Parameter Manual Part 2

Variables 1
Interface Signals 2
SINUMERIK 840D sl, 840Di sl, PLC Blocks 3

SINAMICS S120
Index I
Lists, 2nd Book
Parameter Manual
Valid for
Control
SINUMERIK 840D sl/ 840DE sl
SINUMERIK 840Di sl/ 840DiE sl
Software Version
NCU system software for 840D sl/ 840DE sl 2.6
system software for 840Di sl/ 840DiE sl 1.4
03/2009
SINUMERIK®-Documentation
Printing history
Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below.
The status of each edition is shown by the code in the "Remarks" column.
Status codes in the "Remarks" column.
A .... New documentation.
B .... Unrevised reprint with new Order No.
C .... Revised edition with new status.
Edition Order-No. Remarks

07/2005 6FC5397-3CP10-0BA0 A
03/2006 6FC5397-3CP10-1BA0 C
11/2006 6FC5397-3CP10-2BA0 C
01/2008 6FC5397-3CP10-3BA0 C
03/2009 6FC5397-3CP10-4BA0 C
Registered Trademarks
All designations with the trademark symbol ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Other designations in this
documentation may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes may infringe the rights of the owner.
Liability disclaimer
We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to the hardware and software described. Nonetheless,
differences might exist and therefore we cannot guarantee that they are completely identical. The information contained in this
document is, however, reviewed regularly and any necessary changes will be included in the next edition.
Copyright © Siemens AG 1995 - 2009.

Orderl-No. 6FC5397-3CP10-4BA0
Siemens AG 2009.
Subject to change without prior notice
03/2009 Preface
Preface
Structure of the documentation

The SINUMERIK documentation is available in three versions:
• General Documentation
• User Documentation
• Manufacturer/Service Documentation
Information on the following topics is available at

http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol/docu:
• Ordering documentation
Here you can find an up-to-date overview of publications.
• Downloading documentation
Links to more information for downloading files from Service & Support.
• Researching documentation online
Information on DOConCD and direct access to the publications in
DOConWEB.
• Compiling individual documentation on the basis of Siemens contents with the
My Documentation Manager (MDM), refer to http://www.siemens.com/mdm.
My Documentation Manager provides you with a range of features for
generating your own machine documentation.
• Training and FAQs
Information on the range of training courses and FAQs (frequently asked
questions) are available via the page navigation.
Target group
This documentation is intended for project engineers, commissioning engineers,
machine operators, service and maintenance personnel.
Benefits
The Parameter Manual enables the intended target group to evaluate error and
fault indications and to respond accordingly.
With the help of the Parameter Manual, the target group has an overview of the
various diagnostic options and diagnostic tools.
With the present edition, the previous Lists will be subdivided into Lists (1st Book)
and Lists (2nd Book).
1 st Book contains:
• Overview of functions
• Maschine data (HMI, NCK, SD)
• SINAMICS Parameters
The table of contents refers to the present 2nd Book.
© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK 840D sl, 840Di sl, SINAMICS S120 Parameter Manual (LIS2sl) - 03/2009 iii
Preface 03/2009
Standard version
This Parameter Manual only describes the functionality of the standard version.
Extensions or changes made by the machine tool manufacturer are documented by
the machine tool manufacturer.
Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the

control. This does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions
with a new control or when servicing.
Further, for the sake of simplicity, this documentation does not contain all detailed
information about all types of the product and cannot cover every conceivable case
of installation, operation or maintenance.
Technical Support
If you have any questions, please contact the following hotline:
Europe / Africa
Phone +49 180 5050 222
Fax +49 180 5050 223
€0.14/min. from German landlines, mobile phone prices may differ.
Internet http://www.siemens.de/automation/support-request
America
Phone +1 423 262 2522
Fax +1 423 262 2200
Email http:// mailto:techsupport.sea@siemens.com
Asia / Pacific
Phone +86 1064 757575
Fax +86 1064 747474
Email mailto:support.asia.automation@siemens.com
Note
Country telephone numbers for technical support are provided under the following
Internet address:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support
Questions about this documentation

If you have any queries (suggestions, corrections) in relation to this documentation,
please send a fax or email to the following address:
Fax +49 9131 98 2176

Email mailto:docu.motioncontrol@siemens.com
A fax form is available at the end of this document.
SINUMERIK Internet address

http://www.siemens.com/sinumerik

iv SINUMERIK 840D sl, 840Di sl, SINAMICS S120 Parameter Manual (LIS2sl) - 03/2009
03/2009 Preface
CompactFlash cards for the user

• The SINUMERIK CNC supports the file systems FAT16 and FAT32 for
CompactFlash cards. You may need to format the memory card if you want to
use a memory card from another device or if you want to ensure the
compatibility of the memory card with the SINUMERIK. However, formatting the
memory card will permanently delete all data on it.
• Do not remove the memory card while it is being accessed. This can result in
damage to the memory card and the SINUMERIK as well as the data on the
memory card.
• If you cannot use a memory card with the SINUMERIK, it is probably because
the memory card is not formatted for the control system (e.g. Ext3 Linux file
system), the memory card file system is faulty or it is the wrong type of memory
card.
• Insert the memory card carefully and the right way round into the memory card
slot (observe indicators such as arrow or similar). This way you avoid
mechanical damage to the memory card or the device.
• Only use memory cards that have been approved by Siemens for use with
SINUMERIK. Even though the SINUMERIK complies with the general industry
standards for memory cards, it is possible that memory cards from some
manufacturers will not function perfectly in this device or are not completely
compatible with it (you can obtain information on compatibility from the memory
card manufacturer or supplier).
• The "CompactFlash® 5000 Industrial Grade" CompactFlash card from SanDisk
has been approved for SINUMERIK (Order Number 6FC5313-5AG00-0AA0).
Safety Instructions
This Manual contains information which you should carefully observe to ensure
your own personal safety and the prevention of material damage. The notices
referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring to property damage only have no safety alert symbol The
warnings appear in decreasing order of risk as given below.
! Danger
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury or in substantial property damage.
! Warning
Indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are
not taken.
! Caution
with a warning triangle indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper
precautions are not taken.

SINUMERIK 840D sl, 840Di sl, SINAMICS S120 Parameter Manual (LIS2sl) - 03/2009 v
Preface 03/2009
Caution
without a warning triangle indicates that property damage can result if proper
precautions are not taken.
Notice
indicates a potential situation which, if not avoided, may result in an undesirable
event or state.
If several hazards of different degrees occur, the hazard with the highest degree
must always be given priority. A warning notice accompanied by a safety alert
symbol indicating a risk of bodily injury can also indicate a risk of property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The associated device/system may only be set up and operated using this
documentation. Commissioning and operation of a device/system may only be
performed by qualified personnel. Qualified persons are defined as persons who
are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits, equipment, and
systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.

vi SINUMERIK 840D sl, 840Di sl, SINAMICS S120 Parameter Manual (LIS2sl) - 03/2009
03/2009 Table of Contens
Table of Contens
1 Variables .....................................................................................................1-11
1.1 Introduction ..............................................................................................1-11

1.1.1 General information ..............................................................................1-12
1.1.2 Module types.........................................................................................1-14
1.1.3 Variable types .......................................................................................1-15
1.1.4 Data types.............................................................................................1-17
1.1.5 Reference .............................................................................................1-18
1.2 System data .............................................................................................1-19

1.2.1 Area N, Module Y: Global system data ................................................1-19
1.2.2 Area C, Module Y: Channel-specific system data ................................1-27
1.2.3 Area N, Module PA: Global protection zones .......................................1-32
1.2.4 Area C, Module PA: Channel-specific protection zones.......................1-45
1.2.5 Area N, Module YNCFL: NCK instruction groups.................................1-51
1.3 State data of system ................................................................................1-52

1.3.1 Area N, Module S: Global state data ....................................................1-52
1.3.2 Area N, Module SALA: Alarms: List organized according to time,
oldest alarm appears first .....................................................................1-85
1.3.3 Area N, Module SALAP: Alarms: List organized according to priority..1-86
1.3.4 Area N, Module SALAL: Alarms: Liste organized according to time,
most recent alarm appears first ............................................................1-88
1.3.5 Area N, Module SMA: State data: Machine axes .................................1-89
1.3.6 Area N, Module SEMA: State data: Machine axes
(extension of SMA) ...............................................................................1-90
1.3.7 Area N, Module SSP: State data: Spindle ............................................1-119
1.3.8 Area N, Module SSP2: State data: Spindle ..........................................1-124
1.3.9 Area N, Module FA: Active NCU global frames....................................1-130
1.3.10 Area N, Module FB: NCU global base frames....................................1-131
1.3.11 Area N, Module FU: NCU global settable frames...............................1-132
1.3.12 Area N, Module YFAFL: NCK instruction groups (Fanuc)..................1-133
1.3.13 Area B, Module S: Mode-group-specific state data ............................1-133
1.3.14 Area N, Module SALAC: Alarm actions: List in rev. chronol. order,
oldest alarm act. appears first ............................................................1-134
1.4 State data of channel...............................................................................1-136

1.4.1 Area C, Module M: Channel-specific machine data .............................1-136
1.4.2 Area C, Module S: Channel-specific status data ..................................1-136
1.4.3 Area C, Module SINF: Part-program-specific status data ....................1-176
1.4.4 Area C, Module SPARP: Part program information..............................1-178
1.4.5 Area C, Module SPARPP: Program pointer in automatic operation.....1-183
1.4.6 Area C, Module SPARPI: Program pointer on interruption ..................1-185
1.4.7 Area C, Module SPARPF: Program pointers for block search
and stop run..........................................................................................1-187
1.4.8 Area C, Module SSYNAC: Synchronous actions .................................1-189
1.4.9 Area C, Module SYNACT: Channel-specific synchronous actions ......1-191
1.4.10 Area C, Module SNCF: Active G functions.........................................1-193
1.4.11 Area C, Module NIB: State data: Nibbling ..........................................1-194

SINUMERIK 840D sl, 840Di sl, SINAMICS S120 Parameter Manual (LIS2sl) - 03/2009 vii
Table of Contens 03/2009
1.4.12 Area C, Module FB: Channel-specific base frames ...........................1-195

1.4.13 Area C, Module FS: Channel-specific system frames ........................1-196
1.4.14 Area C, Module AUXFU: Auxiliary functions ......................................1-196
1.5 State data of axis .....................................................................................1-198

1.5.1 Area C, Module SMA: State data: Machine axes .................................1-198
1.5.2 Area C, Module SEMA: State data: Machine axes
(extension of SMA) ...............................................................................1-200
1.5.3 Area C, Module SGA: State data: Geometry axes
in tool offset memory ............................................................................1-229
1.5.4 Area C, Module SEGA: State data: Geometry axes
in tool offset memory (extension of SGA).............................................1-231
1.5.5 Area C, Module SSP: State data: Spindle ............................................1-239
1.5.6 Area C, Module SSP2: State data: Spindle ..........................................1-245
1.5.7 Area C, Module FU: Channel-specific settable frames ........................1-251
1.5.8 Area C, Module FA: Active channel-specific frames ............................1-252
1.5.9 Area C, Module FE: Channel-specific external frame ..........................1-253
1.6 State data of drives..................................................................................1-254

1.6.1 Area H, Module S: Drive-specific state data (MSD) .............................1-254
1.6.2 Area V, Module S: Drive-specific status data (FDD) ............................1-257
1.7 Tool and magazine data ..........................................................................1-260

1.7.1 Area C, Module TO: Tool data of the active tool ..................................1-260
1.7.2 Area T, Module TO: Tool edge data: Offset data .................................1-260
1.7.3 Area T, Module TD: Tool data: General data .......................................1-262
1.7.4 Area T, Module TS: Tool edge data: Monitoring data ..........................1-264
1.7.5 Area T, Module TUD: Tool data: User-defined data .............................1-265
1.7.6 Area T, Module TUO: Tool edge data: User-defined data....................1-265
1.7.7 Area T, Module TG: Tool data: Grinding-specific data .........................1-266
1.7.8 Area T, Module TMC: Magazine data: Configuration data ...................1-267
1.7.9 Area T, Module TMV: Magazine data: Directory ..................................1-269
1.7.10 Area T, Module TM: Magazine data: General data ............................1-269
1.7.11 Area T, Module TP: Magazine data: Location data ............................1-271
1.7.12 Area T, Module TPM: Magazine data: Multiple assignment
of location data ...................................................................................1-273
1.7.13 Area T, Module TT: Magazine data: Location types...........................1-274
1.7.14 Area T, Module TV: Tool data: Directory ............................................1-274
1.7.15 Area T, Module TF: Parametrizing, return parameters
of _N_TMGETT, _N_TSEARC ...........................................................1-275
1.7.16 Area T, Module TUM: Tool data: user magazine data........................1-281
1.7.17 Area T, Module TUP: Tool data: user magatine place data ...............1-281
1.7.18 Area T, Module TUS: Tool data: user monitoring data .......................1-282
1.7.19 Area T, Module AD: Adapter data ......................................................1-282
1.7.20 Area T, Module AEV: Working offsets: Directory................................1-282
1.7.21 Area T, Module TC: Toolholder parameters .......................................1-284
1.7.22 Area T, Module TOE: Edge-related coarse total offsets,
setup offsets........................................................................................1-290
1.7.23 Area T, Module TOET: Edge-related coarse total offsets,
transformed setup offsets ...................................................................1-290
1.7.24 Area T, Module TOS: Edge-related location-dependent
fine total offsets ..................................................................................1-290
1.7.25 Area T, Module TOST: Edge-related location-dependent
fine total offsets, transformed .............................................................1-292
1.7.26 Area T, Module TOT: Edge data: Transformed offset data ................1-292

viii SINUMERIK 840D sl, 840Di sl, SINAMICS S120 Parameter Manual (LIS2sl) - 03/2009
03/2009 Table of Contens
1.7.27 Area T, Module TAD: Application-specific data ..................................1-294

1.7.28 Area T, Module TAM: Application-specific magazine data.................1-294
1.7.29 Area T, Module TAO: Application-specific cutting edge data .............1-295
1.7.30 Area T, Module TAP: Application-specific magazine location data ....1-295
1.7.31 Area T, Module TAS: Application-specific monitoring data ................1-296
1.8 Machine and setting data.........................................................................1-297

1.8.1 Area N, Module M: Global machine data..............................................1-297
1.8.2 Area A, Module M: Axis-specific machine data ....................................1-298
1.8.3 Area N, Module SE: Global setting data...............................................1-298
1.8.4 Area C, Module SE: Channel-specific setting data...............................1-299
1.8.5 Area A, Module SE: Axis-specific setting data .....................................1-299
1.9 Parameters ..............................................................................................1-300

1.9.1 Area C, Module RP: Arithmetic parameters .........................................1-300
1.9.2 Area C, Module VSYN: Channel-specific user variables
for synchronous actions........................................................................1-301
1.10 Diagnosis data .......................................................................................1-302

1.10.1 Area N, Module DIAGN: Global diagnostic data.................................1-302
1.10.2 Area C, Module DIAGN: Channel-specific diagnosis data .................1-314
1.10.3 Area N, Module ETPD: Data lists for protocolling...............................1-316
1.10.4 Area C, Module ETP: Types of events ...............................................1-317
1.11 HMI State data .......................................................................................1-321

1.11.1 Area M, Module S: Internal status data HMI.......................................1-321
1.12 User data ...............................................................................................1-322

1.12.1 Area C, Module GD1: C-GD1 .............................................................1-322
1.12.10 Area C, Module GUD: C-GUD ..........................................................1-324
1.12.11 Area C, Module LUD: C-LUD............................................................1-324
1.12.12 Area N, Module GD1: N-GD1 ...........................................................1-325
1.12.21 Area N, Module GUD: N-GUD ..........................................................1-327
1.13 Generic coupling....................................................................................1-327

1.13.1 Area N, Module CP: Generic coupling................................................1-327
1.13.2 Area C, Module CP.............................................................................1-329
1.13.3 Area C, Module DIAG: Diagnostic data ..............................................1-334
1.13.4 Area C, Module WAL: Working area limitation ...................................1-337

SINUMERIK 840D sl, 840Di sl, SINAMICS S120 Parameter Manual (LIS2sl) - 03/2009 ix
Table of Contens 03/2009
1.13.5 Area N, Module VSYN ........................................................................1-337

1.13.6 Area T, Module TDC...........................................................................1-338
1.13.7 Area T, Module TISO..........................................................................1-338
2 Interface Signals ........................................................................................2-339
2.1 General notes ...........................................................................................2-339
2.2 Signals from/to Operator Component......................................................2-340

2.2.1 Machine control panel, M version.........................................................2-340
2.2.2 Machine control panel, T version..........................................................2-342
2.2.3 Machine control panel, slimline.............................................................2-344
2.2.4 Signals from/to handheld unit (HHU, HT 2) ..........................................2-346
2.2.5 Signals from/to handheld programming unit (HT 8)..............................2-348
2.3 PLC alarms / messages...........................................................................2-350

2.3.1 FC 10 alarms in DB2 (FB1-Parameter "ExtendAlMsg"=False) ............2-350
2.3.2 FC10 alarms in DB2 (FB1-Parameter "ExtendAlMsg"=True)...............2-359
2.4 Signals from/ to NCK, PLC, HMI..............................................................2-371

2.4.1 Signals to NCK (DB10) .........................................................................2-371
2.4.2 Signals from NCK/HMI/GP to PLC/HMI (DB10) ...................................2-372
2.4.3 Signals to external inputs and outputs to NCK (DB10) ........................2-376
2.4.4 Signals from/to mode group (DB11) .....................................................2-380
2.4.5 Signals for Safety SPL (safe programmable logic) (DB18) ..................2-383
2.4.6 Signals from/to operator panel (DB19) .................................................2-388
2.4.7 PLC machine data (DB20)....................................................................2-393
2.4.8 Signals from/to NCK channel (DB21 – DB30) ......................................2-394
2.4.9 Signals from/to axis/spindle (PLC → NCK) (DB31 – DB61).................2-412
2.4.10 Tool management interface ................................................................2-419
2.4.11 Signals to/from the machine control panel and HHU .........................2-424
3 PLC-Blocks.................................................................................................3-425
3.1 Overview of organization blocks ..............................................................3-425
3.2 Overview of function blocks .....................................................................3-425
3.3 Assignment of data blocks.......................................................................3-427
3.4 Assigned timers .......................................................................................3-428
I Index.............................................................................................................I-429

x SINUMERIK 840D sl, 840Di sl, SINAMICS S120 Parameter Manual (LIS2sl) - 03/2009
03/2009 1 Variables
1.1 Introduction
1 Variables
1
1.1 Introduction
This section describes the NCK variables that an HMI or the PLC can access
via the operator panel interface. (Access is read and for some variables write
also). The access methods of the various components are described in the
following user documentation:
References: /FBO/ Configuring the OP 030 Operator Interface
Description of PLC access method in:
References: /FB/P3 "Basic PLC Program"
OEM-HMI
OPI
MPI
NCK
OP 030 NCU 57x
NC data
block
PLC
The components shown on the left-hand side of the diagram each have their
own development environment which defines the syntax to be used. A
variable is always addressed according to a defined pattern. All the
information required for addressing the variables irrespective of the
programming language chosen is summed up in the following lists.

SINUMERIK 840D sl, 840Di sl, SINAMICS S120 Parameter Manual (LIS2sl) - 03/2009 1-11
1 Variables 03/2009
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 General information

The NCK variables are stored in data modules that are assigned to the
individual areas of the NCK as the figure below shows:
Mode group 1
Channel n
Channel 2
Channel 1
Axis n
Axis 2
Axis 1
Variable areas of SINUMERIK 840D sl
A distinction is made between the following areas:

• NCK (N)
• Mode group (B)
• Channel (C)
• Tool (T)
• Axis (A)
• Feed/main drive (V/H)
NCK
Contains all the variables such as system data (Y), protection zones (PA),
G groups (YNCFL) etc. that apply to the entire NCK.
Mode group
Contains variables such as the status data (S) that apply to the mode group.

1-12 SINUMERIK 840D sl, 840Di sl, SINAMICS S120 Parameter Manual (LIS2sl) - 03/2009
03/2009 1 Variables
1.1 Introduction
Channel
Contains variables such as the system data (Y), protection zones (PA),
global status data (S) etc. that apply to each channel.
Tool
Contains variables such as the tool offset data (TO), general tool data (TD),
tool monitoring data (TS) etc. that apply to the tools on the machine. Each
tool area T is assigned to a channel.
Axis
Contains the setting data and machine data that apply to each axis or
spindle. For a description see Section "Axis-specific machine data".
Feed / main drive

Contains machine data and machine data as the service values that apply to
each drive. For a description see Section "Drive machine data".

1 Variables 03/2009
1.1 Introduction
1.1.2 Module types

The following table provides an overview of the modules for the variables of
the NCK and how they are assigned to the individual areas.
Only the data modules whose variables can be read or written with direct
access are contained in the list. Data modules whose variables can be
defined by the programmer (e.g. global user data) are read by the HMI or
PLC using other mechanisms. The documentation listed below describes the
modules to which these mechanisms are applied:
References: /FBO/Configuring the OP 030 Operator Interface,

/FB1/P3/"Basic PLC Program"
Module Area
A B C H N T V
ETP 1
ETPD 1
DIAGN 1
FA 1 1
FB 1 1
FE 1
FU 1 1
M 1 1
NIB 1
PA 1 1
RP 1
S 1 1 1 1 1
SALA 1
SALAL 1
SALAP 1
SE 1 1 1
SEGA 1
SEMA 1 1
SGA 1
SINF 1
SMA 1 1
SNCF 1
SPARP 1
SPARPF 1
SPARPI 1
SPARPP 1
SSP 1 1
SSP2 1 1
SSYNAC 1
SYNACT 1
TD 1
TF 1
TG 1
TM 1
TMC 1
TMV 1
TO 1
TP 1
TPM 1
TS 1
TT 1
TU 1
TUE 1

03/2009 1 Variables
1.1 Introduction
TUM 1
TUP 1
TUS 1
TV 1
AD 1
AEV 1
TC 1
TOE 1
TOET 1
TOS 1
TOST 1
TOT 1
VSYN 1
Y 1 1
YNCFL 1
1.1.3 Variable types

Within each area the variables are generally stored in the form of structures
or in arrays of structures (tables). The following information must therefore
be contained in an address when accessing a variable:
• Area + area number
• Module
• Variable name (or column number)
• Line number
It is generally possible to distinguish between three different variable types:

1. Variables that consist of 1 line
2. Variables that consist of several lines
3. Variables that consist of several columns and lines
Single-line variables
Each of these variables consists of a single value. The following information
is required when accessing a variable of this type:
1. Area (and possibly area number)
2. Module
3. Variable name
numMachAxes
Number of existing machine axes
- Word r
Multi-line: no
Example for reading the number of machine axes in channel 1:
HMI:
/Channel/Configuration/numMachAxes[u1]
HMI/OP 030:
P_C_Y_numMachAxes

1 Variables 03/2009
1.1 Introduction
PLC with NC-Var-Selector:

Area: C[.]
Module: Y
Variable: numMachAxes
Area No. = 1
Multi-line variables
These variables are defined as a one-dimensional field. When accessing a
variable of this type the following information must be specified:
2. Module
3. Variable name
4. Line number
actFeedRate $AA_VACTB[x] S5
Axial feedrate actual value (only if axis is a positioning axis "spec" = 1)
% Double r
Multi-line:yes Axis index numMachAxes
Example for reading the current velocity of axis 3 in channel 1:
HMI:
/Channel/MachineAxis/actFeedRate[u1, 3]
HMI/OP 030:
P_C_SEMA_actFeedRate

Area: C[.]
Module: SEMA
Variable: actFeedRate[.]
Area No. = 1
Line = 3
Multi-line and multi-column variables

These variables are defined as a two-dimensional field. In order to access a
variable of this type, the following information must be specified:
2. Module
3. Variable name
4. Column number
5. Line number
In this case the entire data module only consists of this two-dimensional
variable.

03/2009 1 Variables
1.1 Introduction
cuttEdgeParam $TC_DPx[y,z]
Offset value parameters for a cutting edge
mm, inch or userdef 0 Double
Multi-line:yes (CuttEdgeNo 1) * numCuttEdgeParams * numCuttEdges

numCuttEdgeParams +
ParameterNo
Example for reading the current cutting edge data of cutting edge
3/parameter 1 of tool 3 in T area 1: (in this example it is assumed that each
tool cutting edge has been defined with (numCuttEdgeParams =) 25
parameters).
HMI:
/Tool/Compensation/cuttEdgeParam[u1,c3, 51]
HMI/OP 030:
P_T_TO_cuttEdgeParam

Area: T[.]
Module: TO
Variable: cuttEdgeParam[.]
Area No. = 1
Column = 3
Line = 51
1.1.4 Data types

The following data types are used in this description:
Data type Description

Bool 1 bit
Character 8 bits without sign
Byte 8 bits with sign
Word 16 bits without sign
Short Integer 16 bits with sign
Doubleword 32 bits without sign
Long Integer 32 bits with sign
Float 32 bits floating point
Double 64 bits floating point
String String ending in zero
In the tables below the individual fields have the following meaning:
Variable name Reference to assigned MD Ref.

Variable brief description/
variable description
« Description of value range »
Physical unit Default value Lower limit Upper limit Format / w/r
field length
Multi-line:yes / no Description of line index Maximum line index
Ref. Cross-reference to references

w/r w Variable can be overwritten
r Variable can be read

1 Variables 03/2009
1.1 Introduction
1.1.5 Reference
Reference is made to the following documents:
/FB1/ Function Manual of basic machines, supporting manuals: A2, A3, B1,
B2, D1, F1, G2, H2, K1, K2, N2, P1, P3, R1, S1, V1, W1, Z1
/FB2/ Function Manual of expanded functions, supporting manuals: A4, B3,
B4, F3, H1, K3, K5, M1. M5, N3, N4, P2, P5, R2, S3, S7, T1, W3,
W4, Z2
/FB3/ Function Manual of special functions, supporting manuals F2, G1,
G3, K6, M3, S9, T3, TE01, TE02, TE1, TE3, TE4, TE6, TE7, TE8,
TE9, V2, W5, W6, Z3
/FBA/ Function manual of drive functions, supporting manuals: DB1, DD1,
DD2, DE1, DF1, DG1, DL1, DM1, DS1, DÜ1
/IAD/ 840D/611D Installation & Start-Up Guide
/IHAsl/ Commissioning HMI-Advanced, supporting manuals: IM4, BE2, HE1,
TX2, IM8
/FBO/ Configuring OP 030 Operator Interface
/FBW/ Description of Functions Tool Management

03/2009 1 Variables
1.2 System data
1.2 System data

1.2.1 Area N, Module Y: Global system data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/Configuration/...
The machine tool builder or user configures the control with the help of the machine data. Configuration
can only be performed with certain access rights. The configuration of the NC can be read in the system
data regardless of current access rights.
accessLevel
Level of the access rights currently set. Can be changed by entering the password or turning the keyswitch.
0 = access level SIEMENS
1 = access level machine tool builder
2 = access level system start-up engineer (machine tool builder)
3 = access level end user with password
4 = access level key switch 3
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
axisType
Axis types for all machine axes (necessary for start-up): If a machine axis is addressed via the M module, the units and
values are returned with reference to the axis type accessible via this variable. (The absolute machine axis index 1-
N_Y_maxnumGlobMachAxes is specified via the line index)
0 = Linear axis
1 = Rotary axis
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Absolute machine axis number maxnumGlobMachAxes
basicLengthUnit
Global basic unit
0 = mm
1 = inch
4 = userdef
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
chanAssignment MD 10010: ASSIGN_CHAN_TO_MODE_GROUP[x] x=ChannelNo K1

Assignment of each channel to mode group
0 = channel does not exist
n = channel assigned to mode group n (n is maximum numBAGs (BAG = mode group))
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Channel number maxnumChannels
externCncSystem
CNC system whose part programs must be processed on the
SINUMERIK control.
0: No external language defined
1: System ISO Dialect0 Milling (obsolete)
2: System ISO Dialect0 Turning (obsolete)
3: External language via OEM application (from P6.2)
4: System ISO Dialect0 Milling (from P7.)
5: System ISO Dialect0 Turning (from P7.)
etc.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 03/2009
1.2 System data
extraCuttEdgeParams
Bit string that specifies which TO edge parameters are available
in addition to the 25 standard parameters.
Bit 0: Cutting edge parameter no. 26 valid (ISO Dialect Milling H No.)
Bit 1: Cutting edge parameter no. 27 valid (Orientation of the cutting edge)
Bit 2: Cutting edge parameter no. 28 valid (L1 of the orientation of the cutting edge)
Bit 5: Cutting edge parameter no. 31 valid (L1 of the orientation of the cutting edge normal)
Bit 8: Cutting edge parameter no. 34 valid (number of cutting edge teeth, always set)
etc.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
handWheelNr
Handwheel number, as required for selection via the PLC user interface.
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Handwheel number numHandWheels
kindOfSumcorr $MN_MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR
Characteristics of total offsets in NCK:
Bit No. Value Meaning
0 0 Total offsets are saved at the same time as the tool data.
1 Total offsets are not saved at the same time as the tool data.
1 0 Setup offsets are saved at the same time as the tool data.
1 Setup offsets are not saved at the same time as the tool data.
2 0 If the "Tool management" function is in use: The existing total/setup offsets are not affected when tool status
"active" is set.
1 When tool status "active" is set, the existing total offsets are set to zero. The setup offsets are not affected.
3 0 If the "Tool management" function plus "Adapter" is in use: Transformation of total offsets
1 No transformation of total offsets
4 0 No setup offset data sets
1 Setup offset data sets are created additionally, in which case the total offset equals the product of total offset + "fine
total offset".
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
maskToolManagement $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Settings for NCK tool management function
Activation of tool management memory with "0" means: The set tool management data do not occupy any memory
space.
Bit 0=1: Memory for TM-specific data is made available
Bit 1=1: Memory for monitoring data is made available
Bit 2=1: Memory for user data (CC data) is made available
Bit 3=1: Memory for "Consider adjacent location" is made available
SW 5.1 and later:
Bit 5=0: Parameters and function for tool wear monitoring are not available.
Bit 5=1: Parameters and function for tool wear monitoring are available and, if bit 1 = 1, the wear monitoring function is
also available.
Bit 6=0: The wear group function is not available; i.e. parameters $TC_MAMP3, $TC_MAP9 cannot be programmed,
$TC_MPP5 is not defined for magazine locations of type 1.
Bit 6=1: The wear group function is available; i.e. parameters $TC_MAMP3, $TC_MAP9 can be programmed and wear
groups defined. $TC_MPP5 contains the wear group number for location type 1.
Bit 7=1: Tool adapter data sets are available.
Bit 8=1: Total offsets are available.
Bit 9=1: Tools in a turret are handled in OPI variable modules such that they are not "displayed" in tool half-locations,
but always displayed in a turret location. Please note, therefore, that tools in a turret remain (in display terms) in their
turret location in the event of a tool change.
Bit 9=0: Default response; Tools in a turret are "displayed" in the OPI in their actual (according to data) location.
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1

03/2009 1 Variables
1.2 System data
maxCuttingEdgeNo $MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO
Maximum value of D number
1 to 32000
- 9 1 32000 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
maxNoOfChannels
Maximum number of channels that can be activated.
This defines the upper limit of the option data $ON_NUM_CHANNELS.
- 1 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
maxNoOfProgLevel
Maximum number of program levels present in the system.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
maxNumAdapter $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER
Maximum number of tool adapter data sets available in NCK
>0: Maximum number of adapter data sets.
0: Adapter data cannot be defined. Edge-specific parameters $TC_DP21, $TC_DP22, $TC_DP23 are available, i.e.
active tool management function with adapters is not in use.
-1: An adapter is automatically assigned to each magazine location, i.e. the number of adapters provided internally
corresponds to the number of magazine locations set in machine data $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION.
- 0 -1 600 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1
maxNumSumCorr $MN_MM_NUM_SUMCORR
Total number of total offsets in NCK
A setting of -1 means that the number of total offsets equals the
number of edges * number of total offsets per edge.
A setting of > 0 and < number of edges * number of total offsets per edge
means that a maximum number of total offsets equalling "number of total
offsets per edge" can be defined per edge, but need not be, i.e. it is thus
possible to use the buffer memory more economically.
In other words, only the edges have a total offset data set for which
data can be defined explicitly.
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1
maxnumAlarms
Size of NCK alarm buffer (maximum number of pending alarms)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
maxnumChannels
Maximum number of available channels
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
maxnumContainer
Maximum number of available axis containers
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
maxnumContainerSlots
Maximum number of available slots per axis container
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 03/2009
1.2 System data
maxnumCuttEdges_Tool $MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL
Max. number of edges per tool
1 to 12
- 9 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
maxnumDrives
Maximum number of available drives
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
maxnumEdgeSC $MN_MAX_SUMCORR_PERCUTTING_EDGE
Max. number of total offsets per edge
0 to 6
- 0 ??? NCK UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
maxnumEventTypes
Maximum number of event types for the trace protocolling
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
maxnumGlobMachAxes
Maximum number of available machine axes
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
maxnumTraceProtData
Maximum number of data per data list for trace protocolling
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
maxnumTraceProtDataList
Maximum number of data per data list for trace protocolling
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
modeSpindleToolRevolver MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK Bit 9

Representation of tool currently in use in modules
magazine location data (T / TP, magazine data, location data) and
tool data (T / TD, tool data, general data and T / TV, tool data, directory)
0: Previous method: During operation, the tool is removed (in data terms) from its circular magazine location and
loaded to the spindle location in the buffer magazine.
1: During operation, the tool remains in its circular magazine locations in the OPI modules. This applies to OPI
modules magazine location data (T / TP, magazine data and location data) and tool data (T / TD, tool data, general
data and T / TV, tool data, directory and T / AEV, working offsets, directory).
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
nckLogbookSeekPos
NCK logbook
- Long Integer wr
Multi-line: no 1

03/2009 1 Variables
1.2 System data
nckType
NCK type
0: 840D pl
1000: FM-NC (up to and including SW 6)
2000: 810D pl
3000: 802S (up to and including SW 6)
4000: 802D pl (up to and including SW 6)
5000: 840Di pl (up to and including SW 6)
6000: SOLUTIONLINE
10700: 840D sl
14000: 802D sl T/M
14000: 802D sl N/G or C/U
15000: 840Di sl
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
nckVersion
NCK version
Only the digits before the comma of the floating point number are evaluated, the digits after the comma may contain
identifiers for development-internal intermediate releases.
The digits before the comma includes the official NCK identifier for the software release: For software release 3.4 the
value of the variable is 34,....
- Double r
Multi-line: no
ncuPerformanceClass
NCU power class
Not defined in SW 6.2.
0: No special power class
1: Powerline
2-n: Reserved
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numAnalogInp MD 10300: FASTIO_ANA_NUM_INPUTS A2

Number of HW analog inputs
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numAnalogOutp MD 10310: FASTIO_ANA_NUM_OUTPUTS A2

Number of HW analog outputs
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numBAGs
Number of available mode groups
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numBasisFrames $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES
Number of channel-independent basic frames
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numChannels
Number of active channels
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numContainer
Number of currently available axis containers
- 0 maxnumContainer UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 03/2009
1.2 System data
numContainerSlots
Number of currently available slots per axis container
- maxnumContainerSlots UWord r
Multi-line: yes Index of axis container numContainer
numCuttEdgeParams
Number of P elements of a cutting edge
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numCuttEdgeParams_tao $MN_MM_NUM_CCS_TOA_PARAM
Number of Siemens application cutting edge data in module TAO
!! Reserved for SIEMENS applications !!
- 0 0 10 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numCuttEdgeParams_tas $MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MON_PARAM
Number of Siemens application monitoring data in module TAS
- 0 0 10 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numCuttEdgeParams_ts
Number of P elements of a cutting edge in module TS (tool monitoring data)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numCuttEdgeParams_tu MD 18096: MM_CC_TOA_PARAM

Number of P elements of a cutting edge in module TUE (cutting edge data for OEM)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numCuttEdgeParams_tus $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM
Number of parameters in the user monitoring data of a cutting edge in the module TUS
- 0 0 10 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numDigitInp MD 10350: FASTIO_DIG_NUM_INPUTS A2

Number of HW digital inputs
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numDigitOutp MD 10360: FASTIO_DIG_NUM_OUTPUTS A2

Number of HW digital outputs
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numDrives
Number of active drives
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numGCodeGroups
Number of NC instruction groups
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numGCodeGroupsFanuc
Number of NC instruction groups in ISO Dialect mode
(the number for the turning and milling versions is not the same)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

03/2009 1 Variables
1.2 System data
numGlobMachAxes
Number of active machine axes
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numHandWheels
Maximum number of handwheels
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numMagLocParams_tap $MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MAGLOC_PARAM
Number of Siemens application magazine location data in module TAP
- 0 0 10 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numMagLocParams_u $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM
Number of parameters of the magazine user data for a tool magazine place in the module TUP
- 0 0 10 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numMagParams_tam $MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MAGAZINE_PARAM
Number of Siemens application magazine data in module TAM
- 0 0 10 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numMagParams_u $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM
Number of parameters of the magazine user data for
a tool magazine
in the TUM module
- 0 0 10 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numMagPlaceParams
Number of parameters of a magazine location
8 in SW 5.1 and later
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
numMagPlacesMax MD 18086: MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION FBW

Maximum number of magazine locations
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numMagsMax MD 18084: MM_NUM_MAGAZINE FBW

Maximum number of magazines
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numOfISOCorr
Number of offset values in the ISO offset memory in ISO2 and ISO3 modes.
- 98 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numParams_Adapt
Number of parameters per adapter
- 4 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1

1 Variables 03/2009
1.2 System data
numParams_SC $TC_SCPx; x=13,...21,....71

Number of total offset parameters per total offset set
- 9 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
numPlaceMulti FBW
Number of possible multiple assignments of a location to magazines
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numPlaceMultiParams FBW
Number of parameters of a multiple assignment
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numToBaust MD 18110: MM_NUM_TOA_MODULES

Number of T areas
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numToolHolderParams
Number of parameters in the data toolHolderData in the area C, module S
Number of parameters in toolHolderData.
If the tool magazine management is not active, the value =0 will be returned.
- 3 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
numToolParams_tad $MN_MM_NUM_CCS_TDA_PARAM
Number of Siemens application tool data in module TAD
- 0 0 10 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numToolParams_tu MD 18094: MM_CC_TDA_PARAM

Number of P elements of a tool in module TU (tool data for OEM)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numUserFrames MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES
Number of channel-independent user frames
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
toolChangeMFunc MD 22560: TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE W1

Number of M function for tool change
0 = change on T selection (standard for turning)
1 = change on selection M1..
99999 = change on selection M99999
(standard for milling M06)
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no
typeOfCuttingEdge
Type of D-number programming see MD: MM_TYPE_OF_CUTTING_EDGE
Value Meaning
0 no 'flat D number management' active
1 flat D numbers active
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

03/2009 1 Variables
1.2 System data
userScale
User unit table with 13 elements (see Start-up Guide 2.4 and machine data)
0 = table not active
1 = table active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
1.2.2 Area C, Module Y: Channel-specific system data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/Configuration/...
The machine tool builder or user configures the control with the help of the machine data. Configuration
can only be performed with certain access rights. The configuration of the NC can be read in the system
data regardless of current access rights.
channelName MD 20000: CHAN_NAME K1

Channel name
- String[32] r
Multi-line: no
maskToolManagement MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Channel-specific settings for NCK tool management function
Activation of TM memory by "0" means: The set tool management data do not use any memory space.
Value=0: TM deactivated
Bit 0=1: TM active: The tool management functions are enabled for the current channel.
Bit 1=1: TM monitoring function active: Functions required to monitor tools (tool life and number of workpieces) are
enabled.
Bit 2=1: OEM functions active: The memory for user data can be utilized.
Bit 3=1: Consideration of adjacent location active
Bits 0 to 3 must be set identically to machine data MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (18080).
Bit 4=1: The PLC has the possibility of issuing another request for tool change preparation with modified parameters.
-------------------------For test purposes only :------------------------------------------------
Part program is halted in response to T selection or M06 until it has been
acknowledged by the PLC program.
Bit 5=1: The main run/PLC synchronization in response to a tool change for the main spindle is executed
simultaneously with the transport acknowledgement.
Bit 6=1: The main run/PLC synchronization in response to a tool change for the auxiliary spindle is executed
simultaneously with the transport acknowledgement.
Bit 7=1: The main run/PLC synchronization in response to a tool change for the main spindle is not executed until the
PLC acknowledgement confirms that the tool change is complete.
Bit 8=1: The main run/PLC synchronization in response to a tool change for the auxiliary spindle is not executed until
the PLC acknowledgement confirms that the tool change is complete..
-------------------------End For test purposes only :-------------------------------------------
Bit 9: Reserved
Bit 10=1: M06 is delayed until the preparation acknowledgement has been output by the PLC. The change signal (e.g.
M06 ) is not output until the tool selection ( DBX [ n+0 ].2 ) has been acknowledged. The part program is halted in
response to M06 until the T selection has been acknowledged.
Bit 11=1: The preparation command is output even if a preparation command has already been output for the same
tool. This setting is useful, for example, if the chain is to be positioned when "Tx" is first called and if the second call is
to initiate a check as to whether the tool is in the correct location for a tool change (e.g. in front of tool-change station).
Bit 12=1: The preparation command is executed even if the tool is already loaded in the spindle, i.e. the T selection
signal (DB72.DBXn.2) is set even if it has already been set for the same tool. (Tx...Tx)
Bit 13=1: Only on systems with sufficient memory space (NCU572, NCU573): Recording of tool sequences in a
diagnostics buffer. The commands are fetched from the diagnostics buffer in response to Reset and stored in a file in
the passive file system, NCATR xx.MPF under part program. The trace file is useful for the Hotline in the event of
errors and is not described in detail here.
Bit 14=1: Automatic tool change in response to Reset and Start according to machine data MD20120
TOOL_RESET_NAME MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK MD20124 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER. If
machine data RESET_MODE_MASK is in use, then this bit must be set as well. If RESET_MODE_MASK is set such
that the tool stored in TOOL_RESET_NAME must be loaded in response to RESET, then the select and change
command is output to the user interface (DB 72) in response to RESET or Start. If machine data
RESET_MODE_MASK is set such that the active tool must remain active after M30 or RESET and if the active tool is
disabled in the spindle (by user), then a change command for a replacement tool is output to the user interface in
response to RESET. If no replacement tool is available, then an error message is output.

1 Variables 03/2009
1.2 System data
Bit 15=1: No return transport of tool when several preparation commands are output. (Tx->Tx)
Bit 16=1: T location number is active
Bit 17=1: Tool life decrementation can be started/stopped via the PLC.
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1
mmcCmd
Command from NCK to MMC
The string is made up of the following characters:
1st Character acknowledgement mode:
"N" no acknowledgement
"S" synchronous acknowledgement
"A" asynchronous acknowledgement
2. - 6th character: five-digit sequence number in ASCII that is generated by the NCK
7. - 207th character: Command string which ends with "\0"
- String[206] r
Multi-line: no
mmcCmdPrep
Command from the NCK-preparation task to the MMC (e.g. for calling external subprograms)
- String[206] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
mmcCmdQuit
Acknowledgement from MMC for command from NCK to MMC
The string is made up of the following characters:
1st Character acknowledgement code:
"P" programmed
"B" busy
"F" failed
"E" executed
2. - 6th character: five-digit sequence number in ASCII for acknowledgement code "B", "F" or "E", generated by NCK
7. - 201th character: additional communication-specific information for acknowledgement code "B", "F" or "E", ends
with "\0"
- String[200] w
Multi-line: no
mmcCmdQuitPrep
Acknowledgemnt by MMC for an NCK-preparation command to the MMC (e.g. for calling external subprograms)
- String[200] wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numActAxes
Number of active tools in channel.
Channel axis gaps are not included in count which means that value might be lower than numMachAxes.
The following applies:
numMachAxes >= numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes
numActAxes = numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes
- 0 0 numMachAxes UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numAuxAxes
Number of auxiliary axes
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numBasisFrames $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES
Number of basic frames in channel
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numContourInProtArea
Maximum number of polygon elements per protection zone
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

03/2009 1 Variables
1.2 System data
numGeoAxes
Number of geometry axes and orientation axes
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numMachAxes
No. of highest channel axis.
This also corresponds to the number of axes in the
channel provided there are no gaps in the axis sequence.
- 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numOriAxes
Number of orientation axes in channel
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numProtArea MD 28200: MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CHAN S7

Maximum number of protection zones
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numRParams MD 28050: MM_NUM_R_PARAM S7

Number of channel-specific R variables
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numSpindles
Number of spindles
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numSpindlesLog
Number of logical spindles.
Specifies the number of lines in module SSP2.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
numToolEdges MD 18100: MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA S7

Number of tool edges in this channel
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numUserFrames MD 28080: MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES S7

Number of user frames in this channel
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
oemProtText
OEM text to be entered next in the logging buffer.
- String[128] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
progProtText
Programmable text to be entered next in the logging buffer
- String[128] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 03/2009
1.2 System data
punchNibActivation MD 26012: PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION N4

Activation of punching and nibbling functions
0 = option not available
1 = option available
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
stringIsFileId
As soon as PI _N_STRGIS is executed, the result from interpretation of the transferred string
is stored as file ID in this variable. moduleId may be used instead of fileId.
Also refer to NC command STRINGIS.
Meaning Name of OPI area OPI modules
definition file in NCK (domain name)
(explanation)
0 String is unknown
1 GCODE (G code - Siemens and/or ISO )
2 NCADDRES (NCK NC address character)
3 NCADDRES_CHAN (channel NC?address character)
4 NCNAM (named NCK NC address)
5 NCNAM_CHAN (named channel NC address)
6 FRAME (frame variable)
7 TOOLCORR (tool parameter) TO (=4)
8 MACHDAT_NCK (machine data) NCK (=0) M (= 0x1A)
9 MACHDAT_CHAN (machine data) CHAN (=2) M (=-0x1A)
10 MACHDAT_AXIS (machine data) AXIS (=3) M (=-0x1A)
11 R_PARAM (R parameter) CHAN (=2) RP (= 0x15)
12 AC_MARKER (synchronized action marker)
13 AC_PARAM (synchronized action parameter)
14 PRED_FUNC (NC language function)
15 SYSDAT_NCK (status variable)
16 SYSDAT_CHAN (status variable)
17 SYSDAT_AXIS (status variable)
18 USER_NCK _N_SGUD_DEF NCK (=0) GD1 (= 0x36)
19 USER_CHAN _N_SGUD_DEF CHAN (=2) GD1 (= 0x36)
20 USER_AXIS _N_SGUD_DEF AXIS (=3) GD1 (= 0x36)
21 USERMACRO _N_SMAC_DEF
_N_MMAC_DEF
_N_UMAC_DEF
22 EEC (leadscrew parameter)
23 QEC (quadrant error parameter)
24 CEC (cross error compensation parameter)
25 TOOLMAGAZINE (magazine parameter) TO (=4)
26 PROTAREA (protection area parameter)
27 PROTAREA_CHAN (protection area parameter)
28 USER_NCK2 _N_MGUD_DEF NCK (=0) GD2 (= 0x2D)
29 USER_NCK3 _N_UGUD_DEF NCK (=0) GD3 (= 0x2E)
30 USER_NCK4 _N_GUD4_DEF NCK (=0) GD4 (= 0x2F)
31 USER_NCK5 _N_GUD5_DEF NCK (=0) GD5 (= 0x30)
36 USER_CHAN2 _N_MGUD_DEF CHAN (=2) GD2 (= 0x2D)
37 USER_CHAN3 _N_UGUD_DEF CHAN (=2) GD3 (= 0x2E)
38 USER_CHAN4 _N_GUD4_DEF CHAN (=2) GD4 (= 0x2F)
39 USER_CHAN5 _N_GUD5_DEF CHAN (=2) GD5 (= 0x30)
44 reserved
45 reserved
46 reserved
47 reserved
48 reserved
49 reserved
50 reserved

03/2009 1 Variables
1.2 System data
51 reserved
52 TOOLCARRIER (orientable tool carrier parameter TO (=4)
53 GCODESEXT (G code) NCK (=0) (G codes FANUC)
54 FRAME_NCK (frame) NCK (=0)
55 CYC_PARAM_CHAN (global cycle transfer parameter)r
56 TOOLENVMOD (tool environment parameter)
57 SYNAGUD_CHAN (synchronized action capable GUD CHAN (=2) GD1 (= 0x36)
58 SYNAGUD_CHAN2 (synchronized action capable GUD CHAN (=2) GD2 (= 0x2D)
59 SYNAGUD_CHAN3 (synchronized action capable GUD CHAN (=2) GD3 (= 0x2E)
60 SYNAGUD_CHAN4 (synchronized action capable GUD CHAN (=2) GD4 (= 0x2F)
61 SYNAGUD_CHAN5 (synchronized action capable GUD CHAN (=2) GD5 (= 0x30)
66 NKIN (kinematic chain parameter)
67 NPA (3D protection area parameter)
68 WAL_CS (work area in specific coordinate system)
69 TOOLISO22CORR (tool correction parameter with ISO2.2)
70 TOOLISO32CORR (tool correction parameter with ISO3.2)
71 EPS_PARAM (ePS services parameters (reserved for ePS use only !!)
>= 200 LUD (LUD / PUD - program local variable)
Note: via OPI normally only a subset of the NCK data blocks is made known.
Note: missing column entries means that no definition file has been defined for this line,
or that in OPI no domain name has been defined. Various NCK data may be accessed through
OPI variable blocks instead of through domain names. Example: tool data, frame data, etc.
It is possible that several OPI variable blocks exist for a value of stringIsFileId.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
stringIsMeaning
is stored as a code in this variable. For example, the code for $P_TOOL is value 207.
Also refer to NC command STRINGIS.
000 = itemName string is unknown in the NCK
100 = itemName string is a language construct, but is not programmable (option/function is not active)
2xx = itemName string is a permissible language construct (option/function is active)
2xx = is defined by:
200 = no interpretation possible
201 = DIN address / NC address (e.g. MEAS)
202 = G code (e.g. G04, INVCW)
203 = NC language function (= command with return value, parameter Passing) (e.g. GETMDACT)
204 = NC language procedure (= command without return value, with parameter Passing) (e.g. SBLOF)
205 = NC key word (e.g. DEFINE)
206 = machine/setting/option data (= parameter starting with $M / $S / $O)
207 = NC system parameter (= parameter starting with R and $)
208 = cycle name (name created by cycle)
209 = GUD variable (name created by GUD definitions
210 = macro name (name created by macro definition file)
211 = LUD variable (name created by active program)
212 = no Siemens G code, but an ISO G code
400 = NC address, which is not xx=01 or xx=10, and which is also not: G or R (e.g. T, D, F, H, L, M)
- 0 0 4000 UWord r
Multi-line: no
stringIsSymbolId
is stored as symbol ID in this variable. The symbol ID is found in the NCK module, which is
specified in variable stringIsFileId.
This value can be found also in the corresponding ACC and ACX file.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

1 Variables 03/2009
1.2 System data
systemFrameMask $MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK
Configuring screenform for channel-specific system frames
Indicates in bit-coded form which system frames are available
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
toNo MD 28085: MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT W1

Number of T area that is assigned to the channel
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
toolDataChangeBufferSize $MC_MM_TOOL_DATA_CHANGE_BUFFER_SIZE
Size of the effective ring buffer for the tool data modifications in the OPI block TDC (0x56).
This value is the maximum column number in the OPI block TDC.
If a number of channels works with a TO unit, the setting with the lowest channel number applies.
The value = 0 is returned if the the ring buffer is not active ($MN_TOOL_DATA_CHANGE_COUNTER, Bit2=0 and
Bit3=0).
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
1.2.3 Area N, Module PA: Global protection zones

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/ProtectedArea/...
Up to 10 protection zones can be defined. Each protection zone is described by a polygon function
consisting of up to 10 elements. The module PA contains the individual coordinates of the polygon
elements. The protection zones are addressed via the variable indices. The physical unit of the parameters
can be read from the variable "basicLengthUnit" in the module Y in area N.
The classification as NCK or channel-specific protection zones does not affect the protection zone
monitoring function, but indicates the area in which the protection zone is registered.
MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_0 $SN_PA_CENT_ABS[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 1st contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 2nd contour element

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 3rd contour element

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 4th contour element



03/2009 1 Variables
1.2 System data




MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_0 $SN_PA_CENT_ORD[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 1st contour element

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 2nd contour element

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 3rd contour element

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 4th contour element





1 Variables 03/2009
1.2 System data


MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_0 $SN_PA_CONT_ABS[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 1st contour element

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 2nd contour element

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 3rd contour element

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 4th contour element






MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_0 $SN_PA_CONT_ORD[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 1st contour element

03/2009 1 Variables
1.2 System data

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 2nd contour element

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 3rd contour element

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 4th contour element






MDD_PA_MINUS_LIM $SN_PA_MINUS_LIM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Limitation in the minus direction of the protection zone in the axis that is perpendicular to the polygon definition
(applicate)
MDD_PA_PLUS_LIM $SN_PA_PLUS_LIM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Limitation in the plus direction of the protection zone in the axis that is perpendicular to the polygon definition
(applicate)

1 Variables 03/2009
1.2 System data
MDU_PA_ACTIV_IMMED $SN_PA_ACTIV_IMMED[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for "active immediately after referencing", i.e. the protection zone is active as soon as the control has been
started up and the axes have been referenced
0 = protection zone is not active immediately
1 = protection zone is active immediately
- UWord r
MDU_PA_CONT_NUM $SN_PA_CONT_NUM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Number of valid contour elements
- 0 numContourInProtArea UWord r
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_0 $SN_PA_CONT_TYP[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Contour type of 1st contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

Contour type of 2nd contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

Contour type of 3rd contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

Contour type of 4th contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

03/2009 1 Variables
1.2 System data

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r
MDU_PA_LIM_3DIM $SN_PA_LIM_3DIM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for limitation of protection zone in the axis that is perpendicular to polygon definition (applicate)
0 = no limitation
1 = limitation in positive direction
2 = limitation in negative direction
3 = limitation in both directions
- UWord r
MDU_PA_ORI $SN_PA_ORI[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for plane assignment of protection zone
0 = G17
1 = G18
2 = G19
- UWord r
MDU_PA_TW $SN_PA_T_W[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for workpiece or tool-oriented protection zone
0 = workpiece-related
1 = reserved
2 = reserved
3 = tool-related
- UWord r
kinChain1stElem $NK_1ST_ELEM
First element of the kinematic chain
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Chain number $MN_MM_MAXNUM_KIN_CHAINS

1 Variables 03/2009
1.2 System data
kinChainName $NK_CHAIN_NAME
Name of the kinematic chain
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Chain number $MN_MM_MAXNUM_KIN_CHAINS
kinElemAngle $NK_ANG
Turning angle
Degree Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of the chain element $MN_MM_MAXNUM_KIN_CHAIN_ELEM
kinElemAxis $NK_AXIS
Machine axis or OEM object name
- String[32] r
kinElemAxisOffset $NK_A_OFF
Axis offset
mm, inch, degree, user
Double r
defined
kinElemAxisOffsetFine $NK_A_OFF_FINE
Fine offset of axis offset
Double r
defined
kinElemLimitFine $NK_LIMIT_FINE
Input limit of fine offset
Double r
defined
kinElemName $NK_NAME
Name of a kinematic element
- String[32] r
kinElemNext $NK_NEXT
Reference to the next kinematic element
- String[32] r
kinElemNextP $NK_NEXTP
Reference to a branching kinematic chain
- String[32] r
kinElemOffDir0 $NK_OFF_DIR[0]
Offset or direction component in the X direction
Offset or direction component in the Y direction
Offset or direction component in the Z direction

03/2009 1 Variables
1.2 System data
kinElemOffDirFine0 $NK_OFF_DIR_FINE[0]
Fine offset of direction component in X direction
Fine offset of direction component in Y direction
Fine offset of direction component in Z direction
kinElemRotAx0 $NK_ROT[0]
Direction component in the X direction
- Double r
Direction component in the Y direction
- Double r
Direction component in the Z direction
- Double r
modelChangeCounter
Modification counter of the machine model
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1: Kinematic modification counter 4
pa3D1stProt $NP_1ST_PROT
Name of the first element of the protection zone
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Number of the protection zone MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_AREAS
pa3DAuxIndex0 $NP_INDEX[0]
1st index for definition of variable protection zones
- UDoubleword r
pa3DAuxIndex1 $NP_INDEX[1]
2nd index for definition of variable protection zones
- UDoubleword r
pa3DBitIndex $NP_BIT_NO
Index of the bits assigned on the VDI interface
- UDoubleword r
pa3DChainElem $NP_CHAIN_ELEM
Name of the kinematic element carrying the protection zone
- String[32] r
pa3DChainName $NP_CHAIN_NAME
Name of the kinematic chain carrying the protection zone
- String[32] r

1 Variables 03/2009
1.2 System data
pa3DElemAdd $NP_ADD
Name of a protection zone to be inserted
- String[32] r
Number of the protection zone
Multi-line: yes $MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_AREA_ELEM
element
pa3DElemAngle $NP_ANG
Turning angle
- Double r
element
pa3DElemDir0 $NP_DIR[0]
X components of rotary axis
- Double r
element
Y components of rotary axis
- Double r
element
Z components of rotary axis
- Double r
element
pa3DElemName $NP_NAME
Name of the protection zone element
- String[32] r
element
pa3DElemNext $NP_NEXT
Name of the next protection zone element
- String[32] r
element
pa3DElemOffset0 $NP_OFF[0]
X components of the offset
element
Y components of the offset
element
Z components of the offset
element

03/2009 1 Variables
1.2 System data
pa3DElemPara0 $NP_PARA[0]
1st geometry parameter of protection zone element
element
2nd geometry parameter of protection zone element
element
3rd geometry parameter of protection zone element
element
pa3DElemType $NP_TYPE
Type of the protection zone element
- String[32] r
element
pa3DGroupAdd $NP_ADD_GROUP
Name of a protection zone group to be added
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes $MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_GROUPS
group
pa3DGroupMember1 $NP_MEMBER[0]
Name of 1st protection zone in this group
- String[32] r
group
Name of 2nd protection zone in this group
- String[32] r
group
Name of 3rd protection zone in this group
- String[32] r
group
Name of 4th protection zone in this group
- String[32] r
group
pa3DGroupName $NP_GROUP_NAME
Name of the protection zone group
- String[32] r
group

1 Variables 03/2009
1.2 System data
pa3DInitStat NP_INIT_STAT
Initialization status of the protection zone
ASCII code of the letters: "I", "A", "P"
- Character r
pa3DProtName $NP_PROT_NAME
Name of a protection zone
- String[32] r
pa3DState
Activation state of a protection zone
- 0 0 3 Character r
Multi-line: yes Number of the protection zone $MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_PROT_AREAS
pa3DSuppressed
Collision monitoring suppressed by PLC
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
trafoDatAuxPos0 $NT_AUX_POS[n,0]
X component of the auxiliary position for measuring cycles
Multi-line: yes Number of transformer data record $MN_MM_NUM_TRAFO_DATA_SETS
Y component of the auxiliary position for measuring cycles
Z component of the auxiliary position for measuring cycles
trafoDatBaseOrient0 $NT_BASE_ORIENT[n, 0]
X component of basic tool orientation
- Double r
Y component of basic tool orientation
- Double r
Z component of basic tool orientation
- Double r
trafoDatBaseOrientNormal0 $NT_BASE_ORIENT_NORMAL[n, 0]
X component of the normal vector of orientation
- Double r
Y component of the normal vector of orientation
- Double r

03/2009 1 Variables
1.2 System data
Z component of the normal vector of orientation
- Double r
trafoDatGeoAxName0 $NT_GEO_AX_NAME[n, 0]
Name of first geometry axis
- String[32] r
Name of second geometry axis
- String[32] r
Name of third geometry axis
- String[32] r
trafoDatHirthInc0 $NT_HIRTH_INC[n, 0]
Angle increment of 1st rotary axis with Hirth tooth system
Degree, user defined Double r
Angle increment of 2nd rotary axis with Hirth tooth system
Angle increment of 3rd rotary axis with Hirth tooth system
trafoDatHirthOff0 $NT_HIRTH_OFF[n, 0]
Angle offset of 1st rotary axis with Hirth tooth system
Angle offset of 2nd rotary axis with Hirth tooth system
Angle offset of 3rd rotary axis with Hirth tooth system
trafoDatIdent $NT_IDENT[n]
Identification, ID no.
- Long Integer r
trafoDatName $NT_NAME[n]
Name of transformer data record
- String[32] r

1 Variables 03/2009
1.2 System data
trafoDatPChain1StElem $NT_P_CHAIN_1ST_ELEM[n]
Name of 1st element of kin. chain for workpiece
- String[32] r
trafoDatPChainLastElem $NT_P_CHAIN_LAST_ELEM[n]
Name of last element of kin. chain for workpiece
- String[32] r
trafoDatPChainName $NT_P_CHAIN_NAME[n]
Name of kin. chain for workpiece
- String[32] r
trafoDatPoleLimit $NT_POLE_LIMIT[n]
End angle tolerance with interpolation through pole
trafoDatPoleTol $NT_POLE_TOL[n]
End angle tolerance for pole interpolation
trafoDatRotAxMax0 $NT_ROT_AX_MAX[n, 0]
Maximum position of 1st manual rotary axis
Maximum position of 2nd manual rotary axis
Maximum position of 3rd manual rotary axis
trafoDatRotAxMin0 $NT_ROT_AX_MIN[n, 0]
Minimum position of 1st manual rotary axis
Minimum position of 2nd manual rotary axis
Minimum position of 3rd manual rotary axis
trafoDatRotAxName0 $NT_ROT_AX_NAME[n, 0]
Name of first rotary axis
- String[32] r

03/2009 1 Variables
1.2 System data
Name of second rotary axis
- String[32] r
Name of third rotary axis
- String[32] r
trafoDatRotOffsetFromFrame $NT_ROT_OFFSET_FROM_FRAME[n]
Accept rotary offset for transformer selection from WO
- Bool r
trafoDatTChain1StElem $NT_T_CHAIN_1ST_ELEM[n]
Name of 1st element of kin. chain for tool
- String[32] r
trafoDatTChainLastElem $NT_T_CHAIN_LAST_ELEM[n]
Name of last element of kin. chain for tool
- String[32] r
trafoDatTChainName $NT_T_CHAIN_NAME[n]
Name of kin. chain for tool
- String[32] r
trafoDatTrafoType $NT_TRAFO_TYPE
Transformer type
- String[32] r
1.2.4 Area C, Module PA: Channel-specific protection zones
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/ProtectedArea/...
Up to 10 protection zones can be defined. Each protection zone is described by a polygon function
consisting of up to 10 elements. The maximum permissible number of protection zones is specified in
"numProtArea" in the module Y in area C. The maximum permissible number of polygon definition
elements is specified in "numContourInProtArea" in module Y in area C. Module PA contains the individual
coordinates of the polygon elements. The protection zones are addressed via the variable indices.
The classification as NCK or channel-specific protection zone does not affect the protection zone
monitoring function but simply indicates the area in which the protection zone is registered.
The physical unit actually used for length quantities is defined in "/C/SGA/extUnit" in module SGA in area
C.
MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_0 $SC_PA_CENT_ABS[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 1st contour element

1 Variables 03/2009
1.2 System data

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 2nd contour element

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 3rd contour element







MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_0 $SC_PA_CENT_ORD[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 1st contour element

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 2nd contour element

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 3rd contour element


03/2009 1 Variables
1.2 System data






MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_0 $SC_PA_CONT_ABS[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 1st contour element

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 2nd contour element

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 3rd contour element




1 Variables 03/2009
1.2 System data




MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_0 $SC_PA_CONT_ORD[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 1st contour element

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 2nd contour element

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 3rd contour element






03/2009 1 Variables
1.2 System data


MDD_PA_MINUS_LIM $SC_PA_MINUS_LIM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Limitation in the minus direction of the protection zone in the axis that is perpendicular to the polygon definition
(applicate)
MDD_PA_PLUS_LIM $SC_PA_PLUS_LIM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Limitation of the protection zone in the plus direction of the axis that is perpendicular to the polygon definition
(applicate)
MDU_PA_ACTIV_IMMED $SC_PA_ACTIV_IMMED[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for "active immediately after referencing", i.e. the protection zone is active as soon as the control has been
started up and the axes have been referenced
0 = protection zone is not active immediately
1 = protection zone is active immediately
- UWord r
MDU_PA_CONT_NUM $SC_PA_CONT_NUM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Number of valid contour elements
- 0 numContourInProtArea UWord r
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_0 $SC_PA_CONT_TYP[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Contour type of 1st contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

Contour type of 2nd contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

Contour type of 3rd contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

1 Variables 03/2009
1.2 System data

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r

0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r
MDU_PA_LIM_3DIM $SC_PA_LIM_3DIM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for limitation of protection zone in the axis that is perpendicular to polygon definition (applicate)
0 = no limitation
1 = limitation in positive direction
2 = limitation in negative direction
3 = limitation in both directions
- UWord r

03/2009 1 Variables
1.2 System data
MDU_PA_ORI $SC_PA_ORI[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for plane assignment of protection zone
0 = G17
1 = G18
2 = G19
- UWord r
MDU_PA_TW $SC_PA_T_W[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for workpiece or tool-oriented protection zone
0 = workpiece-related
1 = reserved
2 = reserved
3 = tool-related
- UWord r
collisionAlarm $ON_COLLCHECK_LEVEL
Collision of two protection zones
- UWord r
1: 0=No collision in the channel,
Multi-line: yes 3
otherwise alarm number
declarProtObject
Declaration of a variable protection zone
0=No object
1=WORKPIECE
2=FIXTURE
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
declarProtObjectReal
Real parameters of the declaration of a variable protection zone
- Double r
Number of the real parameter. The
Multi-line: yes 10
number and significance
declarProtObjectString
String parameter(s) of the declaration of a variable protection zone
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Number of the string parameter 4
1.2.5 Area N, Module YNCFL: NCK instruction groups
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/FunctionGrouping/...
All G functions currently configured for the channels are made available for reading by the NCK. They are
configured via machine data. Since the G functions are organized in groups, only one of which can be
active at a time, this module is organized as a table.
There are two columns for each G group. The 1st column lists the number of G functions in a group
(/N/YNCFL/Gruppe_NUM), this corresponds to the number of rows in each subsequent column. This
second column contains all the G functions belonging to a group (/N/YNCFL/Gruppe).
As a result, the data for a certain G group are calculated via a column offset.
The column offset of each variable is:
2 * (G group number - 1)
The number of G groups is given in the variable "numGCodeGroups" in area N / module Y. The resultant
the maximum column offset of the variables is thus 2 * numGCodeGroups.
The G functions currently active are listed in area C / module SNCF.

1 Variables 03/2009
1.3 State data of system
Gruppe
Instruction group
- String[16] r
Multi-line: yes Serial number Gruppe_NUM
Gruppe_NUM
Number of G functions in the relevant group
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
1.3.1 Area N, Module S: Global state data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/State/...
During NC operation different internal states occur and system-specific data may change during operation.
To distinguish those from system variables, they are classified as state data.
A distinction is made between:

- NCK-specific state data
- Mode-group-specific state data
- Channel-specific state data
- Drive-specific state data (FDD)
- Drive-specific state data (MSD)
aDbb $A_DBB[x] x = ByteNo

Data byte from/to the PLC
Can be written from SW 6.4.
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Position offset within an I/O area
aDbd $A_DBD[x] x = Offset

Data double word (32 bits) from/to the PLC
- Long Integer wr
Multi-line: yes Position offset within an I/O area.
aDbr $A_DBR[x] x = Offset

Real data (32 bits) from/to the PLC
- Double wr
aDbsb $A_DBSB
PLC data byte
Position offset within the I/O range
Multi-line: yes 1023
0-
aDbsw $A_DBSW
PLC data word
- 0 -32768 32767 Long Integer r
Position offset within the I/O range
Multi-line: yes 1022
0-

03/2009 1 Variables
aDbw $A_DBW[x] x = Offset

Data word (16 bits) from/to the PLC
- UWord wr
aDlb $A_DLB[index]
Data byte (8 bits) in link area
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Position offset within link data area
aDld $A_DLD[index]
Data double word (32 bits) in link data area
- Long Integer wr
aDlr $A_DLR[index]
Read data (32 bits) in link data area
- Double wr
aDlw $A_DLW[index]
Data word (16 bits) in link data area
- UWord wr
aDpInConf $A_DP_IN_CONF
PROFIBUS configured input data areas
- 0 0 0xffffffff Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aDpInLength $A_DP_IN_LENGTH
PROFIBUS length of input data area
- 0 0 128 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes RangeIndex 16
aDpInState $A_DP_IN_STATE
PROFIBUS status of input data area
aDpInValid $A_DP_IN_VALID
PROFIBUS valid input data areas
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aDpOutConf $A_DP_OUT_CONF
PROFIBUS configured output data areas
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aDpOutLength $A_DP_OUT_LENGTH
PROFIBUS length of output data area
aDpOutState $A_DP_OUT_STATE
PROFIBUS status of output data area

1 Variables 03/2009
aDpOutValid $A_DP_OUT_VALID
PROFIBUS valid output data areas
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aDpbIn $A_DPB_IN
PROFIBUS input byte (unsigned)
Multi-line: yes LowByte: RangeOffset
aDpbOut $A_DPB_OUT
PROFIBUS output byte (unsigned)
aDprIn $A_DPR_IN
PROFIBUS input data (32 bit REAL)
- 0 Float r
aDprOut $A_DPR_OUT
PROFIBUS output data (32 bit REAL)
- 0 Float r
aDpsbIn $A_DPSB_IN
PROFIBUS input byte (signed)
aDpsbOut $A_DPSB_OUT
PROFIBUS output byte (signed)
aDpsdIn $A_DPSD_IN
PROFIBUS input data double word (signed)
- 0 Long Integer r
aDpsdOut $A_DPSD_OUT
PROFIBUS output data double word (signed)
- 0 Long Integer r
aDpswIn $A_DPSW_IN
PROFIBUS input word (signed)
- 0 -32768 32767 Long Integer r
aDpswOut $A_DPSW_OUT
PROFIBUS output word (signed)
- 0 -32768 32767 Long Integer r
aDpwIn $A_DPW_IN
PROFIBUS input word (unsigned)
aDpwOut $A_DPW_OUT
PROFIBUS output word (unsigned)

03/2009 1 Variables
aInco $A_INCO[x] x = InputNo

Comperator input NC
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Input number 2
aInsip
Corresponds to safeIntInpValPlcBit
0: Input not set
1: Input set
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Bit number 64
aPbbIn $A_PBB_IN[index]
Data byte (8bits) in PLC input/output area IN
(also available on 810D CCU2)
Neg. values are also permitted in spite of TYPE_UWORD
- UWord r
Position offset within PLC
Multi-line: yes
input/output area
aPbbOut $A_PBB_OUT[index]
Data byte (8 bits) in PLC input/output area OUT
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes
input/output area
aPbdIn $A_PBD_IN[index]
Data double word (32bits) in PLC input/output area IN
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes
input/output area
aPbdOut $A_PBD_OUT[index]
Data double word (32 bits) in the PLC input/output area OUT
- Long Integer wr
Multi-line: yes
input/output area
aPbrIn $A_PBR_IN[index]
Real data (32bits) in PLC input/output area IN
- Double r
Multi-line: yes
input/output area
aPbrOut $A_PBR_OUT[index]
Real data (32 bits) in the PLC input/output area OUT
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes
input/output area

1 Variables 03/2009
aPbwIn $A_PBW_IN[index]
Data word (16bits) in PLC input/output area IN
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes
input/output area
aPbwOut $A_PBW_OUT[index]
Data word (16 bits) in the PLC input/output area OUT
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes
input/output area
aProbe $A_PROBE
Probe status
0: Not deflected
1: Deflected
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Probe number 2
aStopesi $A_STOPESI
Current Safety Integrated Stop E for some axis
Value 0: No Stop E
Value not equal to 0: A Stop E is currently applied for some axis
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aXfaultsi $A_XFAULTSI
Information about Stop F for a safety axis:
Bit 0 = 1: An actual value error has been discovered in the cross-check between NCK and
611D of an arbitrary safety axis.
Bit 1 = 1: Some error has been discovered in the cross-check between NCK and
611D of an arbitrary safety axis
and the waiting time until Stop B is triggered is running or has expired
($MA_SAFE_STOP_SWITCH_TIME_F)
- 0 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
accIndex
Global upload starting point for ACC entries. If a value is set here, upload access to _N_xx_yyy_ACC modules starts
from this entry.
- 1 UWord wr
Multi-line: no
anAuxfuListChanno $AN_AUXFU_LIST_CHANNO[n]
Channel number of the auxiliary function collected in the channel.
The variable is only valid in combination with block search type 5 (SERUPRO).
- 0 0 MD_MAXNUM_AUXFU_CHANNELS Long Integer wr
Multi-line: yes List index 1280
anAuxfuListEndindex $AN_AUXFU_LIST_ENDINDEX
The variable determines the last valid index for the global auxiliary function list.
- 0 -1 MD_MAXNUM_AUXFU_LIST_INDEX Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

03/2009 1 Variables
anAuxfuListGroupindex $AN_AUXFU_LIST_GROUPINDEX[n]
Group index of the auxiliary function collected in the channel.
The variable is only valid in combination with block search type 5 (SERUPRO).
MD_MAXNUM_AUXFU_GROUPS
- 0 0 Long Integer wr
-1
Multi-line: yes List index 1280
anAxCtAS $AN_AXCTAS[n]
Current container rotation, i.e. by how many slots the axis
container has been currently advanced. The original container
assignment is valid after Power On and outputs value 0.
maxCount = Maximum number of assigned locations in the axis container - 1
maxnumContainerSlots
- 0 0 UWord r
-1
Multi-line: yes Container no. numContainer
anAxCtSwA $AN_AXCTSWA[CTn]
A rotation is currently being executed on the
axis container.
- 0 0 1 UWord r
anAxEsrTrigger $AN_ESR_TRIGGER
(Global) control signal "Start Stop/Retract". With a signal edge change
from 0 to 1, the reactions parameterized beforehand in axial MD $MA_ESR_REACTION
and enabled via system variable $AA_ESR_ENABLE are started.
Independent drive reactions subsequently require a Power-Off / Power-On,
independent NC reactions require at least an opposite edge change in the
relevant system variable as well as a Reset.
0: FALSE
1: TRUE
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
anCollMemAvailable $AN_COLL_MEM_AVAILABLE
Collision calculation requires internal memory, the size of which is either calculated automatically from the number of
available protection zones, protection zone elements, facets and the number of machine axes, or it can be explicitly
defined by machine data $MN_MM_MAXNUM_3D_COLLISION.
The size of the reserved memory area in kbytes can be read with system variable $AN_COLL_MEM_AVAILABLE.
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
anCollMemUseAct $AN_COLL_MEM_USE_ACT
The system variable $AN_COLL_MEM_USE_ACT returns the current (that is the last calculated) memory space
required for collision calculation as a percentage of the reserved memory area.
It can be reset by writing with the value 0. Any attempt to write any other value than 0 is rejected with an error
message.
- 0 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 03/2009
anCollMemUseMax $AN_COLL_MEM_USE_MAX
The system variable $AN_COLL_MEM_USE_MAX returns the maximum memory space required for collision
calculation as a percentage of the reserved memory area.
message.
- 0 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
anCollMemUseMin $AN_COLL_MEM_USE_MIN
The system variable $AN_COLL_MEM_USE_MIN returns the minimum memory space required for collision
calculation as a percentage of the reserved memory area.
message.
- 0 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
anIpoActLoad $AN_IPO_ACT_LOAD
Current IPO runtime including the runtime of the
synchronized actions of all channels
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
anIpoLoadLimit $AN_IPO_LOAD_LIMIT
IPO utilization limit reached
0: Utilization limit not reached
1: Utilization limit reached
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
anIpoLoadPercent $AN_IPO_LOAD_PERCENT
Ratio of curr. IPO runtime / IPO cycle
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
anIpoMaxLoad $AN_IPO_MAX_LOAD
Maximum IPO runtime including the runtime of the
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
anIpoMinLoad $AN_IPO_MIN_LOAD
Minimum IPO runtime including the runtime of the
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
anPrepActLoad $AN_PREP_ACT_LOAD
Current preprocessing run time throughout all channels
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
anPrepActLoadGross $AN_PREP_ACT_LOAD_GROSS
Current gross preprocessing run time throughout all channels
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

03/2009 1 Variables
anPrepMaxLoad $AN_PREP_MAX_LOAD
Longest preprocessing run time throughout all channels
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
anPrepMaxLoadGross $AN_PREP_MAX_LOAD_GROSS
Longest gross preprocessing run time throughout all channels
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
anPrepMinLoad $AN_PREP_MIN_LOAD
Shortest preprocessing run time throughout all channels
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
anPrepMinLoadGross $AN_PREP_MIN_LOAD_GROSS
Shortest gross preprocessing run time throughout all channels
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
anRebootDelayTime $AN_REBOOT_DELAY_TIME
Time until reboot
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
anServoActLoad $AN_SERVO_ACT_LOAD
Current runtime of the position controller
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
anServoMaxLoad $AN_SERVO_MAX_LOAD
Maximum runtime of the position controller
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
anServoMinLoad $AN_SERVO_MIN_LOAD
Minimum runtime of the position controller
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
anSyncActLoad $AN_SYNC_ACT_LOAD
Current runtime for synchronized actions
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
anSyncMaxLoad $AN_SYNC_MAX_LOAD
Maximum runtime for synchronized actions
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
anSyncToIpo $AN_SYNC_TO_IPO
Percentage of Synact / IPO computing time
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
anTimer $AN_TIMER[n]
Global NCK timer in seconds.
s, user defined 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Index in $AN_TIMER[n] $MN_MM_NUM_AN_TIMER

1 Variables 03/2009
anVModelStatus $AN_VMODEL_STATUS
System variable for the status of the VRML model
1: MODIFIED_STATE: The model has been modified internally
This is the original status. It may change,
if machine parameters such as protection zones change.
2: COPIED_STATE: This status is generated outside the NCK,
if the model file is ready for being displayed.
3: DISPLAYED_STATE: If the NCK sends the instruction for
display of the model in the display program.
- 1 1 3 Long Integer wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
analogInpVal $A_INA[x] x = AnaloginputNo

Value of HW analog input
A or V Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of analog input numAnalogInp
analogOutpVal $A_OUTA[x] x = AnalogoutputNo

Number of HW analog output
A or V Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of analog output numAnalogOutp
axisActivInNcu
Display indicating whether the axis is active, i.e. whether it can be traversed via a channel
of its own NCU or via another NCU (link axis).
This data can be utilized by MMCs in order to suppress the display of any non-active axes.
Bits 0-31 stand for the axes of the NCU.

Bit n = 1: Axis can be traversed.
Bit n = 0: Axis cannot be traversed.
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
badMemFfs
Number of bytes which are defective in the Flash File System (FFS)
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
basisFrameMask $P_NCBFRMASK
Display indicating which channel-independent basic frames are active.
Every bit in the mask indicates whether the appropriate basic frame
is active. Bit0 = 1st basic frame, Bit1 = 2nd basic frame, etc.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
checkSumForAcxData
Current checksum of selected ACX data, in order to check relatively quickly whether ACX data have changed.
The data required for the OPI access are at the start of the downloaded ACX file.
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes 1: _N_NC_TEA_ACX 6

03/2009 1 Variables
completeDocAcxChangeCnt
Modification counter of ACX for the configuration of
DO of all SINAMICS on all PROFIBUS segments (_N_COMPLETE_DOC_ACX) that is
incremented when the ACX is changed. If the contents of ACX
is or becomes invalid, the modification counter will be set to 0.
If the contents of ACX is valid again, the modification counter will
be reset to the value it had before the contents of ACX became invalid,
and will simultaneously be incremented (only the value), if the contents of
ACX has really changed.
== 0: Contents of _N_COMPLETE_DOC_ACX is invalid
!= 0: Contents of _N_COMPLETE_DOC_ACX is valid
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
completeDotAcxChangeCnt
Modification counter of ACX that describes all
SINAMICS DO types known to the OPI (_N_COMPLETE_DOT_ACX) and that
is incremented when ACX changes. If the contents of ACX is or becomes
invalid, the modification counter will be set to 0.
If the contents of ACX is valid again, the modification counter will be
reset to the value it had before the contents of ACX became invalid and will
be incremented (only the value) simultaneously, if the contents of ACX has really changed.
== 0: Contents of _N_COMPLETE_DOT_ACX is invalid

!= 0: Contents of _N_COMPLETE_DOT_ACX is valid
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
completeDpcAcxChangeCnt
Modification counter of ACX for the PROFIBUS configuration of
all PROFIBUS segments (_N_COMPLETE_DPC_ACX) that is
incremented when ACX is changed. If the contents of ACX
is or becomes invalid, the modification counter will be set to 0.
If the contents of ACX is valid again, the modification counter will
be reset to the value it had before the contents of ACX became invalid,
and will simultaneously be incremented (only the value), if the contents of
ACX has really changed.
== 0: Contents of _N_COMPLETE_DPC_ACX is invalid
!= 0: Contents of _N_COMPLETE_DPC_ACX is valid
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
diagnoseDataFfs
Diagnostic data for Flash File System (FFS)
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1: realspace (bytes) 8
digitInpVal $A_IN[x] x = DigitalinputNo

Value of HW digital input
0 = low
1 = high
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of digital input numDigitInp
digitOutpVal $A_OUT[x] x = DigitaloutputNo

Value of HW digital output
0 = low
1 = high
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Number of digital output numDigitOutp

1 Variables 03/2009
driveType
Digital drive type. Coded according to machine data 13040, but additional code.
Note:
As long as the OPI variable contains the identifier 0x100 "Drive type unknown" after an NCK ramp-up, the information
is not yet consistent and must not be evaluated.
As soon as the identifier 0x100 is deleted, in NCU systems with SIMODRIVE 611D drives it can be assumed that the
content can only change after renewed link to the NCK.
(e.g. after modification of the drive modules), i.e. it need not be cyclically checked for change.
0x100: Drive type unknown.

0x200: This identifier is entered in addition to the code according to the machine data 13040 if a 611D-Performance2
module is detected.
For other codes, see MD 13040.

- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no maxnumDrives
driveTypeChangeCnt
This counter is incremented by 1 every time driveType is modified.
The next value after 65535 is 0.
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
freeDirectorys
Number of directories that can be created
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeFiles
Number of files that can be created
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeMem
Free SRAM in bytes
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeMemDram
Free memory in bytes
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeMemDramEPassF
Memory in bytes available in the passive file system for executing from external drives
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeMemDramMPassF
Free memory of the passive file system of the "Machine manufacturer" area in bytes
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeMemDramPassF
Memory available in passive file system (DRAM no. 1) in bytes
Multi-line: yes 1 1

03/2009 1 Variables
freeMemDramSPassF
Free memory of the passive file system of the "Control manufacturer" area in bytes
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeMemDramTPassF
Free memory of the passive file system of the "Temp" area in bytes
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeMemDramUPassF
Free memory of the passive file system of the "User" area in bytes
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeMemFfs
Number of bytes that are still available in the Flash File System (FFS)
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeMemISram
Free internal SRAM
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeMemSettings
Free SRAM for the part programs and persistent
data for the present (possibly not yet active) memory layout. It is updated when
memory-configuring machine data is changed. The size of the current
file system is taken into account.
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeMemSettingsDram
Free DRAM memory for data for the present
(may not yet be active) memory layout. Is updated when memory-
configuring machine data is changed.
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeMemSettingsISram
Free internal SRAM for the current
(possibly not yet active) memory layout. It is updated when the
memory-configuring machine data is updated.
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeMemSramPassF
Memory available in passive file system (SRAM) in bytes
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeMemWarrant
Guaranteed free memory for part programs and persistent data (from catalog NC60)
Multi-line: yes 1 1
freeMemWarrantDram
Guaranteed memory (DRAM)
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 03/2009
freeProtokolFiles
Logging: Number of protocol files that can still be created
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes User No. (1-10) 10
fsInfoChangeCounter
First line enabled for modification in part program fsInfoPathName.
- UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes No. of info object 20
fsInfoChangeDateTime
Change time of the file system object fsInfoPathName.
- String[13] r
fsInfoChangeDateTimeSub
Change time of the files contained in the fsInfoPathName directory.
- String[13] r
fsInfoFileLength
Length of the file system object fsInfoPathName.
- UDoubleword r
fsInfoObjStatus
Status of file system object fsInfoPathName.
Bit-coded (may be added to later):
Bit0 = 0: Object not loaded in the NCK.
Bit0 = 1: Object loaded in the NCK.
Bit1 = 0: Object is a file.
Bit1 = 1: Object is a directory
- 0 3 UWord r
fsInfoPartition
Partition and lifetime of the file fsInfoPathName
SRP: SRAM persistent
USV: DRAM User volatile
USP: DRAM User persistent
SIP: DRAM Siemens persistent
MAV: DRAM Manufacturer volatile
MAP: DRAM Manufacturer persistent
TMV: DRAM Temporary volatile
D1V: DRAM System 1 volatile
EXV: DRAM External volatile
EXP: DRAM External persistent
- String[160] r
fsInfoPathName
Name of a file or directory to be observed
- String[160] wr
fsInfoRights
Access protection and lifetime of file fsInfoPathName
0-7 ASCII-coded for read / write / execute / show / delete rights
- "77777" String[6] r
fsInfoSeekw
First line enabled for modification in part program fsInfoPathName
- UDoubleword r

03/2009 1 Variables
fsInfoUsed
Assignment of file system info object.
The client first searches for a free info object by reading the list fsInfoUsed.
This is assigned by writing fsInfoUsed with 1.
If there is no error in the assignment, the desired file or directory can be selected by writing the fsInfoPathName.
The information about this object can then be read from the other variables.
0: Info object free. It must be explicitly released by writing 0.
1: Info object assigned. If an assigned object is assigned again then this is acknowledged negatively.
- 0 1 UWord wr
handWheelTestDiffPulses
Handwheel pulses specified incrementally via OPI
- Long Integer wr
Multi-line: yes Handwheel number numHandWheels
handwheelStatus
Handwheel status
0 = PASSIVE
1 = ACTIVE
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Number of handwheel numHandWheels
hwMLFB
MLFB of the NCU module
- String[24] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
hwProductSerialNr
Unique hardware number of the NCU module
- String[16] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
hwProductSerialNrL
Unique hardware number of the NCU module
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
licenseKeyInputCount
Statement of how often the license key can still be entered
> 0: LicenseKey can still be entered x times
= 0: LicenseKey can no longer be entered. An NCK Power On is required before a new entry can be made.
- 3 0 3 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
licenseStatus
Licensing status
0: Licensed,
1: Insufficiently licensed
2: Not licensed
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
mmcCmdPrepCounter
Counter that is incremented with each call of EXTCALL
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
nckAliveAndWell DB10, DBX104.7 A4

NCK sign-of-life
This value is incremented every time the variable is read which means that an
MMC can determine whether the NCK is still operating correctly by reading the variable
cyclically.

1 Variables 03/2009
The value itself has no meaning.

Cyclic result acknowledgements in relation to this variable are generated even if the NCK
is otherwise no longer operating cyclic services owing to problems with block cycle times.
However, this response can be guaranteed only if the variable is not mixed with others in
one request, i.e. nckAliveAndWell must be the only variable linked to the cluster.
As long as a cyclic read service is set for this variable, one of the MMC-CPU-Ready signals
is set in the PLC interface.
Which of the signals is set is determined on the one hand by the line number and, on the other,
by the client's "gloports":
line index = 1 and gloports 0x20-0x2f --> DB10.DBX108 bit2 MMC1-CPU-Ready to MPI
line index = 1 and gloports 0x10-0x1f --> DB10.DBX108 bit3 MMC1-CPU-Ready to OPI
line index = 2 --> DB10.DBX108 bit1 MMC2-CPU-Ready
Note: The related NCK-CPU-Ready signal is stored in DB10,DBX104.7.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes MMC No. 2 (ab SW 5.2)
nckMode
Mode in which the NCK works.
The mode can be set with the PI _N_NCKMOD.
Bit0: NCK works accelerated in simulation mode.
This mode is currently provided only for the VNCK.
Bit1: NCK slowed down in order to give the simulation more computing time on the same processor.
NC start not possible.
Bit2: PowerOn-Init-Finish; power-up initialization finished.
Meaning:
State = 1
All channels of the NCK have been powered up and
have interpreted the DEF files.
Thus the HMI may receive consistent data from the NCK.
Example of a call from HMI to NCK:
What macros are available?
What GUDs are available?
Note: With Init-Finish==1 the POWER-ON progevent has NOT yet been run.
State = 0
Power up has not yet been finished, or initialization
could not been executed due to a fatal alarm
Bit3: PowerOn-Ready ; power-up finished
Meaning:
State == 1
NCK has finished initialization, AND the power-up progevent has been executed.
OR the power-up progevent could not be executed due to an alarm.
Note: The next RESET will catch up on the power-
up progevent. This will no longer influence PowerOn-Ready.
Without PowerOn-Progevent bit 3 and bit 2 are the same.
- 0 0 f UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
nckModeAccFact
NCK acceleration factor.
The acceleration factor can be set with the PI _N_NCKMOD.
The NCK executes the programs in SERUPRO mode. This mode is currently provided only for the VNCK.
0 VNCK executes a program at normal speed.
>0 VNCK executes a program at accelerated speed.
nckModeAccFact defines the acceleration factor.
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
ncuLinkActive
Display indicating whether NCU link is activated (via machine data setting)
Based on display, MMC decides whether link-specific calculations and
displays are required.
0: NCU link not activated
1: NCU link activated
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

03/2009 1 Variables
nettoMemFfs
Net number of bytes which are available for the
Flash File System (FFS).
This memory stores the files contents and
management data (e.g. file names).
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numAlarms
Number of pending general alarms
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numFilesPerDir
Maximum number of files per directory (see: $MN_MM_NUM_FILES_PER_DIR)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numSubDirsPerDir
Maximum number of subdirectories per directory see:
$MN_MM_NUM_SUBDIR_PER_DIR
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numTraceProtocDataList $MM_PROTOC_NUM_ETPD_STD_LIST
Logging: Number of standard data lists per user
- 0 UWord r
numTraceProtocOemDataList $MM_PROTOC_NUM_ETPD_OEM_LIST
Logging: Number of OEM data lists per user
- 0 0 UWord r
passFChangeCounter
Counter is incremented by 1 when there is a change in
the passive file system (but not for changes to the FFS)
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
protCnfgAutoLoad
Log: Controls automatic loading of the trace session
from the description file during the NCK start-up process
0: Automatic load is disabled
1: Load trace session from description file during NCK start-up
2: Same as (1), but cancel automatic load when stop trigger fires
3: Same as (1), but update the description file whenever the logging state changes
- 0 0 3 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10
protCnfgAutoLoadFile
Log: Directory path and file name from which
the trace session is to be loaded during NCK start-up
- String[64] wr
protCnfgAutoSave
Log: Automatically save the trace session into a description file
0: Automatic save is disabled
1: Save the trace session to a description file whenever data logging is terminated
2: Save the trace session and diagnostic information to a description file whenever data logging is terminated
- 0 0 2 UWord wr

1 Variables 03/2009
protCnfgCtl
Log: Control word to manipulate the trace session description file
0: Do nothing
1: Save the trace session into a description file
2: Save the trace session with diagnostic information into a description file
3: Load the trace session from a description file and reset all active triggers to the armed state
4: Load the trace session from a description file with the saved trigger states
5: Delete the trace session description file
- 0 0 5 UWord wr
protCnfgFilename
Log: Directory path and file name of the
session description file that is managed by protCnfgCtl
- String[64] wr
protCnfgStat
Log: Result from the most recent save or load of a description file
0: No Error
- 0 UWord wr
protSessAccR
Logging: Access rights of the session
- String[32] wr
protSessComm
Logging: Comments on session
- String[128] wr
protSessConn
Logging: Connection of the session
- String[32] wr
protSessName
Logging: Name of the session
- String[32] wr
protSessPrior
Logging: Priority of the session
- String[32] wr
protocLastValNetIpoCycle
Logging: Runtime of all events of all channels of a user in the last IPO cycle
- 0 0 Double r
protocMaxValNetIpoCycle
Logging: Maximum run time of all events of all channels of a user
- 0 0 Double wr
protocStrtMaskInt16
Logging: Integer 16 bit screen form with which the start trigger variable is logically AND-ed before the comparison is
made with the trigger value. There is no logic operation with the value 0.
- 0 0 UWord wr
low byte: user no. (1-10); high byte:
Multi-line: yes 10
variable index (0-1)

03/2009 1 Variables
protocStrtMaskInt32
Logging: Integer 32 bit screen form with which the start trigger variable is logically AND-ed before the comparison is
made with the trigger value. There is no logic operation with the value 0.
Multi-line: yes 10
protocStrtMatchCount
Logging: Specifies how often the comparison must match before the start trigger fires.
The trigger will only fire, if all trigger conditions are fulfilled.
- 0 0 UWord wr
protocStrtNumEvDelay
Logging: Number of events which are still to be omitted after the occurrence of the trigger event before logging is
started.
- 0 0 UWord wr
protocStrtOperation
Logging:
There are two start trigger variables. Each of these two variables is monitored using protocTrigType.
The result from each of these monitoring actions is: Trigger: yes/no
Since there are two variables, there are also two results, which can now be combined with a
logic operator. This operator is specified with this variable
0: No logic operation, only the first variable is to be taken into consideration

1: NOT (unary, the result of the first variable is negated, no second variable
2: AND (the result of the first variable is combined with the result of the second variable with logic AND
3: OR (the result of the first variable is combined with the result of the second variable with logic OR
4: XOR (the result of the first variable is combined with the result of the second variable with logic XOR
- 0 0 UWord wr
protocStrtRemMatchCount
Logging: Specifies how often the comparison must match before the start trigger fires.
- 0 0 UWord r
protocStrtState
Logging: Status of the start triggering
0: Passive (trigger inactive)
1: Active (trigger is active, but has not yet responded)
2: Delay (trigger has responded and is still waiting the delay time)
3: Firing (trigger has responded, but must still respond more frequently until the triggering takes place)
4: Done (trigger has responded and is inactive)
- 0 0 UWord wr
protocStrtType
Logging: Type of start triggering
0: Monitoring for equality
1: Monitoring for more than or equal to
2: Monitoring for greater than
3: Monitoring for less than or equal to
4: Monitoring for less than
5: Monitoring for inequality
6: Monitoring for value change
7: Monitoring for increasing values
8: Monitoring for falling values
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 10

1 Variables 03/2009
protocStrtValueInt16
Logging: Integer 16 bit value with which the start trigger variable is to be compared
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 10
protocStrtValueInt32
Logging: Integer 32 bit value with which the start trigger variable is to be compared
Multi-line: yes 10
protocStrtValueReal32
Logging: Real 32 bit value with which the start trigger variable is to be compared
- 0 0 Float wr
Multi-line: yes 10
protocStrtValueReal64
Logging: Real 64 bit value with which the start trigger variable is to be compared
- 0 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes 10
protocStrtVarArea
Logging: Variable which is to be monitored for start triggering.
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 10
protocStrtVarCol
Logging: Variable which is to be monitored for the start triggering.
Statement of the "Col"
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 10
protocStrtVarRow
Statement of the "Row"
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 10
protocStrtVarType
Statement of the "Type"
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 10
protocStrtVarUnit
Statement of the "Unit".
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 10

03/2009 1 Variables
protocTrigMaskInt16
Logging: Integer 16-bit mask with which the trigger variable is logically
ANDed before the comparison with the trigger value is made.
Variable is not ANDed if value is 0.
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 10
protocTrigMaskInt32
Logging: Integer 32-bit mask with which the trigger variable is logically
ANDed before the comparison with the trigger value is made.
Variable is not ANDed if value is 0.
Multi-line: yes 10
protocTrigMatchCount
Logging: Specifies how often the comparison in total must match before the trigger fires.
- 0 0 UWord wr
protocTrigNumEvDelay
Logging: Number of events to be recorded after the trigger event
has occurred before the logging operation is stopped.
- 0 0 UWord wr
protocTrigOperation
Logging:
There are two start trigger variables. Each of these two variables is monitored using protocTrigType.
The result from each of these monitoring actions is: Trigger: yes/no
Since there are two variables, there are also two results, which can now be combined with a
logic operator. This operator is specified with this variable
0: No logic operation, only the first variable is to be taken into consideration

1: NOT (unary, the result of the first variable is negated, no second variable
2: AND (the result of the first variable is combined with the result of the second variable with logic AND
3: OR (the result of the first variable is combined with the result of the second variable with logic OR
4: XOR (the result of the first variable is combined with the result of the second variable with logic XOR
- 0 0 UWord wr
protocTrigRemMatchCount
Logging: Specifies how often the comparison must match before the trigger fires.
- 0 0 UWord r
protocTrigState
Logging: Triggering status
0: Passive (trigger inactive)
1: Active (trigger is active, but has not yet responded)
2: Delay (trigger has responded and is still waiting the delay time)
3: Firing (trigger has responded, but must still respond more frequently until the triggering takes place)
4: Done (trigger has responded and is inactive)
- 0 0 UWord wr

1 Variables 03/2009
protocTrigType
Logging: Triggering method
0: Monitor for equals
1: Monitor for greater than/equal to
2: Monitor for greater than
3: Monitor for less than/equal to
4: Monitor for less than
5: Monitoring for inequality
6: Monitoring for value change
7: Monitoring for increasing values
8: Monitoring for falling values
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 10
protocTrigValueInt16
Logging: Integer 16-bit value with which trigger variable must be
compared
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 10
protocTrigValueInt32
Logging: Integer 32-bit value with which trigger variable must be
compared
Multi-line: yes 10
protocTrigValueReal32
Logging: Real 32-bit value with which trigger variable must be
compared
- 0 0 Float wr
Multi-line: yes 10
protocTrigValueReal64
Logging: Real 64-bit value with which trigger variable must be
compared
- 0 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes 10
protocTrigVarArea
Specification of "Area".
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 10
protocTrigVarCol
Logging: Variable to be monitored for triggering.
Specification of "Col".
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 10
protocTrigVarRow
Specification of "Row".
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 10

03/2009 1 Variables
protocTrigVarType
Specification of "Type".
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 10
protocTrigVarUnit
Specification of "Unit".
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 10
safeExtInpValNckBit $A_INSE[n]
External NCK input of the SI programmable logic from the NCK periphery
- 0 0 1 UWord r
safeExtInpValNckWord $A_INSED
Image of the external NCK inputs of the SI programmable logic
- 0 Long Integer r
1: image of the system variables
Multi-line: yes 2
$A_INSE[1]...[32]
safeExtInpValPlcBit $A_INSEP[n]
External PLC input of the SI programmable logic from the PLC periphery
- 0 0 1 UWord r
safeExtInpValPlcWord $A_INSEPD
Image of the external PLC inputs of the SI programmable logic
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 2
$A_INSEP[1]...[32]
safeExtOutpValNckBit $A_OUTSE[n]
External NCK output of the SI programmable logic to the NCK periphery
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Output number 64
safeExtOutpValNckWord $A_OUTSED
Image of the external NCK outputs of the SI programmable logic
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 2
$A_OUTSE[1]...[32]
safeExtOutpValPlcBit $A_OUTSEP[n]
External PLC output of the SI programmable logic to the PLC periphery
- 0 0 1 UWord r
safeExtOutpValPlcWord $A_OUTSEPD
Image of the external PLC outputs of the SI programmable logic
- 0 Long Integer r
1: image of the system variable
Multi-line: yes 2
$A_OUTSEP[1]...[32]
safeFdpActCycle
Current value of the F_DP communication cycle in seconds
s, user defined 0.0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 03/2009
safeFdpMaxCycle
Maximum value of F_DP communication cycle in s
Multi-line: yes 1 1
safeFrdpAckReqNck $A_FRDP_ACK_REQ[n]
After a communication error, the F_DP communication is back in cyclic operation. A user acknowledgement is required
to release normal operation with output of the process values.
0 = No user acknowledgement required
1 = User acknowledgement required
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 3 3
safeFrdpActComTime
Current F_RECVDP communication time in seconds
Multi-line: yes 3 3
safeFrdpDiagNck $A_FRDP_DIAG[n]
Diagnostics data for F_RECVDP communication/system error
01H = Timeout detected (TO)
02H = Sequence number error detected (SN)
04H = CRC error detected (CRC)
2000H = Deviations in the F telegram data detected (TD)
4000H = Sign-of-life monitoring error detected (LS)
8000H = Asynchronous error state detected (SF)
- 0 0 0x7 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 3 3
safeFrdpDriverStateNck
Current state of the F_RECVDP driver
0 = Not parameterized
1 = Initialization
2 = Communication buildup, F_RECVDP ready: waiting for F_SENDDP
3 = Communication buildup, F_SENDDP ready: waiting for sequence number = 1
4 = F_SENDDP and F_RECVDP ready: waiting for user acknowledgement
5= Normal operation
- 0 0 5 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 3 3
safeFrdpErrReacNck $A_FRDP_ERR_REAC[n]
The user can define the error reaction irrespective of the machining situation or the coupling of the communication
partners.
0 = Alarm 27350 + stop D/E
1 = Alarm 27350
2 = Alarm 27351 (display only, self-clearing)
3 = No reaction
- 0 0 3 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 3 3
safeFrdpErrReacPlc
partners.
1 = Alarm 27350
3 = No reaction
Multi-line: yes 3 3
safeFrdpErrorNck $A_FRDP_ERROR[n]
An F_RECVDP communication error has been detected. The cause is stated in the diagnostics data.
0 = No communication error
1 = Communication error detected
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 3 3

03/2009 1 Variables
safeFrdpFDataNck
F user data received
- 0 0 0xFFFF UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 3 3
safeFrdpMaxComTime
Maximum value of F_RECVDP communication time in s
Multi-line: yes 3 3
safeFrdpSendModeNck $A_FRDP_SENDMODE[n]
Current operating mode of the F-CPU of the F_SENDDP communication partner
0: FALSE: The F-CPU is in safety mode
1: TRUE: The F-CPU is in deactivated safety mode
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 3 3
safeFrdpSubsNck $A_FRDP_SUBS[n]
The user can define substitute values. These are then output to the application during power up, and communication
errors are output instead of the process values.
Multi-line: yes 3 3
safeFrdpSubsOnNck $A_FRDP_SUBS_ON[n]
During power up and in the event of a communication error, substitute values are output.
ERROR = 0 AND SUBS_ON = 1 => Power up
ERROR = 1 AND SUBS_ON = 1 => Communication error
0 = Process values are output
1 = Substitute values are output
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 3 3
safeFrdpSubsPlc
The user can define substitute values. These are then output to the application during power up, and communication
errors are output instead of the process values.
Multi-line: yes 3 3
safeFsdpActComTime
Current F_SENDDP communication time in seconds
The communication time is the time from F_SENDDP sending the message telegram
until the arrival of the correct acknowledge telegram from F_RECVDP.
Multi-line: yes 3 3
safeFsdpDiagNck $A_FSDP_DIAG[n]
Diagnostics data for F_SENDDP communication/system error
01H = Timeout detected (TO)
02H = Sequence number error detected (SN)
04H = CRC error detected (CRC)
2000H = Deviations in the F telegram data detected (TD)
4000H = Sign-of-life monitoring error detected (LS)
8000H = Asynchronous error state detected (SF)
Multi-line: yes 3 3

1 Variables 03/2009
safeFsdpDriverStateNck
Current state of the F_SENDDP driver
0 = Not parameterized
1 = Initialization
2 = F_SENDDP ready: waiting for F_RECVDP
3 = F_SENDDP and F_RECVDP ready: waiting for user acknowledgement from F_RECVDP
4 = Normal operation
- 0 0 4 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 3 3
safeFsdpErrReacNck $A_FSDP_ERR_REAC[n]
partners.
1 = Alarm 27350
3 = No reaction
Multi-line: yes 3 3
safeFsdpErrReacPlc
partners.
1 = Alarm 27350
3 = No reaction
Multi-line: yes 3 3
safeFsdpErrorNck $A_FSDP_ERROR[n]
A communication error has been detected. The cause is stated in the diagnostics data
0 = No communication error
1 = Communication error detected
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 3 3
safeFsdpFDataNck
The F user data sent from F_SENDDP to F_RECVDP
Multi-line: yes 3 3
safeFsdpMaxComTime
Maximum value of the F_SENDDP communication time in s
After a communication error, the maximum value is reset to 0 by the user acknowledgement.
Multi-line: yes 3 3
safeFsdpStatusSubsNck
Status signal in the acknowledgement telegram from F_RECVDP to F_SENDDP.
F_RECVDP informs F_SENDDP with this signal that there is a communication error, and it is currently outputting
substitute values.
F_RECVDP resets the signal when it receives a user acknowledgement
0 = F_RECVDP outputs process values
1 = F_RECVDP outputs substitute values
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 3 3
safeFsdpSubsOnNck $A_FSDP_SUBS_ON[n]
The communication relationship is not in normal operation.
If F_RECVDP is active, it outputs substitute values. The signal is set during the start-up of the F communication and in
the event of a communication error.
ERROR = 0 AND SUBS_ON = 1 => Power up
ERROR = 1 AND SUBS_ON = 1 => Communication error
0 = Process values are output by F_RECVDP

03/2009 1 Variables
1 = Substitute values are output by F_RECVDP

- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 3 3
safeIntInpValNckBit $A_INSI[n]
Internal NCK input of the SI programmable logic from the NCK's SI monitoring channel
- 0 0 1 UWord r
safeIntInpValNckWord $A_INSID
Image of the internal NCK inputs of the SI programmable logic from the NCK's SI monitoring channel
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 2
$A_INSID[1]
safeIntInpValPlcBit $A_INSIP[n]
Internal PLC input of the SI programmable logic from the 611D's SI monitoring channel
- 0 0 1 UWord r
safeIntInpValPlcWord $A_INSIPD
Image of the internal PLC inputs of the SI programmable logic from the 611D's SI monitoring channel
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 2
$A_INSIPD[1]
safeIntOutpValNckBit $A_OUTSI[n]
Internal NCK output of the SI programmable logic to the NCK's SI monitoring channel
- 0 0 1 UWord r
safeIntOutpValNckWord $A_OUTSID
Image of the internal NCK outputs of the SI programmable logic to the NCK's SI monitoring channel
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 2
$A_OUTSI[1]...[32]
safeIntOutpValPlcBit $A_OUTSIP[n]
Internal PLC output of the SI programmable logic to the 611D's SI monitoring channel
- 0 0 1 UWord r
safeIntOutpValPlcWord $A_OUTSIPD
Image of the internal PLC outputs of the SI programmable logic to the 611D's SI monitoring channel
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 2
$A_OUTSIP[1]...[32]
safeMarkerNck $A_MARKERSI
NCK flag for the SI programmable logic
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no 64
safeMarkerNckWord
NCK flag words for the safe programmable logic
1: Image of the system variable
Multi-line: yes 2
$A_MARKERSID[1]
safeMarkerPlc $A_MARKERSIP
Image of the PLC flag-variable for SI programmable logic
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no 64

1 Variables 03/2009
safeMarkerPlcWord
Image of the PLC flag words for the safe programmable logic
1: Image of the system variable
Multi-line: yes 2
$A_MARKERSIPD[1]
safeNumActiveFrdp
Number of active F_RECVDP connections
- 0 0 3 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
safeNumActiveFsdp
Number of active F_SENDDP connections
- 0 0 3 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
safePlcIn $A_PLCSIIN[index]
Bit image of the single channel safety signals from PLC to NCK
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Index for $A_PLCSIIN[1...32] 32
safePlcOut $A_PLCSIOUT[index]
Bit image of the single channel safety signals from NCK to PLC
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Index for $A_PLCSIOUT[1...32] 32
safeSplStatus
Status of components and parameter settings required for
operation of Safe Programmable Logic
Bit 0: SPL interfaces $A_INSE, $A_OUTSE, $A_INSI

or $A_OUTSI have been parameterized
Bit 1: SPL program file SAFE.SPF loaded
Bit 2: Drive runup status 4 reached, NCK is waiting
for PLC to run up
Bit 3: Drive runup status 4 reached, PLC has
reached cyclic operating status. PLC can now communicate
with drive.
Bit 4: Interrupt for ASUB start of SPL must be
assigned (FB4 call started)
Bit 5: Interrupt for ASUB start of SPL has been
assigned (FB4 call ended)
Bit 6: Interrupt processing for SPL start called
(FC9 call started)
Bit 7: Interrupt processing for SPL start ended
(FC9 call ended)
Bit 8: -
Bit 9: NCK cross-checking has been started
Bit10: PLC cross-checking has been started
Bit11: Cyclic SPL checksum check active
Bit12: All SPL protective mechanisms active
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
safeTimerNck $A_TIMERSI
NCK timer-variable for the SI programmable logic
Multi-line: no 8

03/2009 1 Variables
safeXcmpCmd $A_CMDSI[index]
Command word for cross-checking (KDV) between NCK and PLC
0:No command
1:Extension of time window for different signal levels in cross-checking operation between NCK and PLC
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no 32
safeXcmpLevel $A_LEVELSID
Fill-level display for cross-checking operation (KDV)
between NCK and PLC. Specifies the current number
of signals of different levels between the NCK and PLC)
Multi-line: no 1
safeXcmpState $A_STATSID
Cross-checking (KDV) error has occurred between NCK and PLC.
0: No error has occurred

Multi-line: no 1
scalingSystemCounter
Modification counter for dimension system
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
semaDataAvailable
Display indicating whether complete SEMA data are available for individual axes.
This is the case if a channel can be assigned to the relevant NCU axis, thus allowing
the data in the channel context to be accessed. This does not apply to link axes as these
are traversed by a channel of another NCU.
This data can be utilized by MMCs in order to conceal specific, inaccessible data
in link axis data displays.
Bits 0-31 stand for the axes of the NCU.

Bit n = 1: Data can be accessed easily
Bit n = 0: Not all SEMA data are accessible
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
simo611dSupport
This data specifies the extent to which the system supports
611 drives.
Bit 0 set: NCK software supports 611D drives
Bit 1 set: Hardware supports 611D drives (only if bit 0 is also set).
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
stopCond
Number of the NC stop state in the NCK
More than one stop state can be active simultaneously. The highest priority stop state appears below the first line, this
is followed by those with lower priorities.
The documentation explains the meanings of the individual stop states.

- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of the active stop state stopCondNumNck

1 Variables 03/2009
stopCondChan
Channel in which the NC stop state was reported
More than one stop state can be active simultaneously. The highest priority stop state appears below the first line, this
is followed by those with lower priorities.

- 0 1 maxnumChannels UWord r
stopCondChangeCounter
Modification counter for stop states in the NCK.
This is incremented as soon as one of the stop states has changed.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
stopCondNumNck
Number of active stop states in the NCK
Specifies the number of occupied lines in stopCond
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
stopCondPar
Stop state parameters in the NCK.
More than one stop state can be active simultaneously. The highest priority
stop state appears below the first line, this is followed by those with lower priorities.
- UWord r
High byte: No. of the active stop
Multi-line: yes
state
stopCondParA
Stop state parameters in the NCK.
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes
state
stopCondTime
BCD time stamp for stop state in the NCK.
- Date+Time r
swLicensePIN
PIN for licensing
- String[128] wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
sysTimeBCD
Time represented in PLC format:
<month>.<day>.<year> <hours>:<minutes>:<seconds>.<milliseconds> <weekday> <status>
<weekday> can take following values: "SUN", "MON", "TUE", "WED", "THU", "FRI", "SAT"
- Date+Time r
Multi-line: no
sysTimeNCSC
NCSC system time in microseconds
Multi-line: yes 1 1

03/2009 1 Variables
sysTimeNCSCatTraceStart
Logging: NCSC time stamp for the trace start time in µs
sysTimeNCSCatTraceTrig
Logging: NCSC time stamp for the trace start trigger time in µs
sysTimeNCSCdiffTraceStart
Logging: Time difference for the trace start time in µs
sysTimeNCSCdiffTraceTrig
Logging: time difference for the trace start trigger time in µs
sysTimeSinceStartup
System run time in seconds since NCK ramp-up
Multi-line: yes 1 1
sysTimeUdword
Time sysTimeBCD in special data format:
6 bits for second (bits of the lowest priority)
6 bits for minute
5 bits for hour
5 bits for day
4 bits for month
6 bits for the last two digits of the year
This coding is suitable for using the absolute time as trigger for logging.
Also see: protocStrtValueInt32 and protocTrigValueInt32
- UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no
tlkNr
Unique copy number for the temporary license key
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
tlkPIN
Temporary license key
- String[128] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
tlkStatus
Status of the temporary license key
0: active
1: inactive
10: incorrect input
11: max. number of incorrect inputs exceeded
200: internal error (TLK_BUFFER_TOO_SMALL)
- 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
totalDirectorys
Maximum number of directories which may be created
see:
$MN_MM_NUM_DIR_IN_FILESYSTEM
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 03/2009
totalFiles
Maximum number of files which may be created (see: $MM_NUM_FILES_IN_FILESYSTEM)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
totalMem S7
Total SRAM in bytes (user memory)
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1
totalMemDram
total DRAM in bytes
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
totalMemDramEPassF
Size in bytes of the passive file system for executing from external drives
Multi-line: yes 1 1
totalMemDramMPassF
Size of the passive file system of the "Machine manufacturer" area in bytes
Multi-line: yes 1 1
totalMemDramPassF
Size of passive file system (DRAM No. 1) in bytes
Multi-line: yes 1 1
totalMemDramSPassF
Size of the passive file system of the "Control manufacturer" area in bytes
Multi-line: yes 1 1
totalMemDramTPassF
Size of the passive file system of the "Temp" area in bytes
Multi-line: yes 1 1
totalMemDramUPassF
Size of the passive file system of the "User" area in bytes
Multi-line: yes 1 1
totalMemFfs
Number of bytes reserved on the PCMCIA card for the
Flash File System (FFS)
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
totalMemISram
Total internal SRAM in bytes
Multi-line: yes 1 1
totalMemSramPassF
Size of passive file system (SRAM) in bytes
Multi-line: yes 1 1

03/2009 1 Variables
totalProtokolFiles $MM_PROTOC_NUM_FILES
Logging: Maximum number of log files which may be created
- 0 0 1 UWord r
traceProtocolActive $A_PROTOC
Logging: User status
1 = Not active
2 = Active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
traceProtocolLock $A_PROT_LOCK
Logging: Recording disable of a user
0: No disable
1: Disable
- 0 0 1 UWord wr
traceStopAction
Logging: Actions on ending the recording
Bit 0: Automatic restart
1: Disable
- 0 0 UWord wr
usedDirectorys
Number of directories that have already been created
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
usedFiles
Number of files that have already been created
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
usedMem S7
Used memory in bytes
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1
usedMemDram
Used DRAM in bytes
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
usedMemDramEPassF
Memory in bytes occupied by the passive file system for executing from external drives
Multi-line: yes 1 1
usedMemDramMPassF
Occupied memory of the passive file system of the "Machine manufacturer" area in bytes
Multi-line: yes 1 1
usedMemDramPassF
Memory used in passive file system (DRAM No. 1) in bytes
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 03/2009
usedMemDramSPassF
Occupied memory of the passive file system of the "Control manufacturer" area in bytes
Multi-line: yes 1 1
usedMemDramTPassF
Occupied memory of the passive file system of the "Temp" area in bytes
Multi-line: yes 1 1
usedMemDramUPassF
Occupied memory of the passive file system of the "User" area in bytes
Multi-line: yes 1 1
usedMemFfs
Number of used bytes in the Flash File System (FFS)
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
usedMemISram
Occupied internal SRAM
Multi-line: yes 1 1
usedMemSramPassF
Memory used in passive file system (SRAM) in bytes
Multi-line: yes 1 1
usedOptionsNotLicensed
List of options which are not licensed
- String[200] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
usedProtokolFiles
Logging: Number of protocol files that have already been created
- 0 0 1 UWord r
vaDpActTel $VA_DP_ACT_TEL[n, Achse]

Word for word image of the Profibus actual value message frames from drives on the Profibus/PROFIdrive
100 * axis index + word offset in the
Multi-line: yes 100 * numMachAxes + 19
message frame

03/2009 1 Variables
1.3.2 Area N, Module SALA: Alarms: List organized according to time,

oldest alarm appears first
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/SequencedAlarms/...
The NCK alarms are sorted in a list in the order they occurred, the oldest alarm appears at the top of the
list. The alarm parameters are transferred as ASCII strings, the first character contains the type information
for that parameter. The following types are used:
S: General string, e.g. part program name
A: Axis name / spindle name
K: Channel name
N: Block number
Y: System error
D: Drive number
If a parameters is not assigned, an "S" is transferred.
All variables in this module are privileged variables! This means that cyclic acknowledgements are sent for
these variables even if the cyclic services are no longer serviced by the NCK because of block cycle
problems.
Attention: Privileged variables lose this characteristic if they are combined with non-privileged variables in
a request. -> Do not combine alarm variables with other variables in a cluster!
In addition it is presumed that the cyclic services are set "on change" for the alarm variables and are not
combined with other variables (not even with privileged variables) in the same request.
The module SALA only contains the alarms that are generated in the NCK. It contains neither PLC nor
MMC alarms. In order to read all alarms, the OEM-MMC user should use the alarm server functions and
not read the SALA module directly.
alarmNo DA
Ordinal number of an alarm (how many alarms since control ON)
0 = unknown alarm
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes Alarm list index 16
clearInfo DA
Acknowledgement criterion for an alarm
1 = Power On
2 = Reset
3 = Cancel
4 = Alarm is cancelled by NCK-software (from SW 4.1)
5 = Alarm is cancelled by starting a program
6 = Alarm is cancelled by RESET in all channels of the bags (from SW 4.1)
7 = Alarm is cancelled by RESET in all channels of the NC (from SW 4.1)
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no 1
fillText1 DA
Parameter 1 of the alarm
- String[32] r
fillText2 DA
- String[32] r

1 Variables 03/2009
fillText3 DA
- String[32] r
fillText4 DA
- String[32] r
textIndex
Alarm number (actual alarm)
- Long Integer r
timeBCD
Time stamp of an alarm
Time stamp, displayed in PLC format DATE_AND_TIME
- Date+Time r
1.3.3 Area N, Module SALAP: Alarms: List organized according to priority
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/TopPrioAlarm/...
The alarms of the NCK are arranged in a list in the order of their priorities. The highest-priority alarm is set
to position 1. The alarm list is sorted according to the following criteria:
1. Sorting criterion: deletion criterion (highest priority at 1st position)

- NC power OFF/ON
- Press reset key
- Press "Delete alarm"
- Press "NC start"
- Press "Recall" key
2. Sorting criterion: alarm occurrence time
The alarm parameters are transferred as ASCII strings, the first character contains the type information for
the parameter. The following types are used:
K: Channel name
N: Block name
Y: System error
D: Drive number
If a parameter is not assigned, an "S" is transferred.
problems.
Notice: Privileged variables lose this characteristic if they are combined with non-privileged variables in a
request. -> Do not combine alarm variables with other variables in a cluster!
The module SALAP only contains the alarms that are generated in the NCK. It contains neither PLC nor

03/2009 1 Variables
not read the SALAP module directly.
alarmNo DA
0 = unknown alarm
- Long Integer r
clearInfo DA
1 = Power On
2 = Reset
3 = Cancel
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no
fillText1 DA
- String[32] r
fillText2 DA
- String[32] r
fillText3 DA
- String[32] r
fillText4 DA
- String[32] r
textIndex
- Long Integer r
timeBCD
- Date+Time r

1 Variables 03/2009
1.3.4 Area N, Module SALAL: Alarms: Liste organized according to time,

most recent alarm appears first
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/LastAlarm/...
The NCK alarms are sorted in a list in the order they occurred, the most recent alarm appears at the
bottom of the list. The alarm parameters are transferred as ASCII strings, the first character contains the
type information for that parameter. The following types are used:
K: Channel name
N: Block number
Y: System error
D: Drive number
If a parameters is not assigned, an "S" is transferred.
problems.
Attention: Privileged variables lose this characteristic if they are combined with non-privileged variables in
a request. -> Do not combine alarm variables with other variables in a cluster!
The module SALA only contains the alarms that are generated in the NCK. It contains neither PLC nor
not read the SALA module directly.
alarmNo DA
0 = unknown alarm
- Long Integer r
clearInfo DA
1 = Power On
2 = Reset
3 = Cancel
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no
fillText1 DA
- String[32] r
fillText2 DA
- String[32] r

03/2009 1 Variables
fillText3 DA
- String[32] r
fillText4 DA
- String[32] r
textIndex
- Long Integer r
timeBCD
- Date+Time r
1.3.5 Area N, Module SMA: State data: Machine axes
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/MachineAxis/...
All state data that are dependent on machine movement and are defined specifically for machine axes
(geometry and special axes) are combined in module SMA. Supplementary information is to be found in
module SEMA. The individual variables are defined as fields where the line index is the number of the
machine axis (assigned to the current channel). The variable "name" in module SMA with the line index in
question identifies the axis.
The assignment of the line indices in modules SMA and SEMA is identical.
actIncrVal H1
Active INC weighting of the axis
0 = INC_10000
1 = INC_1000
2 = INC_100
3 = INC_10
4 = INC_1
5 = INC_VAR
6 = INC_JOG_CONT
7 = no incremental mode set
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes
actToolBasePos
Tool base position. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (from this module)
Double r
defined
cmdToolBasePos
Tool base position, desired value . Physical unit is defined in variable extUnit (in this module).
Double r
defined
extUnit
Current physical unit of the axis position
0 = mm
1 = inch

1 Variables 03/2009
2 = degree
3 = indexing position
4 = userdef
- UWord r
name
Axis name
- String[32] r
status
Axis status
0 = travel command in plus direction
1 = travel command in minus direction
2 = exact position coarse reached
3 = exact position fine reached
- UWord r
toolBaseDistToGo
Tool base distance-to-go. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
Double r
defined
toolBaseREPOS
Tool base REPOS. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
Double r
defined
varIncrVal
Settable value for INC_VAR. The physical value depends on whether the axis is linear or rotary.
Linear axis: unit is 1 mm
Rotary axis: unit is 1/1000 degrees
Double r
defined
1.3.6 Area N, Module SEMA: State data: Machine axes (extension of SMA)
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/MachineAxis/...
PRESETActive
Preset state
0 = no preset active
1 = preset active
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes
PRESETVal
The function PRESETON (...) programs a work offset for an axis. The value of the offset is stored in the variable
'PRESETVal'. The variable can be overwritten by the part program and by the MMC.
mm, inch, user defined Double wr

03/2009 1 Variables
aaAcc
Current axial acceleration value
m/s2, 1000 inch/ s2, rev/s2,
0 0 Double r
user defined
aaAccPercent
Current acceleration value for single-axis interpolation in percent
- 0 0 UWord r
aaActIndexAxPosNo
Current indexing position; the display depends on
$MN_INDEX_AX_NO_MODE and the division (via table or equidistant)
- 0 Long Integer r
aaAlarmStat
Display indicating whether alarms are active for a PLC-controlled axis.
The relevant coded alarm reactions can be used as a source for
the "Extended Stop and Retract" function.
The data is bit-coded, allowing, where necessary, individual states to be
masked or evaluated separately (bits not listed supply a value of 0)
Bit2 = 1: NOREADY (active rapid deceleration + cancelation of servo enable)
Bit6 = 1: STOPBYALARM (rampm stop in all channel axes)
Bit9 = 1: SETVDI (VDI interface signal "Setting alarm")
Bit13 = 1: FOLLOWUPBYALARM (Follow-up)
- 0 UWord r
aaAxChangeStat
Axis status with respect to axis replacement
0: Axis can be replaced
1: Axis is linked to the channel, but can become the PLC, command or reciprocating axis
2: Axis cannot be replaced
- 0 0 2 UWord r
aaAxChangeTyp
Axis type with respect to axis replacement
0: Axis assigned to the NC program
1: Axis assigned to the PLC or active as command axis or reciprocating axis
2: Other channel has interpolation right
3: Neutral axis
4: Neutral axis controlled from the PLC
5: Other channel has interpolation right; axis is requested for the NC program
6: Other channel has interpolation right; axis is requested as neutral axis
7: Axis is PLC axis or is active as command axis or reciprocating axis; axis is requested for the
NC program
8: Axis is PLC axis or is active as command axis or reciprocating axis; axis is requested as
neutral axis
- 0 0 8 UWord r
aaBcsOffset
Sum of all axial offsets of an axis,
such as DRF, online tool offset, $AA_OFF and ext. WO.
- 0 Double r
aaBrakeCondB
Shows the pending braking requests (conditions) for the interpolator stop of the axis / spindle.
A braking request consists of a collision direction relating to a coordinate axis in the BCS and a braking priority relating
to the machining step.
If the axis / spindle receives a current braking request on account of these requirement(s), bit 0 is set in

1 Variables 03/2009
$AA_BRAKE_STATE[X] (in the next IPO cycle).

The braking priorities in the positive direction are indicated in bits 0 to 2:
0: No pending braking request
1: Priority 1 covers all positioning actions (G0, POS, SPOS)
2: Priority 2 covers DYNNORM and all priority 1 motions
3: Priority 3 covers DYNPOS and all priority 1 to 2 motions
4: Priority 4 covers DYNROUGH and all priority 1 to 3 motions
5: Priority 5 covers DYNSEMIFIN and all priority 1 to 4 motions
6: Priority 6 covers all motions (including DYNFINISH)
7: Priority 7 covers all motions. The request was triggered by the VDI interface signal DB31,..DBX4.3 "Feed stop /
Spindle stop".
Braking always takes place, irrespective of the direction of motion.
The braking priorities in the negative direction are indicated in bits 16 to 18:
0 to 7: Same meaning as bits 0 to 2
All other bits are not set.

If the value of the variable is shown in hexadecimal format, the fifth character from the right shows the braking word in
the negative direction and the first character from the right shows it in the positive direction.
aaBrakeCondM
A braking request consists of a collision direction relating to a coordinate axis in the MCS and a braking priority relating
The braking priorities in the positive direction are indicated in bits 0 to 2:
0: No pending braking request
Spindle stop".
Braking always takes place, irrespective of the direction of motion.
The braking priorities in the negative direction are indicated in bits 16 to 18:

If the value of the variable is shown in hexadecimal format, the fifth character from the right shows the braking word in
the negative direction and the first character from the right shows it in the positive direction.
aaBrakeState
Returns for the axis / spindle whether braking has been initiated on account of the request of $AA_BRAKE_CONDB[X]
or a VDI interface signal DB31,..DBX4.3 "Feed stop / Spindle stop".
aaChanNo
The variable supplies the number of the channel in which the axis
is currently being interpolated.
With value 0, the axis could not be assigned to any channel.
- 0 0 UWord r
aaCoupAct
Current coupling state of the slave spindle
- UWord r

03/2009 1 Variables
aaCoupCorr
This variable is used to execute the function "Correct synchronism error".
It returns the compensation value for the position offset for the generic coupling with CPFRS = "MCS".
The actual values of this spindle are compared with the setpoints for the duration (MD 30455
MISC_FUNCTION_MASK, bit 7) of the activation of the VDI interface signal
DB31..,DBX31.6 'Correct synchronism' for the following spindle with coupling active.
The difference is the compensation value, which can be read with this variable.
- 0 Double r
aaCoupCorrDist
Generic coupling: path still to be retracted for aaCoupCorr
- 0 Double r
aaCoupOffs
Position offset of the synchronous spindle desired value
- Double r
aaCurr
Actual value of the axis/spindle current in A (611D only)
A Double r
aaDepAxO
Dependency on other axes.
Returns an axis code for the defined axis AX containing all the machine axes that have a mechanical dependency on
the defined axis.
aaDtbb
Axis-specific distance from the beginning of the block in the BCS for positioning and synchronous axes used in
synchronous actions
(note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaDtbreb
The estimated total distance until the end of deceleration is reached, BCS
- 0 0 Double r
aaDtbrebCmd
Specified section of the decelaration distance, BCS
- 0 0 Double r
aaDtbrebCorr
Offset section of the deceleration distance, BCS
- 0 0 Double r
aaDtbrebDep
Dependent section of the decelaration distance, BCS
- 0 0 Double r

1 Variables 03/2009
aaDtbrem
The estimated total distance until the end of deceleration is reached, MCS
- 0 0 Double r
aaDtbremCmd
Specified section of the decelaration distance, MCS
- 0 0 Double r
aaDtbremCorr
Offset section of the deceleration distance, MCS
- 0 0 Double r
aaDtbremDep
Dependent section of the decelaration distance, MCS
- 0 0 Double r
aaDteb
Axis-specific distance to the end of the block in the BCS for positioning and synchronous axes used in synchronous
actions
(note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaDtepb
Axis-specific distance-to-go of infeed during oscillation in the BCS
(note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaEnc1Active
First measuring system is active
0: Measuring system is not active
1: Measuring system is active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
aaEnc1Ampl
Enc1: Percentage gain factor of the amplitude control
- 0 0 Double r
aaEnc2Active
Second measuring system is active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
aaEnc2Ampl
- 0 0 Double r
aaEncActive
Measuring system is active
- 0 0 1 UWord r

03/2009 1 Variables
aaEsrEnable
(Axial) enabling of reactions of "Extended Stop and Retract" function.
The selected axial ESR reaction must be parameterized in MD $MA_ESR_REACTION.
beforehand. The corresponding Stop or Retract reactions can be activated via
$AN_ESR_TRIGGER (or for individual drives in the event of communications failure/
DC-link undervoltage), generator-mode operation is automatically activated in response to
undervoltage conditions.
0: FALSE
1: TRUE
- 0 0 1 UWord r
aaEsrStat
(Axial) status checkback signals of "Extended Stop and Retract" function,
which can be applied as input signals for the gating logic of the ESR (synchronous actions).
The data is bit-coded. Individual states can therefore be masked or

evaluated separately if necessary:
Bit0 = 1: Generator mode is activated
Bit1 = 1: Retract operation is activated
Bit2 = 1: Stop operation is activated
Bit3 = 1: Risk of undervoltage (DC-link voltage monitoring,
voltage has dropped below warning threshold)
Bit4 = 1: Speed has dropped below minimum generator mode threshold (i.e. no more
regenerative rotation energy is available).
- 0 UWord r
aaEsrTrigger
Activation of "NC-controlled ESR" for PLC-controlled axis
- 0 0 1 UWord r
aaFixPointSelected
Selected fixed point: Number of the fixed point that is to be approached
- 0 UDoubleword r
aaIbnCorr
Current BZS setpoint value of an axis including override components
- 0 Double r
aaIenCorr
Current SZS setpoint value of an axis including override components
- 0 Double r
aaInSync
Synchronization status of the following axis with master value coupling and ELG
0: Synchronization is not running
1: Synchronization is running, i.e. following axis is being synchronized
- 0 0 1 UWord r
aaInposStat
Status for the programmed position
0: No status available (axis/spindle is outside of the programmed position)
1: Travel motion pending
2: Position setpoint reached
3: Position reached with 'exact stop coarse'
4: Position reached with 'exact stop fine'
- 0 0 4 UWord r

1 Variables 03/2009
aaJerkCount
Total traverse processes of an axis with jerk
- 0 Double r
aaJerkTime
Total traverse time of an axis with jerk
- 0 Double r
aaJerkTotal
Overall total jerk of an axis
- 0 Double r
aaJogPosAct
Position reached for JOG to position
- 0 0 1 UWord r
aaJogPosSelected
JOG to position is active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
aaLeadP
Actual lead value position
- Double r
aaLeadPTurn
Current master value - position component lost
as a result of modulo reduction
- 0 0 Double r
aaLeadSp
Simulated lead value - position
- Double r
aaLeadSv
Simulated leading value velocity
- Double r
aaLeadV
Actual lead value - velocity
- Double r
aaLoad
Drive load in % (611D only)
% Double r
aaMaslState
Each slave axis currently coupled via master-slave delivers the machine axis number of the corresponding master
axis.
Zero is displayed as default for inactive coupling. A master axis also shows default value zero.
0: No coupling for this axis configured, or axis is master axis, or no coupling active
>0: Machine axis number of the master axis with which the slave axis is currently coupled
- 0 0 numGlobMachAxes UWord r

03/2009 1 Variables
aaMeaAct
Axial measuring active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
aaMm
Latched probe position in the machine coordinate system
- Double wr
aaMm1
Access to measurement result of trigger event in the MCS
- Double wr
aaMm2
- Double wr
aaMm3
- Double wr
aaMm4
- Double wr
aaOff
Superimposed position offset from synchronous actions
- Double r
aaOffLimit
Limit for axial correction $AA_OFF reached (Note: for SYNACT only)
0: Limit value not reached
1: Limit value reached in positive axis direction
11: Limit value reached in negative axis direction
- UWord r
aaOffVal
Integrated value of overlaid motion for an axis.
The negative value of this variable can be used to cancel an overlaid motion.
e.g. $AA_OFF[axis] = -$AA_OFF_VAL[axis]
- 0 Double r
aaOnFixPoint
Current fixed point, number of the fixed point at which the axis stands
- 0 UDoubleword r
aaOscillBreakPos1
Oscillation interrupt position 1
- Double r

1 Variables 03/2009
aaOscillBreakPos2
- Double r
aaOscillReversePos1
Current reverse position 1 for oscillation in the BCS. For synchronous actions the value of the setting data
$SA_OSCILL_REVERSE_POS1 is evaluated online; (note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaOscillReversePos2
Current reverse position 2 for oscillation in the BCS; For synchronous actions the value of the setting data
- Double r
aaOvr
Axial override for synchronous actions
- Double r
aaPlcOvr
Axial override specified by PLC for motion-synchronous actions
- 100 0 Double r
aaPolfa
The programmed retraction position of the single axis
- Double r
aaPolfaValid
States whether the retraction of the single axis is programmed
0: No retraction programmed for the single axis
1: Retraction programmed as position
2: Retraction programmed as distance
- 0 0 2 UWord r
aaPower
Drive power in W (611D only)
W Double r
aaProgIndexAxPosNo
Programmed indexing position
0: No indexing axis, therefore no indexing position available
>0: Number of the programmed indexing position
- 0 0 UWord r
aaRef
Axis is referenced
0: Axis is not referenced
1: Axis is referenced
- 0 0 1 UWord r

03/2009 1 Variables
aaReposDelay
REPOS suppression active
0: REPOS suppression is currently not active for this axis
1: REPOS suppression is currently active for this axis
- 0 0 1 UWord r
aaScPar
Current setpoint parameter set
aaSnglAxStat
Display status of a PLC-controlled axis
0: Not a single axis
1: Reset
2: Ended
3: Interrupted
4: Active
5: Alarm
- 0 UWord r
aaSoftendn
Software end position, negative direction
- Double r
aaSoftendp
Software end position, positive direction
- Double r
aaStat
Axis state
0: no axis state available
1: travel command is active
2: axis has reached the IPO end. only for channel axes
3: axis in position (exact stop coarse) for all axes
4: axis in position (exact stop fine) for all axes
- UWord r
aaSync
Coupling status of the following axis with master value coupling
0: No synchronism
1: Synchronism coarse
2: Synchronism fine
3: Synchronism coarse and fine
- UWord r
aaSyncDiff
Setpoint synchronism difference
0 0 Double r
defined
aaSyncDiffStat
Status of the setpoint synchronism difference
-4: No valid value in aaSyncDiff, coupled motion from part program
-3: Reserved
-2: Reserved
-1: No valid value in aaSyncDiff

1 Variables 03/2009
0: No valid value in aaSyncDiff, coupling not active

1: Valid value in aaSyncDiff
aaTorque
Desired torque value in Nm (611D only)
Nm Double r
aaTotalOvr
The total axial override for motion-synchronous actions
- 100 0 Double r
aaTravelCount
Total traverse processes of an axis
- 0 Double r
aaTravelCountHS
Total traverse processes of an axis at high speed
- 0 Double r
aaTravelDist
Total travel path of an axis in mm or degrees
- 0 Double r
aaTravelDistHS
Total travel path of an axis at high speed in mm or degrees
- 0 Double r
aaTravelTime
Total traverse time of an axis in seconds
- 0 Double r
aaTravelTimeHS
Total traverse time of an axis at high speed in seconds
- 0 Double r
aaTyp
Axis type
0: axis in other channel
1: channel axis of same channel
2: neutral axis
3: PLC axis
4: reciprocating axis
5: neutral axis, currently traversing in JOG
6: slave axis coupled via master value
7: coupled motion slave axis
8: command axis
9: compile cycle axis
- UWord r

03/2009 1 Variables
aaType
Cross-channel axis type
0: Axis type cannot be determined
1: NC program axis
2: Neutral axis
3: PLC axis
4: Reciprocating axis
5: Neutral axis that is currently executing a JOG or homing motion
6: Following axis coupled to the master value
7: Coupled motion of the following axis, activated in a synchronized action
8: Command axis
9: Compile Cycle axis
10: Coupled slave axis (master-slave function.)
11: Program axis that is currently executing a JOG or homing motion
- 0 0 11 UWord r
aaVactB
Axis velocity in basic coordinate system
mm/min, inch/min, user
0.0 Double r
defined
aaVactM
Axis velocity in machine coordinate system
0.0 Double r
defined
aaVc
Additive correction value for path feed or axial feed
- Double r
acRpValid
Reapproach position valid
0: Reapproach position not valid
1: Reapproach position valid
- 0 0 1 UWord r
ackSafeMeasPos
Confirmation of SI actual position
0 = not confirmed
0x00AC = confirmed
- UWord wr
actCouppPosOffset S3
Position offset of an axis to a leading axis / leading spindle (actual value)
0 360 Double r
defined
actFeedRate S5
Actual value of axis-specific feedrate, if the axis is a positioning axis.
- Double r

1 Variables 03/2009
actIndexAxPosNo
Current indexing position number
0 = no indexing position
>0 = indexing position number
- UWord r
actSpeedRel
Actual value of rotary speed (referring to the maximum speed in %; for 611D in MD1401), for linear drives actual value
of the velocity.
% Double r
actValResol
Actual value resolution. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module)
Double r
defined
activeSvOverride
Currently active SG override factor in the NCK
- -1 -1 100 Long Integer r
amSetupState
State variable of the PI Service Automatic set-up of an asynchronous motor
0 = inactive
1 = wait for PLC enable
2 = wait for key NC-start
3 = active
4 = stopped by Servo + fine code in the upper byte
5 = stopped by 611D + fine code in the upper byte
6 = stopped by NCK + fine code in the upper byte
- 0 0 0xff06 UWord r
axComp
Sum of axis-specific compensation values (CEC Cross Error compensation and temperature compensation). The
physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
Double r
defined
axisActiveInChan
Flag indicating whether axis is active in this channel
0 = inactive
1 = active
- UWord r
axisFeedRateUnit
Unit of axial feedrate
0 = mm/min
1 = inch/min
2 = degree/min
- UWord r
chanAxisNoGap
Display of existing axis, i.e. no axis gap in channel.
0: Axis does not exist
1: Axis does exist
- 0 0 1 UWord r

03/2009 1 Variables
chanNoAxisIsActive
Channel number in which the channel axis is currently active
0 = axis is not assigned to any channel
1 to maxnumChannels (Area.:N / Module:Y) = channel number
- UWord r
cmdContrPos
Desired value of position after fine interpolation
Double r
defined
cmdCouppPosOffset S3
Position offset of an axis referring to the leading axis / leading spindle (desired value)
0 360 Double r
defined
cmdFeedRate
Desired value of axis-specific feedrate for a positioning axis.
- Double r
cmdSpeedRel
Desired value of rotary speed. (referring to the max. speed in %; for 611D in MD 1401). For linear motors actual value
of velocity.
% Double r
contrConfirmActive
Controller enable
0 = no controller enable
1 = controller enable
- UWord r
contrMode
Identifier for controller mode servo
0 = position control
1 = speed control
2 = stop
3 = park
4 = follow-up
(set the mode through VDI interface and partly through part program)
- UWord r
displayAxis
Identifier indicating whether axis is displayed by MMC as a machine axis.
0 = Do not display at all
0xFFFF = Always display everything
bit 0 = Display in actual-value window
bit 1 = Display in reference point window
bit 2 = Display in Preset / Basic offset / Scratching
bit 3 = Display in handwheel selection
- 0xFFFF 0 0xFFFF UWord r

1 Variables 03/2009
distPerDriveRevol
Rotary drive: Load-side path corresponding to one revolution of the drive.
Is returned in the unit of the internal computational resolution INT_INCR_PER_MM (for linear axes) or
INT_INCR_PER_DEG (for rotary axes / spindles) taking into account gear ratios etc.
In the case of linear axes, the pitch of the ball screw is also included in the calculation.
In the case of linear motors, a fixed value of "1mm" is used for the ball screw pitch instead of the non-existent ball
screw.
Double r
defined
drfVal
DRF value
- 0 Double r
drive2ndTorqueLimit
2nd torque limit. With linear motors: 2nd force limit
0 = inactive
1 = active
- UWord r
driveActMotorSwitch
Actual motor wiring (star/delta)
0 = star
1 = delta
- UWord r
driveActParamSet
Number of the actual drive parameter set
- 1 8 UWord r
driveClass1Alarm
Message ZK1 drive alarm
0 = no alarm set
1= alarm set (fatal error occured)
- UWord r
driveContrMode
Control mode of drive
0 = current control
1 = speed control
- UWord r
driveCoolerTempWarn
Heatsink temperature monitoring
0 = temperature OK
1 = overtemperature
- UWord r
driveDesMotorSwitch
Motor wiring selection (star/delta)
0 = star
1 = delta
- UWord r

03/2009 1 Variables
driveDesParamSet
Desired parameter set of the drive
- 1 8 UWord r
driveFastStop
Ramp-function generator rapid stop
0 = not stopped
1 = stopped
- UWord r
driveFreqMode
I/F mode
- UWord r
driveImpulseEnabled
Enable inverter impulse (checkback signal to impulseEnable)
0 = not enabled
1 = enabled
- UWord r
driveIndex
Drive assignment (logical drive number)
0 = drive does not exist
1 to 15 = logical drive number
- 0 15 UWord r
driveIntegDisable
Integrator disable
0 = not disabled
1 = disabled
- UWord r
driveLinkVoltageOk
State of the DC link voltage
0 = OK
1 = not OK
- UWord r
driveMotorTempWarn
Motor temperature warning
0 = temperature OK
1 = overtemperature
- UWord r
driveNumCrcErrors
CRC errors on the drive bus
(transmission errors when writing data to the 611D; values may range up to FFFFH)
0 = no error
- UWord r
driveParked
Parking axis
0 = no parking axis
1 = parking axis
- UWord r

1 Variables 03/2009
drivePowerOn
Drive switched on
0 = drive not switched on
1 = drive switched on
- UWord r
driveProgMessages
Configurable messages (via machine data)
- UWord r
driveReady
Drive ready
0 = drive not ready
1 = drive ready
- UWord r
driveRunLevel
Current state reached during the boot process
(range: coarse state (0 to 5) * 100 + fine state (up to 22)
Booting the firmware ---> 0 XX
entering the configuration ---> 1XX
hardware-init, communication-init
loading, converting data ---> 2XX
changing bus addressing ---> 3XX
preparing synchronization ---> 4XX
activating interrupt ---> 519
XX ==> fine state

- UWord r
driveSetupMode
Set-up mode
0 = inactive
1 = active
- UWord r
driveSpeedSmoothing
Smoothing the desired value of the rotary speed, for linear drives: smoothing the desired value of the velocity
0 = no smoothing
1 = smoothing
- UWord r
effComp1
Sum of the compensation values for encoder 1. The value results from: Temperature compensation, backlash
compensation, quadrant error compensation, beam sag compensation, leadscrew error compensation. The physical
unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
Double r
defined
effComp2
Sum of the compensation values for encoder 2. The value results from: Temperature compensation, backlash
Double r
defined

03/2009 1 Variables
encChoice
Active encoder
0 = does not exist
1 = encoder 1
2 = encoder 2
- UWord r
fctGenState
State of the function generator
- UWord r
feedRateOvr
Feedrate override (only if axis is a positioning axis)
% Double r
focStat
Current status of "Travel with limited torque" function
0-2
0: FOC not active
1: FOC modal active (programming of FOCON[])
2: FOC non-modal active (programming of FOC[])
- 0 0 2 UWord r
fxsInfo
Additional information on travel to fixed stop if
$VA_FXS[]=2, or OPI variable fxsStat=2.
0 No additional information available
1 No approach motion programmed
2 Programmed end position reached, movement ended
3 Abort by NC RESET (Reset key)
4 Fixed stop window exited
5 Torque reduction was rejected by drive
6 PLC has canceled enable signals
- 0 0 6 UWord r
fxsStat
State after travelling to fixed stop
0 = normal control
1 = fixed stop reached
2 = failed
- UWord r
handwheelAss
Number of handwheel assigned to axis
0 = no handwheel assigned
1 to 3 = handwheel number
- 0 3 UWord r
impulseEnable
Impulse enable for drive
0 = not enabled
1 = enabled
- UWord r

1 Variables 03/2009
index
Absolute axis index referred to MD
- UWord r
isDriveUsed
One or more machine axes are assigned to each drive.
The drive can only be controlled at any one time by one of these machine axes.
The machine manufacturer makes the selection.
The status of the drive control changes dynamically.
- 0 0 1 UWord r
kVFactor
position control gain factor
16.667 1/s Double r
lag
Following error = desired value of position after fine interpolation - actual value of position. The physical unit is defined
in measUnit (in this module).
Double r
defined
logDriveNo
0 = not available
1 to 15 = drive number
- 0 15 UWord r
measFctState
State of the probing function
- UWord r
measPos1
Actual value of position for encoder 1. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
Double r
defined
measPos2
Double r
defined
measPosDev
Actual position difference between the two encoders. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
Double r
defined
measUnit
Unit for service values of the drives
0 = mm
1 = inch
2 = grd
- UWord r

03/2009 1 Variables
paramSetNo
Number of parameter set
- 1 8 UWord r
preContrFactTorque
Feed forward control factor torque
Nm Double r
preContrFactVel
Feed forward control factor velocity
- Double r
preContrMode
Feed forward control mode
0 = inactive
1 = velocity feed forward
2 = torque feed forward
- UWord r
progIndexAxPosNo
Programmed indexing position number
- UWord r
qecLrnIsOn
Quadrant error compensation learning active
0 = inactive
1 = Neuronal-QEC learning active
2 = Standard-QEC active
3 = Standard-QEC with adaptation of correction value active
4 = Neuronal-QEC active
5 = Neuronal-QEC with adaptation of measuring time active
6 = Neuronal-QEC with adaptation of decay time of correction value active
7 = Neuronal-QEC with adaptation of measuring time and decay time of correction value active
- 0 7 UWord r
refPtBusy
Axis is being referenced
0 = axis is not being referenced
1 = axis is being referenced
- UWord r
refPtCamNo
Reference point cam
0 = no cam approached
1 = cam 1
2 = cam 2
3 = cam 3
4 = cam 4
- UWord r

1 Variables 03/2009
refPtPhase
Referencing phases
0 = False
1 = Phase 1
2 = Phase 2
3 = Phase 3
4 = Phase 4
- UWord r
refPtStatus
Identifier indicating whether an axis requires referencing and is referenced.
Note regarding exchange axes:

An exchange axis need only ever be referenced in the channel to which it is currently assigned. A referenced
exchange axis is thus logged onto the channel in which it is traversing with value "3" (requires referencing and
referenced) and in other channels with value "1" (does not require referencing, but referenced).
A set bit means:
Until SW release 3.1:

bit0: at least 1 measuring system has been referenced
bit1: active measuring system is liable for reference
From SW release 3.2:

bit0: active measuring system has been referenced
(The busy signal effects the state)
- Achsindex UWord r
Multi-line: no maxnumGlobMachAxes
resolvStatus1
Encoder status for measuring system 1
0 = Undefined
1 = Referenced
2 = Activated
3 = Limit frequency exceeded
- UWord r
resolvStatus2
0 = Undefined
1 = Referenced
2 = Activated
- UWord r
safeAcceptCheckPhase
Flag for NCK-side acceptance test phase, the human-machine interface can determine which acceptance test phase is
present on the NCK.
0: NCK has acceptance test phase inactive = 0

0ACH: NCK has acceptance test phase active
- 0 0 0ACH UWord r
safeAcceptTestMode
SI PowerOn alarms can be acknowledged by Reset in acceptance test mode
0: Acceptance test mode: SI PowerOn alarms cannot be acknowledged by Reset
0ACH: Acceptance test mode: SI PowerOn alarms can be acknowledged by Reset
- 0 0 0FFH UWord wr

03/2009 1 Variables
safeAcceptTestPhase
Flag for acceptance test phase
0: Acceptance test Wizard not selected, activate NCK-side alarm suppression
0ACH: Dialogs for acceptance test support selected, deactivate NCK-side alarm suppression
- 0 0 0FFH UWord wr
safeAcceptTestSE
Flag for NCK-side SE acceptance test. The human-machine interface starts checking the safe limit positions during the
acceptance test
0: NCK has SE acceptance test inactive = 0. The single channel SW limit positions are activated.
0ACH: NCK is to activate SE acceptance test. The single channel SW limit positions are deactivated in this way.
- 0 0 0ACH UWord r
safeAcceptTestState
Flag for acceptance test status, the human-machine interface can determine which acceptance test mode is present
on the NCK.
0: NCK has inactive acceptance test mode

0CH: Acceptance test mode not activated because SI PowerOn alarms already present.
The causes of the SI PowerOn alarms must be eliminated first.
0DH: Acceptance test mode not activated, the HMI writes invalid values in safeAcceptTestMode to the NCK.
0ACH: NCK has active acceptance test mode
- 0 0 0FFH UWord r
safeActPosDiff
Current actual value difference betw. NCK and drive monitoring channels
0.0 Double r
defined
safeActVeloDiff
Current speed difference between NCK and drive monitoring channels
0.0 Double r
defined
safeActVeloLimit
Safe limit of actual speed
-1 => no actual speed limit active
>= 0 => limit of actual speed is active
-1 Double r
defined
safeActiveCamTrack
Status Safe cam track (active/inactive)
Bit 0 = 1/0: Safe cam track 1 active/inactive
- 0 0 0xF UWord r
safeDesVeloLimit
Safe limit of desired speed
-1 => no desired speed limit active
>= 0 => desired speed limit is active
-1 Double r
defined

1 Variables 03/2009
safeFctEnable
Safe operation active
0 = inactive
1 = active
- UWord r
safeInputSig
Safe input signals of the axis
- UWord r
safeInputSig2
Safe input signals part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
safeInputSigDrive
Safe input signals of the drive
- UWord r
safeInputSigDrive2
Safe input signals of the drive part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
safeMaxVeloDiff
Maximum speed difference between NCK and drive monitoring channels since last NCK Reset
0.0 Double r
defined
safeMeasPos
Safe actual position of the axis. The physical unit is defined in the variable measUnit (in this module).
Double r
defined
safeMeasPosDrive
Safe actual position of drive. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
Double r
defined
safeOutputSig
Safe output signals of the axis
- UWord r
safeOutputSig2
Safe output signals part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
safeOutputSigCam
Results of the NCK safe cam evaluation
- 0 0 3FFFFFFF Long Integer r
safeOutputSigCamDrive
Results of the drive safe cam evaluation

03/2009 1 Variables
safeOutputSigDrive
Safe output signals of the drive
- UWord r
safeOutputSigDrive2
Safe output signals of the drive part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
safePosCtrlActive
Axis monitors absolute position
0 = Axis does not monitor absolute position (no SE/SN)
1 = Axis monitors absolute position
- 0 0 1 UWord r
safeStopOtherAxis
Stop on another axis
0: No stop on another axis
1: Stop on another axis
- 0 0 1 UWord r
spec
Axis specification
0 = path axis
1 = positioning axis
- UWord r
stateContrActive
State controller (not available)
1 = TRUE
0 = FALSE
- UWord r
subSpec T1
Subspecification
0 = normal axis
1 = indexing axis
- UWord r
torqLimit
Torque limitation value (referring to the nominal value of the drive). For linear motors: force limitation value.
% Double r
traceState1
State of trace channel 1
0 = idle state
1 = recording started
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
4 = recording aborted
- UWord r

1 Variables 03/2009
traceState2
0 = idle state
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- UWord r
traceState3
0 = idle state
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- UWord r
traceState4
0 = idle state
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- UWord r
trackErrContr
Position controller difference (actual value / desired value of position)
Double r
defined
trackErrDiff
Contour deviation (difference actual value of position and calculated dynamical model)
Double r
defined
type
Axis type
1 = linear axis
2 = rotary axis
3 = spindle
- UWord r
vaAbsoluteEnc1DeltaInit
Enc1: Initial difference
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
vaAbsoluteEnc1ErrCnt
Enc 1: Error counter for absolute encoder
vaAbsoluteEnc1State
Enc1: Status of absolute encoder interface
Bit0: Interface is active
Bit1: Error during parity check

03/2009 1 Variables
Bit2: Error bit alarm

Bit3: Error bit CRC error
Bit4: Start bit missing with EnDat transfer
vaAbsoluteEnc1ZeroMonMax
Enc1:Maximum of vaEnc1ZeroMonAct with absolute encoder
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
vaAbsoluteEnc2DeltaInit
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
vaAbsoluteEnc2ErrCnt
vaAbsoluteEnc2State
vaAbsoluteEnc2ZeroMonMax
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
vaCecCompVal
Axial sag compensation value
0 Double r
defined
vaCurr
Drive actual current value
- 0 Double r
vaDistTorque
Disturbing torque/max. torque (motor end, York)
% 0 -100 100 Double r
vaDpe
Status of power enable of a machine axis
0-1
- 0 0 1 UWord r
vaEnc1CompVal
Leadscrew error compensation (LEC) value encoder 1
0 Double r
defined

1 Variables 03/2009
vaEnc1ZeroMonAccessCnt
Enc1: Update counter
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
vaEnc1ZeroMonAct
Enc1: Zero monitoring values
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
vaEnc1ZeroMonErrCnt
Enc 1: Error counter for zero mark monitoring
vaEnc1ZeroMonInit
Enc1:Hardware counter value of the basic zero mark
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
vaEnc2CompVal
0 Double r
defined
vaEnc2ZeroMonAccessCnt
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
vaEnc2ZeroMonAct
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
vaEnc2ZeroMonErrCnt
vaEnc2ZeroMonInit
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
vaFoc
Actual status of "ForceControl"
0: ForceControl not active
1: Modal ForceControl active
2: Non-modal ForceControl active
- 0 0 2 UWord r
vaFxs
Actual status of "Travel to fixed stop"
0: Axis not at fixed stop
1: Successful travel to fixed stop
2: Unsuccessful travel to fixed stop
3: Travel to fixed stop selection active
4: Fixed stop has been detected
5: Travel to fixed stop deselection active
- 0 0 5 UWord r

03/2009 1 Variables
vaIm
Encoder actual value in the machine coordinate system (measured
active measuring system)
- 0 0 Double r
vaIm1
Actual value in the machine coordinate system (measured encoder 1)
- 0 0 Double r
vaIm2
- 0 0 Double r
vaLagError
Axis following error
- 0 Double r
vaLoad
Drive utilization in %
- 0 -100 100 Double r
vaPosctrlMode
Position controller mode"
0: Position control
1: Speed control
2: Holding
3: Parking
4: Tracking
- 0 0 4 UWord r
vaPower
Active drive power
- 0 Double r
vaPressureA
Pressure on A end of the cylinder in bar (only for 611D Hydraulic)
- 0 Double r
vaPressureB
Pressure on B end of the cylinder in bar (only for 611D Hydraulic)
- 0 Double r
vaSce
Status of speed controller enable
- 0 0 1 UWord r
vaStopSi
Stop from Safety Integrated
-1: No stop
0: Stop A
1: Stop B
2: Stop C
3: Stop D
4: Stop E

1 Variables 03/2009
5: Stop F
10: Test stop of NC
11: Test of ext. pulse suppression
- 0 Long Integer r
vaSyncDiff
Actual value synchronism difference
0 Long Integer r
defined
vaSyncDiffStat
Status of the actual value synchronism difference
-4: Reserved
-3: No valid value in $VA_SYNCDIFF, tangential control
-2: No valid value in $VA_SYNCDIFF, master value coupling and simulated master value
-1: No valid value in $VA_SYNCDIFF
0: No valid value in $VA_SYNCDIFF, coupling not active
1: Valid value in $VA_SYNCDIFF
0 -4 1 Long Integer r
defined
vaTempCompVal
Axial temperature compensation value
0 Double r
defined
vaTorque
Drive torque setpoint
- 0 Double r
vaTorqueAtLimit
Status "effective torque equals specified torque limit"
0: Effective torque lower than torque limit

1: Effective torque has reached torque limit
- 0 0 1 UWord r
vaVactm
Axis velocity actual value on the load side in the MCS
- Double r
vaValveLift
Actual valve lift in mm (only for 611D Hydraulic)
- 0 Double r
vaXfaultSi
Stop F through cross-checking error active
Bit 0 set: An actual value error has been discovered in the cross-check between NCK and 611D
Bit 1 set: Some error has been discovered in the cross-check between NCK and 611D
and the waiting time until Stop B ($MA_SAFE_STOP_SWITCH_TIME_F) is triggered is running or has
expired
- 0 Long Integer r

03/2009 1 Variables
1.3.7 Area N, Module SSP: State data: Spindle

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/Spindle/...
All status data that refer to the spindle are combined in the module SSP. The individual variables are
defined as arrays where the row index is the number of the spindle (assigned to the current channel). The
spindle can be identified by reading the variables "name" or "index" in the same module with the respective
row index.
The number of spindles can be read from "numSpindles" in the module Y in the area C.
Values of 0 or ' ' are supplied for axes which are not spindles. The value SSP:index = 0 indicates that the
axis is not a spindle.
acConstCutS
Current constant cutting rate
m/min, ft/min, user defined 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles
acSMode
Spindle mode
0: No spindle present in channel or spindle is active in another channel or
is being used by PLC (FC18) or by synchronized actions.
1: Open-loop speed control mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- 1 0 4 UWord r
acSmaxAcc
Active acceleration of the spindle
This variable returns the active acceleration of the spindle for spindle mode.
Bit 7 of $AC_SPIND_STATE (spindle accelerating) is set for the duration of the acceleration to the defined setpoint
speed.
Bit 8 of $AC_SPIND_STATE (spindle braking ) is set for the duration of the braking to the defined setpoint speed.
Apart from that, the acceleration-determining machine and setting data can be determined with the system variable
$AC_SMAXACC_INFO.
If the spindle is in axis mode, then $AC_SMAXACC does not return the current acceleration, instead the machine data
(MAX_AX_VELO, MAX_AX_ACCEL, ...) typical for axis mode are active.
Rev/s2, user defined Double r

acSmaxAccInfo
Identifier for the active spindle acceleration data
This system variable provides additional information to $AC_SMAXACC and returns the
definitive machine data as identifier/index.
The index can be used to determine the active acceleration data on the basis of the following table of existing spindle
accelerations.
The number range is oriented to the system variable $AC_SMAXVELO_INFO:
0: No acceleration limitation (SERUPRO)
1: Not used
2: Acceleration in speed control mode in the current gear stage
without position control,
MD 35200 GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL * ACC * ACCFXS
3: Acceleration in the current gear stage with active position control
(e.g. SPCON, SPOS )
MD 35210 GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL * ACC * ACCFXS
while tapping (G331, G332 - only with corresponding configuration
of the second data block)
MD 35212 GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL2

1 Variables 03/2009
5: Not used
6: Not used
7: Not used
8: Acceleration limited by the preparation for thread cutting
and with synchronous spindle coupling of the leading spindle on account of
limited acceleration of the following spindle.
9: Not used
10: Not used
11: Not used
12: Acceleration limited by tool parameter $TC_TP_MAX_ACCEL
13: Not used
- Long Integer r
acSmaxVelo
Maximum spindle speed
This variable returns the maximum spindle speed for spindle mode.
This is formed from the smallest active speed limitation, and cannot be exceeded by speed programming or override >
100%.
A speed limitation is indicated by the VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX83.1 'Setpoint speed limited' and by
$AC_SPIND_STATE, bit 5 (speed limitation active).
The cause of the speed limitation (machine, setting data, G code, VDI interface signal etc.) can also be determined
with the system variable $AC_SMAXVELO_INFO.
If the spindle is in axis mode, then the speed is not limited by $AC_SMAXVELO but instead the machine data
(MAX_AX_VELO, ...) typical for axis mode are active.
rev/min, user defined Double r

acSmaxVeloInfo
Identifier (index) for the speed-limiting data (machine/setting data, etc.)
The system variable provides additional information about $AC_SMAXVELO, and returns the definitive data (machine,
setting data, G code, VDI interface, etc.) as identifier/index.
The speed-limiting data can be determined with the index from the following table of existing spindle speed limitations .
0: No limitation (SERUPRO)
1: Speed limited by clamping arrangement (chuck speed),
MD 35100 SPIND_VELO_LIMIT;
2: Speed limitation (upper limit, that is maximum speed) in the current gear stage,
MD 35130 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT * VELOLIMA
(maximum speed factor from part program)
3: Speed limitation in the current gear stage with position control active
MD 35132 GEAR_STEP_PC_MAX_VELO_LIMIT * VELOLIMA
(among other items with SPCON, SPOS )
4: Speed limited to
SD 43220 SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26
(part program instruction: G26 S.. or PI service from HMI)
5: Speed limited by set VDI interface signal DB31,...DBX3.6 to
MD 35160 SPIND_EXTERN_VELO_LIMIT
6: Speed limited at constant cutting speed by
part program instruction: LIMS (G96, G97, G961)
SD 43230 SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS;
7: Speed limited by Safety Integrated to safe speed (SG)
8: Speed limited by the preparation for thread cutting and
synchronous spindle coupling of the leading spindle on account of the
speed limitation of the following spindle.
9: Speed limited to the maximum speed of the drive by the drive parameters,
e.g. SINAMICS: p1082.
10: Speed limited to
MD 36300 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT
with functions that require a functioning measuring system,
e.g. position control and for the master spindle with the
G functions G95, G96, G97, G33..35. The limitation takes into account the
encoder speed, the MS arrangement (direct/indirect),

03/2009 1 Variables
MS limiting frequency and the current parameter set.

11: Limitation of the overlaid movement of the following spindle to the
dynamic remaining after the coupling.
12: Speed limited by tool parameter (in preparation)
13: Speed limited by tool carrier (in preparation)
- Long Integer r
acSminVelo
Minimum spindle speed
This variable returns the minimum spindle speed for speed control mode.
This is formed from the highest active speed increase, and cannot be undershot by speed programming or override <
100%.
A speed increase is indicated by the VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX83.2 'Setpoint speed increased' and by
$AC_SPIND_STATE, bit 6 (speed increase active).
The cause of the speed increase (machine, setting data, G code, VDI interface signal etc.) can also be determined with
the system variable $AC_SMINVELO_INFO.
If the spindle is in axis or positioning mode, then the speed is not increased by $AC_SMINVELO.
acSminVeloInfo
The speed-limiting data can be determined with the index from the following table of existing spindle speed limitations.
The system variable provides additional information about $AC_SMINVELO, and returns the speed increasing data
(machine, setting data) as identifier/index.
The speed-increasing data can be determined with the index from the following table of existing spindle speed
increases.
- Long Integer r
acSpindState
This variable returns the spindle status in speed control mode only (Bit0 =1).
The variable $AA_INPOS_STAT is relevant in positioning and axis modes.
$AC_SPIND_STATE returns no values in synchronous mode.
Bit 0: "Speed control mode active" (condition for validity of the bits of the variable $AC_SPIND_STATE[)
Bit 1: "Spindle stopped" (corresponds to VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX61.4)
Bit 2: "Spindle programmed" (e.g. M3, M4 S.., FC18, ..) (corresponds to VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX64.4/5 or 6/7)
Bit 3: "Spindle in set range" (corresponds to VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX83.5)
Bit 4: Free
Bit 5: "Limitation of setpoint speed active" remains as long as the programmed or overrride speed remains higher than
the speed in the system variable $AC_SMAXVELO. Corresponds to VDI interface signal
DB31..,DBX83.1 'Setpoint speed limited'.
Bit 6: "Increasing setpoint speed active" remains as long as the programmed speed remains less than the speed in the
system variable $AC_SMINVELO.
Corresponds to VDI interface signal DB31..,DBX83.2 'Setpoint speed increasing'
Bit 7: "Spindle accelerating" (setpoint side), remains as long as the spindle is accelerating to the defined setpoint
speed.
Bit 8: "Spindle braking" (setpoint side), remains as long as the spindle is braking to the defined setpoint speed or
comes to a standstill.
Bit 9: "Position control active"
- Long Integer r
actGearStage
Actual gear stage of spindle
- UWord r

1 Variables 03/2009
actSpeed
Spindle speed actual value
channelNo
Number of channel in which spindle is configured
- UWord r
cmdAngPos
Spindle position (SPOS)
cmdConstCutSpeed
Constant cutting rate of the master spindle. The requested value for the master spindle differs from SSP:cmdSpeed
only if G96 is active.
(For a certain OEM customer this variable is now available retroactively in software version 3.2)
0.0 Double r
defined
cmdGearStage
Requested gear stage
- UWord r
cmdGwps
Programmed SUG desired value (SUG is the function "constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel")
m/s, ft/s Double r
cmdSpeed
Spindle speed desired value
rev/min , m/min Double r
driveLoad
Load
% Double r
dummy
dummy
- UWord r
gwpsActive
SUG programming active (SUG is the function "constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel)
0 = inactive
1 = active
- UWord r
index
- UWord r

03/2009 1 Variables
name
Spindle name
Note: If several logical spindles are referred to one physical spindle with active spindle conversion and access is made
via area N of module SSP2, then the name of the first suitable logical spindle is output.
- String[32] r
namePhys
Name of assigned physical spindle, identical to "name" variable.
- String[32] r
opMode
Spindle mode
0 = spindle mode
1 = oscillation mode (gear step changeover)
2 = positioning mode
3 = synchronous mode
4 = axis mode
- UWord r
pSMode
Last programmed spindle mode
0: No spindle configured in channel or spindle is active in another channel
or in use by the PLC (FC18) or by synchronized actions.
1: Speed control mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- UWord r
pSModeS
Last programmed spindle mode with block search
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- UWord r
psModePos
If the spindle is in positioning mode (pSMode = 2) or axis mode
(pSMode = 4), the value actToolEdgeCenterPosEns is returned, otherwise 0.
- 0 Double r
psModePosS
(pSMode = 4), the value cmdToolEdgeCenterPosEnsS is returned, otherwise 0.
- 0 Double r
speedLimit
Current speed limitation for spindle

1 Variables 03/2009
speedOvr
Spindle override
% Double r
spindleType
Spindle type
0 = master spindle
1 = no master spindle
- UWord r
status
Spindle status
Bit0 = following spindle
Bit1 = leading spindle
Bit2 = master spindle (expansion from SW 4.1)
Bit3 = constant cutting rate (G96) active (expansion from SW 4.1)
- UWord r
turnState
State of spindle rotation
value range to be read via BTSS variable
0 = clockwise
1 = counter-clockwise
2 = stop
value range to be read via $ variable
3 = clockwise
5 = stop
- UWord r
1.3.8 Area N, Module SSP2: State data: Spindle

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/LogicalSpindle/...
All state data that refer to a spindle, if a spindle converter (logical spindles) is active
acConstCutS
Multi-line: yes Logical spindle index numSpindlesLog
acSMode
Spindle mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- 1 0 4 UWord r

03/2009 1 Variables
acSmaxAcc
speed.
$AC_SMAXACC_INFO.

acSmaxAccInfo
accelerations.
1: Not used
(e.g. SPCON, SPOS )
5: Not used
6: Not used
7: Not used
9: Not used
10: Not used
11: Not used
13: Not used
- Long Integer r
acSmaxVelo
100%.


1 Variables 03/2009
acSmaxVeloInfo
4: Speed limited to
- Long Integer r
acSminVelo
100%.
acSminVeloInfo

03/2009 1 Variables
increases.
- Long Integer r
acSpindState
Bit 4: Free
speed.
- Long Integer r
actGearStage
- UWord r
actSpeed
channelNo
- UWord r
cmdAngPos
cmdConstCutSpeed
0.0 Double r
defined
cmdGearStage
- UWord r

1 Variables 03/2009
cmdGwps
m/s, ft/s Double r
cmdSpeed
driveLoad
Load
% Double r
dummy
dummy
- UWord r
gwpsActive
0 = inactive
1 = active
- UWord r
index
- UWord r
name
Spindle name
- String[32] r
namePhys
Name of assigned physical spindle.
- String[32] r
opMode
Spindle mode
0 = spindle mode
4 = axis mode
- UWord r
pSMode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- UWord r

03/2009 1 Variables
pSModeS
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- UWord r
psModePos
- 0 Double r
psModePosS
- 0 Double r
speedLimit
speedOvr
Spindle override
% Double r
spindleType
Spindle type
0 = master spindle
- UWord r
status
Spindle status
- UWord r
turnState
0 = clockwise
2 = stop
3 = clockwise
5 = stop
- UWord r

1 Variables 03/2009
1.3.9 Area N, Module FA: Active NCU global frames
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/ActualFrame/...
There are the following frame indices:

2: IFRAME current settable work offset (only if $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES > 0)
6: ACTBFRAME current total of base frames (only if $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES = 0)
The maximum frame index is: 6
linShift diverse, siehe Bausteinbescheibung PA

Translation of an active work offset (the physical unit is defined in basicLengthUnit in module Y in area N).
Frame index *
Multi-line: yes maxnumGlobMachAxes + axis 6 * maxnumGlobMachAxes
number
linShiftFine
Fine offset for frames, extension of the basic frames and the settable frames.
Frame index *
number
mirrorImgActive diverse, siehe Bausteinbescheibung PA

Mirroring enabled in an active work offset
0 = mirroring not active
1 = mirroring active
- UWord r
Frame index *
number
rotation diverse, siehe Bausteinbescheibung PA

Rotation of an active work offset
Degree Double r
Frame index *
number
scaleFact diverse, siehe Bausteinbescheibung PA

Scaling factor of an active work offset
- Double r
Frame index *
number

03/2009 1 Variables
1.3.10 Area N, Module FB: NCU global base frames

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/BaseFrame/...
This only applies if $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES > 0.
The maximum frame index is: $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES - 1
linShift $P_NCBFR[x,TR] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Translation of settable work offset (the physical unit is defined in basicLengthUnit in module Y in area N).
Frame index *
$MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES *
Multi-line: yes maxnumGlobMachAxes + axis
maxnumGlobMachAxes
number
linShiftFine $P_NCBFR[x,SI] x=FrameNo, y=Axis

Fine offset with frames, expansion of basic frames and settable frames
Frame index *
maxnumGlobMachAxes
number
mirrorImgActive $P_NCBFR[x ,MI] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Mirroring enabled in a settable work offset
0: Mirroring not active
1: Mirroring active
- UWord wr
Frame index *
maxnumGlobMachAxes
number
rotation $P_NCBFR[x,y,RT] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Rotation of a settable work offset
Degree Double wr
Frame index *
maxnumGlobMachAxes
number
scaleFact $P_NCBFR[x,SC] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Scaling factor of a settable work offset
- Double wr
Frame index *
maxnumGlobMachAxes
number

1 Variables 03/2009
1.3.11 Area N, Module FU: NCU global settable frames

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/UserFrame/...
This only applies if $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES > 0.
The following frame indices are possible:

0 = G500
1 = G54
2 = G55
3 = G56
4 = G57
5 = G505
6 = G506
:
n = G5n
:
99 = G599
The maximum frame index is: $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES - 1
The PI service SETUFR has to be called in order to activate the settable frames.
linShift PA
Frame index *
$MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES *
maxnumGlobMachAxes
number
linShiftFine
Frame index *
maxnumGlobMachAxes
number
mirrorImgActive PA
- UWord wr
Frame index *
maxnumGlobMachAxes
number
rotation
Dummy variable, do not use
- Double r
Multi-line: no
scaleFact PA
- Double wr
Frame index *
maxnumGlobMachAxes
number

03/2009 1 Variables
1.3.12 Area N, Module YFAFL: NCK instruction groups (Fanuc)

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/FunctionGroupingFanuc/...
All G functions currently configured for the channels are made available for reading by the NCK. They are
configured via machine data. Since the G functions are organized in groups, only one of which can be
active at a time, this module is organized as a table.
There are two columns for each G group. The 1st column lists the number of G functions in a group
(/N/YFAFL/Gruppe_NUM), this corresponds to the number of rows in each subsequent column. This
second column contains all the G functions belonging to a group (/N/YFAFL/Gruppe).
As a result, the data for a certain G group are calculated via a column offset.
The column offset of each variable is:
2 * (G group number - 1)
The number of G groups is given in the variable "numGCodeGroupsFanuc" in area N / module Y. The
resultant maximum column offset of the variables is thus 2 * numGCodeGroupsFanuc.
The G functions currently active are listed in area C / module SNCF.
Gruppe
Instruction group
- String[16] r
Multi-line: yes Serial number Gruppe_NUM
Gruppe_NUM
Number of Fanuc-G functions in the relevant group
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
1.3.13 Area B, Module S: Mode-group-specific state data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Bag/State/...

autoJogState $MC_AUTO_JOG_STATE
Status of Automatic+JOG mode
1: Automatic is selected, $MN_JOG_MODE_MASK is set, and the mode group
is in "Mode group reset". Thus can ??? by pressing the +/- buttons or the hand wheel in Auto.
2: This mode group has been switched internally to JOG on account of a JOG motion.
VDI and OPI still show Automatic.
0: In all other cases
- 0 0 2 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Mode group number numBAGs
ncAutoCounter
Counter which is incremented with each 0->edge of
the Auto key
- 0 0 UWord r

1 Variables 03/2009
ncJogCounter
the Jog key
- 0 0 UWord r
ncMDACounter
the MDI key
- 0 0 UWord r
opMode DB11, DBX6.0-6.2

Active mode
0 = JOG
1 = MDI
2 = AUTO
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
readyActive DB11, DBX6.3

Code whether mode group is ready
0 = not ready
1 = ready
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
resetActive DB11, DBX6.7

Code whether all channels in mode group are in Reset
0 = not all channels in reset
1 = all channels in reset
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
1.3.14 Area N, Module SALAC: Alarm actions: List in rev. chronol. order,
oldest alarm act. appears first
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/AlarmEvent/...
In a given alarm, all values in the SALAC module are identical to the corresponding variables in the SALA,
SALAP and SALAL modules with the exception of actionType and actionCount.
The same alarm can be found in the various modules by comparing the values of alarmNo.
A client is registered with an alarm server when cyclic reading of the SALAC module has been set.
If the operator panel sets cyclic reading when a data in the module changes and column index 0 has been
specified, then the variable server sends the entire data block to the operator panel if the alarm server
receives a new alarm action.
Another alarm server client is registered at each cyclic reading of the SALAC module which has been set.
This mechanism therefore functions with more than one user interface connected. Registration is
withdrawn when the corresponding cyclic reading is terminated. As cyclic reading only applies to registered
clients,
each regular and noncyclic reading returns the default value for the requested variable.
actionCount
A unique number assigned to Alarm Action.
On power ON it is reset to zero by the NCK.
For each new alarm action it will be incremented by one.
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

03/2009 1 Variables
actionType
Specifies whether the alarm is deleted or activated.
0: No alarm action pending
1: Alarm set
2: Alarm deleted
Multi-line: yes 1 1
alarmNo
A unique number assigned to the alarm.
It will be incremented by one for each reported alarm.
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
clearInfo
Describes the acknowledgement criterion for the alarm.
1 = Power ON
2 = Reset
3 = Delete
4 = Alarm is deleted by NCK software (from SW 4.1)
5 = Alarm is deleted by program call
6 = Alarm is deleted by RESET in all channels of the mode groups (from SW 4.1)
7 = Alarm is deleted by RESET in all channels of the NC (from SW 4.1)
Multi-line: yes 1 1
fillText1
Parameter 1, ASCII string which is inserted
in the standard alarm text to supplement the alarm description.
- 0 String[32] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
fillText2
- 0 String[32] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
fillText3
- 0 String[32] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
fillText4
- 0 String[32] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
textIndex
Identifies the alarm for alarm description.
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
timeBCD
Date and time of the occurred alarm in BCD format.
- Date+Time r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 03/2009
1.4 State data of channel
1.4.1 Area C, Module M: Channel-specific machine data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/Drive/...
Channel-specific machine data
1.4.2 Area C, Module S: Channel-specific status data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/State/...

G0Mode $AC_G0MODE
G00 is active and $MC_G0_LINEAR_MODE is FALSE (Siemens mode) or $MC_EXTERN_G0_LINEAR_MODE is
FALSE (ISO mode) and therefore non-linear interpolation is active with G0, i.e. the path axes are traversed as
positioning axes.
0: G00 not active
1: G00 and linear interpolation active
2: G00 and non-linear interpolation active
- 0 0 2 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aGG $A_GG
active G function in synchronized action
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of the G function group Gruppe_NUM
aLinkTransRate $A_LINK_TRANS_RATE
Link transfer rate
Number of bytes that can still be transferred in the
current IPO cycle via the NCU link communication.
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aMonifact $A_MONIFACT
Factor for tool life monitoring
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcAckC $AC_TC_ACKC
Counter variable: aTcAckC (AcknowledgeCounter) is incremented by 1
every time the PLC acknowledges a tool management command.
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

03/2009 1 Variables
aTcCmdC $AC_TC_CMDC
Counter variable: aTcCmdC (CoMmandCounter) is incremented by
1 every time the tool management outputs a command to the PLC.
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcFct $AC_TC_FCT
Command number
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcLfn $AC_TC_LFN
Source location number of new tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcLfo $AC_TC_LFO
Source location number of old tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcLmyn $AC_TC_LMYN
Owner location number of the new tool
- -1 32000 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcLtn $AC_TC_LTN
Target location number of new tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcLto $AC_TC_LTO
Target location number of old tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcMfn $AC_TC_MFN
Source magazine of new tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcMfo $AC_TC_MFO
Source magazine number of old tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcMmyn $AC_TC_MMYN
Owner magazine number of the new tool
- -1 32000 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcMtn $AC_TC_MTN
Target magazine number of new tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcMto $AC_TC_MTO
Target magazine number of old tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 03/2009
aTcStatus $AC_TC_STATUS
Command status
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcThno $AC_TC_THNO
Number of toolholder for new tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aTcTno $AC_TC_TNO
T number of new tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
aaATol $AA_ATOL
aaATol provides the axis tolerance for compressor and smoothing, which was effective during preprocessing of the
current main run block.
0 0 Double r
defined
aaAccLimA $AA_ACCLIMA[a]
Axial acceleration override in main run
1-200
- 100 1 200 UWord r
Multi-line: yes (Axis index ) numMachAxes
aaEgActive $AA_EG_ACTIVE[a,b]
Electronic gear:
Link to the specified master axis is operative, i.e. activated.
0: Deactivated
1: Activated
- 0 0 1 UWord r
(Axis index of the slave axis) *
Multi-line: yes numMachAxes + (axis index of the numMachAxes * numMachAxes
master axis) + 1
aaEgAx $AA_EG_AX[n,a]
Electronic gear:
Axis number of nth master axis (1-n).
(Axis index = axis number - 1)
1-numMachAxes
(Axis index of slave axis) * 5 +
Multi-line: yes numMachAxes * 5
(index of master axis) + 1
aaEgDenom $AA_EG_DENOM[a,b]
Electronic gear:
Denominator of link factor for the specified master axis.
The link factor of the gear is the result of $AA_EG_NUMERA[a,b]/$AA_EG_DENOM[a,b].
- 1 Double r
master axis) + 1
aaEgNumLa $AA_EG_NUM_LA[a]
Electronic gear:
Number of master axes specified with EGDEF.
If the axis has not been specified with EGDEF as slave axis,
the value is 0.
0-5
- 0 0 5 UWord r
Multi-line: yes (Axis index of slave axis + 1) numMachAxes

03/2009 1 Variables
aaEgNumera $AA_EG_NUMERA[a,b]
Electronic gear:
Numerator of link factor for the specified master axis.
The link factor of the gear is the result of $AA_EG_NUMERA[a,b]/$AA_EG_DENOM[a,b].
- 0 Double r
master axis) + 1
aaEgSyn $AA_EG_SYN[a,b]
Electronic gear:
Synchronous position for the specified master axis.
0 Double r
defined
master axis) + 1
aaEgSynFa $AA_EG_SYNFA[a]
Electronic gear:
Synchronous position for the slave axis.
0 Double r
defined
aaEgType $AA_EG_TYPE[a,b]
Electronic gear:
Type of link for the specified master axis
0: Actual-value linkage
1: Setpoint linkage
- 0 0 1 UWord r
master axis) + 1
aaFgref $AA_FGREF
The variable provides the radius used by a rotary axis to contribute to the path travel. The default value is 180 mm/PI =
57,296 mm, which corresponds to a contribution of 1mm per degree.
For linear axes the variable always provides 1.
mm, inch, user defined 0 0 Double r
aaFgroup $AA_FGROUP
If the travel of an axis influences the path velocity in the current main run block (FGROUP), the variable provides
TRUE, otherwise FALSE.
- 0 Bool r
aaJerkLimA $AA_JERKLIMA[a]
Axial jerk override in run in
1-200
- 100 1 200 UWord r
aaMeasP1Valid $AA_MEAS_P1_VALID
Save axial measuring point P1 for workpiece and
tool measurement
0: Clear axial measuring point
1: Write actual axial values to axial measuring point

1 Variables 03/2009
tool measurement
tool measurement
tool measurement
aaMeasPoint1 $AA_MEAS_POINT1
1st measuring point for workpiece and tool measurement
mm, inch, user defined 0 Double wr
2nd measuring point for workpiece and tool measurement
3rd measuring point for workpiece and tool measurement
4th measuring point for workpiece and tool measurement
aaMeasSetangle $AA_MEAS_SETANGLE
Setpoint angle of an axis
Degree, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index
aaMeasSetpoint $AA_MEAS_SETPOINT
Setpoint position of edge, corner or hole
aaMeasSpValid $AA_MEAS_SP_VALID
Save axial setpoint for workpiece and
tool measurement
0: Clear axial setpoint
1: Validate axial setpoint

03/2009 1 Variables
aaSyncDiff $AA_SYNCDIFF[]
Setpoint synchronism difference for all types of coupling
0 Double r
defined
Multi-line: yes Axis index of the following axis numMachAxes
aaSyncDiffStat $AA_SYNCDIFF_STAT[]
Status of setpoint synchronism difference
-4: No valid value in $AA_SYNCDIFF, coupled motion from part program
-3: Reserved
-2: Reserved
-1: No valid value in $AA_SYNCDIFF
0: No valid value in $AA_SYNCDIFF, coupling not active
1: Valid value in $AA_SYNCDIFF
aaVeloLimA $AA_VELOLIMA[a]
Axial velocity override in main run
1-200
- 100 1 200 UWord r
acAlarmStat $AC_ALARM_STAT
!=0: Alarms are pending, the appropriate coded alarm reactions can be used as source for
"Extended stop and retract".
evaluated separately if necessary (bits excluded below produce a value of 0)
Bit2 = 1: NOREADY (active rapid deceleration + cancellation of servo enable)
Bit6 = 1: STOPBYALARM (ramp stop of all channel axes)
Bit9 = 1: SETVDI (VDI interface signal alarm setting)
Bit13 = 1: FOLLOWUPBYALARM (follow-up)
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acAsup $AC_ASUP
Code number for the reason for the activation of an ASUB
The reasons are bit-coded.
BIT0: Activation because of: User interrupt "ASUB with Blsync".
BIT1: Activation because of: User interrupt "ASUB".
BIT2: Activation because of: User interrupt "ASUB from channel state Ready".
BIT3: Activation because of: User interrupt "ASUB in manual mode".
BIT4: Activation because of: Activation because of: User interrupt "ASUB".
BIT5: Activation because of: Abort of the subroutine repetition.
BIT6: Activation because of: Activation of decoding single block.
BIT7: Activation because of: Activation of DDTG.
BIT8: Activation because of: Activation of axis synchronization.
BIT9: Activation because of: Change of operating mode.
BIT10: Activation because of: Program continuation under TeachIn or after TeachIn deactivation.
BIT11: Activation because of: Selection overstore.
BIT12: Activation because of: Alarm with reaction compensation block with REPOS ( COMPBLOCKWITHREORG).
BIT13: Activation because of: Retraction motion with G33 and Stop.
BIT14: Activation because of: Activation of dry run feed.
BIT15: Activation because of: Deactivation of dry run feed.
BIT16: Activation because of: Activation of skip block.
BIT17: Activation because of: Deactivation of skip block.
BIT18: Activation because of: Activate machine data.
BIT19: Activation because of: Activate tool offset.
BIT20: Activation because of: System ASUB after search type SERUPRO has reached the search target.
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 03/2009
acAxCtSwA $AC_AXCTSWA[CTn]
Channel status of axis container rotation
TRUE: The channel has enabled rotation for the axis container
and rotation is still in progress.
FALSE: Axis container rotation is already finished
- 0 0 1 UWord r
acCTol $AC_CTOL
acCTol provides the contour tolerance for compressor and smoothing which was used to preprocess the current main
run block.
mm, inch, user defined 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acConeAngle $AC_CONE_ANGLE
Currently effective taper angle for taper turning.
The taper angle is specified by the setting data $SC_CONE_ANGLE and is
effective in the operating mode JOG only.
Degree 0 -90 90 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acDelt $AC_DELT
Stored distance-to-go of the path in the WCS after delete-distance-to-go of the path DELDTG for synchronous action
(Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acDtbb $AC_DTBB
Distance from the beginning of the block in the BCS (Note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acDtbw $AC_DTBW
Distance from the beginning of the block in the WCS
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acDteb $AC_DTEB
Distance to the end of the block in the BCS (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acDtew $AC_DTEW
Distance to the end of the block in the WCS
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acEsrTrigger $AC_ESR_TRIGGER
Activation of "NC-controlled ESR"
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acFGo $AC_F_G0
Max. rapid traverse rate in the block
0 0 Double r
defined
Multi-line: yes 1 1

03/2009 1 Variables
acFZ $AC_FZ
Tooth feedrate, setpoint. The physical unit is defined in variable 'feedRateIpoUnit'.
0 0 Double r
defined
Multi-line: no
acFct0 $AC_FCT0[x] x = PolynomNo

a0-coefficient of the nth polynominal for the synchronous action SYNFCT / function FCTDEF n
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of the polynominal $MC_MM_NUM_FCTDEF_ELEMENTS

a1-coefficient of the nth polynominal for the synchronous action SYNFCT / function FCTDEF n
- Double r

a2-coefficient of the nth polynominal for the synchronous action
SYNFCT / function FCTDEF n
- Double r

a3-coefficient of the nth polynominal for the synchronous action
SYNFCT / function FCTDEF n
- Double r
acFctll $AC_FCTLL[x] x = PolynomNo

Lower limit of the nth polynominal for the synchronous action SYNFCT / function FCTDEF n
- Double r
acFctul $AC_FCTUL[x] x = PolynomNo

Upper limit of the nth polynominal for the synchronous action SYNFCT / function FCTDEF n
- Double r
acFgroupMask $AC_FGROUP_MASK
acFgroupMask bit-coded provides the channel axes which are to contribute to the path velocity
- 0 0 0xFFFF Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acIpoState $AC_IPO_STATE
The variable provides selected information about whether certain
functions are active:
Bit 0: Free-form surface mode is active
Bit 1: Compressor active
- 0 0 0x0003 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acIwStat $AC_IW_STAT
Current position of machine
Bit-coded:
Bit 0: Tool inv. position
Bit 1: Axis 2/3 position
Bit 2: Axis 5 position
Bit 3-31: Not yet assigned

1 Variables 03/2009
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acIwTu $AC_IW_TU
Current position of channel axes
Bit-coded:
Bit 0: Channel axis 1 position
...
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acJogCircleSelected $AC_JOG_CIRCLE_SELECTED
JOG in circles has been selected
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acJogCoord $AC_JOG_COORD
Setting the coordinate system for the manual travel
0: Work
1: SZS
Multi-line: no
acLiftFast $AC_LIFTFAST
Information about the execution of LIFTFAST.
At the start of the LIFTFAST operation, the variable
is set internally by the NC to the value "1".
The variable must be reset to the initial state ($AC_LIFTFAST=0)
by the evaluating program (if available), in order to be able to
detect a subsequent LIFTFAST.
0: Initial state
1: LIFTFAST has been executed
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMea $AC_MEA
Touch probe has switched
No. of touch probe
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes No. of touch probe 2
acMeasActPlane $AC_MEAS_ACT_PLANE
Plane setting for measurement calculation
0: G17, 1: G18, 2: G19
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasChbfr $AC_MEAS_CHBFR
Channel basic frame screen form for setting up the new frame
Multi-line: no
acMeasChsfr $AC_MEAS_CHSFR
System frame bit screen form for setting up the new frame
Multi-line: no
acMeasCornerAngle $AC_MEAS_CORNER_ANGLE
Calculated cutting angle of corner
Multi-line: yes 1 1

03/2009 1 Variables
acMeasCornerSetangle $AC_MEAS_CORNER_SETANGLE
User-selectable setpoint cutting angle of corner
Permissible input range between 0 and 180 degrees
Degree, user defined 0 180.0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasDNumber $AC_MEAS_D_NUMBER
Selected tool edge number
- 0 Long Integer wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasDiameter $AC_MEAS_DIAMETER
Calculated diameter
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasDirApproach $AC_MEAS_DIR_APPROACH
Approach direction towards workpiece
0: +x 1: -x 2: +y 3: -y 4: +z 5: -z
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasFineTrans $AC_MEAS_FINE_TRANS
Correction in fine offset
0: Correction in coarse translation
1: Correction in fine translation
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasFrameSelect $AC_MEAS_FRAME_SELECT
The frame calculated during workpiece measurement is
entered in the selected frame.
0: $P_SETFR
10.. 25: $P_CHBFR[0..15]
50.. 65: $P_NCBFR[0..15]
100.. 199: $P_UIFR[0..99]
1010..1025: $P_CHBFR[0..15]
1050..1065: $P_NCBFR[0..15]
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasInput $AC_MEAS_INPUT[n]
Data for the workpiece and tool measurement
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Index 10
acMeasLatch $AC_MEAS_LATCH
Save measuring points for workpiece and tool measurement
0: Clear measuring point

1: Write current axial values to measuring point
Multi-line: yes Measuring point no. 4
acMeasNcbfr $AC_MEAS_NCBFR
Global basic frame screen form for setting up the new frame
Multi-line: no
acMeasP1Coord $AC_MEAS_P1_COORD
Coordinate system of the 1st measuring point
0: Work 1: BCS 2: MCS
Multi-line: no

1 Variables 03/2009
Coordinate system of the 2nd measuring point
Multi-line: no
Coordinate system of the 3rd measuring point
Multi-line: no
Coordinate system of the 4th measuring point
Multi-line: no
acMeasPframe $AC_MEAS_PFRAME
Programmable frame is not included
Multi-line: no
acMeasResults $AC_MEAS_RESULTS[n]
Measurement results
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Index 10
acMeasScaleunit $AC_MEAS_SCALEUNIT
Unit of measurement for input and output values
0: Unit of measurement as configured
1: Unit of measurement in relation to active G code G70/G700/G71/G710
- 0 Long Integer wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasSema $AC_MEAS_SEMA
Variable for disabling and enabling the measurement interface
0: Not assigned
1: Assigned
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasSetCoord $AC_MEAS_SET_COORD
Coordinate system of the set point
Multi-line: no
acMeasTNumber $AC_MEAS_T_NUMBER
Selected tool number
- 0 Long Integer wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasToolLength $AC_MEAS_TOOL_LENGTH
Calculated tool length
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasToolMask $AC_MEAS_TOOL_MASK
Tool setting for the measurement calculation
Bit 0: Tool radius is not included in the calculation
Multi-line: no

03/2009 1 Variables
acMeasType $AC_MEAS_TYPE
Measurement type specification
0: Default
1: x edge
2: y edge
3: z edge
4: Corner 1
5: Corner 2,
6: Corner 3
7: Corner 4
8: Hole
9: Shaft
10: Tool length
11: Tool diameter
12: Groove
13: Web
14: Actual value setting for geo and special axes
15: Actual value setting for special axes only
16: Edge_2P
17: Plane_Angles
18: Plane_Normal
19: Dimension_1
20: Dimension_2
21: Dimension_3
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasUifr $AC_MEAS_UIFR
Settable data management frame for setting up the new frame
Multi-line: no
acMeasValid $AC_MEAS_VALID
Validity bits for measurement input values
Bit 0: $AA_MEAS_POINT1[axis]
Bit 4: $AA_MEAS_SETPOINT[axis]
Bit 5: $AC_MEAS_WP_SETANGLE
Bit 6: $AC_MEAS_CORNER_SETANGLE
Bit 7: $AC_MEAS_T_NUMBER
Bit 8: $AC_MEAS_D_NUMBER
Bit 9: $AC_MEAS_DIR_APPROACH
Bit 10: $AC_MEAS_ACT_PLANE
Bit 11: $AC_MEAS_FRAME_SELECT
Bit 12: $AC_MEAS_TYPE
Bit 13: $AC_MEAS_FINE_TRANS
- 0 Long Integer wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasWpAngle $AC_MEAS_WP_ANGLE
Calculated workpiece position angle
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMeasWpSetangle $AC_MEAS_WP_SETANGLE
User-selectable setpoint workpiece position angle
Permissible input range less than +/- 90 degrees
Degree, user defined -90.0 90.0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMonMin $AC_MONMIN
Ratio of the actual tool monitoring value to the setpoint
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 03/2009
acMsNum $AC_MSNUM
Number of the master spindle
0: No spindle available
1..n: Number of the master spindle
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acMthNum $AC_MTHNUM
Number of the current master tool holder.
Is only meaningful with active magazine management.
0: No master tool holder available
1..n: Number of the master tool holder
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acOTol $AC_OTOL
acOTol provides the orientation tolerance for compressor and smoothing which was used to preprocess the current
main run block.
Degree, user defined 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acOvr $AC_OVR
Path override for synchronous actions (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPRTimeA
For simulation: Estimation of program runtime in seconds - downtime
s, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPRTimeM
For simulation: Estimation of program runtime in seconds - machining time
s, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPathAcc $AC_PATHACC
Path acceleration for real-time events
m/s2, 1000 inch/ s2, user
0 0 Double r
defined
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPathJerk $AC_PATHJERK
Path jerk for real-time events
mm/s3, 1000 inch / s3, user
0 0 Double r
defined
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPathn $AC_PATHN
Normalized path parameter (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPlcOvr $AC_PLC_OVR
Path override for synchronized actions specified by the PLC
- 100 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPltbb $AC_PLTBB
Path length from the beginning of the block in the BCS (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

03/2009 1 Variables
acPlteb $AC_PLTEB
Path length to the end of the block in the BCS (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPrepActLoad $AC_PREP_ACT_LOAD
Current preprocessing run time
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPrepActLoadGross $AC_PREP_ACT_LOAD_GROSS
Current preprocessing gross run time
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPrepMaxLoad $AC_PREP_MAX_LOAD
Longest preprocessing run time
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPrepMaxLoadGross $AC_PREP_MAX_LOAD_GROSS
Longest preprocessing gross run time
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPrepMinLoad $AC_PREP_MIN_LOAD
Shortest preprocessing run time
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPrepMinLoadGross $AC_PREP_MIN_LOAD_GROSS
Shortest preprocessing gross run time
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acProg $AC_PROG
Program status
(identical to progStatus but with coding that corresponds to $AC_PROG)
0: aborted (reset)
1: halted (stop)
2: running (active)
3: waiting
4: interrupted
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acPtpSup
Cartesian point-to-point travel (PTP) is supported by transformation
0: Cart. PTP travel is not supported
1: Cart. PTP travel is supported
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acSafeSynaMem $AC_SAFE_SYNA_MEM
Free Safety synchronized action elements
The maximum number of elements is configured in $MC_MM_NUM_SAFE_SYNC_ELEMENTS
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 03/2009
acStat $AC_STAT
Channel status
(identical to chanStatus but with coding that corresponds to $AC_STAT)
0: reset
1: interrupted
2: active
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acSynaMem $AC_SYNA_MEM
Free memory for synchronous actions: Shows how many elements of the memory set with
$MC_MM_NUM_SYNC_ELEMENTS are still free.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acSyncActLoad $AC_SYNC_ACT_LOAD
Current runtime for synchronized actions of the last IPO cycle in the channel
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acSyncAverageLoad $AC_SYNC_AVERAGE_LOAD
Average runtime for synchronized actions of an IPO cycle in the channel
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acSyncMaxLoad $AC_SYNC_MAX_LOAD
Longest runtime for synchronized actions of an IPO cycle in the channel
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acTaneb $AC_TANEB
Tangent angle at the block end point
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acTc $AC_TC
Active tool carrier
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acTcAckt $AC_TC_ACKT
Trigger variable ACKnowledgeTrigger always assumes a value of 1
for an IPO cycle when the PLC acknowledges a command of the tool management.
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acTcCmdt $AC_TC_CMDT
Trigger variable: CoMmadTrigger always assumes a value of 1 for an
IPO cycle when a new command of the magazine management is output to the PLC.
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acThreadPitch $AC_THREAD_PITCH
Programmed lead
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acThreadPitchAct $AC_THREAD_PITCH_ACT
Current lead
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

03/2009 1 Variables
acThreadPitchInc $AC_THREAD_PITCH_INC
Current lead change
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acTime $AC_TIME
Time from the beginning of the block in seconds (Note: for SYNACT only)
s Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acTimec $AC_TIMEC
Time from the beginning of the block in interpolation cycles (Note: for SYNACT only)
IPO cycle Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acTimer $AC_TIMER[x] x = TimerNo

Time variable in seconds (Note: for SYNACT only)
s Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of the time variable $MN_MM_NUM_AC_TIMER
acToolOAct $AC_TOOLO_ACT
Supplies the setpoint value of the current tool orientation.
The orientation vector is normalized, i.e. it has the absolute value 1.
- 0 -1 Double r
Multi-line: no
acToolODiff $AC_TOOLO_DIFF
Supplies the angle remaining between the current and end vectors of the tool orientation block
- 0 0 180 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acToolOEnd $AC_TOOLO_END
Supplies the end orientation of the current block.
- 0 -1 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1: X component 3
acToolRAct $AC_TOOLR_ACT
Setpoint of the tool rotation.
- 0 -1 1 Double r
acToolRDiff $AC_TOOLR_DIFF
Angle remaining between the current and end rotation vectors of the tool orientation block
- 0 0 180 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acToolREnd $AC_TOOLR_END
End rotation vector of the current block
- 0 -1 1 Double r
acTotalOvr $AC_TOTAL_OVR
Total path override for synchronized actions
- 100 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acTrafo $AC_TRAFO
Code number of the active transformation (encoded as for $AC_TRAFO)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 03/2009
acTrafoChain $AC_TRAFO_CHAIN
Active chained transformation
Code numbers of the chained transformations of the active TRACON corresponding
to machine data $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_m.
0: No master tool holder available
1..n: Number of the master tool holder
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Index of the chained transformation 4
acTrafoPar $AC_TRAFO_PAR[n]
Supplies the value of parameter 'n' of the current transformation, e.g. the cylinder diameter in the case of TRACYL
- Double r
Number of the parameter
Multi-line: yes (dependent on the transformation 8
type)
acTrafoParSet $AC_TRAFO_PARSET
Number of current transformation data record.
The variable is '0' if no transformation is active.
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acVactB $AC_VACTB
Path velocity in basic coordinate system
0 Double r
defined
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acVactBf $AC_VACTBF
Path velocity in the BCS.
FGroup and FGREF are taken into account.
0 0 Double r
defined
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acVactWf $AC_VACTWF
Path velocity in the workpiece coordinate system.
FGroup and FGREF are taken into account.
0 0 Double r
defined
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acVactw $AC_VACTW
Path velocity in the work piece coordinate system (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
acVc $AC_VC
Additive path feedrate correction value for synchronous actions (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actDLNumber ??
Number of active total offset DL
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
actDLNumberS ??
Corresponds to actDLNumber for block search with calculation
Caution: This variable is not available for the Variable Service,
but only for logging in the case of block search events!.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1

03/2009 1 Variables
actDNumber $P_TOOL
Number of active tool edge
- 0 9 UWord r
Multi-line: no
actDNumberFanuc
With programming in ISO Dialect mode:
Offset memory number radius.
Assigned only in conjunction with ISO Dialect M external language.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actDNumberS
Corresponds to actNumber for block search with calculation
Attention: This variable is available for protocolling block search events only, not for the Variable Service!
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actDuploNumber
Duplo number of active tool
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
actFeedRateIpo
Actual value of the interpolation feedrate. The actual value is the feed actually moved with. (depends on the
acceleration profiles, LookAhead, velocity limits etc. ) The variable 'feedRateIpoUnit' defines the physical unit.
Double r
defined
Multi-line: no
actFrameIndex $P_UIFRNUM
Index of the active set frame (index in G group 8 "Settable work offset"). Frames 0 - 4 (corresponds to G500 ... G57)
can be set in the standard version. The number of frames can be changed via machine data
MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES.
0 = no frame selected
1 = G54
2 = G55
3 = G56
4 = G57
5 = G505
to
99 = G599
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
actHNumberFanuc
With programming in ISO Dialect mode:
Offset memory number length.
Assigned only in conjunction with ISO Dialect M external language.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actIpoType
Active interpolation mode used for the path motion. This date corresponds to a large degree to the SNCF:ncFktBin for
the first G-group.
The value differs for automatically generated intermediate blocks only. This is e.g. the case if two lines are connected
with an arc by the command RND. The value is the index of the active G-code (analog with SNCF:ncFktBin)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 03/2009
actIpoTypeS
Active mode of interpolation applied during block searches.
This data is very similar to SNCF:ncFktBinS for the 1st G group.
Its value is different only in the case of automatically generated intermediate blocks,
such as when, for example, two straight lines are connected to an arc
by means of command RND.
The value is the index of the active G function (analogous to SNCF:ncFktBinS).
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actLanguage
Active language mode
0: Siemens
1: ISO mode
2: Reserviert for later language expansions
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
actMasterToolHolderNo
Active number of the master tool holder.
Especially for $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, Bit0=0, this is the value of
SETMS or SETMTH last programmed in the RESET status of the NCK.
Especially for $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, Bit0=1, this is the value in the RESET status of the NCK for
$MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND (if $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER=0);
or $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER (if $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER > 0)
max. Anzahl der
- 1 UWord r
Kanalachsen
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actOriToolLength1
X component in workpiece coordinate system (WCS) of active tool length,
taking into account the tool orientation, incl. adapter data, mirroring and TCARR
(orientable toolholder).
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actOriToolLength2
Y component in workpiece coordinate system (WCS) of active tool length,
(orientation-capable toolholder).
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actOriToolLength3
Z component in workpiece coordinate system (WCS) of active tool length,
(orientation-capable toolholder).
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actParts $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS
Total number of workpieces machined in current run:
This counter registers the number of workpieces
machined since it started.
When the required number is reached, the counter is set
to zero automatically.
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: no

03/2009 1 Variables
actProgNetTime $AC_ACT_PROG_NET_TIME
The current net runtime of the current program, that is the time in which the program was stopped, is subtracted.
actProgNetTime is automatically reset to zero with the part program start in automatic mode, chanel status RESET.
The net runtime does not include the time during which the program pauses on account of override=0.
actProgNetTime can be further manipulated with progNetTimeTrigger.
Seconds
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actTNumber $P_TOOLNO W1
Number of active tool
- 0 32000 UWord r
Multi-line: no
actTNumberLong
Number of the active tool using flat D-numbers with up to 8 digits
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actTNumberS
Corresponds to actTNumber for block search with calculation.
Attention: This variable is available for protocolling the block search events only, not for the Variable Service!
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actToolEdgeCenterPosEns
Corresponds to actToolEdgeCenterPosEns in the SEGA block
for the three geometry axes
The variable consists of three values of the DOUBLE type, i.e. is 24 bytes long.
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actToolIdent W1
Identifier of active tool
- "\0" String[32] r
Multi-line: no 1
actToolLength1 $P_TOOLL[1] W1
Active tool length 1
Multi-line: no
actToolLength2 $P_TOOLL[2] W!
Multi-line: no
actToolLength3 $P_TOOLL[3] W1
Multi-line: no
actToolRadius $P_TOOLR W1
Active tool radius
Multi-line: no
actTransform
Active transformation
- \0 String[32] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 03/2009
actWaCSCoordSys $AC_WORKAREA_CS_COORD_SYSTEM
Coordinate system of the active coordinate system-specific working area limitation
Identifier for the coordinate system in which the working area limitation is to apply.
The following are valid:
0: Working area limitation in the WCS
3: Working area limitation in the SZS
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actWaCSLimitMinus $AC_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_MINUS
Position of the coordinate system-specific working area limitation in the negative direction for the addressed axis and
working area group.
Position of the working area limitation in the negative direction
0 Double r
defined
Multi-line: yes Channel axis index numMachAxes
actWaCSLimitPlus $AC_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_PLUS
Position of the coordinate system-specific working area limitation in the positive direction for the addressed axis and
working area group
Position of the working area limitation in the positive direction
0 Double r
defined
actWaCSMinusEnable $AC_WORKAREA_CS_MINUS_ENABLE
The coordinate-specific working area limitation in the negative direction of actWaCSLimitMinus is valid.
TRUE: The value in the variable actWaCSLimitMinus is valid for the axis.
FALSE: There is no limitation in the coordinate-specific working area in the negative direction for this axis.
- 0 UWord r
actWaCSPlusEnable $AC_WORKAREA_CS_PLUS_ENABLE
The coordinate system-specific working area limitation in the positive direction of actWaCSLimitPlus is valid.
TRUE: The value in the variable actWaCSLimitPlus is valid for the axis.
FALSE: There is no limitation for this axis in the positive direction in the coordinate-specific working area.
- 0 UWord r
actWalimGroupNo $AC_WORKAREA_CS_GROUP
Active working area group in the IPO
Writing is only possible if the channel has been aborted or stopped
0: Not activated
n: $MC_MM_NUM_WORKAREA_CS_GROUPS
- 0 0 10 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
allAxesRefActive DB21-28, DBX36.2

Code specifying whether all axes are referenced
1 = all axes referenced
0 = at least 1 axis not referenced
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
allAxesStopped
Code specifying whether axes are in exact stop
0 = at least one axis is not in exact stop
1 = All axes in exact stop
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

03/2009 1 Variables
basisFrameMask $P_CHBFRMASK
Display indicating which channel-specific basic frames are active
Every bit in the mask indicates whether the appropriate basic frame
is active. Bit0 = 1st basic frame, Bit1 = 2nd basic frame, etc.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
blockType $AC_BLOCKTYPE
Identifies the type of a block (programmed or generated internally)
0: No internally generated block
1: Internally generated block, but cannot be specified in detail
2: Block was generated on chamfering/rounding
3: Smooth approach and retraction (SAR)
4: Block was generated during tool offset
5: Block was generated on smoothing
6: Block was generated by TLIFT (tangential correction)
7: Block was generated during path segmentation
8: Block was generated by compile cycles
Multi-line: yes 1 1
blockTypeInfo $AC_BLOCKTYPEINFO
Detailed information on block type
The value range and the meaning of this variable depend on the current
value of system variable blockType
With system variable blockTypeInfo, additional information on

variable blockType can be requested.
Depending on the value of system variable blockType, different values are possible:
1. General internally generated block: blockType = 1

blockTypeInfo = 1000 and does not include any additional information.
2. Chamfer/round: blockType = 2
2001: straight
2002: circle
3. SAR: blockType = 3
3001: Approach with straight
3002: Approach with quadrant
3003: Approach with semicircle
4. Tool offset: blockType = 4

4001: Approach block after STOPRE
4002: Link sets when intersection not found
4003: Pointed circle on the inner corners (with TRACYL only)
4004: Bypass circle (or conic) on outer corners
4005: Approach blocks for offset suppression
4006: Approach blocks for reactivation of TRC
4007: Block separation when curvature is too high
4008: Compensation blocks for 3D front milling (tool vector || plane vector)
5. Corner rounding: blockType = 5

5001: Rounding contour through G641
6. TLIFT: blockType = 6
6001: TLIFT block with linear movement of the tangential axis and without retraction movement.
6002: TLIFT block with non-linear tangential axis (polynomial)
and without retraction movement.
6003: TLIFT block with retraction movement; tangential axis movement and retraction movement
start simultaneously.
6004: TLIFT block with retraction movement; tangential axis will only start, if certain
retraction position has been reached.

1 Variables 03/2009
7. Path segmentation: blockType = 7

7001: Programmed path segmentation without punching/nibbling to be active.
7002: Programmed path segmentation with active punching/nibbling.
7003: Automatic internally generated path segmentation.
8. Compile cycles: blockType = 8

In this case, system variable $AC_BLOCKTYPEINFO includes the ID of the compile cycles
application that created the block.
Multi-line: yes 1 1
cIn $C_IN[n]
Signal from PLC to cycle (reserved for
SIEMENS application, e.g. ShopMill/ManualTurn)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes No. of input signal 16
cOut $C_OUT[n]
Signal from cycle to PLC (reserved for
SIEMENS application, e.g. ShopMill/ManualTurn)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes No. of output signal 16
chanAlarm DB21-28, DBX36.6 und DBX36.7 A2

Code whether NCK alarm pending.
0 = no alarm in this channel
1 = alarm without stop
2 = alarm with stop
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
chanAxisNoGap
Display of existing axes, i.e. no axis gap in channel.
Bits 0-31 represent the axes of the channel.
Bitn = 0: Axis does not exist.
Bitn = 1: Axis does exist.
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
chanStatus DB21-28, DBX35.5-DBX35.7 K1

Channel status
0 = RESET
1 = active
2 = interrupted
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
changeAxConfCounter
A counter which is incremented if the axes configuration has changed. This is the case, if e.g. geometry axes are
switched or axes have been changed between channels. The counter is set to 0 at PowerOn and it might overflow.
You cannot be sure, that the axes configuration actually has changed when the counter is incremented.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
cmdDwellTime
Programmed dwell time
See timeOrRevolDwell
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

03/2009 1 Variables
cmdFeedRateIpo $AC_F
Desired feedrate of the interpolation feedrate. The physical unit is defined in the variable 'feedRateIpoUnit'
Double r
defined
Multi-line: no
cmdFeedRateIpoS
Interpolation feed during search.
The physical unit is in the variable feedRateIpoUnitS
0 0 Double r
defined
Multi-line: yes 1 1
cmdTrafoParS $P_TRAFO_PAR[n]
Supplies the value of parameter 'n' of the programmed transformation, e.g. the cylinder diameter in the case of
TRACYL
- Double r
Number of the parameter
Multi-line: yes (dependent on the transformation 8
type)
cmdTrafoParSetS $P_TRAFO_PARSET
Number of programmed transformation data record for block search
The variable is '0' if no transformation is active.
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
cmdTrafoS $P_TRAFO
Code number of programmed transformation for block search
Coding as for variable $AC_TRAFO
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
contourDev
Contour deviation
Multi-line: no
corrBlActive
Incorrect block has occurred (correction block)
0 = no incorrect block
1 = incorrect block
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
cycServRestricted
Code whether restricted cyclic variable service is available.
This is a privileged variable: Cyclic result acknowledgements for this variable are produced even if the cyclic services
are no longer served by the NCK because of block cycle time problems.
Caution: Privileged variables lose this characteristic if they are mixed with non-privileged variables in one request. ->
Do not combine the variable cycServRestricted in a cluster with other variables!
0 = normal cycl. service
1 = no cyclic service (but acknowledgement)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

1 Variables 03/2009
delayFSt
Delay Feed Stop, Stop is delayed in the current program area
0: Stop in the current program area is effective immediately
1: Stop in the current program area is effective after a delay
2: Stop in the current program area is effective immediately (same as 0), although
a stop delay area was programmed in the parts program.
(This means that the NCK could not switch on the stop delay area.)
- 0 0 2 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
direction
Traversing direction
0 = normal travel
1 = forward travel
2 = reverse travel
3 = reference point cycle
4 = stop state
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
enableOvrRapidFactor
Activate additional rapid traverse override $SC_OVR_RAPID_FACTOR
0: not activated
1: activated
- 0 0 1 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
extProgActive DB21-28, DBB32.0

Flag indicating whether program execution from external is active.
0 = inactive
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
feedRateIpoOvr
Interpolation feedrate, override
% Double r
Multi-line: no
feedRateIpoUnit
Interpolation feedrate, units
0 = mm/min
1 = mm/rev
2 = inch/min
3 = inch/rev
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
feedRateIpoUnitS
Interpolation feed, units during search
0 = mm/min
1 = mm/rev
2 = inch/min
3 = inch/rev
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
findBlActive DB21-28, DBX33.4 K1

Code whether block search is active.
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

03/2009 1 Variables
incoapB $P_INCOAP_B
Boolean supply and return parameter(s) of the COA application cutting generator
- 0 0 1 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Array index incoapSize[1]
incoapC $P_INCOAP_C
CHAR supply and return parameter(s) of the COA application cutting generator
- 0 0 255 UWord wr
incoapI $P_INCOAP_I
INT supply and return parameter(s) of the COA application cutting generator
- 0 UDoubleword wr
incoapR $P_INCOAP_R
DOUBLE supply and return parameter(s) of the COA application cutting generator
- 0 Double wr
incoapS16 $P_INCOAP_S16[]
CHAR16 supply and return parameter(s) of the COA application cutting generator
- 0 String[16] wr
- 0 String[160] wr
- 0 String[32] wr
incoapSize $P_INCOAP_SIZE[]
Array size of the supply and return parameters of the COA application cutting generator
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1: Array size of $incoapB 7
isoActHDNo $P_ISO2_HNO[n],$P_ISO2_DNO,$P_ISO3_NO
The following applies to rows 1- 4:
This value is only practical if ISO2 mode is permissible.
This value contains the H number of the tool length offsets in the 3 geometry dimensions in rows 1 - 3 and the D
number of the tool radius offset.
If H99 is programmed, then
all 3 geometry dimensions (=rows 1-3) have the value "-1"
the radius (= row 4) has the value "-1"
If H=D ($MN_EXTERN_TOOLPROG_MODE,Bit6=0), then these variables contain the last programmed D or H.
If an offset D > 1 is selected in Siemens mode, all rows have the value "-2".
If ISO2 mode cannot be activated ($MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM != 4), the variable has the value=-3.
The following applies to row 5:
This value is only practicable if ISO3 mode is permissible.
This value contains the current number of tool offsets in ISO3 mode.
If an offset D > 1 is selected in Siemens mode, the value "-2" is returned.
If ISO3 mode cannot be activated ($MN_MM_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM != 5), the variable value =-3.
-3: ISO2 or ISO3 mode inactive
-2: Siemens offset selected with D > 1.
-1: H99 programmed in ISO mode, Siemens offset D1 active
- 0 short Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1: H number for L1 in ISO2 mode 5
ludAccCounter
Counter indicating that a new LUD ACC is available. If subprograms are called during an automatic program execution,
a new set of LUDs becomes valid. In order to indicate to the MMC that it has to modify the display of the LUDs,

1 Variables 03/2009
respectively that the validity of the LUDs has changed, the variable 'ludAccCounter' is incremented. It is only necessary
for the MMC to inquire a change of the variable's value, the value itself is of no importance.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
machFunc DB11, DBX7.0-DBX7.2

Active channel machine function
0 = none
1 = REPOS
2 = TEACH IN
3 = REF
4 = TEACH-REPOS
5 = TEACH-REF
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
markActiveList
Status array for the active marker in channel m.
The first element (markActiveList[1] ) of the array specifies the currently active marker number of this channel (channel
m).
The second element ( markActiveList[2] ) specifies bit-coded whether channel m is still waiting for the mark to
be reached in the other channels (channel n), in short "waiting status".
markActiveList[2] Bit-n == 1 Channel m is waiting for mark markActiveList[1] in channel n

markActiveList[2] Bit-n == 0 Channel n has already reached mark markActiveList[1], or channel m is not
waiting for mark markActiveList[1] at all
markActiveList[1] == 0 Current channel m does not edit any wait marker
markActiveList[1] == 1..99 Current channel m is positioned on the wait marker with markActiveList[1]
markActiveList[2] Bit-n == 1 Channel m is waiting for mark markActiveList[1] in channel n

markActiveList[2] Bit-n == 0 Channel n has already reached mark markActiveList[1], or channel m is not
waiting for mark markActiveList[1] at all
- 0 0 99 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1: Wait marker number 2
ncProgEndCounter
Counter which is incremented
as soon as the NCK has processed an end of program.
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
ncResetCounter
the Reset key
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
ncStartCounter
Counter for the NC-start key. Pressing this key increments the variable 'ncStartCounter'. The value of the variable can
be ignored, the MMC must just inquire the change of the variable to see whether the start-key has been pressed.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
ncStartSignalCounter
Counter that is incremented
as soon as the channel-specific NC start signal has been activated in the VDI interface.
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
numChanAlarms
Number of present channel-specific alarms
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

03/2009 1 Variables
numToolHolders $P_MAGNS
Number of tool holders/ spindles (buffer locations of the location type = spindle) from the magazine configuration of the
TOA which are allocated to the channel. The number of tool holders / spindles is solely a function of the magazine
configuration and does not change during an NC program execution.
Value = 0, if there is no magazine configuration or the TMMG (tool management magazines) is not present in the NC.
Multi-line: no 1
numTraceProtocEventType
Logging: Number of standard event types
- 0 UWord r
numTraceProtocOemEventType $MM_PROTOC_NUM_ETP_OEM_TYP
Logging: Number of OEM event types
- 0 UWord r
oldProgNetTime $AC_OLD_PROG_NET_TIME
oldProgNetTime is the net runtime of the just correctly ended program.
That is the program was not canceled with RESET, but terminated normally with M30.
If a new program is started, oldProgNetTime remains unaffected until M30 is reached again.
The implicit procedure of copying actProgNetTime to oldProgNetTime takes place only if progNetTimeTrigger is not
written.
oldProgNetTime is reset to zero with the PI "Select program".
Seconds
Multi-line: yes 1 1
oldProgNetTimeCounter $AC_OLD_PROG_NET_TIME_COUNT
This is zero in the power ON status. oldProgNetTimeCounter is always increased when the NCK has newly written
oldProgNetTime.
This enables the user to ensure that oldProgNetTime has been written, that is, if the user cancels the current program
with reset, oldProgNetTime and oldProgNetTimeCounter remain unchanged.
Note: Two programs running consecutively can have identical runtimes and be correctly terminated.
The user can then only detect this by the changed oldProgNetTimeCounter.
Modification counter
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pCutInv $AC_CUT_INV
States that a turning tool is rotated against the machining plane
(typically through 180 degrees around the C axis with G18) such that the
direction of spindle rotation has to be inverted.
FALSE, TRUE
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pCutInvS
States that a turning tool is rotated against the machining plane
(typically through 180 degrees around the C axis with G18) such that the
direction of spindle rotation has to be inverted.
For block search.
FALSE, TRUE
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 03/2009
pCutMod $AC_CUTMOD
Reads the current valid value that was last programmed with the language command CUTMOD
(number of the tool carrier for which the cutting edge data modification is to be activated).
If the last programmed value was CUTMOD = -2 (activation with the currently active tool carrier with orientation
capability),
the value -2 is not returned but the number of the active tool carrier with orientation capability at the time of
programming.
-2, 999999
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pCutModS
Reads the current valid value that was last programmed with the language command CUTMOD
(number of the tool carrier for which the cutting edge data modification is to be activated).
If the last programmed value was CUTMOD = -2 (activation with the currently active tool carrier with orientation
capability),
the value -2 is not returned but the number of the active tool carrier with orientation capability at the time of
programming.
For block search
-2, 999999
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pEgBc $P_EG_BC[a]
Electronic gear:
Block change criterion. Important for EGON, EGONSYN
0: NOC Block change is performed immediately
1: IPOSTOP Block change is performed with setpoint synchronism
2: COARSE Block change is performed with "Synchronism coarse"
3: FINE Block change is performed with "Synchronism fine"
- 3 0 3 UWord r
pMthSDC $P_MTHSDC
Master tool holder no. or master spindle no. is determined with reference to the active tool for the next D offset
selection. This is important if the master spindle changes after the last tool change.
>0 Successful read access
0 No master tool holder or no master spindle available.
The next D offset works with TO.
-1 TMMG not available
- 0 0 numMachAxes Long Integer r
Multi-line: no 1
pOffn $P_OFFN
Last programmed offset normal
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: no
pTCutMod $P_AD[2]
Angle of rotation for modification of edge position and cutting direction
Angle between 0 and 360 degrees
Degree 0 0 360 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pTCutModS
Angle of rotation for edge position and
cutting direction for block search
Angle between 0 and 360 degrees
Multi-line: yes 1 1

03/2009 1 Variables
pTc $P_TC
The active orientatable toolholder
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pTcAng $P_TCANG[n]
The current angles of the two axes of an orientation-capable toolholder
Degree 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis no. of toolholder 2
pTcDiff $P_TCDIFF[n]
The difference between the exact and the actually used
angles of the two axes of
an orientation-capable toolholder
Degree 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis no. of toolholder 2
pTcNum $P_TCNUM
Number of available orientable tool carriers in the channel
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pTcSol $P_TCSOL
Number of solutions (configuration options for rotary
axes) on selection of an orientatable toolholder. The variable
value can be between 0 and 2, where 0 to 2 means either none,
1 solution or 2 solutions.
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pTcStat $P_TCSTAT
Specifies the status of an orientable tool carrier.
The variable is bit-coded with the following meanings:
0x0001 The first rotary axis is available
0x0002 The second rotary axis is available
0x0004 The angles used for the calculation come from an orientation in the frame direction
0x0008 The angles used for the calculation have been absolutely defined
0x0010 The polar axis angle is not defined in the case of orientation in the frame direction
0x1000 Only the tool can be rotated (kinematic type T)

0x1000 Only the workpiece can be rotated (kinematic type P)
0x4000 Tool and workpiece can be rotated (kinematic type M)
The bits stated here are not currently assigned.

Multi-line: yes 1 1
pToolO $P_TOOLO
Supplies the current tool orientation
The orientation vector is normalized, i.e. it has the value 1.
- 0 -1 1 Double r
pToolRot $P_TOOLROT
Current tool rotation
The rotation vector is normalized, i.e. it has the absolute value 1.
- 0 -1 1 Double r
paAccLimA $PA_ACCLIMA[a]
Axial acceleration override in run in
1-200
- 100 1 200 UWord r

1 Variables 03/2009
paJerkLimA $PA_JERKLIMA[a]
Axial jerk override in run in
1-200
- 100 1 200 UWord r
paVeloLimA $PA_VELOLIMA[a]
Axial velocity override in run in
1-200
- 100 1 200 UWord r
progDLNumber
Dummy - do not use!
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
progDNumber
Dummy - do not use!
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
progDuploNumber
Duplo number of programmed tool (does not yet have to be active)
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
progNetTimeTrigger $AC_PROG_NET_TIME_TRIGGER
Serves for the selective measurement of program sections, that is the time measurement can be switched on and off
again by the program by writing progNetTimeTrigger.
Certain values of progNetTimeTrigger are given a special function in order to fully exploit all trigger options:
0 Neutral:
The trigger is not active, the value is taken from reset with the start key.
1 Terminate:
Terminates the measurement and copies actProgNetTime -> oldProgNetTime. actProgNetTime is set to zero and then
runs on again.
2 Start:
Starts the measurement and sets actProgNetTime to zero. oldProgNetTime remains unchanged.
3 Stop:
Stops the measurement. Does not change oldProgNetTime and holds actProgNetTime constant until resume.
4 Resume:
Resumption of the measurement, that is a previously stopped measurement is resumed.
actProgNetTime runs on. oldProgNetTime remains unchanged.
- 0 0 4 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
progStatus DB21-28, DBX35.0 - DBX35.4 K1

Program status
1 = interrupted
2 = stopped
3 = in progress
4 = waiting
5 = aborted
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
progTNumber
Number of programmed tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

03/2009 1 Variables
progTNumberLong
Number of the programmed tool using flat D-numbers with up to 8 digits
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
progToolIdent
Identifier of programmed tool (does not yet have to be active)
- "\0" String[32] r
Multi-line: no 1
progUsekt
Programmed value of the command $P_USEKT.
Bit-coded data for the programmed tool subgroup
available for the tool change.
- 0 0 0xF Long Integer r
Multi-line: no
progWaitForEditUnlock
The interpreter is waiting until the editor has saved the specified parts
program and has enabled it by means of _N_F_MODE
- 0 String[160] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
protAreaCounter
Counter is incremented by 1 every time a
protection zone (block PA) is modified
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
protocHmiEvent
Logging: When writing, the defined event is activated during preprocessing.
49: HMI_TRIG_1
50: HMI_TRIG_2
51: HMI_TRIG_3
- 0 UWord wr
protocUserActive $MM_PROTOC_USER_ACTIVE
Logging: Displays active users
0: User inactive
1: User active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
rapFeedRateOvr
Rapid traverse override
% Double r
Multi-line: no
remainDwellTime
Remaining dwell time
See timeOrRevolDwell
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
reqParts $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS
Number of required workpieces (workpiece requirement):
The workpiece count at which the number of current
workpieces $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS is set to zero can be
defined in this counter.
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: no

1 Variables 03/2009
rotSys $AC_ROT_SYS
Reference system for orientation movements with cartesian manual traversal
0: Axis-specific manual traversal active
1: Cartesian manual traversal in basic coordinate system active
2: Cartesian manual traversal in workpiece coordinate system active
3: Cartesian manual traversal in tool coordinate system active
- 0 0 3 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
searchRunMode
Type of function in which search run has been integrated
1: Search run is used directly
2: Simulation search run
3: Execute program area
The user can preselect a program area via HMI with "Execute program area",
which he/she would like to execute "real" on the machine.
To do this, the NCK uses an internal block search to approach the start of the
program area (abbreviation: APb) correctly. Internal cancellation at the end of the program area
(abbreviation: EPb) via reset.
0: Otherwise
- 0 1 3 UWord r
searchRunStatus
Status of the search run
1: activeSearchRun
Simulation active, that is the NCK simulates the part program from the start
to the agreed search target (or APb) in order to find, among other things, the correct starting
position of the search target block.
2: targetFound
The search target has been found and the NCK is waiting for the Start button.
Simulation has finished.
3: activeAdaption
After the start, the NCK outputs action blocks which set the machine to
the search target (M± function output, spindle speeds) and, if applicable,
starts an ASUB in which the user uses the ASUB program to adapt the machine
to the part program situation in the target block.
(For example, a programmed tool is read and a tool-changing cycle
exchanges it with the current tool.) The NCK stops automatically after the
action blocks or after the ASUB with alarm 10208.
4: finishedAdaption
The NCK waits for the start.
5: activeStopRun
After the adaptation, the REPOS function goes to the target block, and then
the execution of the program is resumed. The NCK executes the program
area after the target block, but is still within the function Execute program area.
The blocks are scanned to see whether the end of the program area (EPb) could
already have been reached. The program is cancelled at EPb with reset
and searchRunStatus is cleared.
0: Otherwise
- 0 1 5 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
seruproMasterChanNo
The search type SERUPRO (search via program testing) may be
started simultaneously in several channels in order to start a channel grouping
correctly. A search target must be specified in one channel (master channel) in the grouping.
The other channels do not need a search target, they wait until they have reached a
stop condition and the master channel has reached the search target. These channels generally
stop at WAIT marks. The variable seruproMasterChanNo defines the master channel.
- 0 0 numChannels UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

03/2009 1 Variables
seruproMasterNcuNo
The search type SERUPRO (search via program testing) may be
started simultaneously in several channels in order to start a channel grouping
correctly. A search target must be specified in one channel (master channel) in the grouping.
The other channels do not need a search target, they wait until they have reached a
stop condition and the master channel has reached the search target. These channels generally
stop at WAIT marks. The variable seruproMasterChanNo defines the master channel.
seruproMasterNcuNo specifies the master channel in more detail if it is not on the active NCU.
- 0 0 $MN_MM_LINK_NUM_OF_MODULES UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
simTolerance keine
The NCK simulation can run part programs at a higher speed (see PI _N_NCKMOD).
Only then is simTolerance evaluated and it ONLY affects geometry blocks that have not been programmed as circles
or straight lines.
These blocks are slowed down so that two successive interpolation points can be connected by a straight line.
This straight line deviates from the programmed contour by not more than 'simTolerance'.
Multi-line: no
simulationSupport
Block information for the support of the JobShop simulation
Bit0: Change of the transformation in the curr. block
Bit1: Change of the frame in the curr. block
Bit2: Curr. block in an action block
Bit3: Curr. block in the last action block
Bit4: Curr. block has PTP active (as of 510600)
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
simulationSupportS
Block information for the support of the JobShop simulation during search
Bit0: -
Bit1: -
Bit2: -
Bit3: -
Bit4: Curr. block has PTP active
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
specParts $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS
Number of current workpieces as defined by user:
This counter enables the user to define his own
workpiece count. The counter is reset to zero automatically
only when the control system boots on defaults.
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: no
splitBlock $AC_SPLITBLOCK
Identifier of internally splitted blocks
0: A BLOCK programmed unchanged
(a BLOCK generated by the compressor is regarded as programmed BLOCK):
<>0: BLOCK was shortened or is an internally generated BLOCK; the following values are possible:
1: It is an internally generated BLOCK or a shortened original BLOCK
3: It is the last block in a chain of internally generated
blocks or shortened original blocks.
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 03/2009
startLockState
Status of the global start disable.
Also see PI _N_STRTLK and _N_STRTUL.
0: No start disable
1: Start disable is switched on and program is not running
2: Start disable is switched on and program is running nevertheless
The NCK changes from 2->1 as soon as the program is stopped.
- 0 0 2 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
startRejectCounter
Counter that is incremented
as soon as an NC start is rejected due to a global start
disable (see _N_STRTLK) or a program-specific
start disable (see _N_F_STLO).
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
stopCond
Replaced by stopCondNew
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
stopCondChangeCounter
Modification counter for stop states.
Is incremented as soon as one of the stop states has changed.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
stopCondNew
Number of the NC stop state
More than one stop state can be active simultaneously.
The highest priority stop state appears below the first line, this is followed by those with lower priorities.
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of the active stop state stopCondNum
stopCondNum
Number of active stop states.
Specifies the number of occupied lines in stopCond
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
stopCondPar
Replaced by stopCondParNew
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1
stopCondParA
Stop state parameter(s).
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes
state
stopCondParNew
Stop state parameter(s).
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes
state

03/2009 1 Variables
stopCondTime
BCD time stamp for stop state.
- Date+Time r
Multi-line: yes Number of the stop state stopCondNum
stopRunActive
Stop run active
0 = inactive
1 = active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
stopRunCounter
Modification counter for stop run.
This is always incremented when the NCK has stopped at a stop block.
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
suppProgFunc
Disabling of language commands
Bit0 = 0: SBLOF command is active
Bit0 = 1: SBLOF command is disabled
- Bit0 = 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
syntaxCheckAlarmNo
Alarm number in the case of a syntax error during the syntax check
Multi-line: yes 1 1
syntaxCheckAlarmPara1
Parameter 1 for an alarm in the case of a syntax error during the syntax check
- 0 0 String[32] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
- 0 0 String[32] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
- 0 0 String[32] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
- 0 0 String[32] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
syntaxCheckSeek
Line number of the faulty line in the syntax check
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 03/2009
syntaxCheckStatus
Status of the "Syntax check" function
0: Syntax check not active (initialization status)
1: Syntax check selected
2: Syntax check active
3: Syntax check stopped with alarm on account of system error
4: Syntax check terminated
5: Syntax check canceled
6: Syntax check canceled on account of errors
- 0 0 6 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
tOffL1L2L3 $AC_TOFFL
Tool length offset programmed in coordinates of the tool length components L1/L2/L3.
0 Double r
defined
1: Tool length offset programmed in
Multi-line: yes the tool length component direction 3
L1
tOffLXYZ $AC_TOFF
Tool length offset TOFFL programmed in coordinates of the WCS.
0 Double r
defined
1: Tool length offset programmed in
Multi-line: yes the direction of the 1st geometry 3
axis
tOffR $AC_TOFFR
Programmed tool radius offset.
0 Double r
defined
Multi-line: yes 1 1
threadPitch
Current lead
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
threadPitchS
Current lead during search run
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
timeOrRevolDwell
Dwell time unit in seconds or spindle revolutions
0: cmdDwellTime and remainDwellTime in seconds
1: cmdDwellTime and remainDwellTime in spindle revolutions
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
timeS $AC_TIMES
Time after a block change between programmed blocks in seconds
Each programmed block can be divided up into a chain of part blocks that are
processed one after the other.
O n l y with the 1st cycle of the 1st block of the chain, timeS is set to zero and
then counted up in seconds. Therefore, the variable enables time measurements
throughout the entire block chain.
Multi-line: yes 1 1

03/2009 1 Variables
timeSC $AC_TIMESC
Time after a block change between programmed blocks in IPO cycles
Each programmed block can be divided up into a chain of part blocks that are
processed one after the other.
Only (!) with the 1st cycle of the 1st block of the chain, timeSC is set to zero and
then counted up in seconds. Therefore, the variable enables time measurements
throughout the entire block chain.
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
toolCounter
Counter of the changes of the tool data assigned to a channel.
The counter is incremented each time a tool data is changed.
All changes of tool data made by BTSS, part programs, INI files and by the Tool Management software are considered.
Tool data are tool compensations, grinding-specific tool parameters, OEM tool parameters and Tool Managment data
including magazine data.
There is one exception: the present tool-in-use-time, since it is changed in each IPO cycle.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
toolCounterC
Counter for modifications to tool offset data assigned to the channel
(analog toolCounter).
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
toolCounterIso keine
Each change of a tool offset value for ISO2.2 and ISO3.2 modes is counted.
This is to enable the HMI to record data changes.
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
toolCounterM
Counter for modifications to magazine data assigned to the channel
(analog toolCounter).
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
toolHolderData GETSELT, GETEXET

Data for each tool holder/spindle from the magazine configuration of the TOA which is assigned to the channel.
There is a set of numToolHolderParams parameters for each tool holder.

Currently there are the three parameters P1, P2 and P3.
There are numToolHolders tool holders. The number of tool holders in this list is solely a function of the magazine
configuration and does not change while an NC program runs.
- P1: THNo ToolHolderNumber / SpindleNumber
(In the language commands of the NC program,
corresponds to the address extension
<n> from T<n>=... or M<n>=6 with explicit notation;
in the magazine configuration, corresponds to the location
type index of the associated buffer location of the location
type = spindle.)
- P2: SelTno T number of the selected tool with
reference to the tool holder / spindle with the number of THNo
(The same TNo would also return the language command GETSELT.)
The value 0 indicates that no tool is selected with
reference to the tool holder. For further behavior see the description of GETSELT.
- P3: ExeTno TNumber of the tool to be loaded / loaded with
reference to the tool holder / the spindle with the number THNo from
the point of view of the NC program.
When working without M6, the same TNumber is in SelTno and ExeTno.
(The same TNumber would also return the language command GETEXET.)

1 Variables 03/2009
The value 0 indicates that no tool is to be loaded / is loaded

with reference to the tool holder. For further behavior see the description of GETEXET.
An array access is possible to toolHolderData, with which the data of all numToolHolders tool holders can be read at
one time.
0 will be returned for line 1 only, if tool magazine management is not active.
- 0 0 Double r
The line index addresses the
Multi-line: yes parameters of the tool holder and numToolHolderParams * numToolHolders
the tool holder itself:
totalParts $AC_TOTAL_PARTS
Total number of all machined workpieces:
This counter specifies the number of workpieces machined
since it was started. The counter is automatically
set to zero only if the control system boots on defaults.
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: no
transSys $AC_TRANS_SYS
Reference system for translation with cartesian manual traversal
0: Axis-specific manual traversal active
1: Cartesian manual traversal in basic coordinate system active
2: Cartesian manual traversal in workpiece coordinate system active
3: Cartesian manual traversal in tool coordinate system active
- 0 0 3 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
K1,
transfActive DB21-28, DBX33.6
M1
Transformation active
0 = inactive
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
vaEgSyncDiff $VA_EG_SYNCDIFF[a]
Electronic gear:
Synchronism deviation (actual values). The comparison between this value
and $MA_COUPLE_POS_TOL_... determines whether the appropriate
"Synchronism" VDI signal is set.
0 Double r
defined
vaEgSyncDiffS $VA_EG_SYNCDIFF_S[a]
Electronic gear:
Synchronous run difference (actual values) with sign.
Whether the corresponding VDI signal "synchronous run" is set depends upon the comparison of this value with
$MA_COUPLE_POS_TOL_....

0 Double r
defined
Multi-line: yes (Axis index of the following axis) numMachAxes
vaSyncDiff $VA_SYNCDIFF[]
Actual value synchronism difference for all types of coupling
0 Double r
defined
vaSyncDiffStat $VA_SYNCDIFF_STAT[]
-4: Reserved

03/2009 1 Variables

vcToolO $VC_TOOLO
Supplies the actual value of the current tool orientation.
- 0 -1 1 Double r
vcToolODiff $VC_TOOLO_DIFF
Supplies the angle between the setpoint and actual vectors of the tool orientation
- 0 0 180 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
vcToolOStat $VC_TOOLO_STAT
Supplies the status of the computation of the actual orientation
Multi-line: no
vcToolR $VC_TOOLR
Actual value of tool rotation
The rotation vector is normalized, i.e. it has the absolute value 1.
- 0 -1 1 Double r
vcToolRDiff $VC_TOOLR_DIFF
Angle between setpoint and actual tool rotation vectors
Multi-line: yes 1 1
vcToolRStat $VC_TOOLR_STAT
Status of the computation of the actual rotation
Multi-line: yes 1 1
workPnameSubstitution
Path name defined by HMI on selection of a progam or workpiece in /_N_EXT_DIR,
which is displayed in the path variable of the OPI instead of the internal NCK path.
The string must be terminated with "\0". The last character before the
terminating zero is interpreted by the NCK as a separator between the path part and
the file name (typically "\" or "/").
Permitted character set: ASCII without control characters.
Handling: workPnameSubstitution is written by the HMI before the program selection.
NCK initially stores this information in a buffer.
The information in the buffer becomes active on the program selection
(PI _N_SELECT, _N_EXTERN, _N_EXTMOD) provided that the selection refers to the /_N_EXT_DIR.
Otherwise workPnameSubstitution is deleted.
- 0 0 String[128] r
Multi-line: no

1 Variables 03/2009
1.4.3 Area C, Module SINF: Part-program-specific status data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/ProgramModification/...
During automatic execution of a part program different parameters can influence the type of machining.
The current status data for the selected part program are combined in module SINF. The status data must
only be changed via the PLC. interface.
DRFActive
DRF active
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
feedStopActive
Feed disable
0 = inactive
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
ipoBlocksOnly
Display traversing blocks
0 = normal block transfer
1 = exclusively traversing blocks
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
optAssStopActive
Associated M01 selected
0: Not selected
1: Selected
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
optStopActive
M01 selected
0 = not selected
1 = selected
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
progTestActive DB21-28, DBX1.7 K1

Program test
0 = inactive
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
rapFeedRateOvrActive
ROV rapid traverse override
0 = inactive
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
singleBlockActive
Single block, SBL
0 = no single block
1 = SBL 1
2 = SBL 2
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

03/2009 1 Variables
singleBlockType
Single block mode
1 = interpolation single block
2 = decoder single block
- UWord wr
Multi-line: no
skipLevel0Active
Info whether skip level /0 is activated.
0: Skip level /0 not active
1: Skip level /0 active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no
skipLevel1Active
Info whether skip level /1 is activated
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no
skipLevel2Active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no
skipLevel3Active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no
skipLevel4Active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no
skipLevel5Active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no
skipLevel6Active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no
skipLevel7Active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no

1 Variables 03/2009
skipLevel8Active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no
skipLevel9Active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no
trialRunActive DB21-28, DBX0.6 V1

Dry run feedrate
0 = inactive
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
1.4.4 Area C, Module SPARP: Part program information

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/ProgramInfo/...
This module contains information on the currently active part programm in the respective channel.
absoluteBlockBufferName
File name with path of upload buffer in which display blocks are stored
Empty string: Function is deactivated

- String[128] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
absoluteBlockBufferPreview
Part of content of file absoluteBlockBufferName.
The desired content of the variables is set by $MC_MM_ABSBLOCK_BUFFER_CONF.
In principle, only complete parts program blocks are entered.

If the desired number of previous blocks are not present, then an empty block ("LF") is entered in that place.
If there is insufficient space for all parts program blocks, then the previous blocks are first replaced by empty blocks
("LF"), if this is still insufficient, the blocks at the end are also omitted.
- String[198] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
absoluteBlockCounter
Modification counter for display information in the upload buffer
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actBlock
Current part program block.
If search run is active, then search run block is displayed.
With DISPLOF an empty string is returned; with search run the subroutine call.
- String[66] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

03/2009 1 Variables
actBlockA
Current part program block.
If search run is active, then search run block is displayed.
Display is always made irrespective of DISPLOF.
- String[66] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actBlockI
Current part program in the interpreter.
Display is always made irrespective of DISPLOF.
- String[66] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actLineNumber
Line number of the current NC instruction (starting at 1)
0: before program start
-1: not available due to an error
-2: not available because of DISPLOF
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actPartProgram
Content of the current part program starting with the previous block.
Blocks may be cut off at the end of the string.
The line index determines the section within the program.
An efficient current block display can be achieved with the aid of a cyclical variable service.
If multiple lines are required then it must be ensured that the client reads line 1 first so that an NCK internal buffer is
filled which ensures that the following lines are returned accordingly.
- String[200] r
If the index=1, the first data block is
Multi-line: yes returned, for index=n the nth data 3
block.
block
To display the currently active part programm, NCK supplies 3 ascii-blocks of the part programm in one single variable
job (last, current and next block). That means the variable 'block' consists of a maximum of 3 lines:
Line index 1: string of the last block

Line index 2: string of the current block
Line index 3: string of the next block
To gain consistent information, all 3 array elements must be processed in one variable request. This is why the
maximum string length of each array element is limited to 66 characters.
- String[66] r
Block index, 1 = last, 2 = current, 3
Multi-line: yes 3
= next block
blockNoStr
Block number
- String[12] r
Multi-line: no
circleCenter
Center of the circle (WCS)
- Double r
Line index 1 - 3 for geometry axis
Multi-line: yes 3
and only effective for G02 or G03
circleCenterS
Corresponds to circleCenter for search with calculation
Attention: This variable is available for protocolling the block search events only, not for the Variable Service!
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes No. of the geometry axis 3

1 Variables 03/2009
circlePlane
The vector perpendicular to the circular plane (axial) is output
to enable identification of the position of a circle in space
- Double r
circlePlaneData
To identify the position of a circle in space, the vector,
which is vertical to the plane of the circle, is output (vector)
- Double r
Multi-line: no 1
circlePlaneDataNorm
To identify the position of a circle in space,
the vector, which is vertical to the plane of the circle, is output
(normalized vector)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
circlePlaneDataNormS
To identify the position of a circle in space during the search,
the vector, which is vertical to the plane of the circle, is output
(normalized vector)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
circlePlaneS
The vector perpendicular to the circular plane (axial) is output
to enable identification of the position of a circle in space
- Double r
circleRadius
Radius of the circle (only effective for G02/G03)
- Double r
Multi-line: no
circleRadiusS
Corresponds to circleRadius for block search with calculation.
Note: This variable is not available for the variable service, but only for logging in connection with block search events!
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1
circleTurn
Progr. number of additional circular passes with
helical interpolation in curr. program
Multi-line: yes 1 1
circleTurnS
Programmed number of additional circular passes with
helical interpolation in the current program for search with calculation.
Note: This variable is not available for the Variable Service, but only for
logging of block search events
Multi-line: yes 1 1
cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleCenterEns
Arc center in relation to WOS frame, i.e. with tool length but
without tool radius
- 0 Double r

03/2009 1 Variables
cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleCenterEnsS
Corresponds to circleCenterWos for block search with calculation
in relation to the WOS frame, i.e. with tool length but without tool radius
Note: This variable is not available for the variable service, but only for
logging in connection with block search events!
- 0 Double r
cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleDataEns
Corresponds to cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleCenterEns for the three geometry axes
as well as cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleRadiusEns
The variable consists of four values of the DOUBLE type, i.e. is 32 bytes long.
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleRadiusEns
Arc radius in relation to WOS frame as center-point path, i.e. with tool
length but without tool radius
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleRadiusEnsS
Corresponds to circleRadiusWos for block search with calculation
in relation to WOS frame as center-point path. i.e. with tool length
but without tool radius
Note: This variable is not available for the variable service, but only for
logging in connection with block search events!
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
lastBlockNoStr
Indicates the last programmed block number, if $MN_DISPLAY_FUNCTION_MASK bit 0 is set.
A block number is shown until either a new block number is programmed or the subroutine level which generated the
block number has been left.
Block numbers of masked blocks are not displayed.

There is also no display if DISPLOF is active.
- String[12] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
msg PG
Messages from a part program can be programmed with the instruction 'MSG (...)'. The variable 'msg' contains the text
of the current 'MSG(...)'-instruction until a new instrucion is processed or until the message is deleted with the
instruction 'MSG ()'.
- String[128] r
Multi-line: no 1
progName
Progam name of the currently active program (or subroutine)
- String[32] r
Multi-line: no 1
seekOffset
Line number of the current NC block in the program workPandProgName
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no 1
seekw
First line enabled for modification in part program
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 03/2009
selectedWorkPProg
Currently selected program, i.e. the program that has been selected
with "Select".
The variable also displays the program in the JOG and MDI modes.
During the simulation, the simulation search temporarily deselects
the selected program and selects the program to be simulated.
This is hidden by selectedWorkPProg, i.e. during the simulation search,
selectedWorkPProg remains unchanged.
- String[160] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
singleBlock
In most cases the variable 'block' is used to read the currently active blocks of the part program. Because this variable
is limited to 66 characters per string, it might be necessary (for long blocks) to read longer strings. The variable
'singleBlock' can read complete blocks (up to strings with 198 charecters) . 3 lines can be addressed:
Line index 1: last block

Line index 2: current block
Line index 3: next block
It is not guaranteed for rapid block changes, that the information of 3 successive blocks is always consistent, because
each block is read with a single variable request. This method is only safe, if the part program has stopped.
- String[198] r
Block index, 1 = last, 2 = current, 3
Multi-line: yes 3
= next block
stepEditorFormName
Current module name for step editor is stored
- String[128] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
workPName
Name of the active workpiece
- String[32] r
Multi-line: no 1
workPNameLong
Name of the active workpiece
- String[128] r
Multi-line: no
workPandProgName
Workpiece name and name of current program.
- String[160] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

03/2009 1 Variables
1.4.5 Area C, Module SPARPP: Program pointer in automatic operation
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/ProgramPointer/...
In automatic mode it is possible to branch to several subroutine levels from the main program level. The
state of the program can be determined for every program level. Each variable of the module consists of
12 rows. This makes it possible to address the main program level and 11 subroutine levels (incl. ASUP
levels).
The array indices (row indices) mean:
1 = Main program
2 = 1st subroutine level
3 = 2nd subroutine level
4 = 3rd subroutine level
5 = 4th subroutine level
9 = 1st asynchronous subroutine level
10 = 2nd asynchronous subroutine level
11 = 3rd asynchronous subroutine level
12 = 4th asynchronous subroutine level
actInvocCount
Subroutine call counter, actual value. Specifies the number of subroutine passes. Is always set 1 for the main program
and for asynchronous subroutines.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12
blockLabel
Block label
- String[32] r
blockNoStr
Block number
[:][N]<No>
- String[12] r
cmdInvocCount
Subroutine call counter, desired value. Specifies the number of subroutine passes. Is always set to 1 for the main
program and for asynchronous subroutines.
- UWord r
displayState
Display state for block display.
(Blocks should not be displayed automatically for program levels for which DISPLAY OFF has been programmed in the
PROC instruction.
This is valid also for the subroutine levels below).
Value Meaning
0 = DISPLAY OFF for the program level
1 = DISPLAY ON for the program level
- 0 UWord r
extProgBufferName
Name of FIFO buffer for execution from external source
- String[160] wr

1 Variables 03/2009
extProgFlag
Indicates whether programs are being executed externally
0: Program is being processed from NCK program memory
1: Program is being executed externally
- UWord r
lastBlockNoStr
Returns the last programmed block number for each program level when $MN_DISPLAY_FUNCTION_MASK bit 0 is
set.
A block number is shown until either a new block number is programmed or the subroutine level which generated the
block number has been left.
Block numbers of masked blocks are not displayed.

There is also no display if DISPLOF is active.
- String[12] r
progName
Program name
- String[32] r
seekOffset
Search pointer (block offset, each block consists of a string that ends with a line feed)
- Long Integer r
seekw
First line enabled for modification in part program
workPName
Workpiece name = path name in the NC file structure
- String[32] r
workPNameLong
Workpiece name = path name in the NCK file structure
Note: This variable is ignored when lines are accessed!
- String[128] r
workPandProgName
Workpiece name and name of current program.
- String[160] r

03/2009 1 Variables
1.4.6 Area C, Module SPARPI: Program pointer on interruption

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/InterruptionSearch/...
In order to be able to continue at the point of interruption in a program, the current states of the main
program and any subroutines must be stored. On a program interrupt the information is immediately
updated in the NCK and reamins valid even after RESET.
This makes it possible to read the states of the main program level and the 11 subroutine levels (incl.
ASUP levels).
1 = main program
2 = 1st subroutine level
3 = 2nd subroutine level
4 = 3rd subroutine level
9 = 1st asynchronous subroutine level
10 = 2nd asynchronous subroutine level
11 = 3rd asynchronous subroutine level
12 = 4th asynchronus subroutine level
displayState
PROC instruction. This is valid also for the subroutine levels below).
Value Meaning
- 0 UWord r
forward
Search direction
2 = forwards
- UWord r
haltBlock
The following applies to the SPARPI: The interrupt pointer does not mark the block where the program was cancelled
but a previous block (hold block), which enables a better resumption.
The hold block is explicitly set with the part program commands IPTRLOCK and IPTRUNLOCK, or implicitly
manipulated via $MC_AUTO_IPTR_LOCK.
The following applies to the SPARPF: If SPARPI is copied completely, the value of the hold block which was set by the
NCK is retained.
This enables the NCK to recognize the situation, and it responds with the suppressed message alarm 16950.
NOTE: For SPARPI and SPARPF this value is ONLY defined for program level 0.
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Program levels (only defined for
Multi-line: yes 1
level 0)
invocCount
Actual value of the subroutine call counter. Is always 1 for the main program.
- UWord r

1 Variables 03/2009
plcStartReason
Specifies for the SERUPRO function which channel has to be started by the PLC so that the current channel starts.
- 0 0 UWord r
progName
Program name
- String[32] r
searchString
Search string (the first 64 characters of the NC block - corresponding to the search pointer)
- String[64] r
searchType
Search type
5 = search pointer block-oriented (searching for line feed characters)
- UWord r
seekOffset
Search pointer (block-oriented, searching for linefeed characters)
1fffffff HEX is returned if the value is invalid.
- Long Integer r
status
Informs about whether block SPARPI includes currently
valid values, and provides the reason for the last update of the
block, if available.
Note: If an interruption occurs in a program range between the command
IPTRLOCK and IPTRUNLOCK, the first block after IPTRLOCK will be provided
in the SPARPI instead of the current block.
The first interruption between IPTRLOCK and IPTRUNLOCK will set "status"
and any additional interruption prior to IPTRUNLOCK will neither change "status" nor SPARPI.
0: Program is running, i.e. SPARPI variables are not up-to-date
1: Program selection, i.e. SPARPI has been reset
2: Block selection through PI service _N_SEL_BL
3: Reset (program abort)
4: Stop after program instruction, e.g. M0
5: Stop with STOP key
6: Stop caused by alarm
- 1 0 6 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
workPName
Workpiece name = path name in the NC file structure
- String[32] r
workPNameL
- String[160] r
workPNameLong
- String[128] r

03/2009 1 Variables
1.4.7 Area C, Module SPARPF: Program pointers for block search and
stop run
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/Search/...
To look for a particular block within a parts program the user can enter search criteria and start a block
search. The variables to be entered are combined in the module SPARPF and must be written by the
MMC (or another component on the MPI bus).
One main program level and 11 subroutine levels can be processed. These levels are the row indices of
the individual variables. The search targets (seek pointer and search string) can only be used mutually
exclusively in one level. If a collision occurs, a negative acknowledgement results when the block search is
started.
Depending on the search type, the search string is either a block label, block number or any string.
If no path name is specified, the default search strategy for subroutine calls is used. The main program
entered in the first program level must be selected for the block search; otherwise the search request is
acknowledged negatively.
1 = main program level for search run

2 = 1st subroutine level for search run
3 = 2nd subroutine level for search run
4 = 3rd subroutine level for search run
5 = 4th subroutine level for search run
9 = 1st asynchronous subroutine level for search run
10 = 2nd asynchronous subroutine level for search run
11 = 3rd asynchronous subroutine level for search run
12 = 4th asynchronous subroutine level for search run
101 = main program level for stop run

102 = 1st subroutine level for stop run
103 = 2nd subroutine level for stop run
104 = 3rd subroutine level for stop run
105 = 4th subroutine level for stop run
109 = 1st asynchronous subroutine level for stop run
110 = 2nd asynchronous subroutine level for stop run
111 = 3rd asynchronous subroutine level for stop run
112 = 4th asynchronous subroutine level for stop run
displayState
PROC instruction. This is valid also for the subroutine levels below).
Value Meaning
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 12

1 Variables 03/2009
forward
Search direction
Search direction "backwards" is only possible in the mode without calculation
1 = backwards (without calculation)
2 = forwards
- UWord wr
haltBlock
The following applies to the SPARPI: The interrupt pointer does not mark the block where the program was cancelled
but a previous block (hold block), which enables a better resumption.
The hold block is explicitly set with the part program commands IPTRLOCK and IPTRUNLOCK, or implicitly
manipulated via $MC_AUTO_IPTR_LOCK.
The following applies to the SPARPF: If SPARPI is copied completely, the value of the hold block which was set by the
NCK is retained.
This enables the NCK to recognize the situation, and it responds with the suppressed message alarm 16950.
NOTE: For SPARPI and SPARPF this value is ONLY defined for program level 0.
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Program levels (only defined for
Multi-line: yes 1
level 0)
invocCount
Actual value of the subroutine call counter. Is always 1 for the main program.
- UWord wr
plcStartReason
Specifies for the SERUPRO function which channel has to be started by the PLC so that the current channel starts.
- 0 0 UWord wr
progName
Program name. The main program that is used in the first main program level must be selected for the block search,
otherwise the search request will be acknowledged negatively.
- String[32] wr
searchString
Search string (the first 64 characters of the NC block - corresponding to search pointer). Contents of the search string
depends on the search type and are either:
block label
block number
any string
- String[64] wr
searchType
Search type
1 = block number
2 = label
3 = string
4 = program level
5 = search pointer block-oriented (searching for line feeds)
- UWord wr

03/2009 1 Variables
seekOffset
Search pointer (block-oriented, searching for line feeds). If the search pointer is used, a program name (progName)
always must have been defined. The search pointer refers to this program.
- Long Integer wr
status
This variable is without function in block SPARPF.
It has only been introduced to achieve the same structure of SPARPI and SPARPF.
- 0 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
workPName
Workpiece name = path name in the NC file structure. If no path name is specified, the default search strategy for
subroutine calls is used.
- String[32] wr
workPNameL
Workpiece name = path name in the NCK file structure. If no path name is specified, the default search strategy for
- String[160] wr
workPNameLong
Workpiece name = path name in the NCK file structure. If no path name is specified, the default search strategy for
- String[128] wr
1.4.8 Area C, Module SSYNAC: Synchronous actions

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/SelectedFunctions/...
Several synchronous actions (M, H, S, E, F, T, D) can be active simultaneously in one channel. The
module SSYNAC contains a list of all the synchronous actions programmed in the current block. This
module consists of arrays of varying length because some types of synchronous actions might be
programmed several times in a block. A synchronous action that is not assigned produces a negative
number for the respecitive index.
For each synchronous action there is an address variable and a variable in which the value of the address
is entered.
5 M functions
3 S functions
3 H functions
1 T function
1 D function
6 F functions
1 E function
can be programmed in each part program block, but no more than 10 synchronous actions must be
programmed in a single block.
Dadr
D-number. There is only one active D-number per channel.
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no 1

1 Variables 03/2009
Dval
Value of the current D-number
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no 1
Eadr S5
Number of active E-function
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
Eval S5
Value of the E-function
Double r
defined
Multi-line: no 1
Hadr S5
Number of active auxiliary functions (H-functions). Up to three H-functions can be active simultaneously.
- 0 99 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Serial number 3
Hval S5
Value of the H-function
- -99999,9999 99999,9999 Double r
Madr S5
Number of the active M-function. Up to 5 M-functions can be active simultaneously.
- 0 99 UWord r
Mval S5
Value of the M-function
Sadr S5
Number of active S-functions. Up to three S-functions can be active simultaneously.
- 0 6 UWord r
Sval S5
Value of the S-function. Specifies the spindle speed.
rev/min , m/min 0 999999,999 Double r
TPreSelAdr
Number of the preselected T-function
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
TPreSelVal
Value of the preselected T-function
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no 1
Tadr
Active T-number. Only one T-number can be active at any a time.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

03/2009 1 Variables
Tval
T-function value
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no 1
1.4.9 Area C, Module SYNACT: Channel-specific synchronous actions

This module contains information on the synchronous actions. The 1000 digit of the cell contains the user
protection level (0-7) needed for displaying the corresponding synchronous action.
blockNoStrAct
If a technology cycle is active: block number of the current action
- String[12] r
(Protection level) * 1000 + no. of the
Multi-line: yes 7 * 1000 + numSynAct
synchronous action
blockNoStrProg
Number of the block where the synchronous action has been programmed
- String[12] r
synchronous action
id
ID of the synchronous action; value 0 means that there is no ID defined (blockwise)
- UWord r
synchronous action
latchRow
Consistent backup of a line in the module.
When writing with a line number, the data in this line is consistently backed up.
When written with the value 0, this back up is deleted.

- UWord r
Multi-line: yes See module header
numElem
Number of occupied SYNACT elements
- UWord r
numSynAct
Number of synchronous actions
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes (protection level) * 1000 + 1 7 * 1000 + 1
numVars
Number of SYNACT variables
- UWord r
progLineOffset
SYNACT offset within the progPathName file
- Long Integer r

1 Variables 03/2009
progPathName
Synchronized action file
- String[160] r
selectMask
Masks some of the entries in the relevant SYNACT list.
Only those SYNACTS are entered in the lists for which
(selectMask-lowByte AND synActInfo-lowByte) AND (selectMask-higByte AND synActInfo-highByte) apply.
The default value 0xFFFF generates completely unfiltered lists.
Bit0: Area: User
Bit1: Area: Manufacturer
Bit2: Area: System
Bit3: Area: Safety
Bit8: Type: Static
Bit9: Type: Modal
- UWord r
synActCounter
Modification counter for the SYNACT entries in the relevant list.
- UWord r
synActInfo
Information on classification of the SYNACT
Bit0: Area: User
Bit1: Area: Manufacturer
Bit2: Area: System
Bit3: Area: Safety
Bit8: Type: Static
Bit9: Type: Modal
- UWord r
synactBlock
Current synchronized action block (short)
- String[66] r
synactBlockL
Current synchronized action block (long)
- String[198] r
typStatus
Type and state of the synchronous action
Bits0-7 describe the state:
Bit0: active, i.e. condition fullfilled, action is being executed
Bit1: lock, i.e. action is locked by PLC or Synact
Bits8-15 describe the type:
Bit8: static
Bit9: modal
Bit10: blockwise (to be recognized by id=0)
- UWord r
synchronous action
varName
Name of SYNACT variable
- String[32] r

03/2009 1 Variables
varTyp
Data type of SYNACT variable. Coding according to ACX.
0: BOOL (2 bytes)
3: LONG
10: DOUBLE
12: CHAR[32]
- UWord r
varValue
Value of SYNACT variable
- String[32] r
1.4.10 Area C, Module SNCF: Active G functions

All G functions are organized in G groups. Only one function of each G group can be active at a time.
The module SNCF consists of a single variable that is organized as an array. The row index corresponds
to the G group number.
ncFkt
Active G-function of relevant group
G <No>.
If there is no function active within the corresponding G-group, the variable returns an empty string "\0".
- String[16] r
Multi-line: yes G group number numGCodeGroups
ncFktAct
Active G function of relevant current group in current
language mode.
Depending on whether function has been programmed in Siemens or
ISO Dialect mode, this is identical to ncFkt or ncFktFanuc.
- String[16] r
G group number or ISO Dialect G numGCodeGroups bzw.
Multi-line: yes
group number numGCodeGroupsFanuc
ncFktBin
Active G-function of the correponding group
- UWord r
ncFktBinAct
Active G function of relevant current group in current
language mode.
Depending on whether function has been programmed in Siemens or
ISO Dialect mode, this is identical to ncFktBin or ncFktBinFanuc.
(The value is the index of the active G function within the group)
- UWord r
G group number or ISO Dialect G numGCodeGroups bzw.
Multi-line: yes
group number numGCodeGroupsFanuc
ncFktBinFanuc
Active G function of relevant ISO Dialect group
(the value is the index of the active G function within the group)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes ISO Dialect G group number numGCodeGroupsFanuc

1 Variables 03/2009
ncFktBinS
Active G-function of the correponding group for block search with calculation
(The value is the index of the active G-function within the group)
Attention:
This variable is available for protocolling block search events only, but not for the Variable Service.
- UWord r
ncFktFanuc
Active G function of relevant ISO Dialect group
- String[16] r
Multi-line: yes ISO Dialect G group number numGCodeGroupsFanuc
ncFktS
Active G-function of the correponding group for block search with calculation
Attention:
This variable is available for protocolling block search events only, but not for the Variable Service.
- String[16] r
1.4.11 Area C, Module NIB: State data: Nibbling

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/Nibbling/...
The module NIB contains technology-specific data for nibbling.
actPunchRate N4
Strokes per minute
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
automCutSegment N4
Identifier that indicates which type of automatic block division is active. The division is specified by the commands
'SPP' and 'SPN' in the part program.
0 = no block division
1 = number of segments per block ('SNP')
2 = segments of fixed length ('SPP')
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
numStrokes N4
Number of strokes when the instruction 'SPN' divides the block into segments (variable 'automCutSegment' = 1).
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
partDistance N4
If the block has been divided in segments with the instruction 'SPP' (variable 'automCutSegment' = 2) the variable
specifies the length of the path between the punches.
Multi-line: no 1
punchActive N4
Identification of punching or nibbling active. The part program turns off/on punching and nibbling with 'SPOF', 'SON'
and 'PON'.
Rapid punching and nibbling are turned on/off with 'SONS' and 'PONS'.
The variable 'punchActive' specified the present state.

0 = inactive
1 = punching active
2 = nibbling active
3 = rapid punching active (PONS from SW 4.1)
4 = rapid nibbling active (SONS from SW 4.1)

03/2009 1 Variables
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
punchDelayActive N4
Identifier that indicates whether punching with delay is active. The part program can turn on/off the delay with the
instructions 'PDELAYON' and 'PDELAYOF'. The variable 'PunchDelayActive' indicates the present state.
0 = inactive
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
punchDelayTime SD 42400: PUNCH_DWELL_TIME N4

Punching delay time
ms Double r
Multi-line: no 1
strokeNr
Current stroke number
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
1.4.12 Area C, Module FB: Channel-specific base frames
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/BaseFrame/...
This only applies if $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES > 0.
The maximum frame index is: $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES - 1
linShift $P_CHBFR[x,y,TR] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Frame index * (numGeoAxes + $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES *
Multi-line: yes
numAuxAxes) + axis number (numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes)
linShiftFine $P_CHBFR[x,y,SI] x=FrameNo, y=Axis

Multi-line: yes
mirrorImgActive $P_CHBFR[x,y,MI] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

1: Mirroring active
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes
rotation $P_CHBFR[x,y,RT] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Degree Double wr
Multi-line: yes
scaleFact $P_CHBFR[x,y,SC] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

- Double wr
Multi-line: yes

1 Variables 03/2009
1.4.13 Area C, Module FS: Channel-specific system frames

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/SystemFrame/...
Those that exist are set by the bits in $MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK.

Consequently, there may be gaps between the active system frames.
The maximum frame index is:

3 up to but excluding SW 6.3.
5 from and including SW 6.3.
11 as from and including SW 7.4.
12 as from and including SW 7.5.
linShift $P_SETFR[Achse, TR]

Translation
Multi-line: yes Frameindex 4 * (numGeoAxes+numAuxAxes)
linShiftFine $P_SETFR[Achse, SI]

Fine offset
mirrorImgActive $P_SETFR[Achse, MI]

Mirroring
1: Mirroring active
- 0 0 1 UWord wr
rotation $P_SETFR[Achse, RT]

Rotation
Degree 0 Double wr
scaleFact $P_SETFR[Achse, SC]

Scaling factor
- 0 Double wr
1.4.14 Area C, Module AUXFU: Auxiliary functions

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/AuxiliaryFunctions/...
The module includes the active auxiliary functions for each group.
In the line, the auxiliary function group (64 groups) and the
desired view are addressed:
Line 1001-1064: Active auxiliary function from the point of view of the NCK
Line 2001-2064: Collected auxiliary function (after search run) from the point of view of the NCK
Line 3001-3064: Active auxiliary function from the point of view of the PLC
Line 1-64: Summary of the above views
Only the values of lines 3001-3064 can be written.

When writing individual values, it must be taken care
that the status variable is written last.
The entire data block of an auxiliary function will not be
accepted before this variable is written.

03/2009 1 Variables
acAuxfuMTick $AC_AUXFU_M_TICK[groupIndex]
The variable is used to read the time stamp of the last auxiliary function group
collected (search function) or output for an auxiliary function group.
If no auxiliary function has been output for a specified group yet,
the variable provides value -1.
- -1 INT_MIN INT_MAX Long Integer wr
Multi-line: yes Group of auxiliary functions/view 3128
acAuxfuPredefIndex $AC_AUXFU_PREDEF_INDEX[groupIndex]
The variable is used to read the pre-defined index of the last auxiliary function group
- -1 -1 INT_MAX Long Integer wr
acAuxfuSpec $AC_AUXFU_SPEC[groupIndex]
The variable is used to read the output specification of the last auxiliary function group
The output specification is bit-coded:

Bit 0 = 1 Acknowledgement "normal" after an OB1 cycle
Bit 1 = 1 Acknowledgement "quick" with OB40
Bit 2 = 1 No pre-defined auxiliary function
Bit 3 = 1 No output to the PLC
Bit 4 = 1 Spindle reaction after acknowledgement by the PLC
Bit 5 = 1 Output before movement
Bit 6 = 1 Output during movement
Bit 7 = 1 Output at block end
Bit 8 = 1 No output after block search type 1,2,4
Bit 9 = 1 Collection during block search type 5 (SERUPRO)
Bit 10 = 1 No output during block search type 5 (SERUPRO)
Bit 11 = 1 Cross-channel auxiliary function (SERUPRO)
Bit 12 = 1 Output made through synchronized action
Bit 13 = 1 Implicit auxiliary function
Bit 14 = 1 Active M01
Bit 15 = 1 No output during travel-in test run
Bit 16 = 1 Nibbling OFF
Bit 17 = 1 Nibbling ON
Bit 18 = 1 Nibbling
- -1 INT_MIN INT_MAX Long Integer wr
acAuxfuTickHifu $AC_AUXFU_TICK[groupIndex,2]
The variable is used to read the auxiliary function counter per package
of the last auxiliary function group
- 0 INT_MIN INT_MAX Long Integer wr
acAuxfuTickPack $AC_AUXFU_TICK[groupIndex,1]
The variable is used to read the package counter per sequence
acAuxfuTickSeq $AC_AUXFU_TICK[groupIndex,0]
The variable is used to read the output sequence counter (all outputs within an IPO cycle)

1 Variables 03/2009
1.5 State data of axis
extension $AC_AUXFU_EXT[groupIndex]
Extension of the auxiliary function
- 0 0 UWord wr
status
Status of the auxiliary function
Bit0 = 1: Auxiliary function has been collected (NCK view)
Bit1 = 1: Auxiliary function has been output to PLC (NCK view)
Bit2 = 1: Auxiliary function has been acknowledged by PLC (NCK view)
Bit3 = 1: Auxiliary function has been acknowledged by PLC (PLC view)
Bit4 = 1: Auxiliary function has been functionally completed (PLC view)
Bit14 = 1: Value type is LONG

Bit15 = 1: Value type is DOUBLE
- 0 0 UWord wr
type $AC_AUXFU_TYPE[groupIndex]
Type of the auxiliary function, e.g. "M", "S", "T", "D", "F", "H", "L".
- String[2] wr
valueDo $AC_AUXFU_VALUE[groupIndex]
Value of the auxiliary function.
This value will be supplied, if "status" Bit15 = 1
- 0 0 Double wr
valueLo $AC_AUXFU_M_VALUE[groupIndex]
Value of the auxiliary function.
This value will be supplied, if "status" Bit14 = 1
1.5.1 Area C, Module SMA: State data: Machine axes
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/MachineAxis/...
actIncrVal DB31-48, DBB5 H1

0 = INC_10000
1 = INC_1000
2 = INC_100
3 = INC_10
4 = INC_1
5 = INC_VAR
6 = INC_JOG_CONT
7 = no incremental mode set
- UWord r

03/2009 1 Variables
actToolBasePos $AA_IM[x] x = Ax is
Double r
defined
cmdToolBasePos
Double r
defined
extUnit
Current physical unit of the axis position
0 = mm
1 = inch
2 = degree
4 = userdef
- UWord r
name
Axis name
- String[32] r
status
Axis status
- UWord r
toolBaseDistToGo
Tool base distance-to-go. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
Double r
defined
toolBaseREPOS
Double r
defined
varIncrVal
Settable value for INC_VAR. The physical value depends on whether the axis is linear or rotary.
Linear axis: unit is 1 mm
Rotary axis: unit is 1/1000 degrees
Double r
defined

1 Variables 03/2009
1.5.2 Area C, Module SEMA: State data: Machine axes (extension of SMA)
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/MachineAxis/...
PRESETActive
Preset state
0 = no preset active
1 = preset active
- UWord r
PRESETVal $AC_PRESET[x] x = Axis

The function PRESETON (...) programs a work offset for an axis. The value of the offset is stored in the variable
'PRESETVal'. The variable can be overwritten by the part program and by the MMC.
aaAcc $AA_ACC[Achse]
Current axial acceleration value
m/s2, 1000 inch/ s2, rev/s2,
0 Double r
user defined
aaAccPercent $AA_ACC_PERCENT[Achse]
Current acceleration value for single-axis interpolation in percent
- 0 0 UWord r
aaActIndexAxPosNo $AA_ACT_INDEX_AX_POS_NO[<Achse>]
Current indexing position; the display depends on
$MN_INDEX_AX_NO_MODE and the division (via table or equidistant)
- 0 Long Integer r
aaAlarmStat $AA_ALARM_STAT
Display indicating whether alarms are active for a PLC-controlled axis.
The relevant coded alarm reactions can be used as a source for
the "Extended Stop and Retract" function.
The data is bit-coded, allowing, where necessary, individual states to be
masked or evaluated separately (bits not listed supply a value of 0)
Bit2 = 1: NOREADY (active rapid deceleration + cancelation of servo enable)
Bit6 = 1: STOPBYALARM (rampm stop in all channel axes)
Bit9 = 1: SETVDI (VDI interface signal "Setting alarm")
Bit13 = 1: FOLLOWUPBYALARM (Follow-up)
- 0 UWord r
aaAxChangeStat $AA_AXCHANGE_STAT[Achse]
Axis status with respect to axis replacement
0: Axis can be replaced
1: Axis is linked to the channel, but can become the PLC, command or reciprocating axis
2: Axis cannot be replaced
- 0 0 2 UWord r

03/2009 1 Variables
aaAxChangeTyp $AA_AXCHANGE_TYP[Achse]
Axis type with respect to axis replacement
0: Axis assigned to the NC program
1: Axis assigned to the PLC or active as command axis or reciprocating axis
2: Other channel has interpolation right
3: Neutral axis
4: Neutral axis controlled from the PLC
5: Other channel has interpolation right; axis is requested for the NC program
6: Other channel has interpolation right; axis is requested as neutral axis
7: Axis is PLC axis or is active as command axis or reciprocating axis; axis is requested for the
NC program
8: Axis is PLC axis or is active as command axis or reciprocating axis; axis is requested as
neutral axis
- 0 0 8 UWord r
aaAxDisable $AA_AX_DISABLE[<Achse>]
Resulting status of axis/spindle disable.
0: Axis/spindle disable not active.
1: Axis/spindle disable active.
- 0 UDoubleword r
aaAxDisableSrc $AA_AX_DISABLE_SRC[<Achse>]
Bitmask which provides the status and source of the currently active axis/spindle disable.
If bit 0 has been set, the axis/spindle disable is active.
The data is bit-coded. Individual states can therefore be masked or evaluated separately if necessary:
Bit0 = 1: Resulting state from all sources: axis/spindle disable active.
Bit1 = 1: Axial signal 'Axis/spindle disable triggered by PLC' is active.
Bit2 = 1: Channel-specific program test is active.
Bit3 = 1: Axial suppression of 'Program test triggered by the PLC' is active.
Bit4 = 1: Axial signal 'Program test (energy saving mode)' is active.
Bit5 = 1: SERUPRO is active.
Bit6 = 1: Coupling object 'Total state is axis/spindle disable' is active.
Bit7 = 1: Coupling object 'Total state is real traveling' is active.
- 0 UDoubleword r
aaBcsOffset $AA_BCS_OFFSET[Achse]
Sum of all axial offsets of an axis,
such as DRF, online tool offset, $AA_OFF and ext. WO.
- 0 Double r
aaBrakeCondB $AA_BRAKE_CONDB[axis]
A braking request consists of a collision direction relating to a coordinate axis in the BCS and a braking priority relating
If the axis / spindle receives a current braking request on account of these requirement(s), bit 0 is set in
$AA_BRAKE_STATE[X] (in the next IPO cycle).\
The highest deceleration priority in positive direction is shown in bits 0 to 3:
0: No pending deceleration request
Spindle stop".
Deceleration always takes place, irrespective of the direction of motion.
13: Priority 13 comprises all motions. Axial deceleration takes place with an emergency stop deceleration ramp.
The highest deceleration priority in negative direction is shown in bits 16 to 19:


1 Variables 03/2009
If the value of the variable is shown in hexadecimal format, the fifth character from the right shows the deceleration
priority
in negative direction while the first number from the right shows the deceleration priority in positive direction.
- 0 0 0xD000D UDoubleword r
aaBrakeCondM $AA_BRAKE_CONDM[axis]
A braking request consists of a collision direction relating to a coordinate axis in the MCS and a braking priority relating
The highest deceleration priority in positive direction is shown in bits 0 to 3:
0: No pending deceleration request
Spindle stop".
Deceleration always takes place, irrespective of the direction of motion.
13: Priority 13 comprises all motions. Axial deceleration takes place with an emergency stop deceleration ramp.
The highest deceleration priority in negative direction is shown in bits 16 to 19:


If the value of the variable is shown in hexadecimal format, the fifth character from the right shows the deceleration
priority
in negative direction while the first number from the right shows the deceleration priority in positive direction.
- 0 0 0xD000D UDoubleword r
aaBrakeState $AA_BRAKE_STATE[axis]
Returns for the axis / spindle whether an active deceleration request has been set on account of the request of
aaBrakeCondB or a VDI interface signal DB31,..DBX4.3 "Feed stop / Spindle stop".
aaChanNo $AA_CHANNO[Achse]
The variable supplies the number of the channel in which the axis
is currently being interpolated.
With value 0, the axis could not be assigned to any channel.
- 0 0 UWord r
aaCoupAct $AA_COUP_ACT[x] x = Spindle following

Current coupling state of the slave spindle
- UWord r
aaCoupCorr $AA_COUP_CORR[Achse]
This variable is used to execute the function "Correct synchronism error".
It returns the compensation value for the position offset for the generic coupling with CPFRS = "MCS".
The actual values of this spindle are compared with the setpoints for the duration (MD 30455
MISC_FUNCTION_MASK, bit 7) of the activation of the VDI interface signal
DB31..,DBX31.6 'Correct synchronism' for the following spindle with coupling active.
The difference is the compensation value, which can be read with this variable.
- 0 Double r
aaCoupCorrDist $AA_COUP_CORR_DIST[Achse]
Generic coupling: path still to be retracted for aaCoupCorr
- 0 Double r

03/2009 1 Variables
aaCoupOffs $AA_COUP_OFFS[x] x = Spindle

Position offset of the synchronous spindle desired value
- Double r
aaCurr $AA_CURR[x] x = Axis

Actual value of the axis/spindle current in A (611D only)
A Double r
aaDepAxO $AA_DEPAXO[Achse]
Dependency on other axes.
Returns an axis code for the defined axis AX containing all the machine axes that have a mechanical dependency on
the defined axis.
aaDtbb $AA_DTBB[x] x = Axis

Axis-specific distance from the beginning of the block in the BCS for positioning and synchronous axes used in
synchronous actions
(note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaDtbreb $AA_DTBREB[axis]
The estimated total distance until the end of deceleration is reached, BCS
- 0 0 Double r
aaDtbrebCmd $AA_DTBREB_CMD[axis]
Specified section of the decelaration distance, BCS
- 0 0 Double r
aaDtbrebCorr $AA_DTBREB_CORR[axis]
Offset section of the deceleration distance, BCS
- 0 0 Double r
aaDtbrebDep $AA_DTBREB_DEP[axis]
Dependent section of the decelaration distance, BCS
- 0 0 Double r
aaDtbrem $AA_DTBREM[axis]
The estimated total distance until the end of deceleration is reached, MCS
- 0 0 Double r
aaDtbremCmd $AA_DTBREM_CMD[axis]
Specified section of the decelaration distance, MCS
- 0 0 Double r
aaDtbremCorr $AA_DTBREM_CORR[axis]
Offset section of the deceleration distance, MCS
- 0 0 Double r

1 Variables 03/2009
aaDtbremDep $AA_DTBREM_DEP[axis]
Dependent section of the decelaration distance, MCS
- 0 0 Double r
aaDteb $AA_DTEB[x] x = Axis

Axis-specific distance to the end of the block in the BCS for positioning and synchronous axes used in synchronous
actions
(note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaDtepb $AA_DTEPB[x] x = Axis

Axis-specific distance-to-go of infeed during oscillation in the BCS
(note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaEnc1Active $AA_ENC1_ACTIVE[Achse]
First measuring system is active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
aaEnc1Ampl $AA_ENC_AMPL[1,ax]
- 0 0 Double r
aaEnc2Active $AA_ENC2_ACTIVE[Achse]
Second measuring system is active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
aaEnc2Ampl $AA_ENC_AMPL[2,ax]
- 0 0 Double r
aaEncActive $AA_ENC_ACTIVE[Achse]
Measuring system is active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
aaEsrEnable $AA_ESR_ENABLE[Achse]
(Axial) enabling of reactions of "Extended Stop and Retract" function.
The selected axial ESR reaction must be parameterized in MD $MA_ESR_REACTION.
beforehand. The corresponding Stop or Retract reactions can be activated via
$AN_ESR_TRIGGER (or for individual drives in the event of communications failure/
DC-link undervoltage), generator-mode operation is automatically activated in response to
undervoltage conditions.
0: FALSE
1: TRUE
- 0 0 1 UWord r

03/2009 1 Variables
aaEsrStat $AA_ESR_STAT[Achse]
(Axial) status checkback signals of "Extended Stop and Retract" function,
which can be applied as input signals for the gating logic of the ESR (synchronous actions).

evaluated separately if necessary:
Bit0 = 1: Generator mode is activated
Bit1 = 1: Retract operation is activated
Bit2 = 1: Stop operation is activated
Bit3 = 1: Risk of undervoltage (DC-link voltage monitoring,
voltage has dropped below warning threshold)
Bit4 = 1: Speed has dropped below minimum generator mode threshold (i.e. no more
regenerative rotation energy is available).
- 0 UWord r
aaEsrTrigger $AA_ESR_TRIGGER
Activation of "NC-controlled ESR" for PLC-controlled axis
- 0 0 1 UWord r
aaFixPointSelected $AA_FIX_POINT_SELECTED[<Achse>]
Selected fixed point: Number of the fixed point that is to be approached
- 0 UDoubleword r
aaIbnCorr $AA_IBN_CORR[<Achse>]
Current BZS setpoint value of an axis including override components
- 0 Double r
aaIenCorr $AA_IEN_CORR[<Achse>]
Current SZS setpoint value of an axis including override components
- 0 Double r
aaInSync $AA_IN_SYNC[Achse]
Synchronization status of the following axis with master value coupling and ELG
0: Synchronization is not running
1: Synchronization is running, i.e. following axis is being synchronized
- 0 0 1 UWord r
aaInposStat $AA_INPOS_STAT[Achse]
Status for the programmed position
0: No status available (axis/spindle is outside of the programmed position)
1: Travel motion pending
2: Position setpoint reached
3: Position reached with 'exact stop coarse'
4: Position reached with 'exact stop fine'
- 0 0 4 UWord r
aaJerkCount $AA_JERK_COUNT[Achse]
Total traverse processes of an axis with jerk
- 0 Double r
aaJerkTime $AA_JERK_TIME[Achse]
Total traverse time of an axis with jerk
- 0 Double r

1 Variables 03/2009
aaJerkTotal $AA_JERK_TOT[Achse]
Overall total jerk of an axis
- 0 Double r
aaJogPosAct $AA_JOG_POS_ACT[Achse]
Position reached for JOG to position
- 0 0 1 UWord r
aaJogPosSelected $AA_JOG_POS_SELECTED[Achse]
JOG to position is active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
aaLeadP $AA_LEAD_P[x] x = Axis

Actual lead value position
- Double r
aaLeadPTurn $AA_LEAD_P_TURN
Current master value - position component lost
as a result of modulo reduction
- 0 0 Double r
aaLeadSp $AA_LEAD_SP[x] x = Axis

Simulated lead value - position
- Double r
aaLeadSv $AA_LEAD_SV[x] x = Axis

Simulated leading value velocity
- Double r
aaLeadV $AA_LEAD_V[x] x = Axis

Actual lead value - velocity
- Double r
aaLoad $AA_LOAD[x] x = Axis

Drive load in % (611D only)
% Double r
aaMaslState $AA_MASL_STAT
Each slave axis currently coupled via master-slave delivers the machine axis number of the corresponding master
axis.
Zero is displayed as default for inactive coupling.
A master axis also shows default value zero.
0: No coupling for this axis configured, or axis is master axis, or no coupling active
>0: Machine axis number of the master axis with which the slave axis is currently coupled
aaMeaAct $AA_MEAACT[Achse]
Axial measuring active
- 0 0 1 UWord r

03/2009 1 Variables
aaMm $AA_MM[x] x = Axis

Latched probe position in the machine coordinate system
- Double wr
aaMm1 $AA_MM1[x] x = Axis

Access to measurement result of trigger event 1 in the MCS
- Double wr

- Double wr

- Double wr

- Double wr
aaOff $AA_OFF[x] x = Axis

Superimposed position offset from synchronous actions
- Double r
aaOffLimit $AA_OFF_LIMIT[x] x = Axis

Limit for axial correction $AA_OFF reached (Note: for SYNACT only)
0: Limit value not reached
1: Limit value reached in positive axis direction
11: Limit value reached in negative axis direction
- UWord r
aaOffVal $AA_OFF_VAL[x]
Integrated value of overlaid motion for an axis.
The negative value of this variable can be used to cancel an overlaid motion.
e.g. $AA_OFF[axis] = -$AA_OFF_VAL[axis]
- 0 Double r
aaOnFixPoint $AA_FIX_ON_POINT[<Achse>]
Number of the fixed point at which the axis stands
- 0 UDoubleword r
aaOscillBreakPos1 $AA_OSCILL_BREAK_POS1[<Achse>]
- Double r
aaOscillBreakPos2 $AA_OSCILL_BREAK_POS2[<Achse>]
- Double r

1 Variables 03/2009
aaOscillReversePos1 $AA_OSCILL_REVERSE_POS1[x] x = Axis

Current reverse position 1 for oscillation in the BCS. For synchronous actions the value of the setting data
- Double r
aaOscillReversePos2 $AA_OSCILL_REVERSE_POS2[x] x = Axis

Current reverse position 2 for oscillation in the BCS; For synchronous actions the value of the setting data
- Double r
aaOvr $AA_OVR[x] x = Axis

Axial override for synchronous actions
- Double r
aaPlcOvr $AA_PLC_OVR[Achse]
Axial override specified by PLC for motion-synchronous actions
- 100 0 Double r
aaPolfa $AA_POLFA
The programmed retraction position of the single axis
- Double r
aaPolfaValid $AA_POLFA_VALID
States whether the retraction of the single axis is programmed
0: No retraction programmed for the single axis
1: Retraction programmed as position
2: Retraction programmed as distance
- 0 0 2 UWord r
aaPower $AA_POWER[x] x = Axis

Drive power in W (611D only)
W Double r
aaProgIndexAxPosNo $AA_PROG_INDEX_AX_POS_NO[Achse]
Programmed indexing position
0: No indexing axis, therefore no indexing position available
>0: Number of the programmed indexing position
- 0 0 UWord r
aaRef $AA_REF[Achse]
Axis is referenced
0: Axis is not referenced
1: Axis is referenced
- 0 0 1 UWord r
aaReposDelay $AA_REPOS_DELAY[Achse]
REPOS suppression active
0: REPOS suppression is currently not active for this axis
1: REPOS suppression is currently active for this axis
- 0 0 1 UWord r

03/2009 1 Variables
aaScPar $AA_SCPAR[Achse]
Current setpoint parameter set
aaSnglAxStat $AA_SNGLAX_STAT
Display status of a PLC-controlled axis
0: Not a single axis
1: Reset
2: Ended
3: Interrupted
4: Active
5: Alarm
- 0 UWord r
aaSoftendn $AA_SOFTENDN[x] x = Axis

Software end position, negative direction
- Double r
aaSoftendp $AA_SOFTENDP[x] x = Axis

Software end position, positive direction
- Double r
aaStat $AA_STAT[]
Axis state
0: no axis state available
1: travel command is active
2: axis has reached the IPO end. only for channel axes
3: axis in position (exact stop coarse) for all axes
4: axis in position (exact stop fine) for all axes
- UWord r
aaSync $AA_SYNC[x] x = Axis

Coupling status of the following axis with master value coupling
0: No synchronism
1: Synchronism coarse
2: Synchronism fine
3: Synchronism coarse and fine
- UWord r
aaSyncDiff $AA_SYNCDIFF[Achse]
Setpoint synchronism difference
0 Double r
defined
aaSyncDiffStat $AA_SYNCDIFF_STAT[Achse]
Status of the setpoint synchronism difference
-4: No valid value in aaSyncDiff, coupled motion from part program
-3: Reserved
-2: Reserved
-1: No valid value in aaSyncDiff
0: No valid value in aaSyncDiff, coupling not active
1: Valid value in aaSyncDiff

1 Variables 03/2009
aaTorque $AA_TORQUE[x] x = Axis

Desired torque value in Nm (611D only)
Nm Double r
aaTotalOvr $AA_TOTAL_OVR[Achse]
The total axial override for motion-synchronous actions
- 100 0 Double r
aaTravelCount $AA_TRAVEL_COUNT[Achse]
Total traverse processes of an axis
- 0 Double r
aaTravelCountHS $AA_TRAVEL_COUNT_HS[Achse]
Total traverse processes of an axis at high speed
- 0 Double r
aaTravelDist $AA_TRAVEL_DIST[Achse]
Total travel path of an axis in mm or degrees
- 0 Double r
aaTravelDistHS $AA_TRAVEL_DIST_HS[Achse]
Total travel path of an axis at high speed in mm or degrees
- 0 Double r
aaTravelTime $AA_TRAVEL_TIME[Achse]
Total traverse time of an axis in seconds
- 0 Double r
aaTravelTimeHS $AA_TRAVEL_TIME_HS[Achse]
Total traverse time of an axis at high speed in seconds
- 0 Double r
aaTyp $AA_TYP[x] x = Axis

Axis type
0: axis in other channel
1: channel axis of same channel
2: neutral axis
3: PLC axis
4: reciprocating axis
5: neutral axis, currently traversing in JOG
6: slave axis coupled via master value
7: coupled motion slave axis
8: command axis
9: compile cycle axis
- UWord r
aaType $AA_TYPE[Achse]
Cross-channel axis type
0: Axis type cannot be determined
1: NC program axis
2: Neutral axis
3: PLC axis
4: Reciprocating axis
5: Neutral axis that is currently executing a JOG or homing motion

03/2009 1 Variables
6: Following axis coupled to the master value

7: Coupled motion of the following axis, activated in a synchronized action
8: Command axis
9: Compile Cycle axis
10: Coupled slave axis (master-slave function.)
11: Program axis that is currently executing a JOG or homing motion
- 0 0 11 UWord r
aaVactB $AA_VACTB[X]
Axis velocity in basic coordinate system
0.0 Double r
defined
aaVactM $AA_VACTM[X]
Axis velocity in machine coordinate system
0.0 Double r
defined
aaVc $AA_VC[x] x = Axis

Additive correction value for path feed or axial feed
- Double r
acRpValid $AC_RPVALID[Achse]
Reapproach position valid
0: Reapproach position not valid
1: Reapproach position valid
- 0 0 1 UWord r
ackSafeMeasPos
Confirmation of SI actual position
0 = not confirmed
0x00AC = confirmed
- UWord wr
actCouppPosOffset $VA_COUP_OFFS[x] x = Axis S3

Position offset of an axis to a leading axis / leading spindle (actual value)
0 360 Double r
defined
actFeedRate S5
- Double r
actIndexAxPosNo
Current indexing position number
- UWord r
actSpeedRel
Actual value of rotary speed (referring to the maximum speed in %; for 611D in MD1401), for linear drives actual value
of the velocity.
% Double r

1 Variables 03/2009
actValResol
Actual value resolution. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module)
Double r
defined
activeSvOverride
Currently active SG override factor in the NCK
- -1 -1 100 Long Integer r
amSetupState
State variable of the PI Service Automatic set-up of an asynchronous motor
0 = inactive
1 = wait for PLC enable
2 = wait for key NC-start
3 = active
4 = stopped by Servo + fine code in the upper byte
5 = stopped by 611D + fine code in the upper byte
6 = stopped by NCK + fine code in the upper byte
- 0 0 0xff06 UWord r
axComp
Sum of axis-specific compensation values (CEC Cross Error compensation and temperature compensation). The
physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
Double r
defined
axisActiveInChan
0 = inactive
1 = active
- UWord r
axisFeedRateUnit
0 = mm/min
1 = inch/min
2 = degree/min
- UWord r
chanAxisNoGap
Display of existing axis, i.e. no axis gap in channel.
0: Axis does not exist
1: Axis does exist
- 0 0 1 UWord r
chanNoAxisIsActive
Channel number in which the channel axis is currently active
0 = axis is not assigned to any channel
1 to maxnumChannels (Area.:N / Module:Y) = channel number
- UWord r
cmdContrPos
Desired value of position after fine interpolation
Double r
defined

03/2009 1 Variables
cmdCouppPosOffset $AA_COUP_OFFS[x] x = Axis S3

Position offset of an axis referring to the leading axis / leading spindle (desired value)
0 360 Double r
defined
cmdFeedRate
- Double r
cmdSpeedRel
Desired value of rotary speed. (referring to the max. speed in %; for 611D in MD 1401). For linear motors actual value
of velocity.
% Double r
contrConfirmActive
Controller enable
0 = no controller enable
1 = controller enable
- UWord r
contrMode
Identifier for controller mode servo
0 = position control
1 = speed control
2 = stop
3 = park
4 = follow-up
(set the mode through VDI interface and partly through part program)
- UWord r
displayAxis $MC_DISPLAY_AXIS Bit16-31

Identifier indicating whether axis is displayed by MMC as a machine axis.
distPerDriveRevol
Rotary drive: Load-side path corresponding to one revolution of the drive.
Is returned in the unit of the internal computational resolution INT_INCR_PER_MM (for linear axes) or
INT_INCR_PER_DEG (for rotary axes / spindles) taking into account gear ratios etc.
In the case of linear axes, the pitch of the ball screw is also included in the calculation.
In the case of linear motors, a fixed value of "1mm" is used for the ball screw pitch instead of the non-existent ball
screw.
Double r
defined
drfVal
DRF value
- 0 Double r

1 Variables 03/2009
drive2ndTorqueLimit
2nd torque limit. With linear motors: 2nd force limit
0 = inactive
1 = active
- UWord r
driveActMotorSwitch
Actual motor wiring (star/delta)
0 = star
1 = delta
- UWord r
driveActParamSet
Number of the actual drive parameter set
- 1 8 UWord r
driveClass1Alarm
Message ZK1 drive alarm
0 = no alarm set
1= alarm set (fatal error occured)
- UWord r
driveContrMode
Control mode of drive
0 = current control
1 = speed control
- UWord r
driveCoolerTempWarn
Heatsink temperature monitoring
0 = temperature OK
1 = overtemperature
- UWord r
driveDesMotorSwitch
Motor wiring selection (star/delta)
0 = star
1 = delta
- UWord r
driveDesParamSet
Desired parameter set of the drive
- 1 8 UWord r
driveFastStop
Ramp-function generator rapid stop
0 = not stopped
1 = stopped
- UWord r
driveFreqMode
I/F mode
- UWord r

03/2009 1 Variables
driveImpulseEnabled
Enable inverter impulse (checkback signal to impulseEnable)
0 = not enabled
1 = enabled
- UWord r
driveIndex
0 = drive does not exist
1 to 15 = logical drive number
- 0 15 UWord r
driveIntegDisable
Integrator disable
0 = not disabled
1 = disabled
- UWord r
driveLinkVoltageOk
State of the DC link voltage
0 = OK
1 = not OK
- UWord r
driveMotorTempWarn
Motor temperature warning
0 = temperature OK
1 = overtemperature
- UWord r
driveNumCrcErrors
CRC errors on the drive bus
(transmission errors when writing data to the 611D; values may range up to FFFFH)
0 = no error
- UWord r
driveParked
Parking axis
0 = no parking axis
1 = parking axis
- UWord r
drivePowerOn
Drive switched on
0 = drive not switched on
1 = drive switched on
- UWord r
driveProgMessages
Configurable messages (via machine data)
- UWord r

1 Variables 03/2009
driveReady
Drive ready
0 = drive not ready
1 = drive ready
- UWord r
driveRunLevel
Current state reached during the boot process
(range: coarse state (0 to 5) * 100 + fine state (up to 22)
Booting the firmware ---> 0 XX
entering the configuration ---> 1XX
hardware-init, communication-init
loading, converting data ---> 2XX
changing bus addressing ---> 3XX
preparing synchronization ---> 4XX
activating interrupt ---> 519
XX ==> fine state

- UWord r
driveSetupMode
Set-up mode
0 = inactive
1 = active
- UWord r
driveSpeedSmoothing
Smoothing the desired value of the rotary speed, for linear drives: smoothing the desired value of the velocity
0 = no smoothing
1 = smoothing
- UWord r
effComp1
Sum of the compensation values for encoder 1. The value results from: temperature compensation, backlash
Double r
defined
effComp2
Sum of the compensation values for encoder 2. The value results from: temperature compensation, backlash
Double r
defined
encChoice
Active encoder
0 = does not exist
1 = encoder 1
2 = encoder 2
- UWord r
fctGenState
State of the function generator
- UWord r

03/2009 1 Variables
feedRateOvr
Feedrate override (only if axis is a positioning axis)
% Double r
focStat $AA_FOC[x]
Current status of "Travel with limited torque" function
0-2
0: FOC not active
1: FOC modal active (programming of FOCON[])
2: FOC non-modal active (programming of FOC[])
- 0 0 2 UWord r
fxsInfo $VA_FXS_INFO[Achse]
Additional information on travel to fixed stop if
$VA_FXS[]=2, or OPI variable fxsStat=2.
0 No additional information available
1 No approach motion programmed
2 Programmed end position reached, movement ended
3 Abort by NC RESET (Reset key)
4 Fixed stop window exited
5 Torque reduction was rejected by drive
6 PLC has canceled enable signals
- 0 0 6 UWord r
fxsStat $AA_FXS[x] x = Axis

State after travelling to fixed stop
0 = normal control
1 = fixed stop reached
2 = failed
- UWord r
handwheelAss
- 0 3 UWord r
impulseEnable
Impulse enable for drive
0 = not enabled
1 = enabled
- UWord r
index
- UWord r
isDriveUsed
One or more machine axes are assigned to each drive.
The drive can only be controlled at any one time by one of these machine axes.
The machine manufacturer makes the selection.
The status of the drive control changes dynamically.
- 0 0 1 UWord r

1 Variables 03/2009
kVFactor
position control gain factor
16.667 1/s Double r
lag
Following error = desired value of position after fine interpolation - actual value of position. The physical unit is defined
in measUnit (in this module).
Double r
defined
logDriveNo
0 = not available
1 to 15 = drive number
- 0 15 UWord r
measFctState
State of the probing function
- UWord r
measPos1
Double r
defined
measPos2
Double r
defined
measPosDev
Actual position difference between the two encoders. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
Double r
defined
measUnit
Unit for service values of the drives
0 = mm
1 = inch
2 = grd
- UWord r
paramSetNo
Number of parameter set
- 1 8 UWord r
preContrFactTorque
Feed forward control factor torque
Nm Double r

03/2009 1 Variables
preContrFactVel
Feed forward control factor velocity
- Double r
preContrMode
Feed forward control mode
0 = inactive
1 = velocity feed forward
2 = torque feed forward
- UWord r
progIndexAxPosNo
Programmed indexing position number
- UWord r
qecLrnIsOn
Quadrant error compensation learning active
0 = inactive
1 = Neuronal-QEC learning active
2 = Standard-QEC active
3 = Standard-QEC with adaptation of correction value active
4 = Neuronal-QEC active
5 = Neuronal-QEC with adaptation of measuring time active
6 = Neuronal-QEC with adaptation of decay time of correction value active
7 = Neuronal-QEC with adaptation of measuring time and decay time of correction value active
- 0 7 UWord r
refPtBusy
Axis is being referenced
0 = axis is not being referenced
1 = axis is being referenced
- UWord r
refPtCamNo
Reference point cam
0 = no cam approached
1 = cam 1
2 = cam 2
3 = cam 3
4 = cam 4
- UWord r
refPtPhase
Referencing phases
0 = False
1 = Phase 1
2 = Phase 2
3 = Phase 3
4 = Phase 4
- UWord r

1 Variables 03/2009
refPtStatus
Identifier indicating whether an axis requires referencing and is referenced.
Note regarding exchange axes:

An exchange axis need only ever be referenced in the channel to which it is currently assigned. A referenced
exchange axis is thus logged onto the channel in which it is traversing with value "3" (requires referencing and
referenced) and in other channels with value "1" (does not require referencing, but referenced).
A set bit means:
Until SW release 3.1:

bit0: at least 1 measuring system has been referenced
From SW release 3.2:

bit0: active measuring system has been referenced
(The busy signal effects the state)
- Achsindex UWord r
Multi-line: no numMachAxes
resolvStatus1
0 = Undefined
1 = Referenced
2 = Activated
- UWord r
resolvStatus2
0 = Undefined
1 = Referenced
2 = Activated
- UWord r
safeAcceptCheckPhase
Flag for NCK-side acceptance test phase, the human-machine interface can determine which acceptance test phase is
present on the NCK.
0: NCK has acceptance test phase inactive = 0

0ACH: NCK has acceptance test phase active
- 0 0 0ACH UWord r
safeAcceptTestMode
SI PowerOn alarms can be acknowledged by Reset in acceptance test mode
0: Acceptance test mode: SI PowerOn alarms cannot be acknowledged by Reset
0ACH: Acceptance test mode: SI PowerOn alarms can be acknowledged by Reset
- 0 0 0FFH UWord wr
safeAcceptTestPhase
Flag for acceptance test phase
0: Acceptance test Wizard not selected, activate NCK-side alarm suppression
0ACH: Dialogs for acceptance test support selected, deactivate NCK-side alarm suppression
- 0 0 0FFH UWord wr

03/2009 1 Variables
safeAcceptTestSE
Flag for NCK-side SE acceptance test. The human-machine interface starts checking the safe limit positions during the
acceptance test
0: NCK has SE acceptance test inactive = 0. The single channel SW limit positions are activated.
0ACH: NCK is to activate SE acceptance test. The single channel SW limit positions are deactivated in this way.
- 0 0 0ACH UWord r
safeAcceptTestState
Flag for acceptance test status, the human-machine interface can determine which acceptance test mode is present
on the NCK.
0: NCK has acceptance test mode inactive
0CH: Acceptance test mode not activated because SI PowerOn alarms already present.
The causes of the SI PowerOn alarms must be eliminated first.
0DH: Acceptance test mode not activated, the HMI writes invalid values in safeAcceptTestMode to the NCK.
0ACH: NCK has acceptance test mode active
- 0 0 0FFH UWord r
safeActPosDiff
Current actual value difference betw. NCK and drive monitoring channels
0.0 Double r
defined
safeActVeloDiff
Current speed difference between NCK and drive monitoring channels
0.0 Double r
defined
safeActVeloLimit
Safe limit of actual speed
-1 => no actual speed limit active
>= 0 => limit of actual speed is active
-1 Double r
defined
safeActiveCamTrack
Status Safe cam track (active/inactive)
- 0 0 0xF UWord r
safeDesVeloLimit
Safe limit of desired speed
-1 => no desired speed limit active
>= 0 => desired speed limit is active
-1 Double r
defined
safeFctEnable
Safe operation active
0 = inactive
1 = active
- UWord r

1 Variables 03/2009
safeInputSig
Safe input signals of the axis
- UWord r
safeInputSig2
Safe input signals part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
safeInputSigDrive
Safe input signals of the drive
- UWord r
safeInputSigDrive2
Safe input signals of the drive part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
safeMaxVeloDiff
Maximum speed difference between NCK and drive monitoring channels since last NCK Reset
0.0 Double r
defined
safeMeasPos $VA_IS[x] x = Axis

Safe actual position of the axis. The physical unit is defined in the variable measUnit (in this module).
Double r
defined
safeMeasPosDrive
Safe actual position of drive. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
Double r
defined
safeOutputSig
Safe output signals of the axis
- UWord r
safeOutputSig2
Safe output signals part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
safeOutputSigCam
Results of the NCK safe cam evaluation
safeOutputSigCamDrive
Results of the drive safe cam evaluation
safeOutputSigDrive
Safe output signals of the drive
- UWord r

03/2009 1 Variables
safeOutputSigDrive2
Safe output signals of the drive part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
safePosCtrlActive
Axis monitors absolute position
0 = Axis does not monitor absolute position (no SE/SN)
1 = Axis monitors absolute position
- 0 0 1 UWord r
safeStopOtherAxis
Stop on another axis
0: No stop on another axis
1: Stop on another axis
- 0 0 1 UWord r
spec
Axis specification
0 = path axis
- UWord r
stateContrActive
State controller (not available)
1 = TRUE
0 = FALSE
- UWord r
subSpec T1
Subspecification
0 = normal axis
1 = indexing axis
- UWord r
torqLimit
Torque limitation value (referring to the nominal value of the drive). For linear motors: force limitation value.
% Double r
traceState1
0 = idle state
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- UWord r
traceState2
0 = idle state
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- UWord r

1 Variables 03/2009
traceState3
0 = idle state
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- UWord r
traceState4
0 = idle state
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
- UWord r
trackErrContr
Position controller difference (actual value / desired value of position)
Double r
defined
trackErrDiff
Contour deviation (difference actual value of position and calculated dynamical model)
Double r
defined
type
Axis type
1 = linear axis
2 = rotary axis
3 = spindle
- UWord r
vaAbsoluteEnc1DeltaInit $VA_ABSOLUTE_ENC_DELTA_INIT[1,Achse]
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
vaAbsoluteEnc1ErrCnt $VA_ABSOLUTE_ENC_ERR_CNT[1,Achse]
vaAbsoluteEnc1State $VA_ABSOLUTE_ENC_STATE[1,Achse]
vaAbsoluteEnc1ZeroMonMax $VA_ABSOLUTE_ENC_ZERO_MON_MAX[1,Achse]
- 0 0 UDoubleword r

03/2009 1 Variables
vaAbsoluteEnc2DeltaInit $VA_ABSOLUTE_ENC_DELTA_INIT[2,Achse]
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
vaAbsoluteEnc2ErrCnt $VA_ABSOLUTE_ENC_ERR_CNT[2,Achse]
vaAbsoluteEnc2State $VA_ABSOLUTE_ENC_STATE[2,Achse]
vaAbsoluteEnc2ZeroMonMax $VA_ABSOLUTE_ENC_ZERO_MON_MAX[2,Achse]
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
vaCecCompVal $VA_CEC_COMP_VAL[Achse]
Axial sag compensation value
0 Double r
defined
vaCurr $VA_CURR[Achse]
Drive actual current value
- 0 Double r
vaDistTorque $VA_DIST_TORQUE[Achse]
Disturbing torque/max. torque (motor end, York)
% 0 -100 100 Double r
vaDpe $VA_DPE[x1]
Status of power enable of a machine axis
0-1
- 0 0 1 UWord r
vaEnc1CompVal $VA_ENC1_COMP_VAL[Achse]
0 Double r
defined
vaEnc1ZeroMonAccessCnt $VA_ENC_ZERO_MON_ACCESS_CNT[1,Achse]
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
vaEnc1ZeroMonAct $VA_ENC_ZERO_MON_ACT[1,Achse]
- 0 0 UDoubleword r

1 Variables 03/2009
vaEnc1ZeroMonErrCnt $VA_ENC_ZERO_MON_ERR_CNT[1,Achse]
vaEnc1ZeroMonInit $VA_ENC_ZERO_MON_INIT[1,Achse]
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
vaEnc2CompVal $VA_ENC2_COMP_VAL[Achse]
0 Double r
defined
vaEnc2ZeroMonAccessCnt $VA_ENC_ZERO_MON_ACCESS_CNT[2,Achse]
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
vaEnc2ZeroMonAct $VA_ENC_ZERO_MON_ACT[2,Achse]
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
vaEnc2ZeroMonErrCnt $VA_ENC_ZERO_MON_ERR_CNT[2,Achse]
vaEnc2ZeroMonInit $VA_ENC_ZERO_MON_INIT[2,Achse]
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
vaFoc $VA_FOC[Achse]
Actual status of "ForceControl"
0: ForceControl not active
1: Modal ForceControl active
2: Non-modal ForceControl active
- 0 0 2 UWord r
vaFxs $VA_FXS[Achse]
Actual status of "Travel to fixed stop"
0: Axis not at fixed stop
1: Successful travel to fixed stop
2: Unsuccessful travel to fixed stop
3: Travel to fixed stop selection active
4: Fixed stop has been detected
5: Travel to fixed stop deselection active
- 0 0 5 UWord r
vaIm $VA_IM[x]
Encoder actual value in the machine coordinate system (measured
active measuring system)
- 0 0 Double r

03/2009 1 Variables
vaIm1 $VA_IM1[x]
- 0 0 Double r
vaIm2 $VA_IM2[x]
- 0 0 Double r
vaLagError $VA_LAG_ERROR[Achse]
Axis following error
- 0 Double r
vaLoad $VA_LOAD[Achse]
Drive utilization in %
- 0 -100 100 Double r
vaPosctrlMode $VA_POSCTRL_MODE[Achse]
Position controller mode
0: Position control
1: Speed control
2: Holding
3: Parking
4: Tracking
- 0 0 4 UWord r
vaPower $VA_POWER[Achse]
Active drive power
- 0 Double r
vaPressureA $VA_PRESSURE_A[Achse]
Pressure on A end of the cylinder in bar (only for 611D Hydraulic)
- 0 Double r
vaPressureB $VA_PRESSURE_B[Achse]
Pressure on B end of the cylinder in bar (only for 611D Hydraulic)
- 0 Double r
vaSce $VA_SCE[Achse]
Status of speed controller enable
- 0 0 1 UWord r
vaStopSi $VA_STOPSI[Achse]
Stop from Safety Integrated
-1: No stop
0: Stop A
1: Stop B
2: Stop C
3: Stop D
4: Stop E
5: Stop F
10: Test stop of NC
11: Test of ext. pulse suppression
- 0 Long Integer r

1 Variables 03/2009
vaSyncDiff $VA_SYNCDISFF[Achse]
Actual value synchronism difference
0 Long Integer r
defined
vaSyncDiffStat $VA_SYNCDIFF_STAT[Achse]
-4: Reserved
vaTempCompVal $VA_TEMP_COMP_VAL[Achse]
Axial temperature compensation value
0 Double r
defined
vaTorque $VA_TORQUE[Achse]
Drive torque setpoint
- 0 Double r
vaTorqueAtLimit $VA_TORQUE_AT_LIMIT[Achse]
Status "effective torque equals specified torque limit"
0: Effective torque lower than torque limit

1: Effective torque has reached torque limit
- 0 0 1 UWord r
vaVactm $VA_VACTM[x] x = Axis

Axis velocity actual value on the load side in the MCS
- Double r
vaValveLift $VA_VALVELIFT[Achse]
Actual valve lift in mm (only for 611D Hydraulic)
- 0 Double r
vaXfaultSi $VA_XFAULTSI[Achse]
Stop F through cross-checking error active
Bit 0 set: An actual value error has been discovered in the cross-check between NCK and 611D
Bit 1 set: Some error has been discovered in the cross-check between NCK and 611D
and the waiting time until Stop B ($MA_SAFE_STOP_SWITCH_TIME_F) is triggered is running or has
expired
- 0 Long Integer r

03/2009 1 Variables
1.5.3 Area C, Module SGA: State data: Geometry axes in tool offset
memory
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/GeometricAxis/...
All status data that are dependent on machine movement and specified in the workpiece coordinate
system are included in module SGA. Supplementary information can be found in module SEGA. The
individual variables are defined as arrays where the line index is the number of the axis (assigned to the
current channel).The variable "name" in module SGA with the line index in question identifies the axis.
The assignment of the line indices in modules SGA and SEGA is identical.
With SW 5.2 and later, OPI modules SGA and SEGA can be addressed via the geo-axis no. instead of via
the channel axis no.:
Line index 1001: 1st geo-axis
Line index 1002: 2nd geo-axis
Line index 1003: 3rd geo-axis
The number of channel axes (geometry, special axes and spindles) can be found in "numMachAxes" in
module Y in area C.
actIncrVal
0 = INC_10000
1 = INC_1000
2 = INC_100
3 = INC_10
4 = INC_1
5 = INC_VAR
6 = INC_JOG_CONT
7 = no increment mode has been set
- UWord r
actProgPos
Programmed position, actual value. The physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module)
Double r
defined
actToolBasePos
Double r
defined
actToolEdgeCenterPos $AA_IW[x] x = Axis

Center point of a cutting edge. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (from this module)
Double r
defined
cmdProgPos
Programmed position, desired value. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module)
Double r
defined
cmdToolBasePos
Double r
defined

1 Variables 03/2009
cmdToolEdgeCenterPos
Position of the cutting edge center point. Physical unit is defined in variable extUnit (in this module).
Double r
defined
extUnit
Current physical unit of the related geometry axis or auxiliary axis
0 = mm
1 = inch
2 = degree
4 = userdef
- UWord r
name
Axis name
- String[32] r
progDistToGo
Programmed position, distance-to-go. The physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
Double r
defined
progREPOS
Programmed position, REPOS. The physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
Double r
defined
status
Axis status
- UWord r
subType
Axis type geometry or auxiliary axis
0 = auxiliary axis
1 = geometry axis
2 = orientation axis
- UWord r
toolBaseDistToGo
Tool base distance-to-go. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module)
Double r
defined
toolBaseREPOS
Double r
defined

03/2009 1 Variables
toolEdgeCenterDistToGo
Center point of cutting edge distance-to-go. Physical unit results from the variable extUnit (in this module)
Double r
defined
toolEdgeCenterREPOS
Center point of the cutting edge REPOS. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
Double r
defined
varIncrVal
Setable value for INC_VAR. The physical unit depends on whether the axis is rotary or linear. Linear axes: 1mm rotary
axes: 1/1000 degrees
Double wr
defined
1.5.4 Area C, Module SEGA: State data: Geometry axes in tool offset
memory (extension of SGA)
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/GeometricAxis/...
All status data that are dependent on machine movement and specified in the workpiece coordinate
system are combined in module SGA. Supplementary information can be found in module SEGA. The
individual variables are defined as arrays where the line index is the number of the axis (assigned to the
current channel).The variable "name" in module SGA with the line index in question identifies the axis.
The assignment of the line indices in modules SGA and SEGA is identical.
With SW 5.2 and later, OPI modules SGA and SEGA can be addressed via the geo-axis no. instead of via
the channel axis no.:
Line index 1001: 1st geo-axis
Line index 1002: 2nd geo-axis
Line index 1003: 3rd geo-axis
The number of channel axes (geometry, special axes and spindles) can be found in "numMachAxes" in
module Y in area C.
aaAcsRel $AA_ACS_REL[Achse]
The axial variable $AA_ACS_REL[ax] determines the current relative setpoint in the settable zero coordinate system
(SZS) for the corresponding axis. The setpoint corresponds to $AA_IEN[ax], which is transformed by the current
relative system frame $P_RELFRAME. The axial positions lie in the relative settable zero system.
0 Double r
defined
aaDelt $AA_DELT[x] x = Axis

Stored axial distance-to-go in the WCS after axial delete-distance-to-go DELDTG(axis) for synchronous actions
- Double r
aaDiamStat $AA_DIAM_STAT[]
Status of the diameter programming as a function of configuration and programming
Bit 0=0: Diameter programming inactive
Bit 0=1: Diameter programming active
Bit 1=0: Channel-specific diameter programming
- 0 0 15 UWord r

1 Variables 03/2009
aaDtbw $AA_DTBW[x] x = Aaxis

Axial distance from the beginning of the block in the WCS for positioning and synchronous axes for synchronous
motion
- Double r
aaDtepw $AA_DTEPW[x] x = Axis

Axial distance-to-go for infeed during oscillation in the WCS (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
aaDtew $AA_DTEW[x] x = Axis

Axial distance to the end of the block in the WCS for positioning and synchronous axes for synchronous actions
- Double r
aaDtsb $AA_DTSB
Path from the motion starting point in the BCS
Double r
defined
aaDtsw $AA_DTSW
Path from the motion starting point in the WCS
Double r
defined
aaIb $AA_IB
Current BCS setpoint of an axis
Double r
defined
aaIbCorr $AA_IB_CORR
Current BCS setpoint value of an axis including override components
- Double r
aaIbc $AA_IBC[Achse]
The axial variable $AA_IBC[ax] determines the setpoint of a Cartesian axis lying between BCS and MCS. Cartesian
means that the axis is a linear axis, and it lies plane parallel to a coordinate axis in a clockwise coordinate system.
If a geometry axis is still Cartesian at the output of the nth transformation, then this value is returned.
The axis identifier used must represent a geometry axis in the BCS, otherwise the variable returns the value 0.
0 Double r
defined
aaItr1 $AA_ITR[Achse, 1]
The axial variable determines the current setpoint of an axis at the output of the 1st chained transformation.
0 Double r
defined
The axial variable determines the current setpoint of an axis at the output of the 2nd chained transformation.
0 Double r
defined

03/2009 1 Variables
The axial variable determines the current setpoint of an axis at the output of the 3rd chained transformation.
0 Double r
defined
aaIwCorr $AA_IW_CORR
Current WCS setpoint value of an axis including override components
- Double r
aaMw $AA_MW[x] x = Axis

Latched probe position retransformed in the WCS
- Double wr
aaMw1 $AA_MW1[Achse]
Access to measurement result of trigger event 1 in the WCS
- Double wr
- Double wr
- Double wr
- Double wr
aaPcsRel $AA_PCS_REL[Achse]
The axial variable $AA_PCS_REL[ax] determines the current relative setpoint of the corresponding axis in the
workpiece coordinate system (WCS). The setpoint corresponds to $AA_IW[ax], which is transformed by the current
relative system frame $P_RELFRAME. The axial positions lie in the relative workpiece coordinate system.
0 Double r
defined
aaSccStat $AA_SCC_STAT[]
Status of the G96/G961/G962 assignment as a function of configuration and programming
Bit 0=0: Axis is not assigned to G96/G961/G962
Bit 0=1: Axis is assigned to G96/G961/G962
- 0 0 1 UWord r
aaTOff $AA_TOFF[ ]
Value of the superimposed motions which have been retracted in the individual tool directions via $AA_TOFF[ ]
mm, inch, user defined 0 Double r

Multi-line: yes 1000 + geo axis number 1000 + numGeoAxes

1 Variables 03/2009
aaTOffLimit $AA_TOFF_LIMIT[ ]
Limiting value of the superimposed motion has been achieved in the tool direction via $AA_TOFF[ ]
0 : Limiting value not achieved

1 : Limiting value achieved in positive direction
11 : Limiting value achieved in negative direction
- 0 0 11 UWord r
aaTOffPrepDiff $AA_TOFF_PREP_DIFF[ ]
Difference between the current value of $AA_TOFF[] and the value as the current block was prepared.

aaTOffVal $AA_TOFF_VAL[ ]
Integrated value of the superimposed motions which have been retracted in the individual tool directions via
$AA_TOFF[ ]

aaVactW $AA_VACTW[X]
Axis velocity in workpiece coordinate system
0.0 Double r
defined
acRetpoint $AC_RETPOINT[x] x = Axis

Return point on the contour for repositioning
- Double r
actDistToGoEns
Distance-to-go in the SZS based on the programmed position
- Double r
actFeedRate S5
Double r
defined
actFeedRateIpo
Corresponds to actFeedRate taking into account the
revolutional feedrate.
For geometry axes the value is reported in the MCS, i.e. related to the geometry axis and not to the machine axis.
Associated unit see: axisFeedRateIpoUnit
- Double r
actProgPosBKS $AA_IBORI
Actual value of geometry and orientation axes in basic coordinate system
0.0 Double r
defined

03/2009 1 Variables
actToolBasPosBN $AA_IBN[x] x=Axis

Actual tool base position in relation to basic zero point
(SGA:actToolBasePos without progr. frame and without settable frames)
Double r
defined
actToolBasPosBNDiam
Corresponds to actToolBasPosBN with diameter conversion
- Double r
actToolBasPosEN $AA_IEN[x] x = Axis

Base position of the active tool relative to the workpiece zero point
(SGA:actToolBasePos without programmed frame)
- Double r
actToolBasPosENitc
corresponds to actToolBasPosEN with $DISPLAY_MODE_POSITION=1
- Double r
actToolBasPosENjmp
corresponds to actToolBasPosEN with $DISPLAY_MODE_POSITION=0
- Double r
actToolBasePosBasic
Base position of the active tool in the base system (inch/metrical)
0.0 Double r
defined
actToolBasePosBasicDiam
Corresponds to actToolBasePosBasic with diameter conversion
- Double r
actToolBasePosDiam
Corresponds to actToolBasePos with diameter conversion
- Double r
actToolEdgeCenterPosEns
Actual position value in relation to the WOS frame as center-point path, i.e. with tool length but without tool radius
- Double r
axisActiveInChan
0 = inactive
1 = active
- UWord r
axisFeedRateIpoUnit
Corresponds to axisFeedRateUnit with revolutional feedrate
0 = mm/min
1 = mm/rev.
2 = inch/min
3 = inch/rev.
4 = deg./min
5 = deg./rev.

1 Variables 03/2009
- UWord r
axisFeedRateUnit
0 = mm/min
1 = inch/min
2 = degree/min
- UWord r
cmdFeedRate
Double r
defined
cmdFeedRateIpo
Corresponds to cmdFeedRate taking into account the revolutional feedrate.
Associated unit see: axisFeedRateIpoUnit
- Double r
cmdToolEdgeCenterPosEnsS
Programmed position for block search with calculation
in relation to the WOS frame as center-point path, i.e. with tool length
but without tool radius
Note: This variable is not available for the variable service,
but only for logging in connection with block search events!
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
diamonInfo
Information whether position values are shown as diameter or radius values.
This information is relevant for the following variables of the blocks SGA/SEGA:
- cmdToolBasePos
- toolBaseDistToGo
- toolBaseREPOS
- cmdToolEdgeCenterPos
- actToolEdgeCenterPos
- toolEdgeCenterDistToGo
- toolEdgeCenterREPOS
- cmdProgPos
- actProgPos
- progDistToGo
- progREPOS
- actToolBasPosEN
- cmdToolEdgeCenterPosEnsS
- actToolEdgeCenterPosEns
- actToolBasPosBN
- cmdToolBasPosENS
- actProgPosBKS
- actToolBasePosDiam
- actToolBasePosBasicDiam
- actToolBasPosBNDiam
0: Diameter programming inactive
1: Diameter programming active
- 0 0 1 UWord r

03/2009 1 Variables
displayAxis $MC_DISPLAY_AXIS Bit0-15

Identifier indicating whether the axis is displayed by the MMC as a geometry or auxiliary axis.
drfVal $AC_DRF[x] x = Axis

DRF value. The physical unit is defined in extUnit (in module SGA).
Double r
defined
effComp
Sum of all length radius compensations. The physical unit is defined in extUnit (in the SGA block).
Double r
defined
feedRateOvr
Feedrate override if axis is a positioning axis. Multiplying override component which is active in addition to the override
factors programmed, set via handwheel or via PLC.
% Double r
geoAxisNr
Number of the geometry axis
If the axis is a geometry axis: 1-3
If the axis is not a geometry axis: 0
- UWord r
handwheelAss
- 0 3 UWord r
index
- UWord r
motEnd $AA_MOTEND
Current motion end criterion for single-axis interpolation
1 = Motion end with exact stop FINE
2 = Motion end with exact stop COARSE
3 = Motion end with exact stop IPO Stop
4 = Block change in braking ramp of axis motion
5 = Block change in braking ramp of axis motion with tolerance window with reference to setpoint
6 = Block change in braking ramp of axis motion with tolerance window with reference to actual value
- 1 1 6 UWord r

1 Variables 03/2009
spec
Axis specification
0 = path axis
- UWord r
subSpec MD 30500: INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB T1

Subspecification, identifies whether an axis is an indexing axis
0 = normal axis
1 = indexing axis
- UWord r
type
Axis type
1 = linear axis
2 = rotary axis
3 = spindle
- UWord r
vaIb $VA_IB[Achse]
The variable $VA_IB[ ax ] determines the encoder position of an axis retransformed into BCS. The BCS value contains
all the axial override components (DRF, AA_OFF, external work offset, etc.) and compensation values (CEC, etc.). The
positions are only computed once per IPO cycle for performance reasons. When a variable is read within one IPO
cycle, the value of the variable does not change, although the actual value could have changed.
If transformations are active, it must be taken into account that transforming the actual values into the BCS in the IPO
cycle can be very time-consuming. In this case, an adequate IPO cycle must be set.
0 Double r
defined
vaIbc $VA_IBC[Achse]
The variable $VA_IBC[ geo axis ] determines the encoder position of a Cartesian axis lying between BCS and MCS.
Cartesian means that the axis is a linear axis and lies plane parallel to a coordinate axis in a clockwise coordinate
system. The axis identifier used can be a geometry, channel or machine axis identifier. This identifier must represent a
geometry axis in the BCS, otherwise the variable returns the value 0.0. The positions are only computed once per IPO
cycle for performance reasons. When a variable is read within one IPO cycle, the value of the variable does not
change, although the actual value could have changed.
0 Double r
defined
vaItr1 $VA_ITR[Achse, 1]
The axial variable determines the current encoder position of an axis at the output of the 1st chained transformation.
0 Double r
defined
The axial variable determines the current encoder position of an axis at the output of the 2nd chained transformation.
0 Double r
defined
The axial variable determines the current encoder position of an axis at the output of the 3rd chained transformation.
0 Double r
defined

03/2009 1 Variables
vaIw $VA_IW[Achse]
The variable $VA_IW[ ax ] determines the encoder position of an axis retransformed into BCS. The BCS value
contains all the axial override components (DRF, AA_OFF, external work offset, etc.) and compensation values (CEC,
etc.). The positions are only computed once per IPO cycle for performance reasons. When a variable is read within
one IPO cycle, the value of the variable does not change, although the actual value could have changed.
0 Double r
defined
1.5.5 Area C, Module SSP: State data: Spindle

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/Spindle/...
All status data that refer to the spindle are combined in the module SSP. The individual variables are
defined as arrays where the row index is the number of the spindle (assigned to the current channel). The
spindle can be identified by reading the variables "name" or "index" in the same module with the respective
row index.
The number of spindles can be read from "numSpindles" in the module Y in the area C.
acConstCutS $AC_CONSTCUT_S[n]
acSMode $AC_SMODE[x]
Spindle mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- 1 0 4 UWord r
acSType $AC_S_TYPE[x]
Type of spindle programming
Spindle programmed as:
0 Spindle not programmed
1 Spindle speed, S in rev/min
2 Cutting rate, SVC in m/min or ft/min
3 Constant cutting rate, S in m/min or ft/min
4 Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed, S in m/s or ft/s
0 0 Double r
defined
Multi-line: no
acSVC $AC_SVC[x]
Programmed, active cutting rate
0 0 Double r
defined
Multi-line: no
acSmaxAcc $AC_SMAXACC[]
speed.

1 Variables 03/2009
$AC_SMAXACC_INFO.

acSmaxAccInfo $AC_SMAXACC_INFO[]
accelerations.
1: Not used
(e.g. SPCON, SPOS )
5: Not used
6: Not used
7: Not used
9: Not used
10: Not used
11: Not used
13: Not used
- Long Integer r
acSmaxVelo $AC_SMAXVELO[]
100%.

acSmaxVeloInfo $AC_SMAXVELO_INFO[]

03/2009 1 Variables
4: Speed limited to
- Long Integer r
acSminVelo $AC_SMINVELO[]
100%.
acSminVeloInfo $AC_SMINVELO_INFO[]
increases.
- Long Integer r

1 Variables 03/2009
acSpindState $AC_SPIND_STATE[]
Bit 4: Free
speed.
- Long Integer r
actGearStage
- UWord r
actSpeed $AA_S[x] x = SpindleNo

channelNo
- UWord r
cmdAngPos
cmdConstCutSpeed
0.0 Double r
defined
cmdGearStage
- UWord r
cmdGwps
m/s, ft/s Double r

03/2009 1 Variables
cmdSpeed $P_S[x] x = SpindleNo

driveLoad
Load
% Double r
dummy
dummy
- UWord r
gwpsActive {$GWPS}
0 = inactive
1 = active
- UWord r
index
- UWord r
name
Spindle name
- String[32] r
namePhys
- String[32] r
opMode
Spindle mode
0 = spindle mode
4 = axis mode
- UWord r
pSMode $P_SMODE
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- 0 4 UWord r

1 Variables 03/2009
pSModeS
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- 0 4 UWord r
psModePos
- 0 Double r
psModePosS
- 0 Double r
speedLimit
speedOvr
Spindle override
% Double r
spindleType
Spindle type
0 = master spindle
- UWord r
status
Spindle status
- UWord r
turnState $AC_SDIR[x] x = SpindleNo

0 = clockwise
2 = stop
3 = clockwise
5 = stop
- UWord r

03/2009 1 Variables
vcSGear $VC_SGEAR[spino]
Variable $VC_SGEAR[spino] determines the currently active spindle gear stage. $AC_SGEAR[spino] determines the
defined gear stage in the main run. During search the actual gear stage may differ from the defined gear stage,
because during search the gear stages are not changed. Using $VC_SGEAR[spino] and $AC_SGEAR[spino] it can be
checked whether a gear stage change is to be performed after a search.
The following values are possible:
1: 1st gear stage active
....
5: 5th gear stage active
1: 1st gear stage active
....
5: 5th gear stage active
- 0 0 5 short Integer r
Multi-line: no
1.5.6 Area C, Module SSP2: State data: Spindle

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/LogicalSpindle/...
All state data that refer to a spindle, if a spindle converter (logical spindles) is active
acConstCutS
acSMode
Spindle mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- 1 0 4 UWord r
acSType
Type of spindle programming
Spindle programmed as:
0 Spindle not programmed
1 Spindle speed, S in rev/min
2 Cutting rate, SVC in m/min or ft/min
3 Constant cutting rate, S in m/min or ft/min
4 Constant grinding wheel peripheral speed, S in m/s or ft/s
0 0 Double r
defined
Multi-line: no
acSVC
Programmed, active cutting rate
0 0 Double r
defined
Multi-line: no
acSmaxAcc
speed.

1 Variables 03/2009
$AC_SMAXACC_INFO.

acSmaxAccInfo
definitive machine data as identifier/index. The index can be used to determine the active acceleration data on the
basis of the following table of existing spindle accelerations.
The number range is oriented to the system variable $AC_SMAXVELO_IDX:

1: Not used
without position control
(e.g. SPCON, SPOS )
5: Not used
6: Not used
7: Not used
and the synchronous spindle coupling of the leading spindle on account of
9: Not used
10: Not used
11: Not used
13: Not used
- Long Integer r
acSmaxVelo
100%.

acSmaxVeloInfo

03/2009 1 Variables
4: Speed limited to
- Long Integer r
acSminVelo
100%.
acSminVeloInfo
increases.
- Long Integer r

1 Variables 03/2009
acSpindState
Bit 4: Free
speed.
- Long Integer r
actGearStage
- UWord r
actSpeed
channelNo
- UWord r
cmdAngPos
cmdConstCutSpeed
0.0 Double r
defined
cmdGearStage
- UWord r
cmdGwps
m/s, ft/s Double r

03/2009 1 Variables
cmdSpeed
driveLoad
Load
% Double r
dummy
dummy
- UWord r
gwpsActive
0 = inactive
1 = active
- UWord r
index
- UWord r
name
Spindle name
- String[32] r
namePhys
- String[32] r
opMode
Spindle mode
0 = spindle mode
4 = axis mode
- UWord r
pSMode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- 0 4 UWord r
pSModeS

1 Variables 03/2009
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- 0 4 UWord r
psModePos
- 0 Double r
psModePosS
- 0 Double r
speedLimit
speedOvr
Spindle override
% Double r
spindleType
Spindle type
0 = master spindle
- UWord r
status
Spindle status
- UWord r
turnState
0 = clockwise
2 = stop
3 = clockwise
5 = stop
- UWord r

03/2009 1 Variables
1.5.7 Area C, Module FU: Channel-specific settable frames

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/UserFrame/...
This only applies if $MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES > 0 and

$MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES = 0, otherwise all settable frames have an NCU-global
configuration.
The following frame indices are possible:

0 = G500
1 = G54
2 = G55
3 = G56
4 = G57
5 = G505
6 = G506
:
n = G5n
:
99 = G599
The maximum frame index is: $MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES - 1
The PI service SETUFR has to be called in order to activate the settable frames.
linShift $P_UIFR[x,y,TR] x=FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Frame index * numMachAxes + axis $MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES *
Multi-line: yes
number (numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes)
linShiftFine $P_UIFR[x,y,SI] x=FrameNo,y=Axis

Multi-line: yes
mirrorImgActive $P_UIFR[x,y,MI] x = FrameNo,y=Axis PA

- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes
rotation $P_UIFR[x,y,RT] x = FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Degree Double wr
Multi-line: yes
scaleFact $P_UIFR[x,y,SC] x = FrameNo,y=Axis PA

- Double wr
Multi-line: yes

1 Variables 03/2009
1.5.8 Area C, Module FA: Active channel-specific frames

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/ActualFrame/...
The following frame indices are available:
0: $P_ACTFRAME = current resulting work offset

1: $P_IFRAME = current settable work offset
2: $P_PFRAME = current programmable work offset
3: EXTFRAME = current external work offset
4: TOTFRAME = current total work offset = sum of ACTFRAME and EXTFRAME
5: $P_ACTBFRAME = current total base frame
6: $P_SETFRAME = current 1st system frame (set actual value, scratching)
7: $P_EXTSFRAME = current 2nd system frame (set actual value, scratching)
8: $P_PARTFRAME = current 3rd system frame (TCARR and PAROT with orientable tool carrier)
9: $P_TOOLFRAME = current 4th system frame (TOROT and TOFRAME)
10: $AC_MEASFRAME = result frame for workpiece and tool measurement
11: $P_WPFRAME = current 5th system frame (workpiece reference points) as from SW 6.3
12: $P_CYCFRAME = current 6th system frame (cycles) as from SW 6.3
13: $P_TRAFRAME = current 7th system frame (transformation) as from SW 7.1
14: $P_ISO1FRAME = current ISO system frame for G51.1 mirroring as from SW 7.4
15: $P_ISO2FRAME = current ISO system frame for G68 2DROT as from SW 7.4
16: $P_ISO3FRAME = current ISO system frame for G68 3DROT as from SW 7.4
17: $P_ISO4FRAME = current ISO system frame for G51 scale as from SW 7.4
18: $P_ACSFRAME = current resulting frame for the SZS (ACS) as from SW 7.4
19: $P_RELFRAME = current 12th system frame for relative coordinate systems as from SW 7.5
The maximum frame index is 18.
linShift diverse, siehe Bausteinbescheibung PA

Translation of an active work offset (the physical unit is defined in basicLengthUnit in module Y in area N).
Frame index * numMachAxes + axis
Multi-line: yes 11 * numMachAxes
number
linShiftFine diverse, siehe Bausteinbescheibung

Frame index * (numMachAxes+axis
number)

Mirroring enabled in an active work offset
- UWord r
number

Rotation of an active work offset
Degree Double r
number

Scaling factor of an active work offset
- Double r
number

03/2009 1 Variables
1.5.9 Area C, Module FE: Channel-specific external frame
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/ExternFrame/...
There is exactly one external frame defined by the PLC.
The maximum frame index is: 0
linShift $AA_ETRANS[x] x = FrameNo PA

Translation of external work offset (the physical unit is defined in basicLengthUnit in module Y in area N).
Multi-line: yes Geo axis number numGeoAxes
linShiftFine diverse, siehe Bausteinbescheibung

Frame index * (numMachAxes+axis
number)

Mirroring of an external work offset
- UWord r
number

Rotation of an external work offset
Degree Double r
number

Scaling factor of an external work offset
- Double r
number

1 Variables 03/2009
1.6 State data of drives
1.6.1 Area H, Module S: Drive-specific state data (MSD)
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /DriveHsa/State/...

Attention: The HS module cannot be addressed with MMC100/EBF/OP030
actualCurrent MD 1708: ACTUAL_CURRENT IAD

Actual value of the smoothened current (referring to the maximum current of the drive)
CAUTION: The variable cannot be configured by MMC100.
% -100000,0 10000,0 Float r
Multi-line: no
actualSpeed MD 1701: ACTUAL_SPEED IAD

Actual value of rotary speed (motor)
CAUTION: The variable cannot be configured by MMC100.
rev/min , m/min -100000,0 100000,0 Float r
Multi-line: no
cl1PoImage MD 1731: CL1_PO_IMAGE IAD

Image of the ZK1PO register. The format is hexadecimal
Attention: The variable cannot be configured by the MMC 100
- 0x0 0x7FFF UWord r
Multi-line: no
cl1ResImage MD 1732: CL1_RES_IMAGE IAD

Image of the ZK1RES register. The format is hexadecimal
Attention: The variable cannot be configured by the MMC 100!
Multi-line: no
crcErrorCount MD 1720: CRC_DIAGNOSIS IAD

CRC-parameter for diagnosis. Number is displayed in hexadecimal format.
Attention: This variable cannot be configured by the MMC100!
Multi-line: no
currentLsb MD 1710: CURRENT_LSB IAD

Current representation value (in myAmpere)
- 0,0 32767,0 Float r
Multi-line: no
desiredSpeed MD 1706: DESIRED_SPEED IAD

Desired value of rotary speed. With linear motors: desired velocity
Attention: The variable cannot be configured by the MMC100!
Multi-line: no

03/2009 1 Variables
encTypeDirect MD 1791: ENC_TYPE_DIRECT IAD

Direct mounted encoder used for reading in the actual values
Attention: This variable cannot be configured by MMC100!
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
encTypeMotor MD 1790: ENC_TYPE_MPTOR IAD

Motor mounted ( indirect ) encoder used for reading in the actual values.
Attention: This variable cannot be configured by MMC100!
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
firmwareDate MD 1798: FIRMWARE_DATE IAD

Firmware date
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
firmwareVersion MD 1799: FIRMWARE_VERSION IAD

Firmware version
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
leadTimeDirectEnc MD 1704: LEAD_TIME_DIRECT_ENC IAD

Direct motor measuring system conversion lead time
µs 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
leadTimeMotorEnc MD 1703: LEAD_TIME_MOTOR_ENC IAD

Motor measuring system conversion lead time
µs 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
linkVoltage MD 1701: LINK_VOLTAGE IAD

Link voltage
0 to 800
V 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
load MD 1722: LOAD IAD

Load. Display is in hexadecimal format
Attention: Variable cannot be configured by the MMC100!
% -100000,0 100000,0 Float r
Multi-line: no
lpfcDiagnosis MD 1733: LPFC_DIAGNOSIS IAD

LPFC diagnosis counter
- 0 32767 UWord wr
Multi-line: no
maxTorqueFromNc MD 1725: MAX_TORQUE_FROM_NC IAD

Normalization of the torque setpoint interface
Nm 0,0 32767,0 Float wr
Multi-line: no
motorTemperature MD 1702: MOTOR_TEMPERATURE IAD

Motor temperature
°C 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no

1 Variables 03/2009
operatingMode IAD
Operating mode
Attention: Variable cannot be configured By the MMC100!
Bit0 = VSA
Bit4 = HSA
Bit8 = AM control
Bit9 = AM closed loop control
Bit12 = U/f-operation mode
bits exclude one another (except bit 12)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
pblVersion MD 1797: PBL_VERSION IAD

Data version
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
rotorFluxLsb MD 1712: ROTOR_FLUX_LSB IAD

Rotor flux representation value (unit myVolsSeconds)
- Float wr
Multi-line: no
safeStopFDiagnosis MD 1395 : SAFE_STOP_F_DIAGNOSIS

Drive error code for alarm 300911
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no
speedLsb MD 1711: SPEED_LSB IAD

Speed representation value
rev/min , m/min Float wr
Multi-line: no
terminalState MD 1700: TERMINAL_STATE IAD

State of the binary inputs (displayed in hexadecimal format)
Multi-line: no
torqueLsb MD 1713: TORQUE_LSB IAD

Torque representation value (unit MyNewtonMeter)
s, user defined Float wr
Multi-line: no
voltageLsb MD 1709: VOLTAGE_LSB IAD

Voltage representation value
- Float wr
Multi-line: no

03/2009 1 Variables
1.6.2 Area V, Module S: Drive-specific status data (FDD)
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /DriveVsa/State/...

No cyclic service may be set up on variables in this module. Only single variable access is permitted.
accelErrorCount $MD_ACCEL_DIAGNOSIS IAD

Number of overshoots of a maximum
acceleration calculated during ramp-up.
- 0 0 0xFFFF UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
actualCurrent MD 1708: ACTUAL_CURRENT IAD

Actual value of the smoothened current (referring to the maximum current of the drive)
% -10000,0 10000,0 Float r
Multi-line: no
actualSpeed MD 1707: ACTUAL_SPEED IAD

Actual value of the rotary speed, actual velocity for linear drive (motor)
Multi-line: no
cl1PoImage MD 1731: CL1_PO_IMAGE IAD

ZK1PO register image. Hexadecimal numerical representation
Multi-line: no
cl1ResImage MD 1732: CL1_RES_IMAGE IAD

ZK1RES register image. Hexadecimal numerical representation
Multi-line: no
crcErrorCount MD 1720: CRC_DIAGNOSIS IAD

CRC diagnostic parameter. Hexadecimal numerical representation
Multi-line: no
currentLsb MD 1710: CURRENT_LSB IAD

Current representation value (in myAmpere)
- 0,0 32767,0 Float r
Multi-line: no
desiredSpeed MD 1706: DESIRED_SPEED IAD

Speed setpoint
Multi-line: no
encTypeDirect MD 1791: ENC_TYPE_DIRECT IAD

Measuring circuit type of direct measuring system
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no

1 Variables 03/2009
encTypeMotor MD 1790: ENC_TYPE_MOTOR IAD

Measuring circuit type of indirect measuring system
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
firmwareDate MD 1798: FIRMWARE_DATE IAD

Firmware date
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
firmwareVersion MD 1799: FIRMWARE_VERSION IAD

Firmware version
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
leadTimeDirectEnc MD 1704: LEAD_TIME_DIRECT_ENC IAD

Direct motor measuring system conversion lead time
µs 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
leadTimeMotorEnc MD 1703: LEAD_TIME_MOTOR_ENC IAD

Motor measuring system conversion lead time
µs 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
linkVoltage MD 1701: LINK_VOLTAGE IAD

DC-link voltage
V 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
load MD 1722: LOAD IAD

Utilization: Represented in hexadecimal format
% -100000,0 100000,0 Float r
Multi-line: no
load611U
Load 611U
- Float r
Multi-line: no
lpfcDiagnosis MD 1733: LPFC_DIAGNOSIS IAD

LPFC diagnosis counter
- 0 32767 UWord wr
Multi-line: no
maxTorqueFromNc MD 1725: MAX_TORQUE_FROM_NC IAD

Normalization of the torque setpoint interface
Nm 0,0 32767,0 Float wr
Multi-line: no
motorTemperature MD 1702: MOTOR_TEMPERATURE IAD

Motor temperature
°C 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no

03/2009 1 Variables
operatingMode IAD
Operating mode
Bit0 = FDD
Bit4 = MSD
Bit8 = Open-loop AM control
Bit9 = Closed-loop AM control
Bit12 = V/Hz mode
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
pblVersion MD 1797: PBL_VERSION IAD

Data version
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no
rotorFluxLsb MD 1712: ROTOR_FLUX_LSB IAD

Rotor flux representation value (unit myVolsSeconds)
- Float wr
Multi-line: no
safeStopFDiagnosis MD 1395 : SAFE_STOP_F_DIAGNOSIS

Drive error code for alarm 300911
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no
speedLsb MD 1711: SPEED_LSB IAD

Speed representation value
rev/min , m/min Float wr
Multi-line: no
terminalState MD 1700: TERMINAL_STATE IAD

State of the binary inputs (in hexadecimal format)
Multi-line: yes 1
torqueLsb MD 1713: TORQUE_LSB MD 1713: TORQUE_LSB IAD

Torque representation value (unit MyNewtonMeter)
s, user defined Float wr
Multi-line: no
voltageLsb MD 1709: VOLTAGE_LSB IAD

Voltage representation value
- Float wr
Multi-line: no

1 Variables 03/2009
1.7 Tool and magazine data
1.7.1 Area C, Module TO: Tool data of the active tool

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/Compensation/...
Tool data of the active tool
cuttEdgeParam
Parameter of the active tool cutting edge
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of the parameter: 24
cuttEdgeParamMod
Modified parameter of the active tool cutting edge.
The rotation has been included in the calculation, so the value may not correspond with the original tool data.
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of the parameter: 24
1.7.2 Area T, Module TO: Tool edge data: Offset data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/Compensation/...
The data module TO is organized as a two-dimensional variable array.

The module contains the tool edge offset data for all tools. Each element can be addressed via a column
and row index:
The column index is the tool number (T-number), i.e. the offset data for all cutting edges of a tool are
located in one column. The assignment of a tool to a T-number is given in the module "Tool directory" (TV)
in the related area T. If a non-existent tool number is entered for the column index the request is negatively
acknowledged.
The number of rows is derived from the number of parameters per tool edge and the number of edges on a
tool:
maxZeilenindex = numCuttEdgeParams * /T/TV/numCuttEdges (T-number)
The number of parameters per tool edge "numCuttEdgeParams" is given in module Y in area N. The
number of cutting edges "/T/TV/numCuttEdges" is always tool-specific and is given in the module TV in
associated area T.
If necessary, several rows can be addressed, so that in one request, for example, all tool edge offset data
of a single tool can be read. The offset values of the tool edges are all of the same data type and have the
same physical unit.
cuttEdgeParam $TC_DPCEx[y,z] x = ParamNo y = ToolNo z = EdgeNo

Replaced by edgeData
The value for the tool type is stored internally as an integer.
- 0 Double wr
(numCuttEdgeParams + 1) *
Multi-line: yes For edge offset value parameters:
maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
edgeData $TC_DPx[y,z] x = ParamNo y = ToolNo z = EdgeNo

Offset value parameter and edge list with D numbers for a tool
1st section: Offset value parameter for a tool edge:
The meaning of each parameter depends on the tool type. Currently 25 parameters are reserved for each tool edge
(however only some of them are used). To be flexible for future extensions use the variable 'numCuttEdgeParams'
rather than the fixed number 25 for the number of parameters.
A detailed description of tool parameters can be found in the documentation Tool Offset (W1), Section "Tool edge".
The following list is a summary of the tool edge parameters:

03/2009 1 Variables
Parameter 1: Geometry -- tool type ($TC_DP1)

Parameter 2: Geometry -- cutting edge direction ($TC_DP2)
Parameter 3: Geometry -- length 1 ($TC_DP3)
Parameter 6: Geometry -- radius ($TC_DP6)
Parameter 7: Geometry -- corner radius (tool type 700; grooving saw) ($TC_DP7)
Parameter 8: Geometry -- length 4 (tool type 700; grooving saw) ($TC_DP8)
Parameter 10: Geometry -- angle 1 ($TC_DP10)
Parameter 11: Geometry -- angle 2 for tapered milling tools ($TC_DP11)
Parameter 12: Wear -- length 1 ($TC_DP12)
Parameter 15: Wear -- radius ($TC_DP15)
Parameter 16: Wear -- groove width b / rounding radius ($TC_DP16)
Parameter 17: Wear -- proj. length k ($TC_DP17)
Parameter 19: Wear -- angle 1 ($TC_DP19)
Parameter 20: Wear -- angle 2 for tapered milling tools ($TC_DP20)
Parameter 21: Adapter -- length 1 ($TC_DP21)
Parameter 24: Relief angle ($TC_DP24)
Parameter 25: ManualTurn: cutting rate ($TC_DP25)
ShopMill: bit-coded value for different states of tools of type 1xx and 2xx ($TC_DP25)
All parameters up to 25, that are not listed, are reserved.
2nd section: edgeDNo (SW 5.1 and later), assigned optional D numbers of edges:
-1: No edge
1 .. maxDNo: Edge exists, assigned D number, only when "any D numbers" function is activated
(maxnumCuttEdges_Tool < maxCuttingEdgeNo)
Edge No.: 1 to maxnumCuttEdges_Tool, when edge exists, but when "Assignment of any D numbers" function is not
activated on the NC.
0: No D number assigned/assignment cancelled. (Here OPI differs from NCK variable $TC_DPCE....
$TC_DPCE = cutting edge number, D = offset number D.
If the D number of a cutting edge (variable of module TO) has been set to invalid, the value $TC_DPCE remains
unaffected.
The edge number specified in the description of the row index matches parameter $TC_DPCE.
The variable D No. defined in the module matches the second index in the offset-specific parameters of type
$TC_DPx[T,D],... and others; with x=1,....25.).
Important: This variable is called "cuttEdgeParam" in the non-Windows-MMC and the PLC.
The value for the tool type is stored internally as an integer.

1 Variables 03/2009
1.7.3 Area T, Module TD: Tool data: General data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/Data/...
In addition to the tool offset data other tool characteristics are stored for managing the tools. The module
TD contains the general data of the tools. The tool characteristics can be addressed via individual multiple-
line variables. The variable line index corresponds to the T-number. If non-existent T-numbers are
accessed, the request is acknowledged negatively. The module Tool directory (TV) in the associated T
area shows which T-numbers are valid.
adaptNo
Number of adapter defined by system parameter $TC_ADPx which is
supporting the tool
>0: adapter number
0: no adapter assigned
- 0 0 numMagPlacesMax UWord r
Multi-line: yes Tool number T max. T-Nummer
duploNo $TC_TP1 FBW

Duplo number (number of replacement tool)
In the tool management each tool is explicitly defined both by its identifier and its duplo number. This means that a T-
area can only contain tool identifiers with different duplo numbers.
- T-Nummer UWord r
Multi-line: yes Tool number T 32000
numCuttEdges $P_TOOLND[x] x = ToolNo

Number of cutting edges of a tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1
toolIdent $TC_TP2 FBW

Tool identifier
- "<T-Nummer>" String[32] r
toolInMag $A_TOOLMN[x] x = ToolNo T

Current magazine in which the tool is located
- UWord r
toolInPlace $A_TOOLMLN[x] x = ToolNo T

Current location in which the tool is located
- UWord r
toolInfo $TC_TP11 FBW

Tool information for MMC
Not currently assigned
- 0 UWord wr
toolMaxAcc
Maximum angular acceleration of the tool if the value is >0. There is no monitoring if no acceleration limit is defined
(=0).
Rev/s2, user defined Double wr
toolMaxVelo
Maximum speed of the tool if the value is >0. There is no monitoring if no speed limit is defined (=0).
rev/min, user defined Double wr

03/2009 1 Variables
toolMon $TC_TP9 FBW

Type of tool monitoring
0: no tool monitoring
1: tool life monitoring
2: no. of workpieces monitoring
4: monitoring of edge wear parameters using wear limit (SW 5.1 and later)
8: monitoring of total offset parameters using wear limit (SW 5.1 and later)
- 0 UWord wr
toolMyMag $A_MYMN
Owner magazine of the tool magazine from which the tool was loaded
0 = the tool is not loaded. If toollnMag is >0 at the same time,
the T number will specify a manual tool, or TMMG is not active.
max. Nummer
- - 0 eines def. UWord r
Magazins
toolMyPlace $A_MYMLN
Owner magazine of the tool - Magazine location from which the tool was
loaded
0 = the tool is not loaded. If toollnPlace is >0 at the same time,
the T number will specify a manual tool, a valid magazine location number or TMMG is not active.
max. Nummer
- - def. UWord r
Magazinplatz
toolProtAreaFile
Reserved, do not use!
- String[32] r
Multi-line: no
toolSearch $TC_TP10 FBW

Type of tool search for replacement tools
0: no strategy
1: next duplo no.
2: shortest path
- 0 UWord wr
toolState $TC_TP8 FBW

Tool state
0: not enabled
1: active tool (A)
2: enabled (F)
4: disabled (G)
8: measured (M)
16: prewarning limit reached (V)
32: tool being changed (W)
64: fixed location coded (P)
128: tool was in use (E)
- 0 UWord wr
toolplace_spec $TC_TP7 FBW

Magazine location type of tool
- 9999 UWord wr
toolsize_down $TC_TP6 FBW

Size downwards in half locations
- 1 UWord wr

1 Variables 03/2009
toolsize_left $TC_TP3 FBW

Size to the left in half locations
- 1 UWord wr
toolsize_right $TC_TP4 FBW

Size to the right in half locations
- 1 UWord wr
toolsize_upper $TC_TP5 FBW

Size upwards in half locations
- 1 UWord wr
1.7.4 Area T, Module TS: Tool edge data: Monitoring data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/Supervision/...
The module TS is organized as a two-dimensional variable array. The module contains the tool edge
monitoring data for all tools. Each element can be addressed via a column and line index:
The column index is the tool number (T-number), i.e. one column contains the monitoring data for all tool
edges of a tool. The assignment of a tool to a T-number is given in the module Tool directory (TV) in the
associated area T. If a non-existent tool number is specified for the column index, the request is
acknowledged negatively.
The number of lines is derived from the number of parameters per tool edge and from the number of tool
edges of a tool:
maxZeilenanzahl = numCuttEdgeParams_ts * /T/TV/numCuttEdges (T-number)
The number of parameters per tool edge "numCuttEdgeParams_ts" is given in the module Y in area N.
The number of tool edges "/T/TV/numCuttEdges" is always tool specific and can be found in the module
TV in associated area T.
If necessary, several lines can be addressed, so that in one request, for example, all tool edge monitoring
data of a single tool can be read. The monitoring data of the tool edges are all of the same data type and
have the same physical unit.
New tool monitoring modes "Monitoring of wear values" and "Monitoring of total offsets":
3 new parameters are provided for these modes:
P7 = Wear prewarning limit (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP6)
P8 = Remaining wear (actual value) (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP5)
P9 = Wear setpoint (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP15)
data diverse, siehe Variablenbeschreibung

Monitoring data per tool edge
Important: This is a two-dimensional variable.
9 parameters are available for each tool edge.
The parameters have the following meaning:
P1 = Prewarning limit service life in minutes ($TC_MOP1)
P2 = Remaining service life in minutes ($TC_MOP2)
P3 = Prewarning limit workpiece number ($TC_MOP3)
P4 = Remaining workpiece number ($TC_MOP4)
P5 = Desired service life ($TC_MOP11)
P6 = Desired workpiece number ($TC_MOP13)
P7 = Prewarning limit wear (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP5)
This parameter can only be set if bit 5 of machine data $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK has been
correspondingly set.
P8 = Remaining wear (actual value) (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP6) cannot be written
P9 = Desired wear (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP15)
This parameter can only be set if bit 5 of machine data

03/2009 1 Variables
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK has been correspondingly set.
colIndex: TNo
Important: This variable is called "dummy" in the non-Windows-MMC and the PLC!
The values for P3 to P9 are stored internally as integers.
- 0 Double wr
(ToolEdgeNo - 1) *
numCuttEdgeParams_ts *
Multi-line: yes numCuttEdgeParams_ts +
ParameterNo
1.7.5 Area T, Module TUD: Tool data: User-defined data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/User/...
The TUD data module is defined as a two-dimensional variable array. The module contains user-defined
data for all tools. Each element can be addressed via a column and row index:
The column index is the number of the user-defined tool parameter. The number of tool parameters
(columns) is given by the variable "numToolParams_tu" in module Y in area N.
The row index is the tool number. If non-existent tools are accessed, the request is acknowledged
negatively.
The user-defined tool data are all of the same type.
data
Siemens application tool parameter
- Double r
Multi-line: no
1.7.6 Area T, Module TUO: Tool edge data: User-defined data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/User/...
The TUO data module is organized as a two-dimensional variable array. The module contains user-defined
cutting edge data for all tools. Each element can be addressed via a column and row index:
The column index is the tool number (T-number), i.e. the user-defined data for all the cutting edges of a
tool are to be found in one column.The assignment of a tool to a T-number is to be found in the Tool
directory (TV) module in the associated area T. If a non-existent tool number is given for the column index,
the request is acknowledged negatively.
The number of rows is derived from the number of parameters per cutting edge and the number of cutting
edges of a tool:
maxZeilenanzahl = numCuttEdgeParams_tu * /T/TV/numCuttEdges (T number)
The number of parameters per cutting edge "numCuttEdgeParams_tu" is given in module Y in area N. The
number of tool-specific cutting edges "/T/TV/numCuttEdges" are to be found in module TV in the
associated area T.
If neccessary, several rows can be addressed, so that, for example, all user-defined cutting edge data of a
single tool can be read in one request. The data are all of the same data type.
edgeData
- Double r
Multi-line: no

1 Variables 03/2009
1.7.7 Area T, Module TG: Tool data: Grinding-specific data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/GrindingData/...
Special tool data are required for grinding tools. These data are contained in the module TG. They can be
addressed via several multiple-row variables. The row index corresponds to the T number. If a non-
existent T-number is addressed negative acknowledgement is returned. The module tool directory (TV) in
the associated area T shows which T-numbers are valid.
actToolWide $TC_TPG5 W4
Current width of the grinding wheel
conntectPar $TC_TPG2 W4
Chaining rule. This parameter ( which is bitwise defined ) specifies which tool parameters of cutting edge 2 and cutting
edge 1 are chained. If the value of any chained parameter is altered, the value of the other chained parameter is
automatically adapted.
If the following bits are set, the corresponding parameters of D1 and D2 are chained:
Bit0: tool type
Bit2: geometry length1
Bit11: wear length1
Bit12: wear length2
Bit13: wear length3
Bit20: base dimension/adapter dimension length1
The value is stored internally as an integer.
- Double wr
inclAngle $TC_TPG8 W4
Angle of inclination of the inclined grinding wheel in the current plane
Degree -90 90 Double wr
maxRotSpeed $TC_TPG6 W4
Maximum rotary speed of the grinding wheel
rev/min , m/min Double wr
maxTipSpeed $TC_TPG7 W4
Maximum peripheral speed of the grinding wheel
Double wr
defined
minToolDia $TC_TPG3 W4
Minimum diameter of the grinding wheel
minToolWide $TC_TPG4 W4
Minimum width of the grinding wheel
paramNrCCV $TC_TPG9 W4
Compensation parameters for the function SUG ("constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel"). These parameters
define which compensation value is to be used for SUG, tool monitoring and centerless grinding. The value always
refers to cutting edge D1.
3: length 1
4: length 2

03/2009 1 Variables
5: length 3
6: radius
- Double wr
spinNoDress $TC_TPG1 W4
Spindle number to which the monitoring data and the function SUG ("constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel")
refer.
- Double wr
1.7.8 Area T, Module TMC: Magazine data: Configuration data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/MagazineConfiguration/...
Each tool magazine is configured with several parameters during start-up. These configuration data
together with the state information are combined in the module TMC.
magBLMag W4
Number of the internal load magazine
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
magCBCmd W4
Command for magazine execution
1: Find_empty location_loading
2: Tool_MOVE
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
magCBCmdState W4
Command state of the magazine (for magCBCmd)
1: started
2: running
3: end correct
4: end with error
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
magCBIdent $TC_MAMP1 W4
Identifier of the magazine
- String[32] r
Multi-line: no
magCMCmdPar1 W4
Return variable for the command MagCBCmd
In case of a succesfull return, the return value is the magazine number.
If an error occurs, an error number is set.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
magCMCmdPar2 W4
Return variable for the command MagCBCmd
In case of a succesfull return, the return value is the place number.
If an error occurs an error number is set.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

1 Variables 03/2009
magRPlaces W4
Total number of real magazine locations (incl. buffer and loading locations)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
magSearch $TC_MAMP2 W4
Type of tool search. This variable is bitwise defined.
A set bit has the following meaning:
Bit0: search active tool
Bit1: search tool by shortest path
Bit8: begin search at first location (forwards)
Bit9: begin search at current location forwards
Bit10: begin search at last location (backwards)
Bit11: begin search at current location backwards
Bit12: begin search at current location symmetrically
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
magVPlaces W4
Number of defined locations for the control block
Number of virtual locations (without buffer and loading locations) for all real magazines in this area unit
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
magZWMag W4
Number of internal buffer magazine
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
modeWearGroup $TC_MAMP3
Definition of strategies relating to wear group.
The value is bit-coded. Default setting = 0.
Effects on tool status
Bit Value Meaning
0 0 When a wear group is activated internally, the status of the tools it contains remains unchanged.
1 When a wear group is activated internally, the status of the tools it contains changes. One tool from each tool group
is set to the "active" state.
1 0 When a wear group is disabled internally, the status of the tools it contains remains unchanged.
1 When a wear group is disabled internally, the status of the tools it contains changes. The "active" status is cancelled
for all tools.
"Internally" in this instance means disabling or activation due to a tool change necessitating a change in the wear
group. Activating/disabling the appropriate tools after writing system parameters or via OPI is described in Section ???.
2... Reserved
... Reserved
7... Reserved
Search strategy for next wear group:
Bit Value Meaning
8 0 Find the next possible wear group
1 Find the wear group with the next-higher group number which can be activated
9... Reserved
... Reserved
11... Reserved
Search strategy within the wear group for the tool to be activated
Bit Value Meaning
12 0 Lowest possible duplo number
1 Lowest possible magazine location number
13... Reserved
... Reserved
15... Reserved
The active wear group can be disabled completely by negating the contents of $TC_MAP9. It is also possible to
disable any selected wear group by negating $TC_MPP5 for a magazine location assigned to the relevant wear group.
See also system parameter magWearCompoundNo / $TC_MAP9 (active wear group number) and wear group number
of magazine location / $TC_MPP5.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1

03/2009 1 Variables
1.7.9 Area T, Module TMV: Magazine data: Directory
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/MagazineCatalogue/...
The data module TMV can be used for the following purposes:
1. To display all magazines. The most important magazine information is combined in the module TMV.
The existing magazines are sorted in ascending order according to the magazine number without gaps.
This means that variables that are defined in this module as one-dimensional arrays contain all magazine
information without any gaps. The row index with which a specific array can be addressed does not refer to
the magazine number, it is merely a serial number. Inserting/deleting a magazine dynamically changes the
contents of a row.
2. To access magazine data in the modules TM, TP and TPM. Before accessing an element in the above
modules, the module TV should be consulted to determine which tools have actually been defined.
magVIdent
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes MagazineNo numMagsMax
magVNo
Number of the magazine
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes MagazineNo numMagsMax
numActMags
Number of magazines in the modules TMV and TM
- numMagsMax UWord r
Multi-line: no
1.7.10 Area T, Module TM: Magazine data: General data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/MagazineDescription/...
This module contains the information for the available tool magazines.
magActPlace $TC_MAP8
Current magazine position
Location number of tool change position
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Magazine number numMagsMax
magCmd
Command for magazine execution
1: Find_empty location_loading
2: Tool_MOVE
- UWord r
magCmdPar1
Command parameter of the magazine
In case of a succesfull return, the return value is the magazine number.
If an error occurs, an error number is set.
- UWord r

1 Variables 03/2009
magCmdPar2
Command parameter of the magazine
In case of a succesfull return, the return value is the place number.
If an error occurs an error number is set.
- UWord r
magCmdState
Command state of the magazine
1: started
2: running
3: end correct
4: end with error
- UWord r
magDim $TC_MAP6 FBW

Dimension of the magazine, number of magazine lines in the box magazine
Applies to box magazines (magKind = 5) number of lines. For all other magazine types the value is 1.
- UWord r
magIdent $TC_MAP2 FBW

- String[32] r
magKind $TC_MAP1 FBW

Type of the magazine
1 = chain
3 = revolver
5 = box magazine
7 = internal magazine tool buffer
9 = internal magazine loading stations
- 0 UWord r
magLink1 $TC_MAP4 FBW

Chaining 1 of the magazine to the following magazine. Number to (next) background magazine. Can be used with
chain, revolver and box magazines (magKind = 1,3 or 5)
- -1 UWord r
magLink2 $TC_MAP5 FBW

Chaining 2 of the magazine to the previous magazine. Backward chaining of background magazines. Can be used for
chaining to chain, revolver and box magazines (magKind = 1, 3 or 5)
- -1 UWord r
magNo
Number of the magazine
- 1 numMagsMax UWord r
magNrPlaces
Number of real locations (in chain magazine) or number of slots (in box magazine)
- UWord r
magPlaceSearchStrat
magPlaceSearchStrat
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

03/2009 1 Variables
magState $TC_MAP3 FBW

State of the magazine
1 = current magazine
2 = disabled
4 = magazine in loading position
8 = motion is active
16 = enabled for loading
- 2 UWord wr
magToolSearchStrat $TC_MPAP10, Bits 0-7

Tool search strategy during tool change
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Magazine number 320000
magWearCompoundNo $TC_MAP9
Each magazine has its own active wear group (wear group number).
The number of this group is stored in OPI variables magWearCompoundNo:
Meaning: Number of active wear group.
=0: No wear group active.
>0: Number of wear group in which tool search commences.
(this is the number of the active wear group.)
<0: Number of wear group in which tool search commences.
However, this wear group is disabled which means that the next tool
search is started in the next possible wear group.
This system parameter can thus also be used to disable a wear
group. See also wear group number of magazine location
/ $TC_MPP7 and modeWearGroup / $TC_MAMP3.
Previous name: actWearGrInMag

-32000, ..., -1, 0, 1, 2, ... 32000
- 0 Long Integer wr
1.7.11 Area T, Module TP: Magazine data: Location data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/Magazine/...
The data module TP is organized as a two-dimensional variable array. The module contains the state and
assignment of all magazine locations of a T area. Each element can be addressed by a column and line
index:
The column index is the magazine number, i.e. the configuration data for all locations of a magazine are
contained in one column. The assignment of a magazine to a magazine number is stated in the associated
area T of the associated Magazine directory module (TMV). If a non-existent magazine number is specified
for the column index, the request is negatively acknowledged.
The number of lines is derived from the number of parameters per magazine location and from the number
of magazine locations:
maxLineindex = numMagPlaceParams * magNrPlaces
The number of parameters per magazine location "numMagPlaceParams" is given in area N of module Y.
The line indices are based on the following scheme:
1: Location type ($TC_MPP1) (read only)
1: Magazine location
2: Spindle
3: Gripper
4: Loader
5: Transfer location
6: Loading station
7: Loading point
2: Location type ($TC_MPP2) (read only)
>0: Location type for virtual location

1 Variables 03/2009
=0: "Match all" (buffer location)

9999: Undefined (not a virtual location)
3: T number of tool in this location ($TC_MPP6)
4: Consideration of adjacent location on / off ($TC_MPP3)
0: off
1: on
5: Location status ($TC_MPP4)
1: Disabled
2: Free (<> occupied)
4: Reserved for tool in buffer location
8: Reserved for tool to be loaded
16: Occupied in left half-location
32: Occupied in right half-location
64: Occupied in top half-location
128: Occupied in bottom half-location
6: Physical magazine reference (read only)
Magazine number of magazine to which location belongs
7: Type index ($TC_MPP5) (read only) and new: Wear group number as from SW 5.1
Type index/wear group number is read only in SW earlier than 5.1 but read/write as from SW 5.1 if it is
assigned "Wear group" meaning.
Type index: The locations of a location type in a magazine are numbered in ascending order, e.g. type=2,
type index=5; ==> Spindle5)
(previous meaning when location type = 1 before P5: Equals location number when location type=1)
Wear group number as from SW 5.1 ($TC_MPP5)
When location type = 1: Number of wear group to which this magazine location is assigned.
Value range: -32000, ..., -1, 0, 1, 2, ... 32000
=0: Not assigned to a wear group
>0: Number of assigned wear group, this wear group is enabled
<0: Number of assigned wear group, this wear group is disabled
By negating this system parameter, it is possible to disable or enable the whole assigned wear group.
See also magWearCompoundNo / $TC_MAP9 (active wear group number) and modeWearGroup /
$TC_MAMP3 (general settings for wear grouping).
8: Adapter number as from SW 5.1 ($TC_MPP7)
Reference to adapter data set number.
Associated system data:

The number of parameters of this module changes accordingly:
N / Y, global system data, numMagPlaceParams = 8 as from SW 5.1
The number of magazine locations "magNrPlaces" is magazine specific and can be found in the
associated area T of module TM.
The locations of the buffer magazine and the loading magazine are numbered in ascending order
independently of the location type index.
If necessary, several lines can be addressed, so that, for example, all location data of a magazine can be
read in a single request. The location data are all of the same type.
placeData diverse, siehe Variablenbeschreibung

P1: Location type (read access only) ($TC_MPP1)
P2: Location type (read access only) ($TC_MPP2)
P3: T number of tool in this location ($TC_MPP6)
P4: Consider adjacent location ON/OFF ($TC_MPP3)
P5: Location state (bit array) ($TC_MPP4)
P6: Reference for physical magazine (read access only)
P7: Location type index (location type numbering) ($TC_MPP5)
P8: Number of adapter in magazine location ($TC_MPP7)
P9: Number of the spindle assigned to the buffer magazine location ($TC_MPP_SP)
Only important, if
- tool holders are used ($MC_TOOLHOLDER_MANAGEMENT > 0)
- magazine location "m" belongs to a buffer magazine "n"
- magazine location describes a tool holder ($TC_MPP1[n,m]=2)
In this case the system variable includes the spindle number, the speed of which is to be monitored for maximum tool

03/2009 1 Variables
speed.
If no tool holders are used ($MC_TOOLHOLDER_MANAGEMENT = 0), the variable includes the value of the spindle
index from $TC_MPP5
If magazine location "n,m" does not use a buffer magazine location for a spindle or tool holder, this variable includes
value =0.
colIndex: Tool magazine number

Notice: This variable is called "dummy" in the non-Windows MMC and the PLC.
- UWord wr
(LocationNo - 1) *
Multi-line: yes numMagPlaceParams + numMagPlaceParams * magNrPlaces
ParameterNo
1.7.12 Area T, Module TPM: Magazine data: Multiple assignment of

location data
The data module TPM is organized as a two-dimensional variable array.

ParameterNo = 1: Specifies the magazine number with which a relationship exists.
ParameterNo = 2: Distance (in locations) between the internal location and the magazine change position
(cf. magazine number for 1st parameter) with which a relationship will be established.
It contains information about possible multiple assignments. The column index is the magazine number.
For location P with location number p in magazine MP (= column index) numPlaceMulti times the multiple
assignments to other magazines which are possible are stored with the associated distances to the
change positions in each of the magazines. The offset for row index zi for a location number p is calculated
according to the following rule: zi = (p-1) * numPlaceMulti * numPlaceMultiParams + ParameterNo.
Determining the distance between the load position and the change position:
The value 9999 (magazine no. load position) must be specified for the variable multiPlace in the column.
The LocationNo (p) for the line is the number of the load position. The line for the first assignment is
calculated with ParameterNo = 1. When reading the variable, the system can thus read the magazine
number linked to the intended change position. If this magazine number is correct, it is possible to read the
number of locations between the load position and the change position with the variable multiPlace with
the next higher line number. If the magazine number read was incorrect, the following magazine
assignment must be read with the line number increased by numPlaceMulti.
This procedure has to be repeated a max. of numPlaceMultiParams times until the desired relationship has
been found.
multiPlace diverse, siehe Variablenbeschreibung

P1: Distance between the change position of magazine n and the location m of the first internal magazine (loading
magazine, 9999) ($TC_MDP1)
P2: Distance between the change position of magazine n and the location m of the second internal magazine (buffer
magazine, 9998) ($TC_MDP2)
colIndex: Tool magazine number
- UWord r
(LocationNo - 1) * numPlaceMulti * numPlaceMulti * numPlaceMultiParams *
Multi-line: yes
numPlaceMultiParams+ParameterNo magNrPlaces

1 Variables 03/2009
1.7.13 Area T, Module TT: Magazine data: Location types

The module TT is organized as a two-dimensional array where the variable with index (1/1) contains the
maximum number of columns (corresponds to the location hierarchies) in this module. Each element can
be addressed via a column and row index:
The column index is the number of the location hierarchy + 1. The row index is the number of the location
type + 1. Row 1 contains the current T-number of rows for a specific location hierarchy as special
information.
If all location types are to be read out for a location hierarchy, this must be defined in two steps:
1. The 1st line of each location hierarchy contains the number of assigned location types for this hierarchy
2. Lines 2 ... n can be read out in a single request.
placeType
Magazine location hierarchy
Attention: This variable is called "dummy" in the non-Windows MMC and the PLC.
colIndex: Number of the location hierarchy + 1
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of the location type + 1 Wert aus Zeile 1
1.7.14 Area T, Module TV: Tool data: Directory
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/Catalogue/...
Data module TV can be used for the following purposes:
1. For displaying all tools of a magazine. The most important tool information is contained in module TV.
Available tools are sorted consecutively in ascending order of T-number. This means that variables that
are defined as one-dimensional arrays in this module contain all the tool information without any gaps. The
line index with which a specific array is addressed has no connection with the tool number but is only a
serial number. Inserting/deleting tools changes the contents of a line dynamically.
2. Access to tool data in modules TD, TG, TO, TS, TU and TUE. Before an element in one of the above
modules is accessed, module TV should be consulted to ascertain which tools are actually defined.
SW 5.1 and later: Variable modeSpindleToolRevolver (module N/Y, global system data) defines for circular
magazines (T / TM, magazine data, general data, MagKind=3) whether the tool in OPI modules "T / TP,
magazine data, location data", "T / TD, tool data, general data", "T/TV, tool data, directory" and "T / AEV,
working offsets, directory" remains (new functionality) in its circular magazine location during operation or
changes to the buffer magazine (earlier behaviour).
Associated system data:

modeSpindleToolRevolver (module N / Y, global system data) with SW 5.1 and later.
TnumWZV
Last assigned T-number for tool management
The last assigned T number is the T number of the new tool
last created in the NCK through an NC language command or the PI service.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
nrDuplo
Duplo number
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Serial number numTools

03/2009 1 Variables
numCuttEdges
Number of cutting edges of a tool
- 9 UWord r
numToolGroups
numToolGroups
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
numTools
Number of tools in the area TO
MD
- 0 UWord r
MM_NUM_TOOL
Multi-line: no
toolIdent
Tool identifier
- String[32] r
toolInMag
Current magazine in which the tool is located
0 = tool not loaded
- UWord r
toolInPlace
Current location in which the tool is located
0 = tool not loaded
- UWord r
toolNo
T number
- UWord r
1.7.15 Area T, Module TF: Parametrizing, return parameters of

_N_TMGETT, _N_TSEARC
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/Find/...
This module is used for parameterizing as well as for the return parameters of PI services _N_TMGETT
and _N_TSEARC. Access to this module must be T area specific and exclusive. It is up to the clients to
guarantee this by using the semaphore mechanism (PI service _N_MMCSEM) with the function number
for _N_TMSEARCH.
With _N_TMGETT, NO parameterizing elements (input parameters) are relevant; the only relevant one is
the result parameter resultToolNr
parDataTAD
Parameterizing: For parameters with data type DOUBLE of the module TAD a value can be stored as a comparison
value for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC).
The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TAS according to parMasksTAD.
The size of the column matches the lines in module TAO.
See module TAD
- Double wr
Column index in the module TAD,
Multi-line: yes i.e. the number of the user-defined numToolParams_tad
tool parameter.

1 Variables 03/2009
parDataTAO
Parameterizing: For parameters with data type DOUBLE of the module TAO a value can be stored as a comparison
The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TAS according to parMasksTAO.
The size of the column matches the lines in module TAO.
See module TAO
- Double wr
Column index in the module TAO,
Multi-line: yes numCuttEdgeParams_tao
i.e. tool number.
parDataTAS
Parameterizing: For parameters with data type DOUBLE of the module TAS a value can be stored as a comparison
The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TAS according to parMasksTAS.
The size of the column matches the lines in module TAS.
See module TAS
- Double wr
Column index in the module TAS,
Multi-line: yes numCuttEdgeParams_tas
i.e. tool number.
parDataTD
Parameterizing: For parameters with data type UWORD of the module TD a value can be stored as a comparison
The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TD according to parMasksTD.
The size of the column matches the lines in module TD.
See module TD
- UWord wr
Index of the parameter (i.e. column
Multi-line: yes 17
index) in the TD module > 1.
parDataTO
Parameterizing: For each parameter of the module TO, a value can be stored as a comparison value for the 'complex
search' (_N_TSEARC).
The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TO according to parMasksTO.
The size of the column matches the data set of an edge in module TO.
See module TO
- Double wr
Line index in the TO module, i.e. a
Multi-line: yes numCuttEdgeParams * maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
cutting edge offset value parameter:
parDataTS
Parameterizing: For each parameter of the module TS a value can be stored as a comparison value for a 'complex
The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TS according to parMasksTS.
The size of the column matches the data set of an edge in module TS.
See module TS
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Line index in the TS module:
parDataTU
Parameterizing: For each parameter of the module TU a value can be stored as a comparison value for a 'complex
The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TU according to parMasksTU.
The size of the column matches the lines in module TU.
See module TU
- Double wr
index) in the TU module is thus the
Multi-line: yes numToolParams_tu
number of the user-defined tool
parameter.

03/2009 1 Variables
parDataTUE
Parameterizing: For each parameter of the module TUE a value can be stored as a comparison value for a 'complex
The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TUE according to parMasksTUE.
The size of the column matches the data set of an edge in module TUE.
See module TUE
- Double wr
numCuttEdgeParams_tu *
Multi-line: yes Line index in the TUE module:
parDataTUS
Parameterizing: For each parameter of the module TUS a value can be stored as a comparison value for a 'complex
search' (_N_TUSEARC).
The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TUS according to parMasksTUS.
The size of the column matches the data set of an edge in module TUS.
See module TUS
- Double wr
numCuttEdgeParams_tus *
Multi-line: yes Line index in the TUS module:
parDataToolIdentTD
Parameterizing: For the parameter with data type string[32] (tool identifier) of the module TD a value can be stored as
a comparison value for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC).
The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TD according to parMasksTD.
See module TD
- String[32] wr
Multi-line: no
parMasksTAD
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TAD that indicates whether it is to serve as a
search criterion for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC) and how it is to be combined.
The corresponding comparison values are stored in parDataTAD. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron)
has been selected (#0), they are logically combined with AND.
Value 0 : Corresponding operand is not evaluated / Variable is not a criterion for comparison
Value 1 : == (equal)
Value 2 : < (less than)
Value 3 : > (greater than)
Value 4 : <= (less or equal)
Value 5 : >= (greater or equal)
Value 6 : && (bitwise AND, value only allowed for operands of the types WORD and DOUBLEWORD)
For string operands "==" is the only operator allowed

- 0 0 6 UWord wr
Column index in the module TAD,
Multi-line: yes i.e. the number of the user-defined numToolParams_tad
tool parameter.
parMasksTAO
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TAO that indicates whether it is to serve as a
The corresponding comparison values are stored in parDataTAO. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron)

1 Variables 03/2009
- 0 0 6 UWord wr
Column index in the module TAO,
Multi-line: yes numCuttEdgeParams_tao
i.e. tool number.
parMasksTAS
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TAS that indicates whether it is to serve as a
The corresponding comparison values are stored in parDataTAS. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has
been selected (#0), they are logically combined with AND.

- 0 0 6 UWord wr
Column index in the module TAS,
Multi-line: yes numCuttEdgeParams_tas
i.e. tool number.
parMasksTD
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TD that indicates whether it is to serve as a search
criterion for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC) and how it is to be combined.
The corresponding comparison values are stored in parDataTD. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has

- 0 0 6 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 17
index) in the TD module > 1.
parMasksTO
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TO that indicates whether it is to serve as a search
The corresponding comparison values are stored in parDataTO. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has

- 0 0 6 UWord wr
Line index in the TO module, i.e. a
Multi-line: yes numCuttEdgeParams * maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
cutting edge offset value parameter:

03/2009 1 Variables
parMasksTS
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TS that indicates whether it is to serve as a search
The corresponding comparison values are stored in parDataTS. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has

- 0 0 6 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Line index in the TS module:
parMasksTU
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TU that indicates whether it is to serve as a search
The corresponding comparison values are stored in parDataTU. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has
- 0 0 6 UWord wr
index) in the TU module is thus the
Multi-line: yes numToolParams_tu
number of the user-defined tool
parameter.
parMasksTUE
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TUE that indicates whether it is to serve as a
The corresponding comparison values are stored in parDataTUE. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron)

- 0 0 6 UWord wr
numCuttEdgeParams_tu *
Multi-line: yes Line index in the TUE module:

1 Variables 03/2009
parMasksTUS
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TUS that indicates whether it is to serve as a
search criterion for a 'complex search' (_N_TUSEARC) and how it is to be combined.
The corresponding comparison values are stored in parDataTUS.
If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has been selected (#0), they are logically combined with AND.
- 0 0 6 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Line index in the TUS module:
resultCuttingEdgeNrUsed $A_USEDD
D numbers of the cutting edges used since the last workpiece count, that have previously been used on the defined
tool carrier via resultNrOfCutEdgesUsed.
Various D offsets for a tool indicate multiple entries of the tool, that means a T number can be present more than once.
The two variables are linked to each other. resultNrOfCutEdgesUsed has to be read first, and then the individual T
numbers with resultToolNrUsed.
See also $A_USEDND, $A_USEDT and SETPIECE command.
0 maximum number of cutting edges in NCK
max. Anzahl
- 0 0 Schneiden in Long Integer r
NCK
((i. tool carrier-1) * line2 of column3
Multi-line: yes (resultNrOfCutEdgesUsed)) + Zeile 1 * Zeile 2 von resultNrOfCutEdgesUsed
consecutive number of the tool used
resultNrOfCutEdgesUsed $A_USEDND
Line 1: Number of tool carriers
Line 2: Maximum number of entries of resultToolNrUsed or resultCuttingEdgeNrUsed per tool carrier
Line i+2: Number of the i. tool carrier
Line i+3: Number of cutting edges which have been used since the last workpiece count on the i. tool carrier. This
corresponds to $A_USEDND.
The T and D numbers of the cutting edges can be read with resultToolNrUsed and resultCuttingEdgeNrUsed
respectively.
If TOOLMAN is not active and
$MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO = FALSE, then line 1 = 1,
$MC_T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO = TRUE, then line 1 = 32.
If tool monitoring is not active, line 2 = 0.
See also $A_USEDT, $A_USEDD and SETPIECE command
max. Anzahl
NCK
Meaning of the index: See 2*max.Anz. der Distanzbez. zw.Mag. und WZ-
Multi-line: yes
description Haltern + 2 = 66
resultNrOfTools
Result: Number of tools found
In the case of _N_TMGETT, it is possible to find no tools (value=0) or exactly 1 tool (value 1); in the case of
_N_TSEARC, the number of found tools can be any number > 0, limited by the number of tools in the NC or no tools at
all (value=0).
- 0 0 numTools UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
resultToolNr
Result: T-numbers of the tools found
The array elements contain the internal T- numbers of the tools found. The storing order is the order in which the tools
have been found by the PI-Service.
- 0 0 31999 UWord r
Multi-line: no resultNrOfTools

03/2009 1 Variables
resultToolNrUsed $A_USEDT
T numbers of the cutting edges used since the last workpiece count, that have previously been used on the defined
tool carrier via resultNrOfCutEdgesUsed.
Various D offsets for a tool indicate multiple entries of the tool, that means a T number can be present more than once.
The two variables are linked to each other. resultNrOfCutEdgesUsed has to be read first, and then the individual T
numbers with resultToolNrUsed.
See also $A_USEDND, $A_USEDD and SETPIECE command.
max. Anzahl
NCK
((i. tool carrier-1) * line2 of column3
Multi-line: yes (resultNrOfCutEdgesUsed)) + Zeile 1 * Zeile 2 von resultNrOfCutEdgesUsed
consecutive number of the tool used
1.7.16 Area T, Module TUM: Tool data: user magazine data

userData $TC_MAPCx[y] x = ParameterNo y = MagazineNo

Magazine user data for a tool magazine. These parameters can only be used if the machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM and
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK have been set accordingly.
colIndex: Magazine number of magazine
- 0 Long Integer wr
Number of the user-defined
Multi-line: yes numMagParams_u
parameter
1.7.17 Area T, Module TUP: Tool data: user magatine place data
userPlaceData $TC_MPPCx[y,z] x=ParamNo y=MagazineNo z=MagPlaceNo

Magazine location user data for a tool magazine. These parameters can only be used if the machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM and
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK have been set accordingly.
colIndex: Magazine number of the magazine
- 0 Long Integer wr
parameter + numMagLocParams_u
Multi-line: yes numMagLocParams_u * magNrPlaces
* (number of the magazine location -
1)

1 Variables 03/2009
1.7.18 Area T, Module TUS: Tool data: user monitoring data

userData $TC_MOPCx[y,z] x=ParamNo,y=T-Number,z=Edge

User data for monitoring a cutting edge. These parameters can only be used if the machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM and $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK have been set accordingly.
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes parameter + (number of the cutting
edge -1) * numCuttEdgeParams_tus
1.7.19 Area T, Module AD: Adapter data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/Adapter/...
Adapter data are used to define the dimensions of an adapter (L1, L2, L3) per magazine location and the
direction (transformation) of loaded tools.
The transformation is applied when cutting edge data are processed in OPI modules TOT, TOST and
TOET if the tool is loaded in a magazine location to which adapter data are assigned.
Adapter data exist independently of magazine location data. Magazine location data contain a reference
(see module TP, placeData) to the adapter data.
adaptData
Adapter data
colIndex: AdaptNo
mm, inch, user defined 0.0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes ParameterNo numParams_Adapt
1.7.20 Area T, Module AEV: Working offsets: Directory

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/ActiveCatalogue/...
The active tool edges are sorted in consecutive ascending D number sequence in the AEV module. This
module also contains the essential tool data for each D number entered. "Active" in this case refers to the
replacement tools.
(If the "unique D numbers" option is not activated in the NC, the edges are sorted according to ascending
ToolIdent and DuploNumber. The D number variable is then set to 0 on all lines in this module.)
The D number assignment is not necessarily unique for active tools. For this reason, the same D number
may be entered in several lines (successively).
The line number is a serial number which is not related to the D number.
The number of active tool edges is stored in numActDEdges (module AEV), e.g. example 10,
i.e. module AEV contains entries for 10 tool edges. These are sorted in ascending D number sequence.
The tool edge with the lowest D number has index (serial number) 1, the next-higher D number index 2,
etc. and the edge with the highest D number index 10.
When tools are activated/deactivated and D numbers re-assigned, the entries for a D number change line
dynamically.
Module T / AEV is organized as a 1-dimensional variable array and can be used for the following
purposes:
- Display all tool edges, including D numbers, of active tools.
- Display associated tool data
The module contains the following information which can be addressed via a column index:

03/2009 1 Variables
- Single column, in 1st line only. Number of D numbers (lines, tool edges) in the current list
- The other columns apply to all lines, each line contains tool edge data with the following information:
- D number
- Internal T number of associated tool
- Tool edge number relative to tool
- Tool identifier
- Duplo number
- Magazine number and
- Location number of tool
Individual values cannot be altered via this module.
Re-assignment of D numbers and changes in allocation to tools (deactivate, activate replacement tools)
and other modifications to data cause changes to toolCounter in "C / S Channel-specific status data".
Variable modeSpindleToolRevolver (module N/Y, global system data) defines for circular magazines (T /
TM, magazine data, general data, MagKind=3) whether the tool in OPI modules "T / TP, magazine data,
location data", "T / TD, tool data, general data", "T/TV, tool data, directory" and "T / AEV, working offsets,
directory" remains (new functionality) in its circular magazine location during operation or changes to the
buffer magazine (earlier behaviour)).
DNo
D number
Meaningful and defined only in connection with "unique D numbers" function.

- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Serial number of active edges numActDEdges
cuttEdgeNo
Number of edge for this tool

- 1 maxnumCuttEdges_Tool UWord r
duploNo
Duplo number

- UWord r
numActDEdges
Number of D numbers in this list

When tool management function is active:
Specifies the number of edges belonging to tools with "active"
status (contained in the TO unit)
When tool management function is not active:
Specifies the number of all edges contained in the TO unit.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
toolIdent
Tool identifier

- String[32] r

1 Variables 03/2009
toolInMag
Magazine in which tool is located

- UWord r
toolInPlace
Magazine location of tool

- UWord r
toolNo
Internal T number

- UWord r
1.7.21 Area T, Module TC: Toolholder parameters
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/ToolCarrier/...
Module TC contains the data which define an orientatable toolholder (offset vectors, axis directions,
rotation angle, type information).
It is also possible to read the current positions of the toolholder axes and the differences between the
current and programmed axis values for the active toolholder.
tcCarr1 $TC_CARR1
x component of offset vector l1
- 0 Double wr
$MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER /
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder
numToBaust
tcCarr10 $TC_CARR10
x component of rotary axis v2
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr11 $TC_CARR11
y component of rotary axis v2
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr12 $TC_CARR12
z component of rotary axis v2
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr13 $TC_CARR13
Angle of rotation alpha1 (in degrees)
Degree 0 Double wr
numToBaust

03/2009 1 Variables
tcCarr14 $TC_CARR14
Angle of rotation alpha2 (in degrees)
Degree 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr15 $TC_CARR15
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr16 $TC_CARR16
y component of offset vector l3
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr17 $TC_CARR17
z component of offset vector l3
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr18 $TC_CARR18
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr19 $TC_CARR19
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr2 $TC_CARR2
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr20 $TC_CARR20
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr21 $TC_CARR21
Axis identifier of 1st rotary axis
- 0 String[32] wr
numToBaust
tcCarr22 $TC_CARR22
Axis identifier of 2nd rotary axis
- 0 String[32] wr
numToBaust

1 Variables 03/2009
tcCarr23 $TC_CARR23
Kinematic type
Kinematic type: P: Rotatable workpiece (part)
M: Rotatable tool and rotatable workpiece (mixed)
T or any character except P and M: Rotatable tool
- 0 String[32] wr
numToBaust
tcCarr24 $TC_CARR24
Offset of 1st rotary axis in degrees
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr25 $TC_CARR25
Offset of 2nd rotary axis in degrees
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr26 $TC_CARR26
Offset of Hirth tooth system in degrees of 1st rotary axis
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr27 $TC_CARR27
Offset of Hirth tooth system in degrees of 2nd rotary axis
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr28 $TC_CARR28
Increment of Hirth tooth system in degrees of 1st rotary axis
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr29 $TC_CARR29
Increment of Hirth tooth system in degrees of 2nd rotary axis
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr3 $TC_CARR3
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr30 $TC_CARR30
Minimum position of 1st rotary axis
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr31 $TC_CARR31
Minimum position of 2nd rotary axis
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust

03/2009 1 Variables
tcCarr32 $TC_CARR32
Maximum position of 1st rotary axis
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr33 $TC_CARR33
Maximum position of 2nd rotary axis
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr34 $TC_CARR34
Toolholder name
Contains a freely definable string provided as a freely definable
identifier for the orientatable toolholder.
It has no meaning as yet within the NCK and is not evaluated either.
The identifier should not be used for other purposes since a later
expansion will allow an orientatable toolholder to be activated via
a name as well as via numbers
- String[32] wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER
tcCarr35 $TC_CARR35
Axis name 1
Contains a freely definable string provided as a free identifier
for the first rotary axis.
It has no meaning whatsoever within the NCK, neither is it evaluated.
It can therefore be used for any other purposes.

- 0 String[32] wr
tcCarr36 $TC_CARR36
Axis name 2
Contains a freely definable string provided as a free identifier
for the second rotary axis.
It can therefore be used for any other purposes.

- String[32] wr
tcCarr37 $TC_CARR37
Identifier
Contains an integer number for identifying the toolholder.
- 0 Long Integer wr
tcCarr38 $TC_CARR38
Position component X
Contains a position (X component of return position).
- 0 Double wr

1 Variables 03/2009
tcCarr39 $TC_CARR39
Position component Y
Contains a position (Y component of return position).
- 0 Double wr
tcCarr4 $TC_CARR4
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr40 $TC_CARR40
Position component Z
Contains a position (Z component of return position).
- 0 Double wr
tcCarr41 $TC_CARR41
x-component of the fine offset of the offset vector l1
mm, inch, user defined 0 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the tool carrier $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER
tcCarr42 $TC_CARR42
y-component of the fine offset of the offset vector l1
tcCarr43 $TC_CARR43
z-component of the fine offset of the offset vector l1
tcCarr44 $TC_CARR44
tcCarr45 $TC_CARR45
tcCarr46 $TC_CARR46
tcCarr5 $TC_CARR5
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr55 $TC_CARR55

03/2009 1 Variables
tcCarr56 $TC_CARR56
tcCarr57 $TC_CARR57
tcCarr58 $TC_CARR58
tcCarr59 $TC_CARR59
tcCarr6 $TC_CARR6
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr60 $TC_CARR60
tcCarr64 $TC_CARR64
Fine offset of the offset of the rotary axis v1
Degree, user defined 0 0 Double wr
tcCarr65 $TC_CARR65
Fine offset of the offset of the rotary axis v2
Degree, user defined 0 0 Double wr
tcCarr7 $TC_CARR7
x component of rotary axis v1
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr8 $TC_CARR8
y component of rotary axis v1
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust
tcCarr9 $TC_CARR9
z component of rotary axis v1
- 0 Double wr
numToBaust

1 Variables 03/2009
1.7.22 Area T, Module TOE: Edge-related coarse total offsets, setup

offsets
One set of edge-related coarse total offsets, setup offsets, exists for each tool edge and operating location.
This module corresponds totally to module T / TOS, edge-related location-dependent fine total offsets.
edgeECData $TC_ECPx[t,d]
Location-dependent offsets, setup value
((EdgeNo-1) * (maxnumEdgeSC *
numParams_SC * maxnumEdgeSC *
Multi-line: yes numParams_SC)) + ((EdgeSC - 1)*
numParams_SC) + ParameterNo
1.7.23 Area T, Module TOET: Edge-related coarse total offsets,

transformed setup offsets
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/CompTransfor/...
One set of edge-related transformed total offsets exists for each tool edge and operating location.
This module corresponds totally to module T / TOE.
edgeECData
Transformed location-dependent offsets, setup value
colIndex: TNo
1.7.24 Area T, Module TOS: Edge-related location-dependent fine total

offsets
One set of edge-related total offsets exists for each tool edge and operating location.
The maximum number of operating locations is identical for all tool edges and defined by the new variable
maxnumEdgeSC ($MN_MAX_SUMCORR_PERCUTTING_EDGE) in "N / Y global system data".
numParams_SC (currently 9) offsets are provided (depending on location-independent wear values) for
each total offset set: Length 1, length 2, length 3, radius and 5 others.
Each replacement tool has its own separate (different) data.
The NCK resets the data when the associated tool is activated if machine data
($MN_MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR, bit 1 = 1) is used for activation.
The total offsets of a tool edge are accessible via the internal T number of the associated tool, edge
number, total offset number ("operating location").
PI Services may exist for selective creation and deletion of tool edge total offsets.
The existence of total offsets can be controlled selectively via the new machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_SUMCORR (OPI: maxNumSumCorr in N / Y) (P5??).

03/2009 1 Variables
The following applies:

When the MMC2 tool management function is in use, $MN_MM_NUM_SUMCORR = -1 must be set to
ensure that the total offsets exist for all offset locations (number = maxnumEdgeSC) from creation of the
tool edge until its deletion.
(The new PI Services for creation / deletion will not currently be used by the MMC2 tool management for
turning applications). For the present, the new NC machine data $MN_MM_NUM_SUMCORR = -1 must
be set to automatic creation / deletion.
The method of addressing in this module is analogous to accessing "Edge data / offsets" by column
addressing with T number (using an array access operation to gain quick access to the total offsets of all
tool edge operating locations or all edges of a tool).
The module contains the location-dependent total offsets for all tools. Each element is addressed via a
column and line index:
The column index is the tool number (T number), i.e. all location-dependent total offsets of this tool (for all
edges / locations) can be found in one column.
If a non-existent T number is specified as the column index, the request is acknowledged negatively.
The number of lines is determined by the number of total offset values, the number of operating locations
and the maximum possible edge number of a tool:
maxZeilenindex = numParams_SC * maxnumEdgeSC * maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
These variables are stored in "N / Y global system data" and have the following meanings:
numParams_SC: No. of wear offsets per location (according to L1, L2, L3, radius and 5 others), currently 9
maxnumEdgeSC: Maximum number of locations (SC) per edge
maxnumCuttEdges_Tool: Max. permissible number of edges per tool
Several lines can be addressed simultaneously if necessary, allowing, for example, all location-dependent
total offsets of all edges of one tool to be read in one request. The location-dependent total offsets of the
tools are all of the same data type and have the same physical unit.
Module T / TOS has a 2-dimensional organization.

For OPI, see Section OPI variables.
The following lines are provided for each T number (column index):
Edge 1, Location 1, L1
Edge 1, Location 1, Radius
Edge 1, Location 1, Par5
.......... ..... .....
Edge 1, Location 1, Par numParams_SC
Edge 1, ..... ......
Edge 1, Location maxnumEdgeSC, Par numParams_SC
.......... ..... .....
Edge 2, Location maxnumEdgeSC, Par numParams_SC
.......... ..... .....
Edge maxnumCuttEdges_Tool, Location maxnumEdgeSC, Par numParams_SC

1 Variables 03/2009
Interrelationship between edge parameters, total offsets and variables:

Edge parameter DL1 DL2 ... DL4 ...
$TC_DP3 $TC_SCP13 $TC_SCP23 ... $TC_SCP43 ...
....
with DLx, TC_DPy, TC_SCPz

x from 1 to 6 (maxnumEdgeSC = $MN_MAX_SUMCORR_PERCUTTING_EDGE) and maximum = 6
y from 3 to 11
z = (10 * x) + y
edgeSCData $TC_SCPx[t,d]
Location-dependent offsets, wear
colIndex: TNo
1.7.25 Area T, Module TOST: Edge-related location-dependent fine total

offsets, transformed
One set of edge-related transformed total offsets exists for each tool edge and operating location.
This module corresponds totally to module T / TOS.
edgeSCData
Transformed location-dependent offsets, wear
colIndex: TNo
1.7.26 Area T, Module TOT: Edge data: Transformed offset data

The MMC must be capable of displaying and modifying the offset data of the tool edges as both
transformed and untransformed data. The transformation refers to the adapter data (if programmed) of
magazine locations. The MMC can display and modify both transformed and untransformed data (of the
same tool if necessary) "simultaneously" (in different applications or different MMCs).
To provide access to transformed data, a new module, T / TOT (edge data: transformed offset data), is
provided which is identical to the existing module T / TO (edge data: Offset data), except that it supplies
transformed data instead of untransformed data.
The information edge DNo (D numbers assigned to edges) is included under the offset
(numCuttEdgeParams * maxnumCuttEdges_Tool) in both the T / TOT and T / TO modules.
Both modules have a 2-dimensional organization.

03/2009 1 Variables
The T number is the column index.

Line numbers are calculated by the following method:
(EdgeNo -1) * numCuttEdgeParams +parameter No.
numCuttEdgeParams = parameter per edge (currently 25) (from Y in N area)

EdgeNo = edge number for tool
Example: with numCuttEdgeParams = 25 and maxnumCuttEdges_Tool = 9
Column: T number
Lines:
1 edge 1, parameter 1
...
25 edge 1, parameter numCuttEdgeParams
...
50 edge 2, parameter numCuttEdgeParams
...
225 edge maxnumCuttEdges_Tool, parameter numCuttEdgeParams
226 edge 1, D No assigned to edge 1
Untransformed data: /Tool/Compensation/edgeData[uToa,cTNr,line_from,line_to]

Transformed data: /Tool/CompTransfor/edgeData[uToa,cTNr,line_from,line_to]
Values which can be displayed as transformed data are the 9 geo-data (corresponding to L1, L2, L3,
radius, and generally 5 other values), wear and total offsets.
If tools which are not located in a magazine location with adapter data are accessed via the module for
transformed data, then the data are treated as if they were untransformed.
For OPI, see Section OPI variables.
cuttEdgeParam
Replaced by edgeData
edgeData
Transformed edge offset data and D number list
Important: This variable is called "cuttEdgeParam" in NonWindows MMC and PLC.

1 Variables 03/2009
1.7.27 Area T, Module TAD: Application-specific data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/Data/...
Data module TAD is organized as a 2-dimensional variable array. This module contains
application-specific data for all tools. Every element can be addressed via a column and
row index:
The column index is the number of the user-defined tool parameter. The number of
tool parameters (columns) can be found in variable numToolParams_tad in area N / module Y.
The row index is the tool number. Attempts to access non-existent tools are
negatively acknowledged.
Application-specific tool data are all of the same data type.
Application-specific tool data are reserved for SIEMENS applications.
siemData $TC_TPCSx[y]
Important: 2-dimensional variable. Column index corresponds to the parameter number.
Reserved for SIEMENS applications.
columnIndex: Number of the application-specific tool parameter

- 0 Double wr
1.7.28 Area T, Module TAM: Application-specific magazine data

Module TAM contains application-specific information about tool magazines.
Application-specific magazine data are all of the same data type.
The application-specific magazine data are reserved for SIEMENS applications.
siemData $TC_MAPCSx[y]
Siemens application magazine data.
These parameters can be used only if machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MAGAZINE_PARAM and $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK are set
accordingly.
colIndex: Magazine number
- 0 Long Integer wr
Multi-line: yes Parameter number numMagParams_tam

03/2009 1 Variables
1.7.29 Area T, Module TAO: Application-specific cutting edge data

Data module TAO is organized as a 2-dimensional variable array. This module contains application-
specific cutting edge data for all tools. Every element can be addressed via a column and row index. The
column index is the tool number (T number), i.e. one column contains the application-specific data for all
the cutting edges of a tool.
The assignments between tools and T numbers are listed in the Tool Directory (TV) module in the relevant
T area.
A request is negatively acknowledged if a non-existent tool number is entered as the column index.
The number of rows is determined by the number of parameters per cutting edge and the number of
cutting edges of a tool:
Max. number of rows = numCuttEdgeParams_tao * /T/TV/numCuttEdges (T number)
The number of parameters per cutting edge numCuttEdgeParams_tao can be found in area N / module Y.
The number of tool-specific cutting edges is specified in area T / module TV.
Several rows can be addressed where necessary which means, for example, that all application-specific
edge data of a tool can be read in one request.
Application-specific edge data are all of the same data type.
Application-specific cutting edge data are reserved for SIEMENS applications.
siemEdgeData $TC_DPCSx[y,z]
Siemens application tool cutting edge parameter
Important: 2-dimensional variable. Column index corresponds to the T number.
colIndex: TNo
- 0 Double wr
(EdgeNo-1) *
Multi-line: yes numCuttEdgeParams_tao + numCuttEdgeParams_tao * numCuttEdges
ParameterNo
1.7.30 Area T, Module TAP: Application-specific magazine location data

Data module TAP is organized as a 2-dimensional variable array. This module contains application-
specific data of a T area. Every element can be addressed via a column and row index:
The column index is the magazine number, i.e. one column contains the application-specific magazine
location data for all the locations of one magazine. The assignments between magazines and magazine
numbers are listed in the appropriate Magazine Directory (TMV) module in the relevant T area. A request
is negatively acknowledged if a non-existent magazine number is entered as the column index.
The number of rows is determined by the number of parameters per magazine location and the number of
magazine locations:
Max. number of rows = numMagLocParams_tap * magNrPlaces
Application-specific magazine location data are all of the same data type.
Application-specific magazine location data are reserved for SIEMENS applications.

1 Variables 03/2009
siemPlaceData $TC_MPPCSx[y,z]
Siemens application magazine location data.
$MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MAGLOC_PARAM and $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK are set
accordingly.
colIndex: Magazine number
- 0 Long Integer wr
ParameterNumber +
Multi-line: yes numMagLocParams_tap * numMagLocParams_tap * magNrPlaces
MagazineLocationNumber-1
1.7.31 Area T, Module TAS: Application-specific monitoring data

Data module TAS is organized as a 2-dimensional variable array. This module contains application-
specific monitoring data for all tools. Every element can be addressed via a column and row index:
The column index is the tool number (T number), i.e. one column contains the application-specific
monitoring data for all the cutting edges of a tool. The assignments between tools and T numbers are
listed in the Tool Directory (TV) module in the relevant T area. A request is negatively acknowledged if a
non-existent tool number is entered as the column index.
The number of rows is determined by the number of parameters per cutting edge and the number of
cutting edges of a tool:
Max. number of rows = numCuttEdgeParams_tas * /T/TV/numCuttEdges (T number)
The number of parameters per cutting edge numCuttEdgeParams_tas can be found in area N / module Y.
The number of tool-specific cutting edges (/T/TV/numCuttEdges) is specified in area T / module TV.
Several rows can be addressed where necessary which means, for example, that all application-specific
monitoring data of a tool can be read in one request.
Application-specific monitoring data are all of the same data type.
Application-specific monitoring data are reserved for SIEMENS applications.
siemData $TC_MOPCSx[y,z]
Siemens application monitoring data of a tool cutting edge.
$MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MON_PARAM and $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
are set accordingly.
colIndex: TNo
- 0 Double wr
ParameterNumber + (EdgeNo -1) *
Multi-line: yes numCuttEdgeParams_tas * numCuttEdges
numCuttEdgeParams_tas

03/2009 1 Variables
1.8 Machine and setting data
1.8.1 Area N, Module M: Global machine data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/Drive/...
Global machine data
MDBA_DRIVE_IS_ACTIVE MD 13000: DRIVE_IS_ACTIVE[x] x = PlugplaceNo

Activation of 611D drive / enable high-speed inputs/outputs
0 = inactive
1 = active
- Character wr
Multi-line: yes Slot number in drive bus 14
MDCA_DRIVE_LOGIC_NR MD 13010: DRIVE_LOGIC_NR[x] x = PlugplaceNo

Logical drive number
- 0 30 Character wr
MDCA_DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE MD 13030: DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE[x] x = PlugplaceNo

Module identifier of relevant drive bus slot
1 = single-axis module
2 = two-axis module
9 = terminal block for dig. I/Os
10 = bit bus interface
- Character wr
MDCA_DRIVE_TYPE MD 13040: DRIVE_TYPE[x] x = PlugplaceNo

Drive type identifier for each drive bus slot
1 = FDD
2 = MSD
- Character wr
MDD_INT_INCR_PER_DEG MD 10210: INT_INCR_PER_DEG

Calculation resolution for angular position
- 0,000001 1000 Double wr
Multi-line: no 1
MDD_INT_INCR_PER_MM MD 10200: INT_INCR_PER_MM

Calculation resolution for linear positions
- 0,000001 1000 Double wr
Multi-line: no 1
MDD_SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME MD 10050: SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME

Basic system clock cycle. For possible assignment of values, see description of machine data
SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME.
s 0,000125 s 0,032 s Double wr
Multi-line: no 1
MDLA_DRIVE_INVERTER_CODE MD 13020: DRIVE_INVERTER_CODE[x] x = PlugplaceNo

Power section code of drive module
- Long Integer wr
Multi-line: yes Slot number of drive module 14
MDL_POSCTRL_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO MD 10060: POSCTRL_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO

Position control cycle factor
Multi-line: no 1

1 Variables 03/2009
MDSA_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB MD 10000: AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[x] x = Axis

Machine axis name
- String[16] wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index from 0 7
1.8.2 Area A, Module M: Axis-specific machine data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Axis/Drive/...
Axis-specific machine data
MDCA_CTRLOUT_MODULE_NR MD 30110: CTRLOUT_MODULE_NR

Setpoint assignment: Drive number / module number
- 1 15 Character wr
Multi-line: no 1
MDCA_CTRLOUT_TYPE MD 30130: CTRLOUT_TYPE

Type of setpoint output
- 0 1 Character wr
Multi-line: no 1
MDCA_ENC_MODULE_NR MD 30220: ENC_MODULE_NR[x] x = PlugplaceNo

Actual value assignment: Drive number / measuring circuit number
- 1 15 Character wr
Multi-line: yes Encoder number 2
MDCA_ENC_TYPE MD 30240: ENC_TYPE[x] x = PlugplaceNo

Type of actual value sensing (actual position value)
0 = Simulation
1 = Raw signal generator, high-resolution
2 = Square-wave generator, standard generator with pulse quadruplication
3 = Encoder for stepper motor
4 = Absolute encoder with EnDat interface
5 = Absolute encoder with SSI interface (FM-NC)
- 0 5 Character wr
Multi-line: yes Encoder number 2
1.8.3 Area N, Module SE: Global setting data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/Settings/...
This module contains all global setting data. The physical units depend on the variable "userScale" in
module Y of area N.
MDB_JOG_CONT_MODE_LEVELTRIGGRD SD 41050: $SN_MDB_JOG_CONT_MODE_LEVELTRIGGRD

Jog mode
- Character wr
Multi-line: no
MDB_JOG_REV_IS_ACTIVE SD 41100: $SN_MDB_JOG_REV_IS_ACTIVE

JOG at revolutional feedrate
0 = G94
1 = G95
- Character wr
Multi-line: no
MDD_JOG_REV_SET_VELO SD 41120: $SN_MDD_JOG_REV_SET_VELO

JOG velocity for G95
Degree, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: no

03/2009 1 Variables
MDD_JOG_SET_VELO SD 41110: $SN_MDD_JOG_SET_VELO

JOG velocity for G94
Multi-line: no
MDD_JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO SD 41200: $SN_MDD_JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO

JOG velocity for master spindle
Multi-line: no
MDD_JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE SD 41010: $SN_MDD_JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE

Variable incremental value for JOG mode
- Double wr
Multi-line: no
1.8.4 Area C, Module SE: Channel-specific setting data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/Settings/...
Channel-specific setting data
MDD_DRY_RUN_FEED SD 42100: $SC_MDD_DRY_RUN_FEED

Dry run feedrate
Double wr
defined
Multi-line: no
MDD_THREAD_START_ANGLE SD 42000: $SC_MDD_THREAD_START_ANGLE

Starting angle for thread
Degree Double wr
Multi-line: no
1.8.5 Area A, Module SE: Axis-specific setting data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Axis/Settings/...
Axis-specific setting data
AA_OFF_LIMIT SD 43350: $SA_AA_OFF_LIMIT

Upper limit of compensation value which can be preset by means of synchronized actions via the system variable
$AA_OFF.
This limit value acts on the absolutely effective compensation value via $AA_OFF.
It is possible to interrogate the compensation value for limit-range violation via the system variable $AA_OFF_LIMIT.
- Double r
Multi-line: no
MDB_WORKAREA_MINUS_ENABLE SD 43410: $SA_MDB_WORKAREA_MINUS_ENABLE

Working area limitation active in the negative direction
0 = inactive
1 = active
- Character wr
Multi-line: yes Number of machine axis 1
MDB_WORKAREA_PLUS_ENABLE SD 43400: $SA_MDB_WORKAREA_PLUS_ENABLE

Working area limitation active in the positive direction
0 = inactive
1 = active
- Character wr

1 Variables 03/2009
1.9 Parameters
MDD_SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26 SD 43220: $SA_MDD_SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26

Maximum spindle speed at G26 (master spindle)
Multi-line: no 1
MDD_SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS SD 43230: $SA_MDD_SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS

Spindle speed limitation (master spindle)
Multi-line: no 1
MDD_SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25 SD 43210: $SA_MDD_SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25

Minimum spindle speed at G25 (master spindle)
Multi-line: no 1
MDD_WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS SD 43430: $SA_MDD_WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS

Working area limitation in the negative direction
MDD_WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS SD 43420: $SA_MDD_WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS

Working area limitation in the positive direction
1.9 Parameters
1.9.1 Area C, Module RP: Arithmetic parameters
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/Parameter/...
Arithmetic parameters are special predefined variables which are addressed with the letter R followed by a
number. The contents and meaning of an arithmetic parameter are defined by the programmer of the NC
program. 100 R variables are defined by default. The number of R variables can be set via the channel-
specific machine data 28050 (MM_NUM_R_PARAM). Up to 1000 R-variables can be set.
R $R[x] x = ParameterNo PA
R variables (up to SW 3.2)
Attention: This variable should be used for SW releases < 3.3. For later releases use the variable rpa !
Attention: For MMC102 the R number is used as row index !!!

- Double wr
Multi-line: yes R number MM_NUM_R_PARAM
rpa R[x] x = ParameterNo PA

R variables (from SW 3.3)
Attention: For MMC102 the R number is used as row index !!!

- Double wr
Multi-line: yes R number + 1 MM_NUM_R_PARAM + 1

03/2009 1 Variables
1.9 Parameters
1.9.2 Area C, Module VSYN: Channel-specific user variables for

synchronous actions
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/SelectedFunctionData/...
This module contains channel-specific user variables for synchronous actions
acFifoN $AC_FIFOx[y] , x = FIFONo (1-10) y = ParameterNo

FIFO variable for synchronous actions (Note: SYNACT only)
The number of columns depends on the number of FIFOs
- Double r
1=2: access to the first element read
Multi-line: yes MD $MC_MM_LEN_AC_FIFO+6
in
acMarker $AC_MARKER[x] x = MarkerNo

Flag variable, counter for synchronous actions
(Note: SYNACT only)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of the flag MD $MC_MM_NUM_AC_MARKER
acMarkerL $AC_MARKER[n]
Flag variable, counter for motion-synchronous actions
(Note: only with SYNACT)
Writeable as from SW 7.4.
- Long Integer wr
acParam $AC_PARAM[x] x = ParameterNo

Dynamic parameters for motion-synchronous actions
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the parameter MD $MC_MM_NUM_AC_PARAM
acSystemMarkerL
Flag variable, counter for motion-synchronous actions
Reserved for system.
- Long Integer wr
acSystemParam
Dynamic parameters for motion-synchronous actions
Reserved for system.
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the parameter MD $MC_MM_NUM_AC_PARAM
alignDummy
dummy
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 03/2009
1.10 Diagnosis data
1.10 Diagnosis data

1.10.1 Area N, Module DIAGN: Global diagnostic data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/ChannelDiagnose/...
This module contains information about global NC diagnostic data.

The measured time variables are available on the destination hardware only.
The net time is calculated without interrupts by higher priority time levels, the gross time includes the
interrupts.
The highest priority time level is the SERVO, followed by the IPO and finally the interpreter/ preparation.
To obtain useful minimum and maximum time intervals, the corresponding variables must be initialized
before the measurement.
actCycleTimeBrut
Total of the current gross run times of all channels in ms.
ms 0 0 Double r
Selects a specific SW task on the
Multi-line: yes 10
NCK:
actCycleTimeNet
Total of the current net run times of all channels in ms.
ms 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 10
NCK:
dp611USpecAccChangeCnt
The counter is incremented if the NCK changes the
available ACC information
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
dp611USpecAccKey
Version and type information about available ACC contents
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes Drive number maxnumDrives
dp611USpecAccMask
Bit-coded screenform indicating the drives for which special ACC files are available
Bit 0 == 1 -> A special ACC is available

for drive with log. drive number 1.
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
dp611USpecAccPath
Path in which the ACC files are stored in the NCK file system.
This path might be empty later on if the files are to
be supplied from the active file system.
Current equivalent value: /_N_VS_DIR
- 0 String[32] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
dpAxisCfgMachAxisNr
Machine axis !!CAUTION NCU LINK!!
- 0 0 INT32_MAX Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes Axis number dpAxisCfgNumAxes
dpAxisCfgNumAxes
Number of axes entered in the system
Multi-line: yes 1 1

03/2009 1 Variables
1.10 Diagnosis data
dpAxisCfgValid
Axis info is available
0=Information is not available
1=Information is available
Multi-line: yes 1 1
dpAxisStateCtrlout
Status of output drivers.
0=no axis status assigned
1=axis status assigned
2=axis status is cyclical
3=axis status assigned and cyclical
- 0 0 3 UWord r
dpAxisStateEnc1
Status encoder 1 driver
- 0 UWord r
dpAxisStateEnc2
Status encoder 2 driver
- 0 UWord r
dpAxisStateLifeCntErrCtrlout
This data counts the number of position control cycles
since failure of the sign-of-life signal
0 to n= number of position control cycles since
failure of the sign-of-life signal
dpAxisStateLifeCntErrEnc1
- 0 Long Integer r
dpAxisStateLifeCntErrEnc2
- 0 Long Integer r
dpBusCfgBaudrate
Baud rate on DP bus (bit/s)
The permissible baud rates are determined by
the Profibus standard (DIN19245 EN50170)
Hz 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Bus number dpBusCfgNumBuses

1 Variables 03/2009
1.10 Diagnosis data
dpBusCfgBusNo
Bus number of the bus; used for conversion of "Bus index"=1...dpBusCfgNumBuses to "Bus number"
All permissible bus numbers are possible:
1 = 1.DP bus on the PLC
2 = 2.DP / MPI bus on the PLC
3 = Virtual PROFIBUS
4 = Isochronous real-time Ethernet (reserved)
Multi-line: yes 1 1
dpBusCfgCycleTime
The time required by the master to scan all
slaves once (request, response), until the
cycle starts from the beginning again.
s, user defined 0 0 DOUBLE_MAX Double r
dpBusCfgDataExTime
Data exchange time in [s,s,userdef]
s, user defined 0 0 DOUBLE_MAX Double r
dpBusCfgNumBuses
Number of DP buses
Currently only one bus standardized acc. to Profibus DP standard
Multi-line: yes 1 1
dpBusCfgValid
Bus configuration data are available
TRUE= data exist and are initialized
FALSE= no data exist
Multi-line: yes 1 1
dpBusStateAccessDurationAct
Current access time to communications buffer for DP master
- 0 Long Integer r
dpBusStateAccessDurationMax
Maximum access time to communications buffer for DP master
- 0 Long Integer r
dpBusStateAccessDurationMin
Minimum access time to communications buffer for DP master
- 0 Long Integer r
dpBusStateAccessErrCnt1
Number of bus access errors of type 1 since NCK Start
- 0 Long Integer r
dpBusStateAccessErrCnt2
Number of bus access errors of type 2 since NCK Start
- 0 Long Integer r

03/2009 1 Variables
1.10 Diagnosis data
dpBusStateAvgCycleBetweenErr1
Average number of cycles between two
bus access errors of type 1
- 0 Long Integer r
dpBusStateAvgCycleBetweenErr2
Average number of cycles between two
bus access errors of type 2
- 0 Long Integer r
dpBusStateCycleCnt
Number of bus cycles since NCK Start
- 0 Long Integer r
dpBusStateDpmAction
Indicator for operating progress of DP M
- 0 Long Integer r
dpBusStateDpmActual
Current status of DP M bus - controlled by DP M
- 0 UWord r
dpBusStateDpmCtrl
Booting status of processor for DP Master dpcadmin
- 0 UWord r
dpBusStateDpmError
Error on status transitions
- 0 Long Integer r
dpBusStateDpmPrjCnt
Modification counter for new DP configurations.
Suggested use:
*) Read modification counter (1)
*) Read out configuring data
*) Read modification counter (2)
*) If the modification counters in (1) and (2) are identical
and both display "valid", the data read from HW-Config
will be consistent.
even values -> configuration invalid
uneven values -> configuration valid
- 0 UWord r
dpBusStateDpmRequest
Desired status of DP M bus - request from HOST
- 0 UWord r
dpBusStateNumActiveSlaves
This data indicates how many slaves can currently be
accessed via the bus. This value is updated in online operation.
The number of slaves on the bus is determined

by the Profibus standard (DIN19245 EN50170)

1 Variables 03/2009
1.10 Diagnosis data
dpClientCfgId
Identification client NCK/PLC/3RD
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Client number dpClientCfgNumClnt
dpClientCfgNumClnt
Number of clients
Multi-line: yes 1 1
dpClientCfgValid
Client information is available
0=no client information available
1=client information is available
Multi-line: yes 1 1
dpClientStateComm
Client status incl. output release
0=No output enable
1=Client state output enable
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Client number dpClientCfgNumClnt
dpSlaveCfgAssignBus
Bus number of the slave
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Slave number dpSlaveCfgNumSlaves
dpSlaveCfgBusAddr
The address of the slave on the bus.
In addition to its own address, every slave has a
broadcast address via which all salves can be
addressed.
The broadcast address is not available for individually
addressing a single slave.
127: Broadcast address
- 0 0 127 UWord r
dpSlaveCfgDataExchangeTime
Time for the end of cyclical data transfer
See dpSlaveCfgMasterAppCycTime
s, user defined 0 Double r
dpSlaveCfgInputTime
Time for actual-value sensing
dpSlaveCfgIsochronModeSupport
Gives information whether the slave has been configured for isochronous mode on the PROFIBUS.
0: Isochronous mode not configured
1: Isochronous mode configured

03/2009 1 Variables
1.10 Diagnosis data
dpSlaveCfgMasterAppCycTime
Position controller cycle.
For a detailed description, please refer to
PROFIDRIVE PROFIL ANTRIEBSTECHNIK
(Edition: V1.2 Draft, April 1999) Section 7
See PROFIDRIVE PROFIL ANTRIEBSTECHNIK
(Edition: V1.2 Draft, April 1999) Section 7
dpSlaveCfgNumSlaves
Number of slaves configured in SDB1xxx.
This value may not match the actual number of slaves
connected to the bus.
The number of slaves which can be configured for bus connection
is determined by Profibus standard (DIN19245 EN50170).
Multi-line: yes 1 1
dpSlaveCfgOutputTime
Time for setpoint acceptance
dpSlaveCfgProfibusCycleTime
Bus cycle time
dpSlaveCfgValid
This data indicates whether the slave data structure
has already been initialized. The structure is initialized
when a slave configuration or status data is accessed.
Scanning dpSlaveCfgValid also activates initialization
of the structure.
True: Slave data are available

False: Slave data are not available
Multi-line: yes 1 1
dpSlaveIdentNo
Ident number of the slave
- 0 UWord r
dpSlaveIdentNoEx
The extended ID no. of the PROFIBUS slave
helps to identify the PROFIBUS slaves not officially classified
as such and therefore lack specificiation dpSlaveIdentNo.
- 0 UWord r
dpSlaveStateComm
The slave is active on the bus once the drive assigned to
the slave has successfully logged on to the bus.
True: Slave on bus
False: Slave not on bus
- 0 0 1 UWord r

1 Variables 03/2009
1.10 Diagnosis data
dpSlaveStateIncCnt
The incarnation counter of the slave
is increased by one each time the slave is included in the bus. If the slave drops out of the bus, this counter is not
changed.
After the first time it has gone into the bus (that is the first operational status of the slave), the value is 1.
In case of an area overflow, the count restarts at 0.

This only functions with slaves which contain at least one assigned NC axis. In the case of other slaves (pure I/O
slaves, or axes controlled by the PLC), this values remains at 0.
From 0 (starting value after Restart) to a maximum of 2147483647 (2^31-1).

- 0 0 2147483647 Long Integer r
dpSlaveStateSync
The drive linked to this slave is operating in cyclic mode.
Slaves without a drive are defined as "non-cyclical".
True: Cyclical
False: Non-cyclical
- 0 0 1 UWord r
dpSlaveVendorId
PROFIBUS: Always returns 0
PROFINET: Manufacturer's number of the device
- 0 UWord r
dpSlotCfgAssignAxis
This data supplies the axis indices of the drive, encoder 1 and encoder 2
for access in the Axis-Assign-Table.
The 32-bit value consists of 4 bytes with the following meaning:
Byte0(bits 0-7) = axis index of axis
Byte1(bits 8-15) = axis index, encoder 1
Byte2(bits 16-23)= axis index, encoder 2
Byte3(bits 24-31)= provided for future extensions.
A byte with the value 0xFF indicates that no axis index
is defined for the relevant slot.
Slot number (PROFINET: Subslot
Multi-line: yes dpSlotCfgNumSlots
number)
dpSlotCfgAssignBus
Bus number assigned to this slot
Since only one bus is currently supported by Profibus DP,
there is only one bus to which all slots are assigned.
number)
dpSlotCfgAssignClient
This data supplies the clientIndex for accessing the
Client Assign table.
0=no assignment possible (this applies to diagnostic and PKW slots)
>0 assignment exists
number)

03/2009 1 Variables
1.10 Diagnosis data
dpSlotCfgAssignMaster
Number of master to which this slot is assigned
Since only one bus is currently supported by
Profibus DP and only one Class 1 Master exists
per bus, there is only one master to which all slots
are assigned.
number)
dpSlotCfgAssignSlave
This data contains the bus address of the slave
belonging to the nth slot.
All legal slave addresses can be specified
number)
dpSlotCfgIoType
I/O identifier
0 = input slot
1 = output slot
2 = diagnosis slot
- 0 0 2 UWord r
number)
dpSlotCfgLength
Length in number of bytes
number)
dpSlotCfgLogBaseAddress
The logical basic address of the slot is assigned
during configuration. Although it is not needed on the
bus for data transfer purposes, this address is the only
means by which a unique link can be created between the
NCK and bus nodes.
- 0 0 UINT16_MAX UWord r
number)
dpSlotCfgNumSlots
The total number of all slots configured in the system is
stored in this data.
0 (lower limit) up to INT32_MAX(upper limit);
Note that a slave cannot support more than
256 slots.
Multi-line: yes 1 1
dpSlotCfgPNSlotNr
PROFIBUS: Not used
PROFINET: Slot number within the IO device
- 0 0 255 UWord r
Multi-line: yes PROFINET: Subslot number dpSlotCfgNumSlots

1 Variables 03/2009
1.10 Diagnosis data
dpSlotCfgSlaveAddress
This data contains the bus address of the slave to which this slot is assigned.
Several slots may have the same slave address.

The number of available addresses on the bus is determined
by the Profibus standard (DIN19245 EN50170).
- 0 0 125 UWord r
number)
dpSlotCfgSlotNr
PROFIBUS: Slot number within the slave
PROFINET: Subslot number within the IO device
A maximum total of 256 slots can be assigned to each slave.
0: Diagnostic slot
2: Diagnostic slot
4: 1st data slot
- 0 0 255 UWord r
number)
dpSlotCfgValid
The slot data structure (CcIdent) exists and is initialized.
True: Data are valid
False: Data are invalid or not initialized
Multi-line: yes 1 1
dpSlotStateComm
Status of slots (ok, failed, not processed by the NCK)
0= no sign of life
1= sign of life
2= not processed by NCK
- 0 0 1 UWord r
number)
dpSlotStateRecvTelegram
Bit pattern of this slot received by the master
in the form of a hexadecimal string
- 0 String[198] r
number)
dpSlotStateSendTelegram
Bit pattern of this slot sent to the slave in
the form of a hexadecimal string
Transmitted message frame
- 0 String[198] r
number)
dpSlotStateTelegramType
Message frame type of slot
0 = Message frame type unknown
- 0 0 UINT16_MAX UWord r
number)

03/2009 1 Variables
1.10 Diagnosis data
dpSysCfgAvailable
This data specifies whether the system has been generated
with DP Adapter and/or DP Master
0= Neither DPA nor DPM available
1= DPA available
2= DPM available
3= DPA and DPM available
- 0 0 3 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
dpSysCfgNumMaster
Number of masters
There is only one master per bus with DP.
Since only 1 bus is currently permitted by the
bus standard, there can only be a maximum
of one master.
Multi-line: yes 1 1
dpSysCfgValid
This data indicates whether the configuration data are valid and
initialized.
TRUE or FALSE
Multi-line: yes 1 1
dpSysCfgVersionDpm
Version number of DP M SW as numerical value
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of the master dpSysCfgNumMaster
dpSysCfgVersionDpr
Actual version Dpr (inaccessible in earlier SW)
- 0 Double r
dpSysCfgVersionDprEx
DPR_SS_VERSION is a version number stored in the NCK which
can be read out via this variable.
- 0 Double r
dpSysCfgVersionHost
This data contains the version number of the host SW as a numerical value
- 0 0 UINT16_MAX Double r
dpSysStateDpmInit
There are three different initialization states:
REQUEST, ACKNOWLEDGE and ERROR
- 0 UWord r
errCodeSetNrGen
Selection of error code set to be used in the case of communication
errors. The selection is client-specific, the client is identified by the sender
address.
0: P1-compatible code
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 03/2009
1.10 Diagnosis data
errCodeSetNrPi
Selection of error code set to be used by PI Services in the case of communication errors.
The selection is client-specific, the client is identified by the sender address.
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
maxCycleTimeBrut
Total of the maximum gross run times of all channels in ms.
ms 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 10
NCK:
maxCycleTimeNet
Total of the maximum net run times of all channels in ms.
ms 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 10
NCK:
minCycleTimeBrut
Total of the minimum gross run times of all channels in ms.
ms 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 10
NCK:
minCycleTimeNet
Total of the minimum net run times of all channels in ms.
ms 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 10
NCK:
nckCapabilities
Describes the NCK functionality
Bit0=1: With Huffman algorithm compressed files can be transferred
(this corresponds to instruction ";$COMPR=HUFFMAN1" during download)
Bit1=1: The protocol of optimized upload is supported
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
nckCompileSwitches
Selected NCK compiler switches
Bit0: NDEBUG
Bit1: NOTRACES
Bit2: EMBARGO
Bit3: TARGET
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
noOfPersistencyReq
Number of persistence operations
Multi-line: yes 1: Sum of the individual functions 1
noOfPersistencyReqFailed
Number of failed persistence operations
optUploadDiag
Optimized upload test parameterization
- 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Test value

03/2009 1 Variables
1.10 Diagnosis data
pcmciaDataShotAct
Current access to PCMCIA card: Transferred bytes
Data pcmciaShotStatus, pcmciaDataShotSum and pcmciaDataShotAct can be used to implement
a status display for PCMCIA card access operations.
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pcmciaDataShotSum
Current access to PCMCIAcard: Total length in bytes.
Data pcmciaShotStatus, pcmciaDataShotSum and pcmciaDataShotAct can be used to implement a
status display for PCMCIA card access operations.
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pcmciaFfsLength
Length of FFS on PCMCIA card in bytes
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pcmciaLength
Length of the PCMCIA card
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pcmciaShotStatus
Current access to PCMCIA-Karte: Status
Data pcmciaShotStatus, pcmciaDataShotSum and pcmciaDataShotAct can be used to implement a
status display for PCMCIA card access operations.
0: Not active
1: Write active
2: Read active
3-: Reserved
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pcmciaStartFfsOffset
Start offset of FFS at beginning of PCMCIA card in bytes
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pcmciaStartP
Start address of the PCMCIA card
- 0 Long Integer wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
pcmciaStartShotOffset
Current access to PCMCIA card: Start offset at beginning of PCMCIA card in bytes
Multi-line: yes 1 1
persistencyTimeAverage
Average time for making data persistent
- 0 0 Double r
persistencyTimeMaximal
Maximum time for making data persistent
- 0 0 Double r

1 Variables 03/2009
1.10 Diagnosis data
persistencyTimeMinimal
Minimum time for making data persistent
- 0 0 Double r
poweronTime $AN_POWERON_TIME
Time since last normal boot ( in minutes )
s, user defined 0.0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
setupTime $AN_SETUP_TIME
Time since last "control system boot on default
values" ( in minutes ).
The timer is automatically set to zero on every
"control system boot on default values".
Multi-line: yes 1 1
totalPersistencyTime
Summated time for making data persistent
- 0 0 Double r
1.10.2 Area C, Module DIAGN: Channel-specific diagnosis data
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/ChannelDiagnose/...
This module contains information about the channel-specific NC diagnostic data.

The measured time variables are available on the destination hardware only.
The net time is calculated without interrupts by higher priority time levels, the gross time includes the
interrupts.
The highest priority time level is the SERVO, followed by the IPO and finally the interpreter/ preparation.
To obtain useful minimum and maximum time intervals, the corresponding variables must be initialized
before the measurement.
acIpoBuf $AC_IPO_BUF
Level of IPO buffer (number of blocks)
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
actCycleTimeBrut
Current gross run time in ms.
ms Double r
Multi-line: yes 11
NCK:
actCycleTimeNet
Current net run time in ms.
ms Double r
Multi-line: yes 11
NCK:
cuttingTime $AC_CUTTING_TIME
Tool operating time ( in seconds ):
The operating time of the path axes excluding active
rapid traverse is measured in all NC programs between
NC Start and Program End/NC Reset.
The measurement is also interrupted during an active

03/2009 1 Variables
1.10 Diagnosis data
dwell time. The timer is automatically set to zero

every time the control boots on default values.
Can be written as of SW 6.3.
Multi-line: yes 1 1
cycleTime $AC_CYCLE_TIME
Runtime of selected NC program ( in seconds ):
The runtime between NC Start and Program End / NC
Reset is measured in the selected NC program.
The timer is cleared when a new NC program is
started.
Multi-line: yes 1 1
ipoBufLevel
Fill level of the IPO buffer (integer value in %)
% 0 100 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
maxCycleTimeBrut
Maximum gross run time in ms.
ms Double wr
Multi-line: yes 11
NCK:
maxCycleTimeBrutPo
Maximum gross run time since cold restart in ms.
ms Double wr
Multi-line: yes 11
NCK:
maxCycleTimeNet
Maximum net run time in ms.
ms Double wr
Multi-line: yes 100
NCK:
maxCycleTimeNetPo
Maximum net run time since cold restart in ms.
ms Double wr
Multi-line: yes 11
NCK:
minCycleTimeBrut
Minimum gross run time in ms.
ms Double wr
Multi-line: yes 100
NCK:
minCycleTimeBrutPo
Minimum gross run time since cold restart in ms.
ms Double wr
Multi-line: yes 11
NCK:
minCycleTimeNet
Minimum net run time in ms.
ms Double wr
Multi-line: yes 100
NCK:

1 Variables 03/2009
1.10 Diagnosis data
minCycleTimeNetPo
Minimum net run time since cold restart in ms.
ms Double wr
Multi-line: yes 11
NCK:
operatingTime $AC_OPERATING_TIME
Total runtime of NC programs in Automatic mode
( in seconds ):
The runtimes of all programs are summed between
NC Start and Program End/NC Reset.
The timer is set to zero on every control boot.
Multi-line: yes 1 1
1.10.3 Area N, Module ETPD: Data lists for protocolling

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/ProtocolData/...
Data lists for protocolling.This module allows to access several lines or rows at a time.
area
Variable specification of nth OPI data in the list:
area
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 2 + 5 * ( n-1) 2 + 5 * (numData- 1)
col
Variable specification of nth OPI data in list:
col
- UWord wr
numData
Number of data in the list.
<= maxnumTraceProtData
- 0 maxnumTraceProtData UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
row
row
- UWord wr
type
type
- UWord wr
unit
unit
- UWord wr
varSpecs
Do not use this variable any more.
- 0 maxnumTraceProtData UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

03/2009 1 Variables
1.10 Diagnosis data
1.10.4 Area C, Module ETP: Types of events

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/ProtocolEvent/...
Description of logging event types.

It is permissible to access this module via several lines and columns.
The line index identifies a specific event.
Standard events: line index <= 10000:
OEM events: line index > 10000:
User index: is determined by the 1000s digit of the line index
Event type: is determined by the last three digits of the line index
Examples of the line index:

00001: Standard event of user 0 with the number 1 (IPO)
00006: Standard event of user 0 with the number 6 (NC start)
10001: OEM event of user 0 with the number 1
13002: OEM event of user 3 with the number 2
Standard event types:
Cyclic events:
1 = IPO and IPO cycle
15 = IPO2
47 = IPO3 (from SW 6.4)
48 = IPO4 (from SW 6.4)
Acyclic events related to axis motions:

2 = GEO_AXIS_START and Geo axis starts or changes the direction
18 = GEO_AXIS_STARTa see VDI interface NCK->PLC channel specific
DBB40 Bit6 and Bit7 (Bit6 = motion command+, Bit7 = motion command-)
Event occurs when a bit is reset.
3 = GEO_AXIS_STOP and Geo axis stops
19 = GEO_AXIS_STOPa, see VDI interface NCK->PLC channel specific
DBB40 Bit6 and Bit7 (Bit6 = motion command-, Bit7 = motion command+)
Event occurs when both bits are set to 0 and one of them was previously active.
4 = MA_AXIS_START, One machine axis of the channel starts or changes the direction
see VDI interface NCK->PLC axis-specific
Event occurs when a bit is reset.
5 = MA_AXIS_STOP, One machine axis stops
see VDI interface NCK->PLC axis-specific
Event occurs if both bits are set to 0 and one of them was previously active.
Acyclic events related to channel influence:

6 = NC_START NC start (if detected in NC)
7 = NC_STOP NC stop (if detected in NC, axes may still be traversed)
Acyclic events related to part program processing:

8 = BLOCK_BEG_1 Block start (first IPO cycle of a block) without intermediate blocks, all program levels
9 = BLOCK_BEG_2 and Block start (first IPO cycle of a block) with intermediate blocks, all program levels
20 = BLOCK_BEG_2a
10 = BLOCK_BEG_3 Block start (first IPO cycle of a block) without intermediate blocks, only main program
level and MDA level
16 = BLOCK_BEG_S1 and Block start (search run with computation) with intermediate blocks, all program
levels

1 Variables 03/2009
1.10 Diagnosis data
22 = BLOCK_BEG_S1a
11 = BLOCK_END_1 Block end (first IPO cycle of a block) without intermediate blocks, all program levels
12 = BLOCK_END_2 and Block end (first IPO cycle of a block) with intermediate blocks, all program levels
21 = BLOCK_END_2a
13 = BLOCK_END_3 Block end (first IPO cycle of a block) without intermediate blocks, only main program
level and MDA level
17 = BLOCK_END_S1 Block end (search run with computation) with intermediate blocks, all program
levels
31 = BLOCK_END_P1 Block end (run in) (from SW ?: not yet implemented)

32 = BLOCK_END_P1a Block end (run in) (from SW ?: not yet implemented)
44 = BLOCK_END_I1 Block end (interpreter) (from SW 6.4)
43 = NC_LEVEL_CHG Level change during part program processing (from SW 6.4)
Acyclic events triggered by part programm command WRTPR

23 = PROT_TXT_REQ Logging a WRTPR text
24 = PROT_TXT_REQ_S1 Logging a WRTPR text (search run with computation)
33 = PROT_TXT_REQ_P1 Logging a WRTPR text (run in) (from SW 6.4)
Acyclic events triggered by the logging process itself

14 = PROT_FILE_BEG Start logging related to a log file.
29 = PROT_START_TRIG Start trigger has triggered (from SW 6.4)
30 = PROT_STOP_TRIG Stop trigger has triggered (from SW 6.4)
46 = PROT_START Start logging (from SW 6.4)
45 = PROT_STOP Stop logging (from SW 6.4)
Acyclic events triggered by buttons

42 = CANCEL_BUTTON The Cancel button was pressed (from SW 6.4)
Acyclic events triggered by alarms

41 = ALARM_REPORTED An alarm has occurred (from SW 6.4)
Acyclic events triggered by synchronized action

36 = SYNC_ACT_ACTIV Activating synchronized action (from SW 6.4)
37 = SYNC_ACT_DEACT Deactivating synchronized action (from SW 6.4)
38 = SYNC_ACT_FIRE Synchronized action triggers (from SW 6.4)
Acyclic events triggered by tool

25 = TOOL_CHANGE tool change (from SW 6.2)
27 = TOOL_CHANGE_S1 tool change (search run with computation) (from SW 6.3)
34 = TOOL_CHANGE_P1 tool change (run in) (from SW 6.4)
26 = CUTTEDGE_CHANGE cutting edge change (from SW 6.2)
28 = CUTTEDGE_CHANGE_S1 cutting edge change (search run with computation) (from SW 6.3)
35 = CUTTEDGE_CHANGE_P1 cutting edge change (run in) (from SW 6.4)
Acyclic events triggered by PLC

39 = PLC_OB_1 PLC OB1 started (from SW 6.4)
40 = PLC_OB40 PLC OB40 started (from SW 6.4)¶
asciiMode
Data logging format
0: Data recorded in binary format with fixed alignment to 8 bytes
1: Data recorded in ASCII format
2: Data recorded in binary format with variable alignment
3: Data recorded in binary format with variable alignment and optimization of two consecutive data records of the same
event. In this case, only the header is logged, not the actual data.
- 0 0 3 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Event (see module header) siehe Bausteinkopf

03/2009 1 Variables
1.10 Diagnosis data
countActivated
Number of times the event has occurred
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no
countActivatedL
Number of times the event has occurred.
- 0 Long Integer r
dataListIndex
Index of data list to be used
All valid columns in module ETPD - 1)
- 0 0 UWord wr
dataProtok
Number of bytes entered in the Fifo file
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: no
dataUploaded
Number of bytes already uploaded from the Fifo file
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: no
eventActive
Event state
0: Not active
1: Active
2: Deactivate and release data set
- 0 0 2 UWord wr
eventActiveStatus
For diagnosis: Event state
0: Activated
1: Not activated
2: Cannot be activated because the sum of the variable lengths is too large
3: Cannot be activated because the internal resources are not sufficient
4: Cannot be activated because the protocol file cannot be created
100-...- cannot be activated because the variable specification with the index (value - 100) is wrong
- 0 0 UWord r
headerType
Type of header in the data record
0: No header
1: Short header with the following structure:
UDword dataStamp; // Data record identified by a consecutive number
UWord event; // Enter type of event that occurred
UWord protCount; // The number of times the event has been logged
2: Long header with the following structure:
UByte chan; // Channel in which the event occurred
UByte dummy1; // Still free
UDword protCount; // The number of times the event has been logged
UDword dummy2; // Still free
3: Mid-length header, non-aligned with the following structure:
UByte chan; // Channel in which the event occurred
UByte dummy1; // Still free
UDword protCount; // The number of times the event has been logged

1 Variables 03/2009
1.10 Diagnosis data
- 1 0 3 UWord wr
maxElementsFastFifoUsed
For diagnosis: Maximum number of entries in the FIFO buffer
- 0 0 UWord r
maxFileLength
Maximum length of log file
- 0 0 UWord wr
maxGrossFileLengthUsed
For diagnosis: Maximum gross size of log file
- 0 0 UWord r
maxNetFileLengthTooSmall
For diagnosis: Number of (net) bytes by which log file is undersized
- 0 0 UWord r
numElementsFastFifoTooSmall
For diagnosis: Number of entries by which the Fifo buffer is undersized
- 0 0 UWord r
protocolFilename
Name of the log file including the path
- 0 String[64] wr
resultPar1
General result value, the significance is a function of the event.
SYNC_ACT_ACTIVATE, SYNC_ACT_DEACTIVATE, and SYNC_ACT_FIRE: ID of the synchronous action.
All non-stated events do not supply this result value.
- 0 UWord r
skip
Number of events to be skipped
- 0 0 UWord wr
startTriggerLock
Setting, whether the start trigger is not to be processed during this event.
0: Trigger is processed
1: Trigger is not processed
- 0 0 1 UWord wr
Multi-line: no
stopTriggerLock
Setting, whether the stop trigger is not to be processed during this event.
0: Trigger is processed
1: Trigger is not processed
- 0 0 1 UWord wr
Multi-line: no

03/2009 1 Variables
1.11 HMI State data
suppressProtLock
Clears the effect of traceProtocolLock
0: The disable is active
1: The disable is canceled for this event
- 0 0 1 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1
timePeriod
Time base for cyclic event only
ms 0 0 UWord r
1.11 HMI State data

1.11.1 Area M, Module S: Internal status data HMI
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Drive/State/...
Some internal status data of the MMC can be accessed via this module.
/Nck/Nck/ActApplication
Current application for display in HMI
- String[32] wr
Multi-line: no
/Nck/Nck/ActBag
Current operating mode for display in HMI
- Character wr
Multi-line: no
/Nck/Nck/Channel
Current channel for display in HMI
- Character wr
Multi-line: no
/Nck/Nck/CoordSystem
Coordinate system for display in HMI
- Character wr
Multi-line: no

1 Variables 03/2009
1.12 User data
1.12 User data
1.12.1 Area C, Module GD1: C-GD1

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel//...
See description of the GUD block in area C
DUMMY
Undefined
- Character r
Multi-line: no 2

DUMMY
Undefined
- Character r
Multi-line: no 2

DUMMY
Undefined
- Character r
Multi-line: no 2

DUMMY
Undefined
- Character r
Multi-line: no 2

03/2009 1 Variables
1.12 User data

DUMMY
Undefined
- Character r
Multi-line: no 2

DUMMY
Undefined
- Character r
Multi-line: no 2

DUMMY
Undefined
- Character r
Multi-line: no 2

DUMMY
Undefined
- Character r
Multi-line: no 2

1 Variables 03/2009
1.12 User data

DUMMY
Undefined
- Character r
Multi-line: no 2
1.12.10 Area C, Module GUD: C-GUD

The variables in this block are dynamically generated and deleted in the NCK.
The description and addressing of the existing variables are therefore not specified, and must be taken
from the associated ACX file.
The variable is addressed via the column index (SymbolID).
The line index is only relevant for vectors and fields, it is calculated as follows:
Single data: 1
1-dim. fields: 1 + index1
2-dim. fields: 1 + index1 * maxdim2 +
index2
3-dim. fields: 1 + index1 * maxdim2 * maxdim3 +
index2 * maxdim3 +
index3
The formula for 3-dim. fields can generally be applied if the missing dimension index is replaced by 0, and
maxdim by 1.
Value ranges:
index1: 0 to (maxdim1-1)
Depending on the dimensioning of the fields, that is the size of maxdim1, maxdim2 and maxdim3, there is
a possibility that the value range of the line index (16 bits) may be inadequate for addressing.
OPI access is not possible if this is the case.
DUMMY
Undefined
- Character r
Multi-line: no 2
1.12.11 Area C, Module LUD: C-LUD

DUMMY
Undefined
- Character r
Multi-line: no 2

03/2009 1 Variables
1.12 User data
1.12.12 Area N, Module GD1: N-GD1

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck//...
DUMMY
Undefined
- Character r
Multi-line: no 2

DUMMY
Undefined
- Character r
Multi-line: no 2

DUMMY
Undefined
- Character r
Multi-line: no 2

DUMMY
Undefined
- Character r
Multi-line: no 2

1 Variables 03/2009
1.12 User data

DUMMY
Undefined
- Character r
Multi-line: no 2

DUMMY
Undefined
- Character r
Multi-line: no 2

DUMMY
Undefined
- Character r
Multi-line: no 2

DUMMY
Undefined
- Character r
Multi-line: no 2

03/2009 1 Variables
1.13 Generic coupling

DUMMY
Undefined
- Character r
Multi-line: no 2
1.12.21 Area N, Module GUD: N-GUD

DUMMY
Undefined
- Character r
Multi-line: no 2
1.13.1 Area N, Module CP: Generic coupling

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/GenericCoupling/...
The CP block contains the status data for the generic coupling.
The status of the axis couplings is structured in an NCK-specific and channel-specific area.
cpCtabExists
Not zero, if the specified curve table exists
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes ID of the curve table
cpCtabId
ID no. of the nth curve table in the specified memory type
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes (n * 10) + memory type
cpCtabIdNumLinSegDef
Number of the linear segments defined for the specified curve table
- 0 UWord r
cpCtabIdNumPolDef
Number of the polynomials defined for the specified curve table
- 0 UWord r
cpCtabIdNumPolySegDef
Number of the polynomial segments defined for the specified curve table
- 0 UWord r

1 Variables 03/2009
cpCtabIdNumSegDef
Number of segments defined for the specified curve table
- 0 UWord r
cpCtabLocked
Locking status, value > 0, if curve table is locked
- -1 3 Long Integer r
cpCtabMemType
Memory type in which the curve table is stored
cpCtabNumDef
Total number of curve tables defined for the specified memory type
- 0 0 UWord r
1=DRAM, 2=SRAM, 3=all memory
Multi-line: yes 3
types
cpCtabNumFree
Number of additional curve tables which can be defined in the specified memory type
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 3
types
cpCtabNumPolDef
Total number of curve table polynomials defined in the specified memory type
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 3
types
cpCtabNumPolFree
Number of additional curve table polynomials which can be defined in the specified memory type
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 3
types
cpCtabNumPolMax
Maximum number of curve table polynomials permissible in the specified memory type
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 3
types
cpCtabNumSegDef
Total number of curve table segments of the specified segment type defined in the specified memory type
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes (Segment type * 10) + memory type 23
cpCtabNumSegFree
Number of additional curve table segments of the specified segment type which can be defined in the specified
memory type
- 0 UWord r
cpCtabNumSegMax
Maximum number of curve table segments of the specified segment type permissible in the specified memory type
- 0 UWord r

03/2009 1 Variables
cpCtabPeriodic
Periodicity, value > 0, if curve table is periodic
1.13.2 Area C, Module CP
OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/GenericCoupling/...
aaCpActFa $AA_CPACTFA[AX1,n]
The axis index of the nth leading axis which is active for the stated following axis, LAx.
-1 = the stated coupling is not defined
- -1 -1 UWord r
(n*256) * axis index of the leading
Multi-line: yes
axis
aaCpActLa $AA_CPACTLA[AX1,n]
The axis index of the nth leading axis which is active for the specified following axis
- -1 -1 UWord r
(n*256) * axis index of the following
Multi-line: yes
axis
aaCpBlockChg $AA_CPBC[a]
The block change criterion indicates the condition that has to be fulfilled
before one can continue with the next block of the NC program
if a coupling has been activated for the stated following axis, FAx
NONE - Block change is performed immediately
FINE - Block change is performed with "Synchronism fine"
COARSE - Block change is performed with "Synchronism coarse"
IPOSTOP - Block change is performed with "Setpoint synchronism"
- String[32] r
aaCpDefLa $AA_CPDEFLA[AX1,n]
The axis index of the nth leading axis which has been defined for the specified following axis
- -1 -1 UWord r
(n*256) * axis index of the following
Multi-line: yes
axis
aaCpMReset $AA_CPMRESET[a]
Coupling mode through RESET
NONE
ON
OFF
DEL
- String[32] r
aaCpMStart $AA_CPMSTART[a]
Coupling mode through program start
NONE
ON
OFF
DEL
- String[32] r

1 Variables 03/2009
aaCpMStartPrt $AA_CPMSTARTPRT[a]
Coupling mode through SERUPRO start
NONE
ON
OFF
DEL
- String[32] r
aaCpMVdi $AA_CPMVDI[a]
Behavior of the coupling module regarding VDI signals
- 0 0 UWord r
aaCpNumActFa $AA_CPNACTFA[AX1]
The number of leading axes which are active for the stated following axis, LAx.
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index of the leading axis numMachAxes
aaCpNumActLa $AA_CPNACTLA[a]
The number of leading axes which are active for the specified following axis
- 0 0 UWord r
aaCpNumDefLa $AA_CPNDEFLA[a]
The number of leading axes which have been defined for the specified following axis
- 0 0 UWord r
aaCpSetType $AA_CPSETTYPE[a]
Coupling set coupling type
NONE
TRAIL
LEAD
EG
COUP
- String[32] r
aaCpSynCoPos $AA_CPSYNCOP[a]
Coarse positioning tolerance for coupling synchronization
- Double r
aaCpSynCoVel $AA_CPSYNCOV[a]
Coarse velocity tolerance for coupling synchronization
- Double r
aaCpSynFiPos $AA_CPSYNFIP[a]
Fine positioning tolerance for coupling synchronization
- Double r
aaCpSynFiVel $AA_CPSYNFIV[a]
Fine velocity tolerance for coupling synchronization
- Double r

03/2009 1 Variables
aaCpfAccelTotal $AA_CPFACCT[a]
Proportion of axis acceleration due to the coupled axes.
The sum of the dependent proportion of the acceleration
of all leading axes for the stated following axis, FAx.
- Double r
aaCpfActive $AA_CPFACT[a]
Bit-coded for identifying all types of coupling which are active for the stated following axis, FAx
0 = NONE - No active coupling to the following axis
Bit 0 (0x0001) - TRAIL - Uses a coupling factor
Bit 1 (0x0002) - LEAD - Uses a curve table
Bit 2 (0x0004) - ELG - An electronic gearbox link
Bit 3 (0x0008) - Reserved
Bit 4 (0x0010) - COUP - Spindle/partial spindle coupling
Bit 5 (0x0020) - GANTRY - Coupling of the split axes (axes mechanically bound)
Bit 6 (0x0040) - TANG - Tangential coupling using a curve table
Bit 7 (0x0080) - GEN_CP - Generic coupling
- UWord r
aaCpfCmdPosTotal $AA_CPFCMDPT[a]
Proportion of the axis position command due to the coupled axes.
The sum of the dependent proportion of the position command
for all leading axes for the stated following axis, FAx.
- Double r
aaCpfCmdVelTotal $AA_CPFCMDVT[a]
Proportion of the axis position command due to
the coupled axes. The sum of the dependent proportion of the velocity command
for all leading axes for the specified following axis.
- Double r
aaCpfMSOn $AA_CPFMSON[a]
Indicates the activation strategy of the following axis
CNONE
CFAST
COARSE
NTG
ACN
ACP
DCT
NTGP
DCP
- String[32] r
aaCpfModeOff $AA_CPFMOF[a]
Identifies the behavior of the following axis if the coupling is deactivated
STOP - Stop following axis/spindle
CON - Continue movement with the current velocity
ADD
- String[32] r
aaCpfModeOn $AA_CPFMON[a]
Indicates the behavior of the following axis, FAx, when the coupling is activated.
STOP - Stop following axis/spindle
CON - Continue motion of the FAx with the current velocity
ADD
- String[32] r

1 Variables 03/2009
aaCpfRS $AA_CPFRS[a]
The reference system indicates the point at which the coupling process is applied
BCS - Basic coordinate system
MCS - Machine coordinate system
- String[32] r
aaCpfReqVelocity $AA_CPFREQV[a]
The required velocity transferred to all active leading
axes as a percentage of the maximum velocity of the specified following axis.
- Double r
aaCplAccel $AA_CPLACC[a,b]
The proportion of the axis acceleration assigned to the stated coupling.
- Double r
master axis)
aaCplCTabId $AA_CPLCTID[a,b]
ID number of the curve table which is used with the coupling of the stated axes.
- UWord r
master axis)
aaCplCmdPos $AA_CPLCMDP[a,b]
The proportion of the axis position command assigned to the stated coupling.
- Double r
master axis)
aaCplCmdVel $AA_CPLCMDV[a,b]
The proportion of the axis acceration command assigned to the stated coupling.
- Double r
master axis)
aaCplDenominator $AA_CPLDEN[a,b]
Denominator of coupling factor
- Double r
master axis)
aaCplInScale $AA_CPLINSC[a,b]
Input scaling factor of coupling factor
- Double r
master axis)
aaCplInTrans $AA_CPLINTR[a,b]
Input transmission correction of coupling factor
- Double r
master axis)

03/2009 1 Variables
aaCplNumerator $AA_CPLNUM[a,b]
Counter of coupling factor
- Double r
master axis)
aaCplOutScale $AA_CPLOUTSC[a,b]
Output scaling factor of coupling factor
- Double r
master axis)
aaCplOutTrans $AA_CPLOUTTR[a,b]
Output transmission correction of coupling factor
- Double r
master axis)
aaCplRS $AA_CPLRS[a,b]
Reference system for the specified coupling
Reference system for the specified coupling DescriptionValue range:
BCS - Basic coordinate system
MCS - Machine coordinate system
- String[32] r
master axis)
aaCplSetVal $AA_CPLSETVAL[a,b]
Indicates the type of defined value used for the coupling
ACTPOS = Actual position
CMDPOS = Setpoint position
CMDVEL = Setpoint velocity
- String[32] r
master axis)
aaCplState $AA_CPLSTATE[a,b]
A string which describes the actual status of the coupling
DEF = Defined (but not yet activated)
ON = Active
OF = Deactivated
- String[32] r
master axis)

1 Variables 03/2009
aaCplType $AA_CPLTYPE[a,b]
Indicates the process that is used with the coupling of the stated following axis with the stated leading axis.
0 = NONE - No defined coupling with these axes
Bit 0 (0x0001) - TRAIL - Uses a coupling factor
Bit 1 (0x0002) - LEAD - Uses a curve table
Bit 2 (0x0004) - ELG - An electronic gearbox link
Bit 3 (0x0008) - Reserved
Bit 4 (0x0010) - COUP - Spindle/partial spindle coupling
Bit 5 (0x0020) - GANTRY - Coupling of the split axes (axes mechanically bound)
Bit 6 (0x0040) - TANG - Tangential coupling with the aid of a curve table
Bit 7 (0x0080) - GEN_CP - Generic coupling
- UWord r
master axis)
1.13.3 Area C, Module DIAG: Diagnostic data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/Diagnose/...
COTraceFlags
COTraceFlags
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no
actCycleTimeBrut
actCycleTimeBrut
- Double r
Multi-line: no
actCycleTimeNet
actCycleTimeNet
- Double r
Multi-line: no
availableBodies
availableBodies
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
bodySize
bodySize
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
coCliStiCounterMax
coCliStiCounterMax
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no
coCliTimestampMax
coCliTimestampMax
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no
coCliTimestampMaxStartup
coCliTimestampMaxStartup
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no

03/2009 1 Variables
countOfFreeByteBrut
countOfFreeByteBrut
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no
fifoFileActNetData
fifoFileActNetData
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no
handleDebugFlags
handleDebugFlags
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
interferenceCheckOn
interferenceCheckOn
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no
internalBlockNumber
internalBlockNumber
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no
ipoBufLevel
ipoBufLevel
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
ipoCounter
ipoCounter
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no
maxAllocBodies
maxAllocBodies
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
maxCycleTimeBrut
maxCycleTimeBrut
- Double r
Multi-line: no
maxCycleTimeNet
maxCycleTimeNet
- Double r
Multi-line: no
minCycleTimeBrut
minCycleTimeBrut
- Double r
Multi-line: no
minCycleTimeNet
minCycleTimeNet
- Double r
Multi-line: no
ncscTraceCounter
ncscTraceCounter
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

1 Variables 03/2009
nextSLSubtype
nextSLSubtype
- String[64] r
Multi-line: no
numConfigBodies
numConfigBodies
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
protocVLTime
protocVLTime
- Double r
Multi-line: no
reposCounter
reposCounter
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
resetCounter
resetCounter
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
stackSizeUsed
stackSizeUsed
- String[30] r
Multi-line: no
testInchMetr
testInchMetr
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
testReqVarServerSuppr
testReqVarServerSuppr
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
theErrorObjOK
theErrorObjOK
- UWord r
Multi-line: no
varAccessError
varAccessError
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

03/2009 1 Variables
1.13.4 Area C, Module WAL: Working area limitation

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Channel/CoordSysWorkAreaLimits/...
Working area limitation data
waCSCoordSys $P_WORKAREA_CS_COORD_SYSTEM
Coordinate system for working area limitation
Identifier for the coordinate system in which the working area limitation is to apply.
The following are valid:
0: Working area limitation in the WCS
3: Working area limitation in the SZS
Special feature of line addressing: Any channel axis index can be selected as the channel axis index.
Within a working area limitation group, the values are identical.
- 0 0 3 UWord wr
Channel axis index + working area numMachAxes *
Multi-line: yes
limitation group * numMachAxes $MC_MM_NUM_WORKAREA_CS_GROUPS
waCSLimitMinus $P_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_MINUS
Position of the coordinate system-specific working area limitation
in the negative direction for the addressed axis and working area group.
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes
waCSLimitPlus $P_WORKAREA_CS_LIMIT_PLUS
Position of the coordinate system-specific working area limitation
in the positive direction for the addressed axis and working area group.
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes
waCSMinusEnable $P_WORKAREA_CS_MINUS_ENABLE
Coord.-specific working area limitation, negative valid
TRUE: The limitation of waCSLimitMinus is valid.
- 0 0 1 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes
waCSPlusEnable $P_WORKAREA_CS_PLUS_ENABLE
Coord.-specific working area limitation, positive valid
TRUE: The limitation of waCSLimitPlus is valid.
- 0 0 1 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes
1.13.5 Area N, Module VSYN

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/SelectedFunctionData/...
anMarker
Dummy
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1
dummy1
Dummy, do not use!
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1 Variables 03/2009
1.13.6 Area T, Module TDC

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/Tools/...
toolDataChangeInfo
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes TDC parameter no.
1.13.7 Area T, Module TISO

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Tool/IsoHDCompensation/...
isoCorrParam $TC_ISO_???,
This variable contains the offset values for the ISO2.2 and ISO3.2 modes.
The column index contains the offset number.
1: Offset value for the geometry of
Multi-line: yes the tool length in ISO2 mode.( 13
$TC_ISO_H)

03/2009 2 Interface Signals
2.1 General notes
2 Interface Signals
2
2.1 General notes
References
References on a signal have a unique chapter number referring to the Basic,
Expansion and Special Functions in the Function Manual: /.../
Example:
DB10, DBB0: Blocking of the digital NCK inputs /Z1- A2/
Z1: Function Manual Basic Functions 840D sl,
NC/PLC Interface Signals (Z1)
A2: Function Manual Basic Functions 840D sl,
Various NC/PLC Interface Signals and Functions (A2)
Inverse signals
Signals marked with a ”*” are so-called inverse signals.
Example:
Signals from machine control panel, EB n + 2, DBX4: *Spindle stop:
1: Spindle stop not requested
0: Spindle stop requested
Abbreviations
ePS: ePS Network Services (remote diagnosis, control and condition monitor
services, data, workflow and administration services)
References
/FH/ Function Manual ePS Network Services
GP: PLC Basic Program
HT 8: Handheld Terminal 8
MCP: Machine Control Panel
Note
Please refere also to
SINAMICS S120 Installation and Start-UP Manual
SINAMICS S List Manual for SINAMICS drives.

2 Interface Signals 03/2009
2.2 Signals from/to Operator Component

2.2.1 Machine control panel, M version
Signals from machine control panel (keys)

Input display
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
IB n + 0 Spindle speed override Operating mode
D C B A JOG TEACH IN MDA AUTO
IB n + 1 Machine function
REPOS REF var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
IB n + 2 Key- Key- Spindle *Spindle Feed *Feed NC Start *NC Stop

switch switch start stop start stop
position 0 position 2
IB n + 3 Key- Feedrate override
switch
position 1
Reset Single E D C B A
block
IB n + 4 Direction keys Keyswitch Direction keys
position 3
+ - Rapid X 4th axis 7th axis

R15 R13 traverse R1 R4 R7 R10
R14
IB n + 5 Axis selection
Y Z 5th axis Traverse 9th axis 8th axis 6th axis
R2 R3 R5 command R11 R9 R8 R6
MCS/WCS
IB n + 6 Unassigned customer keys
T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8

Signals to machine control panel (LEDs)

Output display, LEDs

QB n + 0 Machine function Operating mode
1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC JOG TEACH IN MDA AUTO
QB n + 1 Feed *Feed NC Start *NC Stop Machine function

start stop
REPOS REF var. INC 10000 INC
QB n + 2 Direction Axis selection Single Spindle *Spindle
key block start stop
-
X 4th axis 7th axis
R13
R1 R4 R7 R10
QB n + 3 Axis selection Direction
key
Z 5th axis Travel R11 9th axis 8th axis 6th axis +
R3 R5 command R9 R8 R6 R15
MCS/WCS
R12
QB n + 4 Unassigned customer keys Y
T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 R2
QB n + 5 Unassigned customer keys

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8

2.2.2 Machine control panel, T version

Signals from machine control panel (keys)
Input display

D C B A JOG TEACH IN MDA AUTO
IB n + 1 Machine function
REPOS REF var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
IB n + 2 Keyswitch Keyswitch Spindle *Spindle Feed start *Feed stop NC Start *NC Stop
position 0 position 2 start stop
IB n + 3 Keyswitch Feed override
position 1
Reset Single E D C B A
block
IB n + 4 Direction keys Keyswitch Direction keys
position 3
+Y -Z -C
R15 R13 R14 R1 R4 R7 R10
IB n + 5 Direction keys
+X +C Rapid Travel -Y -X +Z
R2 R3 traverse command R11 R9 R8 R6
override MCS/WCS
R5 R12
T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8

Signals to machine control panel (LEDs)


QB n + 0 Machine function Operating mode
1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC JOG TEACH IN MDA AUTO
QB n + 1 Feed start *Feed stop NC Start *NC Stop Machine function
REPOS REF var. INC 10000 INC
QB n + 2 Direction keys Single Spindle *Spindle
block start stop
+Y -Z -C
R13 R1 R4 R7 R10
QB n + 3 Direction keys
Travel -Y -X +Z
R3 R5 command R11 R9 R8 R6 R15
MCS/WCS
QB n + 4 Unassigned customer keys Direction
key
+X
T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 R2

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8

2.2.3 Machine control panel, slimline

Signals from slimline machine control panel
Keys and switches

*NC Stop SP - SP 100% SP + SINGLEB JOG MDA AUTOM.
IB n + 1 Spindle Keyswitch Machine function
NC Start SP right *SP Stop SP left SS 3 REF. REPOS Teach in
IB n + 2 Feedrate Keyswitch Machine functions
Start *Stop var. INC SS 0 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
IB n + 3 Keyswitch Feed override
RESET SS 2 SS 1 E D C B A
IB n + 4 Direction keys Optional customer keys
+ - Rapid
R15 R13 traverse KT4 KT3 KT2 KT1 KT0
R14
IB n + 5 Axis selection
T17 KT5 6 5 4 Z Y X
IB n + 6 Unassigned customer keys MCS/WCS Unassigned customer keys
T9 T10 T11 T12 T14 T15 T16
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8

Signals to slimline machine control panel

(LEDs)
QB n + 0 Spindle speed override Operating mode
NC Stop SP - SP 100 % SP + SINGLEB JOG MDA AUTOM.
QB n + 1 Spindle Machine function
NC Start SP right SP Stop SP left unassigned REF. REPOS Teach in
QB n + 2 Feedrate Machine functions
Start Stop var. INC unassigned 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
QB n + 3 unassigned
unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned unassigned
QB n + 4 Direction keys Optional customer keys
+ - Rapid
R15 R13 traverse KT4 KT3 KT2 KT1 KT0
R14
QB n + 5 Axis selection
T17 KT5 6 5 4 Z Y X
QB n + 6 Unassigned customer keys Unassigned customer keys
T9 T10 T11 T12 MCS/WCS T14 T15 T16
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8

2.2.4 Signals from/to handheld unit (HHU, HT 2)

Signals from handheld unit (keys)
Input display

IB n + 0 Reserved
Identifier
HT 2
IB n + 1 Reserved
IB n + 2
T9 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1
IB n + 3
T16 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T9
IB n + 4
T24 T23 T22 T21
IB n + 5 Acknowl- Rapid traverse/feed override switch
edgement
Digital Keyswitch E D C B A
display

Signals to handheld unit (LEDs)


QB n + 0 always 1
New data Line selection
QB n + 1 for selected
line
QB n + 2
L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1
QB n + 3
L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9
QB n + 4 1st character (right) of the selected line
QB n + 5 2nd character of the selected line
QB ...
QB n + 18 15th character of the selected line
QB n + 19 16th character (left) of the selected line
Note
Parameterization and/or configuration of the various MCP / HHU variants are
described in:
The parameterization is described in following Documentation:
References: Equipment Manual: Operator Components Manual Networking

Function Manual, Basic Functions: Basic PLC Program (P3)

2.2.5 Signals from/to handheld programming unit (HT 8)

Signals from machine control panel simulation
Interface HT 8 → PLC

IB n + 0 Function key block
(REF) TEACH AUTO (MDA) JOG QUIT RESET (WCS/MCS)
IB n + 1 Function key block
Cntr Panel {U4} {U3} {U2} {U1} (INC) (REPOS)
Func (CPF)
IB n + 2 Change Travel keys (JOG) positive direction
over axes
Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1
IB n + 3 Travel keys (JOG) negative direction
Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1
IB n + 4
{U9} {U10} {U11} {U123} {U13} {U14} {U15} {U16}
[BF8] [BF7] [BF6] [BF5] [BF4] [BF3] [BF2] [BF1]
IB n + 5
{U8} {U7} {U6} {U5} (SBL)
[BF16] [BF15] [BF14] [BF13] [BF12] [BF10] [BF10] [BF9]
IB n + 6 Start key block
Reserved HT 8 SF4 SF3 SF2 SF1 Start Stop

[VAL+] [VAL-]
IB n + 7 Feedrate override
E D C B A

Signals to machine control panel simulation

Interface PLC → HT 8

QB n + 0 Function key block
REF TEACH AUTO MDA JOG QUIT RESET WCS/MCS
QB n + 1 Function key block
FCT15 FCT14 FCT12 FCT11 INC REPOS
QB n + 2 Travel keys (JOG) positive direction
Axes Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1
changed
over
QB n + 3 Travel keys (JOG) negative direction
For WCS: Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1
No MCS
Ax4 to Ax6
QB n + 4
QB n + 5
QB n + 6 Start key block

Display VAL+ VAL- SF2 SF1 Start Stop
travel keys
QB n + 7

2.3 PLC alarms / messages
2.3.1 FC 10 alarms in DB2 (FB1-Parameter "ExtendAlMsg"=False)
Channel areas in DB2 (Parameter "ExtendAlMsg"=False)

DB2 Signals for PLC messages (PLC → HMI)

(Message
type)
Channel 1
0 (EM) 510007 510006 510005 510004 510003 510002 510001 510000
Feed disable (alarm no.: 510000-510015)
1 (OM) 510015 510014 510013 510012 510011 510010 510009 510008
2 (EM) Feed and read-in disable byte 1 (alarm no.: 510100-510107)
4 (OM) Feed and read-in disable byte 3 (alarm no.: 510116-510123)
6 (EM) Read-in disable byte 1 (alarm no.: 510200-510207)
8 (OM) Read-in disable byte 3 (alarm no.: 510216-510223)
10 (EM) NC Start disable byte 1 (alarm no.: 510300-510307)
11 (OM) NC Start disable byte 2 (alarm no.: 510308-510315)
12 (EM) Feed stop GEOaxis 1 byte 1 (alarm no.: 511100-511107)
13 (OM) Feed stop GEOaxis 1 byte 2 (alarm no.: 511108-511115)


(Message
type)
Channel 2
18 (EM) 520007 520006 520005 520004 520003 520002 520001 520000
19 (OM) 520015 520014 520013 520012 520011 520010 520009 520008

(Message
type)
Channel 3
36 (EM) 530007 530006 530005 530004 530003 530002 530001 530000
37 (OM) 530015 530014 530013 530012 530011 530010 530009 530008


(Message
type)

(Message
type)
Channel 4
54 (EM) 540007 540006 540005 540004 540003 540002 540001 540000
55 (OM) 540015 540014 540013 540012 540011 540010 540009 540008


(Message
type)
Channel 5
72 (EM) 550007 550006 550005 550004 550003 550002 550001 550000
73 (OM) 550015 550014 550013 550012 550011 550010 550009 550008
75 /BM) Feed and read-in disable byte 2 (alarm no.: 550108-550115)

(Message
type)
Channel 6
90 (EM) 560007 560006 560005 560004 560003 560002 560001 560000
91 (OM) 560015 560014 560013 560012 560011 560010 560009 560008


(Message
type)

(Message
type)
Channel 7
108 (EM) 570007 570006 570005 570004 570003 570002 570001 570000
109 (OM) 570015 570014 570013 570012 570011 570010 570009 570008


(Message
type)
Channel 8
126 (EM) 580007 580006 580005 580004 580003 580002 580001 580000
127 (OM) 580015 580014 580013 580012 580011 580010 580009 580008
Channel 9 and 10 unrealized
Axis areas in DB2 (Parameter "ExtendAlMsg"=False)

(Message
type)
axis/spindle
144 (EM) 600107 600106 600105 600104 600103 600102 600101 600100
Feed stop/spindle stop for axis/spindle 1 (alarm no.: 600100-600115)
145 (OM) 600115 600114 600113 600112 600111 600110 600109 600108
146 (EM) Feed stop/spindle stop for axis/spindle 2 byte 1 (alarm no.: 600200-600207)
147 (OM) Feed stop/spindle stop for axis/spindle 2 byte 2 (alarm no.: 600208-600215)


(Message
type)
axis 19 – 31 unrealized

User areas im DB2 (Parameter "ExtendAlMsg"=False)

(Message type)
180 (EM) 700007 700006 700005 700004 700003 700002 700001 700000
User area 0 (alarm no.: 700000-700015)
181 (EM) 700015 700014 700013 700012 700011 700010 700009 700008
182 (EM) User area 0: byte 3 (alarm no.: 700016-700023)
184 (OM) User area 0: byte 5 (alarm no.: 700032-700039)
188 - 191 (EM) User area 1: bytes 1 - 4 (alarm no.: 700100-700131)
192 – 195 (OM) User area 1: bytes 5 - 8 (alarm no.: 700132-700163)
196 – 199 (EM) User area 2: bytes 1 - 4 (alarm no.: 700200-700231)
284– 287 (EM) User area 13: bytes 1 - 4 (alarm no.: 701300-701331)


(Message type)

2.3.2 FC10 alarms in DB2 (FB1-Parameter "ExtendAlMsg"=True)
Channel areas in DB2 (Parameter "ExtendAIMsg"=True)

DB2 Signals for PLC messsages (PLC → HMI)

(Message
type)
Channel 1
0
Feed disable (without alarm no.)
1
2 Feed and read-in disable byte 1 (without alarm no.)
6 Read-in disable byte 1 (without alarm no.)
10 NC Start disable byte 1 (without alarm no.)
11 NC Start disable byte 2 (without alarm no.)
12 Feed stop GEOaxis 1 byte 1 (without alarm no.)
18 - 119 Channel 2 - Channel 10 (without alarm no.)

(Message
type)
Channel 1
310 (EM) 510007 510006 510005 510004 510003 510002 510001 510000
311 (OM) 510015 510014 510013 510012 510011 510010 510009 510008


(Message
type)
Channel 2
328 (EM) 520007 520006 520005 520004 520003 520002 520001 520000
329 (OM) 520015 520014 520013 520012 520011 520010 520009 520008


(Message
type)
Channel 3
346 (EM) 530007 530006 530005 530004 530003 530002 530001 530000
347 (OM) 530015 530014 530013 530012 530011 530010 530009 530008

(Message
type)
Channel 4
364 (EM) 540007 540006 540005 540004 540003 540002 540001 540000
365 (OM) 540015 540014 540013 540012 540011 540010 540009 540008


(Message
type)
Channel 5
382 (EM) 550007 550006 550005 550004 550003 550002 550001 550000
383 (OM) 550015 550014 550013 550012 550011 550010 550009 550008


(Message
type)
Channel 6
400 (EM) 560007 560006 560005 560004 560003 560002 560001 560000
401 (OM) 560015 560014 560013 560012 560011 560010 560009 560008
407(EM) Read-in disable byte 2 (alarm no.: 560208-560215)

(Message
type)
Channel 7
418 (EM) 570007 570006 570005 570004 570003 570002 570001 570000
419 (OM) 570015 570014 570013 570012 570011 570010 570009 570008


(Message
type)
Channel 8
436 (EM) 580007 580006 580005 580004 580003 580002 580001 580000
437 (OM) 580015 580014 580013 580012 580011 580010 580009 580008


(Message
type)
Channel 9
454 (EM) 590007 590006 590005 590004 590003 590002 590001 590000
455 (OM) 590015 590014 590013 590012 590011 590010 590009 590008

(Message
type)
Channel 10
472 (EM) 500007 500006 500005 500004 500003 500002 500001 500000
473 (OM) 500015 500014 500013 500012 500011 500010 500009 500008

Axis areas in DB2 (Parameter "ExtendAIMsg" = True)

(Message
type)
axis/spindle
120
Feed stop/spindle stop for axis/spindle 1 (without alarm no.)
121
122 - 181 Feed stop/spindle stop for axis/spindle 2 -
Feed stop/spindle stop for axis/spindle 31 (without alarm no.)

(Message
type)
axis/spindle
490 (EM) 600107 600106 600105 600104 600103 600102 600101 600100
Feed stop/spindle stop for axis/spindle 1 (alarm no.: 600100-600015)
491 (OM) 600115 600114 600113 600112 600111 600110 600109 600108
492 (EM) Feed stop/spindle stop for axis/spindle 2 (alarm no.: 600200-600207)
493 (OM) Feed stop/spindle stop for axis/spindle 2 (alarm no.: 600208-600215)
503 (OM) Feed stop/spindle stop for axis/spindle 7(alarm no.: 600708-600715)


(Message
type)


(Message
type)
User areas in DB2 (Parameter "ExtendAIMsg" = True)

(Message
type)
182
User area 0: byte 0 (without alarm no)
183
184 - 308 User area 0: byte 1 -
User area 0: byte 63 (without alarm no)

(Message type)
554 (EM) 700007 700006 700005 700004 700003 700002 700001 700000
User area 0 (alarm no.: 700000-700015)
555 (EM) 700015 700014 700013 700012 700011 700010 700009 700008
562 - 565 (EM) User area 1 bytes 1 - 4 (alarm no.: 700100-700131)
566 - 569 (OM) User area 1 bytes 5 - 8 (alarm no.: 700132-700163)


(Message type)
630 - 633 (OM) User area 9 bytes 5 - 8 (alarm no.: 700932 - 700963)


(Message type)

2.4 Signals from/ to NCK, PLC, HMI
2.4.1 Signals to NCK (DB10)
On-board NCK input and outputs

DB10 Signals to NC (PLC → NCK)
DBB0 Disabling of digital NCK inputs /Z1-A2/
Digital inputs without hardware #) On-board inputs §)

Input 8 Input 7 Input 6 Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1
DBB1 Setting of digital NCK inputs from PLC
Digital inputs without hardware #) On-board inputs §)

DBB2 - Unassigned
DBB3
DBB4 Disabling of digital NCK outputs /Z2-A4/
Digital outputs without hardware) On-board outputs)
Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1
DBB5 Overwrite screenform of digital NCK outputs /Z2-A4/

DBB6 Setting value of digital NCK outputs from PLC /Z2-A4/

DBB7 Input screenform of digital NCK outputs /Z2-A4/

st
DBB8 - Machine axis number table for FC 19, FC 24, FC 25, FC 26 (1 MCP)
DBB29
st
DBB30 Upper limit of machine axis numbers for FC 19, FC 24 (1 MCP)
With 0, the max. number of machine axis numbers applies
nd
DBB32 - Machine axis number table for FC 19, FC 24, FC 25, FC 26 (2 MCP)
DBB53
nd
DBB54 Upper limit of machine axis numbers for FC 19, FC 24 (2 MCP)
With 0, the max. number of machine axis numbers applies

General signals to NCK (DB10)

DB10 Signals to NC (PLC → NC)
DBB56 Keyswitch /Z1-A2/ Acknowl. Emergancy
Emergancy Stop
Stop /Z1-A2/
/Z1-A2/
Position 3 Position 2 Position 1 Position 0
DBB57 PC INC inputs

shutdown in mode
(Only group area
840Di) active
DBB58 Collision
detection
off
DBB59
2.4.2 Signals from NCK/HMI/GP to PLC/HMI (DB10)
On board NCK inputs and outputs (DB10)

DB10 Signals from (NCK -> PLC)
DBB60 For free disposal Actual value of the digital ON-BOARD inputs of the
NCK
On-board inputs §) /Z2-A4/
Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1
DBB61 -
DBB63
DBB64 Setpoint for the digital outputs of the NCK without Setpoint for the digital on-board outputs of the NCK
hardware /Z2-A4/
/Z2-A4/
DBB65 - unassigned
DBB67
DBB68 Handwheel 1 moved
DBB71 Modification counter inch/metric system of units

Signals from (HMI → PLC)

st
DBB72 Status of the actual value display indicated (1 MCP)
HT 8 → HMI Travel keys MCS/ Valid

displayed WCS display
nd
DBB73 Status of the actual value display indicated (2 MCP)
HT 8 → HMI Travel keys MCS/ Valid

displayed WCS display
st
DBB74 - Machine axis numbers of the displayed axes (1 MCP)
DBB79 MCP1AxisFromHMI
HT 8
nd
DBB80 - Machine axis numbers of the displayed axes (2 MCP)
DBB85 MCP2AxisFromHMI
HT 8
DBB86 Reserved
DBB88 Reserved
Selection/status signals from HMI (DB10)

DB10 Signals from NC (NCK → PLC)
DBB90
ePS → PLC
DBB91
ePS → PLC
DBB92
GP → PLC DP1 MPI/DP
Bus Bus
Slaves OK Slaves OK
DBB93 unassigned
DBB94 unassigned
DBB95 unassigned
DBB96 unassigned
DBB97 Channel number for handwheel 1 /Z2-H1

HMI → PLC
D C B A
DBB98 Channel number for handwheel 2 /Z2-H1
HMI → PLC
D C B A


DBB99 Channel number for handwheel 3 /Z2-H1/
HMI → PLC
D C B A
DBB100 Axis number for handwheel 1 /Z2-H1/

HMI → PLC
Machine Handwheel Contour E D C B A
axis selected handwheel
/Z2-H1/ /Z2-H1/
HMI → PLC
/Z2-H1/ /Z2-H1/
HMI → PLC
/Z2-H1/ /Z2-H1/
DBB103 HMI battery HMI AT box HMI HMI Remote
alarm tempera- ready fan HD diagnosis
HMI → PLC
/Z1-A2/ active
ture limit /Z1-A2/ monitoring monitoring /FBFE/
/Z1-A2/ /Z1-A2/
General signals from NCK (DB10)

DBB104 NCK CPU 1
st
OB1 Op2Key Op1Key HHU MCP 2 MCP 1
ready cycle ready ready ready ready ready
GP → PLC
/Z1-A2/
DBB105 Toolmanage-
GP → PLC ment
command
cancellation
DBB106 EMER- Collision
GENCY detection off
Stop active /Z2-M5/
/Z1-N2/
DBB107 Inch NCU-link Probe actuated
system active /Z2-M5/
/Z1-G2/
/Z2-B3/
Probe 2 Probe 1
DBB108 NC ready Drive ready Drives in HMI 1 CPU HMI 2 CPU HMI2 CPU
/Z1-A2/ /Z1-A2/ cyclic Ready Ready ready
(HMI to (HMI to
operation OPI) MPI) E_HMI2
/Z1-A2/ /Z1-A2/ ready
/Z1-A2/


DBB109 NCK Air temp. Heat sink PC NCK
battery alarm temp. operating alarm
alarm /Z1-A2/ alarm present
/Z1-A2/ NCU 573 system /Z1-A2/
/Z1-A2/ fault
/HBI/
DBB110 Software cams minus /Z2-N3/
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
DBB114 Software cams plus /Z2-N3/

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
DBB118 EPS-Daten
ePS → PLC
DBB119 ePS-Daten
ePS → PLC
DBB120 ePS-Daten
ePS → PLC
DBB121 ePS-Daten
ePS → PLC
Note
regarding NCK-CPU Ready (DBX104.7):
This signal represents the NC sign-of-life monitoring. The signal has to be
entered into the machine safety circuit.

2.4.3 Signals to external inputs and outputs to NCK (DB10)
External digital inputs of the NCK (DB10)


DBB122 Disable the external digital NCK inputs
DBB123 Values from the PLC for the external digital NCK inputs

External digital outputs of the NCK (DB10)


DBB130 Disable the external digital NCK outputs /Z2-A4/
DBB131 Overwrite screenform for the external digital NCK outputs /Z2-A4/
DBB132 Value from the PLC for the external digital NCK outputs /Z2-A4/
DBB133 Default screenform for the external digital NCK outputs /Z2-A4/



Analog inputs of the NCK (external) (DB10)

DB10 Signals to NCK (PLC → NCK)

DBB146 Disable the analog NCK inputs /Z2-A4/
DBB147 Specified analog value for NCK from PLC /Z2-A4/

DBW148 Setpoint from PLC for analog input 1 of NCK /Z2-A4/
DBB164 unassigned
DBB165
Analog outputs of the NCK (external) (DB10)

DB10 Signals to NCK (PLC → NCK)

DBB166 Overwrite screenform for the analog NCK outputs /Z2-A4/
DBB167 Default screenform for the analog NCK outputs /Z2-A4/
DBB168 Disable the analog NCK outputs /Z2-A4/
DBB169 Reserved
DBW170 Setpoint from PLC for analog output 1 of NCK /Z2-A4/

External digital input and output signals of the NCK (DB10)

DB10 Signals from NCK (NCK → PLC)
DBB186 Actual value of external digital NCK inputs /Z2-A4/


DBB190 NCK setpoint for external digital NCK outputs /Z2-A4/


Analog input and output signals of the NCK (DB10)

DBW194 Actual value for analog input 1 of the NCK /Z2-A4/
DBW210 Setpoint for analog output 1 of the NCK /Z2-A4/


DBW226- Collision detection 8 bytes = 64 bits
DBW233
NCK → PLC
DBW234 - Collision detection 8 bytes = 64 bits

DBW241
PLC → NCK
Expansion handwheel signals from NCK (DB10)

Ethernet-Handrad stands still

DBB245 Handwheel Handwheel Handwheel Handwheel Handwheel Handwheel
6 5 4 3 2 1
DBB246 Reserved
2.4.4 Signals from/to mode group (DB11)
Mode group-specific signals to mode group 1 (DB11)

DB11 Signals to mode group 1 (PLC → NCK)
DBB0 Mode BAG-Stopp Mode Mode Operating mode
group reset Mode group stop change /Z1-K1/
/Z1-K1/ group stop /Z1-K1/ disable
Axes plus /Z1-K1/
spindle
/Z1-K1/
JOG MDA AUTO-
MATIC
DBB1 Single block Machine function
/Z1-K1/ /Z1-K1/
Type A Type B REF REPOS TEACH IN
DBB2 Machine function

var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
DBB3 unassigned

Note
about machine function: machine function defined centrally when signal "INC
inputs in mode group area active" (DB10.DBX57.0) is set.
Mode group-specific signals from mode group 1 (DB11)

DB11 Signals from mode group 1 (NCK → PLC)
DBB4 Strobe mode
/Z1-K1/
HMI PLC
JOG MDA AUTOM.
DBB5 Strobe machine function
/Z1-K1/
HMI PLC
REF REPOS TEACH IN
DBB6 All NCK Mode Mode Active operating mode
channels in internal Group group /Z1-K1/
reset state JOG active reseted ready
/Z1-K1/ /Z1-K1/ /Z1-K1/
JOG MDA AUTOM.
DBB7 Active machine function
/Z1-K1/
REF REPOS TEACH IN
Mode group-specific signals to mode group 2 (DB11)

DB11 Signals to mode group 2 (PLC→NCK)
DBB20 Mode Mode Mode Mode Operating mode
group reset group stop group stop change /Z1-K1/
/Z1-K1/ Axes plus /Z1-K1/ disable
spindle /Z1-K1/
/Z1-K1/
JOG MDA AUTO-
MATIC
DBB21 Single block Machine function
/Z1-K1/
Type A Type B REF REPOS TEACH IN
DBB23 unassigned

Note
about machine function: machine function defined centrally when signal "INC
inputs in mode group area active" (DB10.DBX57.0) is set.
Mode group-specific signals from mode group 2 (DB11)

DB11 Signals from mode group 2 (NCK → PLC)
DBB24 Strobe mode
/Z1-K1/
HMI PLC
JOG MDA AUTO-
MATIC
DBB25 Strobe machine function
HMI PLC
/Z1-K1/
REF REPOS TEACH IN

DBB26 All NCK Mode Mode Active operating mode
channels in internal group group /Z1-K1/
reset state JOG active reseted
/Z1-K1/ /Z1-K1/ /Z1-K1/ ready
/Z1-K1/
JOG MDA AUTO-
MATIC
DBB27 Active machine function
/Z1-K1/
REF REPOS TEACH IN

DBB28 Machine functions
Note
The other mode groups (mode group 3 to mode group 10) are also located in
DB11 with the following initial bytes:
e.g.
Mode group 3: DBB40 Mode group 7: DBB120

2.4.5 Signals for Safety SPL (safe programmable logic) (DB18)
Parameterization section
References: SINUMERIK Safety Integrated
DB18 Signals for Safety SPL (PLC → PLC)

DBB0 unassigned
DBB3
DBW34 unassigned
DBB36 Stop E SPL

READY
DBB37
Data area / error
DB18 Signals for Safety SPL (PLC ←→ NCK)

Data area for SPL inputs/outputs
SPL_DATA.INSEP [1..32]
DBD38
SPL_DATA.INSEP [33..64]
DBD42
SPL_DATA.OUTSEP [1..32]
DBD46
SPL_DATA.OUTSEP [33..64]
DBD50
Data area for user SPL

SPL_DATA.INSIP [1..32]
DBD54
SPL_DATA.INSIP [33..64]
DBD58
SPL_DATA.OUTSIP [1..32]
DBD62
SPL_DATA.OUTSIP [33..64]
DBD66


SPL_DATA.MARKERSIP [1..32]
DBD70
SPL_DATA.MARKERSIP [33..64]
DBD74
Difference in level between NCK and PLC for diagnostics

SPL_DELTA.INSEP [1..32]
DBD78
SPL_DELTA.INSEP [33..64]
DBD82
SPL_DELTA.OUTSEP [1..32]
DBD86
SPL_DELTA.OUTSEP [33..64]
DBD90
SPL_DELTA.INSIP [1..32]
DBD94
SPL_DELTA.INSIP [33..64]
DBD98
SPL_DELTA.OUTSIP [1..32]
DBD102
SPL_DELTA.OUTSIP [33..64]
DBD106
SPL_DELTA.MARKERSIP [1..32]
DBD110
SPL_DELTA.MARKERSIP [33..64]
DBD114
CMDSI
DBD118
Systemfehler
DBD119 cross-
checking
Error number
DBD120 0 = no error
1 - 320 = Signal number starting from SPL_DATA.INSEP [1]
Level indicator of cross-checking
DBD124 (diagnostics option: how many SPL signals currently differ in level)

Supplementary data areas

Data area for single-channel inputs/outputs
DBB128 PLCSIOUT [1 .. 8]
NCK → PLC

NCK → PLC

NCK → PLC

NCK → PLC
DBB132 PLCSIIN [1.. 8]

PLC → NCK
DBB133 PLCSIIN [9 .. 16]

PLC → NCK

PLC → NCK

PLC → NCK
SPL status
DBB136
PROFIsafe module(s) for
DBB138 th
8 input
th
7 input
th
6 input
th
5 input
th
4 input
rd
3 input
nd
2 input
st
1 input
byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte
DBB139
PROFIsafe module(s) for
DBB140 th
8 output
th
7 output
th
6 output
th
5 output
th
4 output
rd
3 output
nd
2 output
st
1 output
byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte
DBB141
DBB142 -
DBB 149
DBB150 -
DBB157
DBB158 -
DBB189

F_SENDDP (transmitter)

1. F_SENDDP interface: FSDP[1].
DBW190
ERR_REAC
DBB192 SUBS_ON ERROR
DBB193
DBW194 DIAG
DBW196 RETVAL14
DBW198 RETVAL15

DBW200
ERR_REAC
DBB203
DBW204 DIAG
DBW206 RETVAL14
DBW208 RETVAL15

DBW210
ERR_REAC
DBB213
DBW214 DIAG
DBW216 RETVAL14
DBW218 RETVAL15

F_RECVDP (receiver)
DB18 SPL-Signals (PLC ←→ NCK)

1. F_RECVDP interface: FRDP[1].
DBB220
SUBS[7] SUBS[6] SUBS[5] SUBS[4] SUBS[3] SUBS[2] SUBS[1] SUBS[0]
DBB221 SUBS[15] SUBS[14] SUBS[13] SUBS[12] SUBS[11] SUBS[10] SUBS[9] SUBS[8]
DBB222 REAC
DBB224 ACK_REI
SEND-
DBB225 ACK_REQ SUBS_ON ERROR
MODE
DBW226 DIAG
DBW228 RETVAL14
DBW230 RETVAL15

DBB232
DBW234 REAC
DBB236 ACK_REI
SEND-
DBB237 ACK_REQ SUBS_ON ERROR
MODE
DBW238 DIAG
DBW240 RETVAL14
DBW242 RETVAL15

DBB244
DBW246 REAC
DBB248 ACK_REI
SEND
DBB249 MODE
ACK_REQ SUBS_ON ERROR
DBW250 DIAG
DBW252 RETVAL14
DBW254 RETVAL15

SPL user data
DB18 SPL-Signals (PLC ←→ NCK)
DBD256 SPL_USER_DATA[0]
2.4.6 Signals from/to operator panel (DB19)

DB19 Signals to operator panel (PLC → HMI)
DBB0 Actual Back up HMI-Adv Clear Clear Key disable Screen Screen
value in travel shutdown recall cancel /Z1-A2/ darkening bright
WCS recorder alarms alarms /Z1-A2/ /Z1-A2/
0=MCS HMI-Adv HMI-Adv
/Z1-A2/
Rights for External
DBB1 the external Viewer
viewer
DBB2
DBB4
DBB6 Analog spindle 1, capacity in percent
DBB7 Analog spindle 2, capacity in percent
DBB8 Channel number of machine control panel to HMI
DBB9 Reserved for selection Automato OEM2 OEM1

tool
measure-
ment
DBB10 PLC Hardkeys (Values 1 ... 255, Default: 0 )
Reserved for hardkey function expansions
DBB11
DBB12
DBB13 Select Load part Unload Reserved Disable
program Teach
/Z1-A2/ /Z1-A2/
transfer
/Z1-A2/
IHsl/IM9
DBB14 0=act. FS RS-232 act. FS: Index of file to be transferred in the standard list.
1=pas. FS RS-232 pass. FS: Number of the control file for user file names.
DBB15 RS-232 act. FS: Index that specifies the axis, channel or tool no.
RS-232 pass. FS: Index of the file to be transferred in the user list

DBB16 1=pas FS Part program handling: Number of the control file for user file names.
/IHsl/IM9
DBB17 Part program handling: Index of the file to be transferred in the user list
/IHsl/IM9
DBB18
DBB19 Reserved (signal counter)
DB19 Signals from operator panel (HMI → PLC)

DBB20 MCS/WCS Simulation Language Recall Cancel Cancel key Screen is
Change- active 2 switched alarm alarm actuated dark
over /Z1-A2/ HMI-Emb. cleared cleared /Z1-A2/ /Z1-A2/
/Z1-A2/ HMI-Adv HMI-Adv
/Z1-A2/ /Z1-A2/
DBB21 Active HMI operating area
DBB22 Displayed channel number from the HMI /Z1-A2/
DBB23
DBB24 actual mask number from JobShop
DBB26 Part program handling status /Z1-A2/

Select Load Unload Active Error OK Reserved
DBB27 Error program handling /Z1-A2/
DBB28 Mask number for "Extend user interface" /Z1-A2/
DBB30 Control bits PLC --> HMI
Exit mask Request

mask
DBB31 Control bits PLC --> HMI
Inactive bit Error, Not Mask Mask Mask Mask
possible to exited active requested request
request accepted
mask
DBB32 FunctionSelectionNo. from PLC
PLC HMI Busy Strobe

function function
DBB33 Parameter 1 for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB32)
PLC HMI
PLC HMI
PLC HMI


DBB36 Error code for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB32)
HMI PLC
HMI PLC
HMI PLC
HMI PLC
DBB40 - Reserved
DBB47
DBB48 PLC busy HMI strobe FunctionSelectionNo. from HMI
function function
HMI PLC
DBB49 Error code for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB48)
PLC HMI
DBB50 - Interface 2nd HMI

DBB99 Assignment as for DBB0 to DBB49
DBB100 Switchover interface to HMI

Knocking interface (HMI announces itself to NCU)
ONL_REQUEST /Z2-B3/
Online request from HMI
HMI writes its client identification as online request
(bit 8-15: bus type, bit 0-7: HMI bus address)
DBB102 ONL_CONFIRM /Z2-B3/
Acknowledgment from PLC to online request
PLC writes HMI client identification as acknowledgment (bus type, HMI bus address;
as with DBB100).
DBB104 PAR_CLIENT_IDENT /Z2-B3/
HMI writes its client identification (bus type, HMI bus address; as with DBB100).
DBB106 PAR_HMI_TYP /Z2-B3/

Type of HMI as per NETNAMES.INI: Main / subordinate operator panel / server /...
DBB107 PAR_MSTT_ADR /Z2-B3/
HMI writes address of MCP to be activated; 255, when no MCP activated
DBB108 PAR_STATUS /Z2-B3/

PLC writes online enable for HMI
DBB109 PAR_Z_INFO /Z2-B3/

PLC writes additional info about status


DBB110 M_TO_N_ALIVE
Sign of life from PLC to HMI through M to N block
DBB112 Reserved bus type MCP
DBB113 ParOpKeyAdr
Direct key index knocking interface
DBB114 ParTcuIndex
TCU index knocking interface
DBB115 ParHt2Index
Ht2 index login interface
DBB116 Direct key address

st
1 online interface
DBB117 Direct key address

nd
2 nline interface
DBB118 TCU index

st
1 online interface
DBB119 TCU index

nd
2 online interface
Online interface HMI 1 (user)

DBB120 MMC1_CLIENT_IDENT /Z2-B3/
PLC writes PAR_CLIENT_IDENT to MMCx_CLIENT_IDENT when HMI goes online.
DBB122 MMC1_TYP /Z2-B3/

PLC writes PAR_MMC_TYP to MMCx_TYP when HMI goes online.
DBB123 MMC1_MSTT_ADR /Z2-B3/

PLC writes PAR_MSTT_ADR to MMCx_MSTT_ADR when HMI goes online.
DBB124 MMC1_STATUS /Z2-B3/

Connection status, HMI and PLC alternately write their requests/acknowledgments
DBB125 MMC1_Z_INFO /Z2-B3/

Additional info connection status (pos./neg. acknowledgment, error messages...)


DBB126 Reserved TCU1_ MMC1_ MMC1_ MMC1_ MMC1_ MMC1_ MMC1
SHIFT_ CHANGE_
LOCK ACTIVE_ ACTIVE_ ACTIVE_ MSTT_ SHIFT
DENIED CHANGED PERM REQ SHIFT_ LOCK
/Z2-B3/ /Z2-B3/ /Z2-B3/ /Z2-B3/ LOCK /Z2-B3/
/Z2-B3/
DBB127 Reserved Bus type MCP
DBB128 - Reserved Transline (Transline DB number)

DBB129
Online interface HMI 2 (user)
DBB130 MMC2_CLIENT_IDENT /Z2-B3/

PLC writes PAR_CLIENT_IDENT to MMCx_CLIENT_IDENT when HMI goes online
DBB132 MMC2_TYP /Z2-B3/

PLC writes PAR_MMC_TYP to MMCx_TYP when HMI goes online
DBB133 MMC2_MSTT_ADR /Z2-B3/

PLC writes PAR_MSTT_ADR to MMCx_MSTT_ADR when HMI goes online
DBB134 MMC2_STATUS /Z2-B3/

Connection status, MMC and PLC alternately write their requests/acknowledgments
DBB135 MMC2_Z_INFO /Z2-B3/

Additional info connection status (pos./neg. acknowledgment, error messages...)
DBB136 Reserved TCU2_ MMC2_ MMC2_ MMC2_ MMC2_ MMC2_ MMC2_

SHIFT_
LOCK CHANGE_ ACTIVE_ ACTIVE_ ACTIVE_ MSTT_ SHIFT_
DENIED CHANGED PERM REQ SHIFT_ LOCK
/Z2-B3/ /Z2-B3/ /Z2-B3/ /Z2-B3/ LOCK /Z2-B3/
/Z2-B3/
DBB137 Reserved Bus type MCP
DBB138 – Reserved Transline (Transline DB number)

DBB139
DBB140 - Code carrier input parameters
DBB197 Optional package SINTDC on HMI-Advanced required
DBB198 - Code carrier return parameters

DBB250 - Commands
DBB256 - Commands for Paramtm.exe

DBB268 Traffic light status

Optional package TPM on HMI-Advanced required


DBD270 - Counter[1 ... 32]
DBD394 Optional package TPM on HMI-Advanced required
2.4.7 PLC machine data (DB20)
DB20 PLC machine data (PLC→operator)

DBW0 INT values
DBW
DBW INT values
DBB Bit arrays
DBB
DBB Bit arrays
DBD REAL values
DBD
DBD REAL values
Note
The initial and end addresses of the PLC machine data areas depend on the
respective length indications of the partial areas. In general, the integer values
start with the data byte 0. The upper limit is determined by the corresponding
length indication. In general, the following bit arrays (2-decade hexadecimal
numbers on input) start with the following even address. The real values follow
directly the bit arrays and also start with an even address.

2.4.8 Signals from/to NCK channel (DB21 – DB30)
DB21 - Signals to NCK channel (PLC→NCK)

DB30
DBB0 Activate dry Activate Activate Activate
run M01 single block DRF
feedrate /Z1-K1/ /Z1-K1/ /Z2-H1/
/Z1-V1/
DBB1 Activate PLC action CLC CLC stop Time Synchron- Enable Activate
program complete override /Z3-TE1/ monitoring ized action protection referencing
test /Z1-K1/ /Z3-TE1/ act. (tool OFF zones /Z1-R1/
/Z1-K1/ manage- /Z1-A3/
/FBSY/
ment)
DBB2 Skip block /Z1-K1/
/7 /6 /5 /4 /3 /2 /1 /0
DBB3 Nibbling and punching /K2-N4/
Manual Stroke not Stroke Stroke Manual Stroke
release of operating delayed suppres- stroke enable
stroke 2 /K2-N4/ /K2-N4/ sion enable /K2-N4/
/K2-N4/ /K2-N4/
DBB4 Feedrate override /Z1-V1/
H G F E D C B A
DBB5 Rapid traverse override /Z1-V1/
H G F E D C B A
DBB6 Feedrate Rapid Program Delete Delete Read-in Feed

override traverse level abort subroutine distance-to- disable disable
active override /Z1-K1/ no. of go /Z1-K1/ override
override active passes /Z1-A2/ /Z1-V1/
/Z1-V1/ override
/Z1-V1/
DBB7 Reset Suppress NC Stop NC Stop NC Stop to NC Start NC Start
/Z1-K1// Start Lock axes plus /Z1-K1/ block limit /Z1-K1/ disable
spindle /Z1-K1/ /Z1-K1/
/Z1-K1/
DBB8 Activate machine-related protection area /Z1-A3/
Area 8 Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 Area 1
DBB9 Activate machine-related protection area /Z1-A3/

Area 10 Area 9
DBB10 Activate channel-specific protection area /Z1-A3/
DBB11 Activate channel-specific protection area /Z1-A3/

Area 10 Area 9

Control signals to geometry axes

DB21 - Signals to NCK channel (PLC → NCK)
DB30
Geometry axis 1
DBB12 Traversing keys Rapid Traversing Feed stop Activate handwheel

/Z2-H1/ traverse key disable /Z1-V1/ /Z2-H1/
override /Z2-H1/
/Z2-H1/
+ - 3 2 1
DBB13 Geometry axis 1

machine function /Z2-H1/
Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
DBB14 OEM signals geometry axis 1

Traversing keys Rapid Traversing Feed stop Activate handwheel
override /Z2-H1/
/Z2-H1/
+ - 3 2 1

Traversing keys Rapid Traversing Feed stop Activate handwheel
override /Z2-H1/
/Z2-H1/
+ - 3 2 1

Note
about machine function: machine function only defined when signal "INC inputs
in mode group area active" (DB10.DBX57.0) is not set.

Operating signals from HMI/status signals from NC channel

DB21 – Signals from NCK channel (NCK → PLC,
DB30 HMI → PLC, PLC → NCK)

DBB24 Dry run M01 Select DRF
feedrate selected NCK- selected
HMI → PLC
selected /Z1-K1/ related /Z2-H1/
/Z1-V1/ M01
DBB25 Program REPOS Feedrate REPOSPATHMODE
test MODE override for
HMI → PLC
selected EDGE rapid
/Z1-K1/ traverse 2 1 0
selected
/Z1-V1/
DBB26 Skip block selected /Z1-K1/
HMI → PLC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DBB27 Skip block Skip block
selected selected
HMI → PLC
/Z1-K1/ /Z1-K1/
DBB28 OEM channel signals
PLC → NCK
DBB29 Do not Switch off Switch off Activate Activate Activate Activate Activate
disable wear workpiece PTP fixed feed 4 fixed feed 3 fixed feed 2 fixed feed 1
PLC → NCK
tool monitoring counter motion /FBMA/, /FBMA/, /FBMA/, /FBMA/,
/Z1-V1/ /Z1-V1/ /Z1-V1/ /Z1-V1/
DBB30 Activate contour handwheel
PLC → NCK
No tool Activate Neg. Simulation Handwheel Handwheel Handwheel

change NCK- direction contour 3 2 1
commands related simulation handwheel
M01 contour on
handwheel
/Z1-H2/
DBB31 REPOSPATHMODE
PLC → NCK Skip block Skip block REPOS 2 1 0
active /9 active /8 MODE
EDGE
DBB32 Last action M00/M01 Approach Action Execution
NCK → PLC block active active block active block active from external
/Z1-K1/ /Z1-K1/ /Z1-K1/ /Z1-K1/ source active
DBB33 Program Transforma M02/M30 Block Handwheel Revolutio- Orientable Referencing
NCK → PLC test active tion active active search override nal toolholder active
/Z1-K1/ /Z1-K1/ /Z1-K1/ active active feedrate active /Z1-R1/
/K2-M1/ /Z1-K1/ /Z2-H1/ active
/Z1-V1/
DBB34 OEM channel signals feedback
NCK → PLC
DBB35 Channel status /Z1-K1/ Program status /Z1-K1/

NCK → PLC
Reset Interrupted Active Aborted Interrupted Stopped Waiting Running

DB21 – Signals from NCK channel (NCK → PLC,

DB30 HMI → PLC, PLC → NCK)

DBB36 NCK alarm Channel- Channel Interrupt All axes All axes
NCK → PLC with specific ready processing stationary requiring
processing NCK alarm for active /Z1-B1/ reference
stop present operation /Z1-K1/ points are
present /Z1-A2/ referenced
/Z1-A2/ /Z1-R1/
DBB37 Contour handwheel active
NCK → PLC
Stop at Read-in CLC CLC CLC Handwheel Handwheel Handwhe
block end enable is stopped stopped active 3 2 el 1
with SBL is ignored upper limit lower limit /Z3-TE1/ /Z2-H1/ /Z2-H1/ /Z2-H1/
suppressed /Z1-K1/ /Z3-TE1/ /Z3-TE1/
/Z1-K1/
DBB38 Nibbling and punching /Z2-N4/
NCK → PLC
Acknowl. Stroke
manual enable
stroke active
enable /Z2-N4/
/Z2-N4/
DBB39 Protection
NCK → PLC zones not
guaran-
teed
Status signals of geometry axes

DB21 – Signals from NCK channel (NCK → PLC)
DB30
Traverse command Travel requests Handwheel active /Z2-H1/
/Z2-H1/
plus minus plus minus 3 2 1
active machine function
/Z2-H1/
DBB44
HMI → PLC

Traverse command Travel requests Handwheel active
/Z2-H1/ /Z2-H1/

DB21 – Signals from NCK channel (NCK → PLC)

DB30
/Z2-H1/
DBB50
HMI → PLC

Traverse command Travel requests Handwheel active
/Z2-H1/ /Z2-H1/

/Z2-H1/
DBB56
HMI → PLC
DBB57

Change signals on auxiliary function transfer from NC channel

DB21 –
DB30 Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)

DBB58 M fct. 5 M fct. 4 M fct. 3 M fct. 2 M fct. 1
change change change change change
/Z1-H2/ /Z1-H2/ /Z1-H2/ /Z1-H2/ /Z1-H2/
not not not not not
decoded decoded decoded decoded decoded
DBB60 S fct. 3 S fct. 2 S fct. 1 S fct. 3 S fct. 2 S fct. 1
quick quick quick change change change
/Z1-H2/ /Z1-H2/ /Z1-H2/
DBB61 T fct 3 T fct. 2 T fct. 1 T fct. 3 T fct. 2 T fct. 1
quick quick quick change/Z1- change/Z1- change
H2/ H2/ /Z1-H2/
DBB62 D fct. 3 D fct. 2 D fct. 1 D fct. 3 D fct. 2 D fct. 1
quick quick quick change change/ change
/Z1-H2/ Z1-H2/ /Z1-H2/
DBB63 DL fct. DL fct.
quick change
DBB64 H fct. 3 H fct. 2 H fct. 1 H fct. 3 H fct. 2 H fct. 1
quick quick quick change change change
/Z1-H2/ /Z1-H2/ /Z1-H2/
DBB65 F fct. 6 F fct. 5 F fct. 4 F fct. 3 F fct. 2 F fct. 1
change change change change change change
/Z1-H2/ /Z1-H2/ /Z1-H2/ /Z1-H2/ /Z1-H2/ /Z1-H2/
quick quick quick quick quick
DBB67 F fct. 6 F fct. 5 F fct. 4 F fct. 3 F fct. 2 F fct. 1
quick quick quick quick quick quick
Note
• For 10-decade T numbers, only the T fct. 1 change signal is available.
• For 5-decade D numbers, only the D fct. 1 change signal is available.

Transferred M/S functions

DB21 –

DBB68 Extended address M function 1 (binary)
/Z1-H2/
DBD70 M function 1 (binary)

/Z1-H2/
DBB74 Extended address M function 2 (binary)
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
DBW80 Extended address M function 3 (binary)
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
DBD94 M function 5 (binary) /Z1-H2/
DBW98 Extended address S function 1 (binary)

/Z1-H2/
DBD100 S function 1 (REAL format)
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
Note
M functions are programmed in the part program in the INTEGER format (8 decades plus
sign).

Transferred T/D/DL functions

DB21 - Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)
DB30
DBW116 Extended address T function 1 (16 bit INT)
DBW118 T function 1 (binary) /Z1-H2/

DBD118 For 8-decade T nos., T function 1 (32 bit DINT) is used in DBD 118 (see note)
DBW122 T function 2 (Int)
DBW126 T function 3 (Int)
DBB128 Extended address D function 1 (8 bit INT)
DBB129 D function 1 (binary) /Z1-H2/
DBW130 For 5-decade D nos., D function 1 (16 bit DINT) is used in DBD 130 (see note)
DBB131 D function 2 (8 bit Int)
DBB133 D function 3 (8 bit Int)
DBW134 Extended address DL function (16 bit INT)
DBD136 DL function (REAL)
Note
• With active tool management, programmed T functions are not output to
the PLC.
• 8-decade T nos. are only available as T function 1
• Programmed D functions with names (e.g. D=CUTEDGE_1) cannot be
output in ASCII format to the PLC.
• 5-decade D nos. are only available as D function 1
• The REAL format corresponds to floating point representation in STEP 7
(24 bit mantissa and 8 bit exponent). This floating point format supplies a
maximum of 7 valid places.

Transferred H/F functions

DB21 -

DBW140 Extended address H function 1 (binary)
/Z1-H2/
DBD142 H function 1 (REAL or Dint)
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
DBD148 H function 2 (REAL or Dint) /Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
DBD154 H function 3 (REAL or Dint)
/Z1-H2/
DBW158 Extended address F function 1 (binary)
/Z1-H2/
DBD160 F function 1 (REAL format)
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
DBD172 F function 3 (REAL format) /
Z1-H2/
DBW176 Extended address F function 4 (binary) /
Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
DBW182 Extended address F function 5 (binary) /
Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
/Z1-H2/
Note
• F functions are programmed in the part program in the REAL format.
• The extended address of the F function contains an identifier with the
following meaning:
0: path feed,
1-31: machine axis number for feed with positioning axes.
• The H function data type is dependent on MD 22110:
AUXFU_H_TYPE_INT.

Decoded M signals (M0–M99)

DB21 – Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)
DB30
DBB194 Dynamic M functions
M07 M06 M05 * M04 * M03 * M02 M01 M00

/Z1-H2/
M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08

/Z1-H2/
M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16

/Z1-H2/
M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24
/Z1-H2/
M39 M38 M37 M36 M35 M34 M33 M32

/Z1-H2/
M47 M46 M45 M44 M43 M42 M41 M40
/Z1-H2/
M55 M54 M53 M52 M51 M50 M49 M48
/Z1-H2/
M63 M62 M61 M60 M59 M58 M57 M56
DBB202 Dynamic M functions /
Z1-H2/
M71 M70 * M69 M68 M67 M66 M65 M64
/Z1-H2/
M79 M78 M77 M76 M75 M74 M73 M72
/Z1-H2/
M87 M86 M85 M84 M83 M82 M81 M80

/Z1-H2/
M95 M94 M93 M92 M91 M90 M89 M88
/Z1-H2/
M99 M98 M97 M96
DBB207
Note
• M functions marked with * are not decoded in this bit array if a spindle is
configured in the channel. In this case, these M functions are offered as
extended M functions in DB21-30.DBB68 ff. and in the relevant axis DB
DB31-61.DBB86 ff.

• Dynamic M functions (M00 to M99) are decoded by the basic PLC

program.
The PLC user must use dynamic M functions in order to generate static
M functions.
Active G functions
DB30
DBB208 Number of active G function of G function group 1 (binary) /Z1-K1/
...
DBB270 Number of active G function of G function group n-1 (binary) /Z1-K1/
DBB271 Number of active G function of G function group n (binary) /Z1-K1/
Note
• The active G functions of the groups are updated each time a G function or a
mnemonic identifier (e.g. SPLINE) is programmed.
• G functions within a G group are output as binary value, starting with 1.
A G function with the value 0 means that no G function is active for this G group.

Signals for protection areas from NC channel

DB30
DBB272 Machine-related protection area preactivated /Z1-A3/
DBB273 Machine-related protection area preactivated /Z1-A3/
Area 10 Area 9
DBB274 Channel-specific protection area preactivated /Z1-A3/
DBB275 Channel-specific protection area preactivated /Z1-A3/
Area 10 Area 9
DBB276 Machine-related protection area violated /Z1-A3/
DBB277 Machine-related protection area violated /Z1-A3/

Area 10 Area 9
DBB278 Channel-related protection area violated /Z1-A3/
DBB279 Channel-related protection area violated /Z1-A3/
Area 10 Area 9

Instruction-controlled signals to NC channel

DB21 – Signals to NCK channel (NCK→PLC)
DB30
DBB280 Synch. Reserved
action
disable
request
DBB281 Synch.
action
disabled
DBW282 - Reserved
DBW298
DBB300 Disable synchronized actions /FBSY/
No. 8 No. 7 No. 6 No. 5 No. 4 No. 3 No. 2 No. 1
Note
The request signals are set by the user and reset by the basic program after
transmission of the corresponding data.

Instruction-controlled signals from NC channel

DB21 -

DBB308 Synchronized actions can be disabled /FBSY/
Nr. 8 Nr. 7 Nr. 6 Nr. 5 Nr. 4 Nr. 3 Nr. 2 Nr.1

Nr. 16 Nr. 15 Nr. 14 Nr. 13 Nr. 12 Nr. 11 Nr.10 Nr.9

Nr. 24 Nr. 23 Nr. 22 Nr. 21 Nr. 20 Nr. 19 Nr.18 Nr.17


Nr. 40 Nr. 39 Nr. 38 Nr. 37 Nr. 36 Nr. 35 Nr. 34 Nr. 33


Cyclic Signals
DBB316 Active G functions
G00 geo.
DBB317
Tool PTP motion Travel Workpiece External
missing active request setpoint language
/FB3/F2/ drive test reached mode
active
DBB318
Overstore Dry-run Associated Stop TOFF TOFF Search ASUP
active feedrate M01 delayed movement active active stopped
/F1/A2 active active active /FB1/F2 /FB1/K1/
/FB1/V1/ /FB3/H2/ /FB3/F2/
DBB319
No tool Stop-delay- Repos Delay FTS Repos Path Repos Path Repos Path REPOS
change range not DEFERRA Mode Ackn Mode Ackn Mode Ackn MODE
command activated L Chan 2 1 0 EDGE
active FB1/K1 /FB1/K1/ /FB1/K1/ /FB1/K1/ ACKN
/FB1/K1/

Signals to orientation axes
DB21 - Signals to NCK channel (PLC→NCK)

DB30
Orientation axis 1 /Z2-H1/
DBB320 Traversing keys

+ − Rapid Traversing Feed stop Activate handwheel
− − traverse key disable
(bit value coding)
override
DBB321 Orientation axis 1
DBB322 OEM signals orientation axis 1


+ − Rapid Traversing Feed Activate handwheel
− − traverse key stop (bit value coding)
override disable

+ − Rapid Traversing Feed Activate handwheel
- − traverse key stop (bit value coding)
override disable

Signals from orientation axes

DB30
DBB332 Travel command Travel request Handwheel active

plus minus plus minus (bit value coding)

Active machine function

DBB336
Travel command Travel request Handwheel active
(bit value coding)
plus minus plus minus

DBB340 Travel command Travel request Handwheel active

plus minus plus minus (bit value coding)


Tool management functions from NC channel

DB30
Modification signals tool management functions
DBB344 Last Transfer to Tool limit Tool pre-
replace- new value warning
ment tool of replace- reached limit
tool group ment tool reached
DBB345 -
DBB347
Transferred tool management functions
DBD348 T number for tool prewarning limit (DINT)
DBD352 T number for tool limit value (DINT)
DBD356 T number of new replacement tool (DINT)
DBD360 T number of last replacement tool (DINT)
Signals from NC channel
DB21 – Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)

DB30
CH_CYCLES_SIG_IN (Bit 0 - 7)
DBB364
CH_CYCLES_SIG_IN (Bit 8 - 15)
DBB365
CH_CYCLES_SIG_OUT (Bit 0 - 7)
DBB366
CH_CYCLES_SIG_OUT (Bit 8 - 15)
DBB367
CH_OEM_TECHNO_SIG_IN (DBB368 - DBB371)
DBB368
DBB369
DBB370
DBB371
DBB372 CH_OEM_TECHNO_SIG_OUT (DBB372 - DBB375)
DBB373
DBB374
DBB375
DBB376 ProgEventDisplay

DBB377 Stop Stop

condition following
collision
detection.
DBB378 Silence ASUP
ASUP aktive
aktive
DBB379
DBB380
DBB381
DBB382
DBB383
Signals to NCK channel
DB21 – Signals to NCK channel (NCK→PLC)

DB30
DBB384 Control
program
branch
DBB385
DBB386
DBB387

2.4.9 Signals from/to axis/spindle (PLC → NCK) (DB31 – DB61)

DB31 - Signals to axis/spindle (PLC → NCK)
DB61
DBB0 Feedrate override /Z1-V1/
Axis and H G F E D C B A
spindle
DBB1 Override Position Position Follow-up Axis/spindle Sensor fixed Acknowl. fixed Drive test
active measuring measuring mode disable stop stop reached movement
Axis and
/Z1-V1/ system 2 system 1 /Z1-A2/ /Z1-A2/ /Z1-F1/ /Z1-F1/ enable
spindle /Z1-A2/ /Z1-A2/ /Z1-A2/
DBB2 Reference point value Clamping in Delete Controller Cam
/Z1-R1/ progress distance-to- enable activation
Axis and
/Z1-A3/ go/ spindle /Z1-A2/ /Z1-N3/
spindle reset
/Z1-S1/
4 3 2 1
DBB3 Program test Velocity/ Activate Activate Activate Activate Enable Accept
axis/ spindle spindle speed fixed feed 4 fixed feed 3 fixed feed 2 fixed feed 1 travel to fixed external ZO
Axis and
release limitation stop /Z1-K2/
spindle /Z1-A3/ /FBMA/, /FBMA/, /FBMA/, /FBMA/, /Z1-F1/
/Z1-V1/ /Z1-V1/ /Z1-V1/ /Z1-V1/
DBB4 Traversing keys Rapid Traversing Feed Activate handwheel
Axis and /Z2-H1/ traverse key disable stop/spindle /Z2-H1/
spindle override /Z2-H1/ stop
/Z2-H1/ /Z1-V1/
plus minus 3 2 1
DBB5 Machine function /Z2-H1/
Axis and Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
spindle
DBB6 OEM axis signals
Axis and
spindle
DBB7
DBB8 Request PLC Activation Allocate NC axis to channel
axis/spindle signal with /Z2-K5/
/Z2-K5/ change of this
D C B A
byte
/Z2-K5/
Note
DBX8.4: is automatically reset after assignment.
DBB9 Lock Control parameter block /Z1-A2/

parameter
set definition C B A
from NC
/Z1-A2/
DBB10 REPOS
DELAY
DBB11 Start brake
test
DBB12 Delay Modulo limit 2nd software limit switch Hardware limit switch
reference enabled /Z1-A3/ /Z1-A3/
Axis
point
plus minus plus minus
approach
/Z1-R1/
DBB13


DB61
Axis
DBB14 Joggen auf JOG Fest- JOG Fest- JOG Fest-

Position Festpkt- Festpkt- Festpkt-
Axis
anfahren 2 anfahren 1 anfahren 0
DBB15
Axis
DBB16 Delete No n- Resyn- Resyn- Gear has Actual gear stage /Z1-S1/
S value monitoring chronize chronize changed
Spindle
/Z1-S1/ when spindle 2 spindle 1 over
changing /Z1-S1/ /Z1-S1/ /Z1-S1/ C B A
gear
/Z1-S1/
DBB17 Invert Resyn- Resyn- Feedrate
M3/M4 chronize chronize override f.
Spindle
/Z1-S1/ spindle at spindle at spindle
pos. 2 pos. 1 valid
/Z1-S1/ /Z1-S1/ /Z1-S1/
DBB18 Setpoint rot. direct. /Z1-S1/ Oscillating
via PLC
Spindle
/Z1-S1/
CCW CW
DBB19 Spindle override
/Z1-V1/
Spindle
H G F E D C B A
DBB20 Release Ramp
brake generator
Drive
quick stop
/Z1-A2/
DBB21 Pulse enable n controller Motor Motor selection /Z1-A2/ Drive parameter set selection
Drive
/Z1-A2/ integrator Selection 0…7
disable done /Z1-A2/
/Z1-A2/ /Z1-A2/
B A C B A
DBB22 Selection of Safe speed Deselect safe Deselect
standstill safe velocity
Safety
and
Integrated bit value 1 bit value 0 standstill
DBB23 Activate test SINAMICS Activate end Transmission of

stop brake close position pair
Safety bit value 2 bit value 1 bit value 0
2
Integrated
DBB24 Master/ Bit value for Torque CC_Slave Control Axis Stepper
slave on compensa- axis motor
CTRLOUT_changed:
tion
1 0 controller
Change setpoint output ON Suppress Rotation
assignment (for compile link monitoring
cycles)
DBB25
DBB26 Enable ESR Enable Compen-

response slave axis sation
Grinding
overlay control ON


DB61
DBB27 Stop Resume
Grinding
HIAxMove Corr DEPBCS DEPMCS HIAxMove Corr DEPBCS DEPMCS
DBB28 PLC checks AxStop, stop Stop at next Change Set reversal AXRESUM AXRESET OscillAxExt
Oscillation
axis /Z2-P5/ reversal reversal point E /Z2-P2/ Reversal
/Z2-P5/ point point /Z2-P5/ /Z2-P2/
/Z2-P5/ /Z2-P5/
DBB29 Disable Start gantry

Grinding automatic synchroni-
zation
synchroni- Gantry
zation
DBB30 Reserved
Technology
DBB31 Clear Track Disable Resynchro-

synchronism synchronism synchroni- nize
Technology
zation
DBB32 Deselect Deselect Deselect Deselect
external external stop external stop external
Safety
stop E D C stop A
Integrated
DBB33 Select override
Safety Bit value 3 Bit value 2 Bit value 1 Bit value 0

Integrated
DBB34
DBB35 -
DBB55
DBB56 Spindle Spindle Seperate
inside speed feed drive
PLC → HMI
clamping display as C axis
engaged
DBB57
DBB58 Reserved
DBB59
Note
The IS ”Delete distance-to-go” (DBX2.2) is effective only for position axes on an axis-specific basis; the IS ”Delete
distance-to-go” (DB21-30, DB6.2) acts on a channel-specific basis. The IS ”Spindle reset” (DXB2.2) acts on a
spindle-specific basis.
DBB60 Position reached References Encoder NCU_Link Spindle
Axis and /Z1-B1/
spindle with exact with exact synchro- synchro- limit limit Axis active /no axis
stop fine stop coarse nizes 2 nizes 1 frequency frequency /Z1-S1/
/Z2-B3/
/Z1-R1/ /Z1-R1/ exceeded 2 exceeded 1
/Z1-A3/ /Z1-A3/
DBB61 Current Speed Position Axis/spindle Follow-up Axis ready Axial alarm Travel
Axis and controller controller controller stationary mode active request
active active active (n < nmin) /Z1-A2/ /Z2-B3/ /Z1-F1/
spindle /Z1-A2/ /Z1-A2/ /Z1-A2/ /Z1-A2/


DB61
DBB62 Axis Force fixed Fixed stop Activate travel Measure- Revolutio- Handwheel Software
container stop limited reached to fixed stop ment active nal feedrate overlay cams active
rotation /Z1-F1/ /Z1-F1/ /Z1-F1/ active active /Z1-N3/
/Z2-M5/
active /Z1-V1/ /Z2-H1/
/Z2-B3/
DBB63 Stop Axis/ spindle Axis stop PLC- AXRESET
disable active controlled DONE
HIAxMove Corr DEPBCS DEPMCS
active /Z2-P2/ axis /Z2-P2/
active active active active
/Z2-P2/
DBB64 Traverse command Travel request Handwheel active /Z2-H1/
/Z2-H1/
Axis and plus minus plus minus 3 2 1
spindle
DBB65 Active machine function /Z2-H1/
Axis and Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
spindle
DB31 – Signals to axis/spindle (NCK → PLC)

DB61
DBB66 OEM axis signals (Reserved)

Axis and Activate
spindle
monitorin
g /Z3-
TE6/
DBB67
DBB68 PLC axis/ Neutral axis/ Axis New type NC axis/spindle in channel /Z2-K5/
spindle spindle replacement requested by
D C B A
/Z2-K5/ /Z2-K5/ possible PLC
/Z2-K5/ /Z2-K5/
DBB69 NCU number in NCU link network Control parameter block
C B A
DBB70 Repos delay Repos shift Repos
quit valid shift
DBB71 PLC axis POS restored Brake

permanently test
assigned active
2 1
DBB72 REPOS
DELAY
DBB73
DBB74 Modulo limit
enabled
active
DBB75 JOG- Position JOG fixed- JOG fxed- JOG fixed- JOG fixed- JOG fixed- JOG
position JOG active point point point point point fixed-
reached approach 2 approach 1 approach 0 approach 2 approach 1 point
reached reached reached active active approach
0
active


DB61
DBB76 Rounding Indexing Positioning Path axis Scratch

axis in axis in axis pulse
Axis
position position /Z2-P2/ /Z1-A2/
/Z2-T1/
DBB77 Reduced-
speed
colision
DBB78 F function (REAL format)
Axis for positioning axis
/Z1-V1/
DBB82 Gear change- Setpoint gear stage /Z1-S1/

over
Spindle
/Z1-S1/
C B A
DBB83 Actual rotat. Speed Spindle in Support area Geometry Set speed Set speed Speed
direction monitoring setpoint limits violated monitoring increased limited limit
Spindle
CW /Z1-V1/ range /Z1-V1/ /Z1-S1/ /Z1-S1/ exceeded
/Z1-S1/ /Z1-S1/ /Z1-S1/
DBB84 Active spindle operating mode /Z1-S1/ Tapping CLGON SUG active Const.
without active (grinding cutting
Spindle Control Oscillation Position-ing Synchronou
compen- /Z1-S8/ wheel speed
mode mode mode s mode
sating chuck surface active
/Z1-S1/ speed)
DBB85 Spindle in Werkzeug
mit
Spindle position
Dynamik-
limitierung
DBB86 M function (binary) for spindle /Z1-S1/
Spindle
DBD88 S function (floating-point) for spindle

Spindle /Z1-S1/
3)
DBB92 Motor brake RIL Ramp-
released function
Drive
generator
Block activ
DBB93 Enable n controller Drive Active motor /Z1-A2/ Active drive parameter set 0 … 7
Drive pulses integrator ready /Z1-A2/
/Z1-A2/ disabled /Z1- /Z1-A2/
A2/ B A C B A
DBB4 nact = nset |nact| < nx |nact| < nmin Md < Mdx Ramp-up Temperature prewarning
Drive complete /Z1-A2/
/Z1-A2/ /Z1-A2/ /Z1-A2/
/Z1-A2/
/Z1-A2/
Heat sink Motor
DBB95
Drive


DB61
DBB96 Master/ Bit value for Master/ Slave (Stepper motor)

slave active CTRLOUT_changed
/Z3-TE3/
1 0 Compen- coarse fine Axis control Error
sation active rotation
Change setpoint output
controller /Z3-TE6/ monitorin
assignment (for compile
activ g
cycles)
DBB97 Offset after Activate Coupling Axis is

turn-on point mirroring active slave axis
/Z3-TE6/ /Z3-TE6/
/Z3-TE6/ /Z3-TE6/
DBB98 Emergency Accel. Speed Overlaid Actual value Synchronism /Z2-S3/
Synchronous retraction warning warning motion coupling
spindle active threshold threshold /Z2-S3/ /Z2-S3/
reached reached
coarse fine
DBB99 Emergency Max. acce- Max. speed Synchro- Axis acce- Synchronism Slave Master
Synchronous retraction leration reached nization lerating override spindle spindle
spindle enabled reached running back out active active
/Z2-S3/ /Z2-S3/
DBB100 Oscillation Oscillation Spark-out Error in Oscillation OscillAxExtR
Grinding active motion active oscillation cannot start eversal
/Z2-P5/ active /Z2-P5/ /Z2-P5/ /Z2-P5/ active
/Z2-P5/
DBB101 Gantry axis Gantry Gantry Gantry Gantry Gantry cut-
Gantry /Z2-G1/ leading axis grouping is synchroni- warning limit off limit
/Z2-G1/ synchronous zation run exceeded exceeded
/Z2-G1/ ready to start /Z2-G1/ /Z2-G1/
/Z2-G1/
DBB102
DBB103
DBB104 Active infeed axis /Z2-P5/

Grinding
Axis 8 Axis 7 Axis 6 Axis 5 Axis 4 Axis 3 Axis 2 Axis 1
Grinding
Axis 16 Axis 9
Grinding
Axis 24 Axis 17
Grinding
Axis 31 Axis 30 Axis 25
DBB108 Axis safely Status Safe
Safety referenced pulses operation
Integrated deleted al stop /
safe
speed
active
DBB109 Actual position > cam position
Safety Integr
SN 4- SN 4+ SN 3- SN 3+ SN 2- SN 2+ SN 1- SN 1+
DBB110 n < nx Safe velocity active SG Safe zero

speed active
Safety B A
Integr.


DB61
DBB111 Stop E Stop D Stop C Stop A/B

active active active active
Safety
Integr.
DBB112 Cam range bit for cam track 1

Safety
Integr.

Safety
Integr.

Safety
Integr.

Safety
Integr.
DBB116 Reserved
Safety
Integr.
DBB117 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Cam track 4 Cam track 3 Cam track 2 Cam track
1
Safety
Integr.

Safety Integr Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Safety Integr Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8






DBB126
Safety Integr
DBB127
Safety Integr


DB61
Activate Suppress
DBB128
Safety Integr
program test program
test
DBB129
Safety Integr
DBB130
Safety Integr
DBB131
Safety Integr
Note:
1) DB31,... DBX8.4 (activation signal when byte changes), will be reset
automatically when executing the assignment
2) DB31,... DBX20.1 (ramp-function generator blockage), will be set only if the
cyclic drive interface is operated in the "611U compatibility mode".
3): DB31,... DBX92.4 (RLI) set only in connection with SINAMICS and use of a
611U telegram type 101 and higher.
2.4.10 Tool management interface
Interface for loading/unloading magazine (DB71)

DB71 Interface for loading/unloading magazine (NCK→PLC)
DBB0 Interface (I) active
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
DBB1
I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9
DBB2 Standard end-of-acknowledgement
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
DBB3
I 16 I 15 I 14 I 13 I 12 I 11 I 10 I9
DBBn Reserved Reserved Reserved NC program Position at Reload Unload Load

positions loading
magazine point
DBBn + 1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Acknowled
gement
Status = 3
DBBn + 2
Assigned channel (8 bit INT)
DBBn + 3
Tool management no. (8 bit INT)
DBDn + 4
Unassigned parameter 1 (Dword)

DB71 Interface for loading/unloading magazine (NCK→PLC)

DBDn + 8
DBDn + 12
DBWn + 16
Identification for loading/unloading station (Int), (fixed value 9999)
DBWn + 18
No. of loading station (INT)
DBWn + 20
Magazine no. (source) for unloading/reloading/positioning (INT)
DBWn + 22
Location no. (source) for unloading/reloading/positioning (INT)
DBWn + 24
Magazine no. (target) for loading/reloading/positioning (INT)
DBWn + 26
Location no. (target) for loading/reloading/positioning (INT)
DBBn + 28 Reserved Loading/

unloading
without
magazine
movement
DBBn + 29
Reserved
Initial addresses of the loading/unloading stations:

Loading/unloading station 1: n= 4 Loading/unloading station 3: n= 64
Loading/unloading station 2: n= 34 Loading/unloading station 4: n= 94
Load interface 1 is responsible for spindle loading and reloading of tools, for relocating tools and for positioning at any
location (e.g. buffer).
References: /FBW/, Description of Functions Tool Management

Interface for spindle as change position (DB72)

DB72 Signals from spindle (NCK→PLC)
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
DBB1
I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
DBB3
I 16 I 15 I 14 I 13 I 12 I 11 I 10 I9
DBBn Spindle Replace Replace OldT in T0 Prepare Perform Compul-
manual manual tool buffer no change change sory
Tool tool (n-42) (initiate: change
remains M06)
in spindle
DBBn + 1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Acknowled

gement
Status = 3
DBBn + 1 unassigned
DBBn + 2
Assigned channel (8 bit INT)
DBBn + 3
Tool management no. (8 bit INT)
DBDn + 4
Unassigned parameter 1 (D word)
DBDn + 8
DBDn + 12
DBWn + 16 Buffer identification (Int), (fixed value 9998)
(corresponds to ”Target position for new tool”)
DBWn + 18 Relative location (target) in the buffer (INT)
DBWn + 20 Magazine no. (source) for new tool (INT)
DBWn + 22 Location no. (source) for new tool (INT)
DBWn + 24 Magazine no. (target) for old tool (INT)
DBWn + 26 Location no. (target) for old tool (INT)
DBWn + 28 Tool new: location type (INT)
DBWn + 30 Tool new: size left (INT)
DBWn + 32 Tool new: size right (INT)
DBWn + 34 Tool new: size top (INT)
DBWn + 36 Tool new: size bottom (INT)

DB72 Signals from spindle (NCK→PLC)

DBBn + 38 Tool status for tool new
Master tool to be to be ignore ID for tools
loaded unloaded disabled in buffer
DBBn + 39 Tool status for tool new
Tool was Tool fixed Tool being Prewarning Tool Tool Tool Active tool
in use location changed limit measured disabled enabled
coded reached
DBWn + 40 Tool new: T no. (INT)
DBWn + 42 If DBX (n+0.4) = 1, then buffer location of old tool is entered here.
DBWn + 44 Original magazine of new tool
DBWn + 46 Original location of new tool
Initial addresses of the buffers:

Spindle 1: n= 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
References: /FBW/, Description of Functions, Tool Management
Interface for circular magazine (DB73)

DB73 Signals from circular magazine (NCK → PLC)
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
DBB1
I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9
I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
DBB3
I 16 I 15 I 14 I 13 I 12 I 11 I 10 I9
DBBn
Reserved Replace Reserved Reserved T0 Reserved Perform Obligatory
manual change change
tool (initiation:
T no.)
DBB n + 1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Acknowled
gement
Status = 3
DBB n + 2 Assigned channel (8 bit INT)
DBB n + 3 Tool management no. (8 bit INT)
DBD n + 4 Unassigned parameter 1 (D word)

DB73 Signals from circular magazine (NCK → PLC)

DBW n + 16 Reserved
DBW n + 18 Reserved
DBW n + 20 Circular magazine no. (INT)
DBW n + 22 Location no. for new tool (INT)
DBW n + 24 Magazine no. of the old tool
DBW n + 26 Location no. for old tool (INT)
DBW n + 28 Tool new: location type (INT)
DBW n + 30 Tool new: size left (INT)
DBW n + 32 Tool new: size right (INT)
DBW n + 34 Tool new: size top (INT)
DBW n + 36 Tool new: size bottom (INT)
DBW n + 38 Tool status for tool new

Master to be to be ignore ID for tools
tool loaded unloaded disabled in buffer
Tool status for tool new
DBB n + 39 Tool was in Tool fixed Tool being Prewarning Tool Tool Tool Active tool
use location changed limit measured disabled enabled
coded reached
DBW n + 40 Tool new: T no. (INT)
DBW n + 42 Original location of new tool in this circular magazine
Initial addresses of the circular magazines: circular magazine 1: n = 4

2: n = 48
References: /FBW/, Description of Functions, Tool Management

2.4.11 Signals to/from the machine control panel and HHU

DB77 Signals to and from the machine control panel and HHU
DBB0- Input signals from MCP1 to PLC, MPI Bus (GD communication)
DBB7
DBB8 - Output signals from MCP1 to PLC, MPI Bus (GD communication)
DBB15
DBD16 Status send MCP1, MPI bus (GD communication)
DBD20 Status receive MCP1, MPI bus (GD communication)
DBB24 - Input signals from MCP2 to PLC, MPI bus (GD communication)
DBB31
DBB32 - Output signals from MCP2 to PLC, MPI bus (GD communication)
DBB39
DBD40 Status send MCP2, MPI bus (GD communication)
DBD44 Status receive MCP2, MPI bus (GD communication)
DBB48 - Input signals from HHU to PLC, MPI bus (GD communication)
DBB53
DBB60 - Output signals from PLC to HHU, MPI bus (GD communication)
DBB79
DBD80 Status Send HHU, MPI bus (GD communication)
DBD84 Status Receive HHU, MPI bus (GD communication)
FB 1- parameter:
MCPNum :=1, //correct number of MCPs
MCP1In :=P#DB77.DBX0.0,
MCP1Out := P#DB77.DBX8.0,
MCP1StatSend := P#DB77.DBX16.0,
MCP1StatRec := P#DB77.DBX20.0,
MCP2In :=P#DB77.DBX24.0,
MCP2Out := P#DB77.DBX32.0,
MCP2StatSend := P#DB77.DBX40.0,
MCP2StatRec := P#DB77.DBX44.0,
MCPSDB210 := TRUE,
BHG: :=1; //handheld unit interface:
//0 - no HHU
//1 – HHU to MPI
//2 – HHU to OPI
BHGIn :=P#DB77.DBX48.0, //transmitted data of handheld unit
BHGOut: :=P#DB77.DBX60.0, //received data of handheld unit
BHGStatSend: :=P#DB77.DBX80.0, // status DW for transmitting handheld unit
BHGStatRec: :=P#DB77.DBX84.0, // status DW for receiving HHU

03/2009 3 PLC-Blocks
3.1 Overview of organization blocks
3 PLC-Blocks
3
3.1 Overview of organization blocks
Table 3-1: Overview of organization blocks (OBs)
OB no. Designation Meaning Kit

1 ZYKLUS Cyclic processing GP
40 ALARM Process alarms GP
100 NEUSTART Beginning of restart GP
3.2 Overview of function blocks

Table 3-2: Overview of function blocks (FCs)
FC no. Designation Meaning Kit

0 - Reserved for Siemens
2 GP_HP Basic program, cyclic part GP
3 GP_PRAL Basic program, alarm-controlled part GP
5 GP_DIAG Basic program, diagnostic alarm (FM-NC) GP
7 TM_REV Transfer block for tool change with circular GP
magazine
8 TM_TRANS Transfer block for tool management GP
9 ASUP Asynchronous subprograms GP
10 AL_MSG Alarms/messages GP
12 AUXFU Call interface for user auxiliary functions GP
13 BHG_DISP Display control for handheld unit GP
15 POS_AX Positioning axis GP
16 PART_AX Indexing axis GP
17 Y-D switchover GP
18 SpinCtrl Spindle control from PLC GP
19 MCP_IFM Distribution of machine control panel and GP
MMC signals to interface (milling machine)
21 Transfer data exchange PLC-NCK GP
22 TM_DIR Selection of direction GP
24 MCP_IFM2 Transfer of MCP signals to interface GP
25 MCP_IFT Distribution of machine control panel and GP
MMC signals to interface
26 HPU_MCP Distribution of HPU signals to interface GP
30 - 35 Assigned if ManualTurn, ShopMill or GP
ShopTurn are installed
36 - 255 User assignable

3 PLC-Blocks 03/2009
3.2 Overview of function blocks
Table 3-3: Overview of function blocks (FBs)
FB no. Designation Meaning Kit

0 - 29 Reserved for Siemens
1 RUN_UP Basic program, booting GP
2 GET Read NC variables GP
3 PUT Write NC variables GP
4 PI_SERV PI services GP
5 GETGUD Read GUD variable GP
7 PI_SERV2 General PI services GP
9 M2N M : N changeover block GP
10 SI_Relais Safety Integrated relay GP
11 SI_Braketest Safety Integrated brake service GP
29 Diagnostics for signal recorder and data GP
trigger

03/2009 3 PLC-Blocks
3.3 Assignment of data blocks
3.3 Assignment of data blocks

Note
Only so many DBs are created as are necessary according to NC-MD.
Tabelle 3-4: Overview of data blocks
DB no. Designation Meaning Kit

1 Reserved for Siemens GP
2–5 PLC MSG PLC messages GP
6-8 Basic program
9 NC Interface for NC compile cycles GP
COMPILE
10 NC Central NC interface GP
INTERFACE
11 BAG 1 Mode group interface GP
12 Computer link and transport system
13-14 Reserved (Hymnos, basic program)
15 Basic program
16 PI service definitions
17 Version code
18 SPL interface (Safety Integrated)
19 MMC interface
20 PLC machine data
21 - 30 CHANNEL 1 NC channel interface GP
31 - 61 AXIS 1,... Reserved for interface axis/spindle no. 1 to 31 GP
71 - 74 User tool management GP
75 - 76 M group decoding GP
77 Tool management buffer (for SDB210)
78 - 80 Reserved for Siemens
1000 - Reserved for Siemens
1099
Note
Data blocks of inactivated channels, axes/spindles, C programming, tool
management can be assigned by the user.

3 PLC-Blocks 03/2009
3.4 Assigned timers
3.4 Assigned timers

Tabelle 3-5: Assigned timers
Timer no. Meaning

1-9 Reserved

03/2009 I Index
I
I Index
A H
Analog input and output signals of the NCK Handwheel

(DB10) ............................................ 2-379 Signals from NCK (DB10)............... 2-380
Analog inputs of the NCK (external) (DB10)
........................................................ 2-378
Analog outputs of the NCK (external) I
(DB10) ............................................ 2-378
Assigned timers .................................. 3-428 Instruction-controlled signals from NC
channel ........................................... 2-407
Instruction-controlled signals to NC channel
C ........................................................ 2-406
Interface for circular magazine (DB73)2-422
Change signals on auxiliary function Interface for loading/unloading magazine
transfer from NC channel ............... 2-399 (DB71)............................................. 2-419
Control signals Interface for spindle as change position
to geometry axes ............................ 2-395 (DB72)............................................. 2-421
Interface signals.................................. 2-339
D
M
Data types ............................................ 1-17
Machine control panel
M version ........................................ 2-340
E slimline ............................................ 2-344
T version ......................................... 2-342
External digital input and output signals of Mode group-specific signals from mode
the NCK (DB10).............................. 2-379 group 1 (DB11) ............................... 2-381
External digital inputs of the Mode group-specific signals from mode
NCK (DB10).................................... 2-376 group 2 (DB11) ............................... 2-382
External digital outputs of the NCK (DB 10) Mode group-specific signals to mode group
........................................................ 2-377 1 (DB11).......................................... 2-380
Mode group-specific signals to mode group
G 2 (DB11).......................................... 2-381
Module types......................................... 1-14
General signals from NCK (DB 10) .... 2-374
General signals to NCK (DB10) ......... 2-372 O
On board NCK inputs and

outputs (DB10)................................ 2-372

SINUMERIK 840D sl, 840Di sl, SINAMICS S120 Parameter Manual (LIS2sl) - 03/2009 I-429
I Index 03/2009
On-board NCK input and machine control panel, T version . 2-342

outputs (DB10) ............................... 2-371 operator panel (DB19).................. 2-388
Operating signals from HMI/status signals from/to handheld programming unit
from NC channel............................. 2-396 (HT 8).......................................... 2-348
Overview of data blocks ..................... 3-427 from/to mode group (DB11) ............ 2-380
Overview of function blocks (FCs)...... 3-425 from/to NCK/HMI (DB10) ................ 2-372
Overview of organization blocks from/to slimline machine
(OBs) .............................................. 3-425 control panel ............................... 2-344
to NCK (DB10) ................................ 2-371
to orientation axes........................... 2-408
P to/from NCK channel
(DB21 – DB30)............................ 2-394
PLC alarms / messages ..................... 2-350 to/from the machine control panel and
PLC machine data (DB20) ................. 2-393 HHU ............................................ 2-424
PLC messages (DB2)......................... 2-350 Signals for Safety SPL
Data area/error................................ 2-383
R Signals for Safety SPL (DB18) ........... 2-383
Status signals of geometry axes......... 2-397
Reference ............................................. 1-18
T
S
Tool management functions from NC
Selection/status signals from channel ........................................... 2-410
HMI (DB10)..................................... 2-373 Tool management interface ................ 2-419
Signals Transferred
for protection areas from H/F functions................................... 2-402
NC channel................................. 2-405 M/S functions .................................. 2-400
from NC channel............................. 2-410 T/D/DL functions ............................. 2-401
from orientation axes...................... 2-409
from/to V
axis/spindle (DB31 – DB61)......... 2-412
from/to Variable types ....................................... 1-15
handheld unit (HHU, HT 2) .......... 2-346
machine control panel, M version 2-340

I-430 SINUMERIK 840D sl, 840Di sl, SINAMICS S120 Parameter Manual (LIS2sl) - 03/2009
An Suggestions
Siemens AG Corrections
for Publication/Manual
I DT MC MS1 SINUMERIK 840D sl, 840Di sl, SINAMICS
P. O. Box 3180 S120
D-91050 Erlangen Lists, 2nd Book
Federal Republic of Germany

Manufacturer Documentation
Fax +49 (0) 9131 / 98 - 2176 [Documentation]
Parameter Manual
From
Name: Order -No.: 6FC5397-3CP10-4BA0
Company/Dept. 03/2009
Adress: Should you come across any printing errors

when reading this publication, please notify us
on this sheet. Suggestions for improvements
are also welcome..
____________
Telephone: __________ /
Telefax: ________ /
Email: __________________________________________-
Suggestions and/or Corrections

Parameter Manual Part 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Parameter Manual Part 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Parameter Manual Part 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Variables 1

SINUMERIK 840D sl, 840Di sl, PLC Blocks 3

Lists, 2nd Book

Edition Order-No. Remarks

Copyright © Siemens AG 1995 - 2009.

Structure of the documentation

Information on the following topics is available at

The table of contents refers to the present 2nd Book.

© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved

Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the

Questions about this documentation

Fax +49 9131 98 2176

A fax form is available at the end of this document.

SINUMERIK Internet address

© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved

CompactFlash cards for the user

© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved

© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved

1.1 Introduction ..............................................................................................1-11

1.2 System data .............................................................................................1-19

1.3 State data of system ................................................................................1-52

1.4 State data of channel...............................................................................1-136

© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved

1.4.12 Area C, Module FB: Channel-specific base frames ...........................1-195

1.5 State data of axis .....................................................................................1-198

1.6 State data of drives..................................................................................1-254

1.7 Tool and magazine data ..........................................................................1-260

© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved

1.7.27 Area T, Module TAD: Application-specific data ..................................1-294

1.8 Machine and setting data.........................................................................1-297

1.9 Parameters ..............................................................................................1-300

1.10 Diagnosis data .......................................................................................1-302

1.11 HMI State data .......................................................................................1-321

1.12 User data ...............................................................................................1-322

1.13 Generic coupling....................................................................................1-327

© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved

1.13.5 Area N, Module VSYN ........................................................................1-337

2 Interface Signals ........................................................................................2-339

2.1 General notes ...........................................................................................2-339

2.2 Signals from/to Operator Component......................................................2-340

2.3 PLC alarms / messages...........................................................................2-350

2.4 Signals from/ to NCK, PLC, HMI..............................................................2-371

3.1 Overview of organization blocks ..............................................................3-425

3.2 Overview of function blocks .....................................................................3-425

3.3 Assignment of data blocks.......................................................................3-427

3.4 Assigned timers .......................................................................................3-428

© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved

References: /FBO/ Configuring the OP 030 Operator Interface

Description of PLC access method in:

References: /FB/P3 "Basic PLC Program"

© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved

1.1.1 General information

Variable areas of SINUMERIK 840D sl

A distinction is made between the following areas:

© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved

Feed / main drive

© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved

1.1.2 Module types

References: /FBO/Configuring the OP 030 Operator Interface,

© Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved